WO2014119673A1 - Portable information code reading device - Google Patents

Portable information code reading device Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2014119673A1
WO2014119673A1 PCT/JP2014/052142 JP2014052142W WO2014119673A1 WO 2014119673 A1 WO2014119673 A1 WO 2014119673A1 JP 2014052142 W JP2014052142 W JP 2014052142W WO 2014119673 A1 WO2014119673 A1 WO 2014119673A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
case
information code
unit
portable information
code reader
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/JP2014/052142
Other languages
French (fr)
Japanese (ja)
Inventor
学 宮崎
高弘 田中
丸山　健太郎
惣太郎 田畑
卓也 依田
了太 坂野
太田　裕
彰 木田
Original Assignee
株式会社デンソーウェーブ
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Priority claimed from JP2014013060A external-priority patent/JP6179411B2/en
Application filed by 株式会社デンソーウェーブ filed Critical 株式会社デンソーウェーブ
Priority to US14/764,608 priority Critical patent/US9904828B2/en
Priority to CN201480011336.6A priority patent/CN105027140B/en
Publication of WO2014119673A1 publication Critical patent/WO2014119673A1/en

Links

Images

Classifications

    • G—PHYSICS
    • G06—COMPUTING; CALCULATING OR COUNTING
    • G06K—GRAPHICAL DATA READING; PRESENTATION OF DATA; RECORD CARRIERS; HANDLING RECORD CARRIERS
    • G06K7/00—Methods or arrangements for sensing record carriers, e.g. for reading patterns
    • G06K7/10—Methods or arrangements for sensing record carriers, e.g. for reading patterns by electromagnetic radiation, e.g. optical sensing; by corpuscular radiation
    • G06K7/10544—Methods or arrangements for sensing record carriers, e.g. for reading patterns by electromagnetic radiation, e.g. optical sensing; by corpuscular radiation by scanning of the records by radiation in the optical part of the electromagnetic spectrum
    • G06K7/10821—Methods or arrangements for sensing record carriers, e.g. for reading patterns by electromagnetic radiation, e.g. optical sensing; by corpuscular radiation by scanning of the records by radiation in the optical part of the electromagnetic spectrum further details of bar or optical code scanning devices
    • G06K7/10881—Methods or arrangements for sensing record carriers, e.g. for reading patterns by electromagnetic radiation, e.g. optical sensing; by corpuscular radiation by scanning of the records by radiation in the optical part of the electromagnetic spectrum further details of bar or optical code scanning devices constructional details of hand-held scanners

Definitions

  • the present invention relates to a portable information code reader.
  • portable information code readers that have been provided are generally of a type in which a user holds the device with his hand and points it toward the information code and reads the information code.
  • a user holds the device with his hand and points it toward the information code and reads the information code.
  • it is essential to hold by hand, there is a problem that one hand of the user cannot be used for other work, and it is difficult to improve workability.
  • Patent Documents 1 and 2 disclose a configuration in which a user can read an information code without holding the device by hand.
  • a portable transaction terminal disclosed in Patent Document 1 includes a band 12 that fits on a user's head, an arm 22 extends from the band 12 to the front side of the face, and a glasses-like screen 34 is provided. Yes.
  • a bar code reader 24 is provided above the screen 34.
  • the portable code reader disclosed in FIG. 1 of Patent Document 2 has a configuration in which a two-dimensional imaging unit 100 is fixed to a band 2 attached to the user's head in a bee-like shape.
  • Patent Document 1 since the configuration of Patent Document 1 cannot be easily removed once the reading device is attached to the user, it is difficult to temporarily remove the device and use it. For example, when removing and using an already mounted reader, the reader must be removed together with the fixed part (band, headset, etc.) fixed to the user. It was very expensive.
  • the reader when the reader is configured to be detachable, not only the removal work from the user but also the attachment work to the user becomes a problem.
  • the reader attached to the body without holding it by hand if it becomes necessary to temporarily remove the reader from the body due to circumstances, after the use in the removed state is finished, The device needs to be reinstalled in its original position.
  • Patent Document 1 and Patent Document 2 it is not easy to place the reader once removed at the correct position in the correct posture. Was inevitable.
  • a first object is to provide a portable information code reader that can be easily worn on the body.
  • Second object of the present invention is to provide a configuration in which the apparatus main body can be easily detached from the body or a body-mounted product, and can be quickly mounted at a more accurate mounting position when re-mounted. To do.
  • the present invention has been made to solve the above-described problems, and is a configuration that can be used by attaching the reading device to a body or a body-mounted product without grasping it by a hand.
  • the present invention has been made in order to solve the above-described problems, and is a configuration that can be used by attaching the reader to a body or a body-attached product without grasping it by hand. It is a fourth object of the present invention to provide a configuration in which it is easy to obtain decrypted data of an information code to be performed and to easily eliminate decrypted data of an undesired information code.
  • an imaging unit that images an information code
  • a processing unit that processes an image of the information code captured by the imaging unit
  • the imaging And a case that holds the processing unit
  • a mounting unit that is provided separately from the case, and that attaches the imaging unit to the user in a configuration that images the side facing the user's face
  • An information code reader is provided.
  • an imaging unit that images an information code
  • a processing unit that processes an image of the information code captured by the imaging unit
  • the imaging And a case that holds the processing unit, and a mounting unit that is provided integrally with the case or as a separate body, and that attaches the case to at least one ear of a user.
  • a type information code reader is provided.
  • the case holding the imaging unit and the processing unit can be attached to the ear, the movement of the face is linked to the case, and the imaging direction is determined according to the movement of the user's face. be able to. Furthermore, since the case can be attached to the ear, it is easy to wear even when other wearing tools (such as a helmet or glasses) are used.
  • an imaging unit that images an information code
  • a processing unit that processes an image of the information code captured by the imaging unit, the imaging unit, A case that holds the processing unit; and a case that is provided separately from the case, is attached to a user, and the case is detachably connected to a predetermined mounting portion of the mounting member; and
  • a portable information code reading device having a guide portion that guides the case so that the posture of the case with respect to the attachment portion becomes a predetermined posture at the time of connection.
  • the guide is guided by the guide so that the case is in a predetermined position with respect to the mounted part, so it can be quickly mounted so that the case is in a more accurate position and orientation. It becomes easy to do.
  • an imaging unit that images an information code
  • a processing unit that processes an image of the information code captured by the imaging unit, the imaging unit, A case that holds the processing unit; a flexible body mounting unit that can be bent and deformed; and a mounting unit to which the case is attached and detached, and an mounting member that is provided separately from the case.
  • a portable information code reader is provided.
  • the information code reader can be worn and used without being held by hand. Further, in this configuration, since the case side can be detached while the part to be worn on the body (body wearing part) is attached to the body, the removal work can be facilitated. Furthermore, since the body mounting portion has a flexible structure that can be bent and deformed, the degree of freedom when mounting on the body is increased.
  • an imaging unit that captures an image of a predetermined imaging range, a marker light irradiation unit that irradiates marker light toward the imaging range,
  • An illumination light source that emits illumination light different from the marker light
  • a case that holds at least the marker light irradiation unit, the illumination light source, and the imaging unit and a case that is integrated with the case or the case
  • a mounting member that is provided as a separate body and is attached to a user's body or a user's body, a first control that drives the marker light irradiation unit without driving the illumination light source, and the illumination light source is driven.
  • a light source control unit for switching between the second control and a first captured image obtained by the imaging unit in a state in which the marker light is irradiated according to the first control by the light source control unit;
  • a detection unit that detects a characteristic pattern; and a processing unit that processes a second captured image obtained by the imaging unit in a state where the illumination light is irradiated according to the second control by the light source control unit.
  • the light source control unit switches control of the marker light irradiation unit and the illumination light source from the first control to the second control when the detection unit detects the feature pattern from the first captured image.
  • a portable information code reader configured as described above is provided.
  • the light source control unit is configured to switch between the first control for driving the marker light irradiation unit without driving the illumination light source and the second control for driving the illumination light source. Until the feature pattern is detected, detection of the feature pattern is attempted using the first captured image obtained in the state of irradiation with the marker light. After the feature pattern is detected, the illumination light source is driven. The information code is processed by the second captured image.
  • the feature pattern is detected by the first captured image obtained in the state where the marker light is irradiated, there is a high possibility that the information code exists in the direction intended by the user (direction in which the reading device is directed). If such a detection result is obtained, if the second picked-up image is picked up by driving the illumination light source, the information code intended by the user can be selectively decoded, and the information is always driven by driving the illumination light source. Compared to a configuration that attempts to decode the code, it becomes easier to prevent unintentional decoding of the information code. Further, since the illumination light source is driven when there is a high possibility that an information code exists in the direction in which the reading device faces, power consumption can be effectively suppressed.
  • FIG. 1 is a perspective view schematically illustrating a portable information code reader according to the first embodiment of the present invention.
  • FIG. 2 is a block diagram schematically illustrating an electrical configuration of the portable information code reader of FIG.
  • FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram showing a usage state of the portable information code reader of FIG. 4 is a side view of the portable information code reader of FIG. 1 as viewed from one side in the lateral direction.
  • FIG. 5 is a side view of the portable information code reader of FIG. 1 viewed from a side different from that in FIG. 6 is a bottom view of the portable information code reader of FIG.
  • FIG. 7A is a front view of the portable information code reader of FIG. 1, and FIG.
  • FIG. 7B is a diagram showing a state that is upside down from the state of FIG. 7A.
  • FIG. 8 is a rear view of the portable information code reader of FIG.
  • FIG. 9 (A) is a simplified explanatory diagram showing the arrangement structure of the ear hook when the portable information code reader of FIG. 1 is attached to the right ear, and FIG. 9 (B) shows the portable information. It is explanatory drawing which shows simply the arrangement structure of the ear hooking part, etc. when attaching a code reader to a left ear.
  • FIG. 10 is a chart showing an example of cooperation processing performed between the portable information code reader of FIG. 1 and an external device.
  • FIG. 11 is a diagram schematically showing how the portable information code reader of FIG. 1 is actually used.
  • FIG. 12 is an explanatory diagram schematically illustrating a blink detection sensor as an example of a sensor unit.
  • FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the concept of blink detection by the blink detection sensor of FIG.
  • FIG. 14 is a perspective view schematically showing an example in which the ear insertion part is configured to be detachable.
  • FIG. 15 is a front view of the configuration of FIG.
  • FIG. 16 (A) is a front view schematically showing a state in which the ear insertion part is removed and another member is attached as shown in FIG. 14, and
  • FIG. 16 (B) is a diagram showing the separate member as shown in FIG. 16 (A). Is a view from a different angle.
  • FIG. 16 (A) is a front view schematically showing a state in which the ear insertion part is removed and another member is attached as shown in FIG. 14, and
  • FIG. 16 (B) is a diagram showing the separate member as shown in FIG. 16 (A). Is a view from a different angle
  • FIG. 17 is a flowchart illustrating the flow of a reading process performed by the portable information code reading device according to the second embodiment.
  • FIG. 18 is an explanatory diagram for conceptually explaining a state of reading performed by the portable information code reader according to the second embodiment.
  • FIG. 19 is a flowchart illustrating the flow of a reading process performed by the portable information code reading device according to the first modification of the second embodiment.
  • FIG. 20 is an explanatory diagram conceptually illustrating a state of reading performed by the portable information code reading device according to the first modification of the second embodiment.
  • FIG. 21 is a flowchart illustrating the flow of a reading process performed by the portable information code reading device according to the second modification of the second embodiment.
  • FIG. 22 (A) is an explanatory diagram conceptually illustrating a state of reading performed by the portable information code reader according to the second modification of the second embodiment, and FIG. 22 (B) is a predetermined success.
  • FIG. 22C is an explanatory diagram showing a display example by a light source in a predetermined failure state.
  • FIG. 23 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the use of the portable information code reading device according to the third embodiment.
  • FIG. 24 is a perspective view schematically illustrating a portable information code reader according to the third embodiment.
  • FIG. 25 is a perspective view of the portable information code reader according to the third embodiment viewed from a direction different from that in FIG.
  • FIG. 26 is a perspective view of the portable information code reader according to the third embodiment as seen from a direction different from FIGS.
  • FIG. 27 is a perspective view of the portable information code reader according to the third embodiment as seen from a direction different from that in FIGS.
  • FIG. 28 is a perspective view illustrating a state in which the apparatus main body is mounted on the left mounting portion in the portable information code reader according to the third embodiment.
  • FIG. 29 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the vicinity of the user's face on which the portable information code reader according to the third embodiment is mounted.
  • FIG. 30 is a perspective view showing a state in which the apparatus main body and the holding member are disassembled from the configuration of FIG.
  • FIG. 31 is a perspective view schematically showing a state in which the case is removed from the attachment portion in the portable information code reader according to the third embodiment.
  • FIG. 32 is a perspective view illustrating an attachment portion that is a part of the portable information code reader according to the third embodiment.
  • FIG. 33 is a side view illustrating a device main body which is a part of the portable information code reading device according to the third embodiment.
  • 34 is a side view of the apparatus main body of FIG. 33 viewed from the side opposite to FIG.
  • FIG. 35 is a perspective view illustrating a state in which the apparatus main body illustrated in FIGS. 33 and 34 is connected to a cable.
  • FIG. 36 is a diagram of components housed in the case as viewed from the front side of the case, and is a diagram illustrating the configuration of an imaging unit, a lens, and the like housed in the case.
  • FIG. 36 is a diagram of components housed in the case as viewed from the front side of the case, and is a diagram illustrating the configuration of an imaging unit, a lens, and the like housed in the case.
  • FIG. 37 is an explanatory view showing a state in which the holding member is detached from the case.
  • FIG. 38 is an explanatory view showing a state in which the holding member is attached to the case and the cable is held by the holding member.
  • FIG. 39 is an explanatory diagram for explaining how to attach the attachment portion to the user.
  • FIG. 40 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a state in which the attachment portion is attached to the user as viewed from the front side of the user's face.
  • FIG. 41 is a perspective view showing a state in which the apparatus main body is attached to the attachment portion in a state where the holding member is attached to the case and the cable is held by the holding member.
  • FIG. 42 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a state in which the orientation of the case attached to the attachment portion is finely adjusted.
  • FIG. 43 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the flow of control in the portable information code reader according to the third embodiment.
  • FIG. 44 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a method of using the portable information code reader according to the third embodiment, which is different from FIG.
  • FIG. 45 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a method of using the portable information code reader according to the third embodiment, which is different from FIGS. 23 and 44.
  • FIG. 46 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a scene in which the usage method shown in FIG. 45 is performed.
  • FIG. 47 is a perspective view schematically showing an external device and the like electrically connected to the apparatus main body.
  • FIG. 48 is an explanatory diagram for explaining how the apparatus main body is connected to an external device.
  • FIG. 49 is a perspective view schematically illustrating a portable information code reader according to the fourth embodiment.
  • FIG. 50 is an explanatory diagram showing a usage state of the portable information code reader of FIG.
  • FIG. 51 is an explanatory diagram simply showing the outer shape of the apparatus main body of the portable information code reader of FIG. 49 as viewed from one side in the horizontal direction.
  • 52A is a perspective view showing the main body of the portable information code reader of FIG. 49
  • FIG. 52B is a perspective view seen from a direction different from FIG. 52A.
  • 53A is a perspective view showing the configuration of the camera in the portable information code reader of FIG. 49
  • FIG. 53B is a perspective view seen from a direction different from FIG. 53A. is there.
  • FIG. 50 is an explanatory diagram showing a usage state of the portable information code reader of FIG.
  • FIG. 51 is an explanatory diagram simply showing the outer shape of the apparatus main body of the portable information code reader of FIG. 49 as viewed from one side in the horizontal direction
  • FIG. 54 is a perspective view showing an apparatus main body of the portable information code reader of FIG.
  • FIG. 55 is a perspective view showing an attachment member of the portable information code reader of FIG.
  • FIG. 56 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a state where the case is removed from the attachment portion.
  • FIG. 57 is a schematic cross-sectional view schematically showing a state in which the portable information code reader of FIG. 49 is cut near the guide portion.
  • FIG. 58 is an explanatory view schematically showing a state in which the apparatus main body is removed from the attachment member in the portable information code reader of FIG.
  • FIG. 59 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a state in which the case is removed from the attachment portion in the portable information code reader according to the fifth embodiment.
  • FIG. 60 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a state in which the case is removed from the attachment portion in the portable information code reader according to the sixth embodiment.
  • FIG. 61 is a perspective view showing an attachment member of the portable information code reader according to the seventh embodiment.
  • 62 is a perspective view of the attachment member of FIG. 61 viewed from a direction different from that of FIG.
  • FIG. 63 is an explanatory diagram schematically showing an attachment member of the portable information code reader according to the eleventh embodiment.
  • FIG. 64 is a perspective view showing the configuration inside the case of the portable information code reader of the sixth embodiment;
  • FIG. 65A is an explanatory diagram showing a state when the imaging unit is at the first rotation position in the portable information code reader of the sixth embodiment, and FIG.
  • FIG. 66 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a cut-out range from a captured image.
  • FIG. 67 is a perspective view schematically illustrating a portable information code reader according to the twelfth embodiment.
  • FIG. 68 is a block diagram schematically illustrating an electrical configuration of the portable information code reader of FIG.
  • FIG. 69 is an explanatory diagram showing a usage state of the portable information code reader of FIG.
  • FIG. 70 is a flowchart illustrating the flow of reading processing in the portable information code reading device of FIG.
  • FIG. 71 is an explanatory diagram conceptually illustrating a captured image when a QR code (registered trademark) is within the imaging range.
  • FIG. 72 is an explanatory diagram conceptually illustrating a captured image when the barcode is in the imaging range, regarding an example in which marker light in an irradiation area different from that in FIG. 71 is irradiated.
  • FIG. 73 is an explanatory diagram conceptually illustrating a captured image when the barcode is in the imaging range with respect to the example of the marker light in FIG. 72.
  • FIG. 74 is an explanatory diagram for explaining some examples of irradiation shapes when marker light is irradiated onto a plane.
  • FIG. 75 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the relationship between the imaging range by the imaging unit and the irradiation direction of the marker light.
  • FIG. 76 is a flowchart illustrating the flow of a reading process in the portable information code reading device according to the thirteenth embodiment.
  • FIG. 77 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the flow of a cancel operation when using the portable information code reader according to the fourteenth embodiment.
  • FIG. 78 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the flow of a cancel operation when using the portable information code reader according to the fifteenth embodiment.
  • FIG. 79 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the flow of a cancel operation when using the portable information code reader according to the sixteenth embodiment.
  • a portable information code reader 10 (hereinafter also simply referred to as an information code reader 10 or a reader 19) according to the first embodiment includes an imaging unit 23 that images an information code, and an imaging unit. 23, a processing unit (control circuit 40 (FIG. 2)) that processes the image of the information code imaged by 23, a case 12 that holds the imaging unit 23 and the processing unit, and a case 12 that is integral with or separate from the case 12. And an attachment portion 60 for attaching the case 12 to one of the user's ears.
  • the information code reader 10 is configured as a code reader capable of reading a two-dimensional code in hardware, and an outer case is formed by a case 12, and various electronic components are included in the case 12. Is housed.
  • the information code reader 10 mainly includes an illumination light source 21, a marker light irradiation unit 50, an imaging unit 23, a filter 25, an imaging lens 27, and other optical systems, a memory 35, a control circuit 40, an operation switch 42, and the like.
  • a microcomputer (hereinafter referred to as “microcomputer”) system and a power supply system such as a power switch 41 and a battery 49 are included. These are mounted on a printed wiring board (not shown) or housed in the case 12.
  • the optical system includes an illumination light source 21, an imaging unit 23, a filter 25, an imaging lens 27, a marker light irradiation unit 50, and the like.
  • the illumination light source 21 functions as an illumination light source capable of emitting illumination light Lf, and includes, for example, a red LED and a diffusion lens, a condensing lens, and the like provided on the emission side of the LED.
  • the illumination light Lf can be irradiated toward the reading object R through the irradiation port 16 formed in the case.
  • the reading object R for example, various objects such as a resin material and a metal material can be considered, and an information code 100 as shown in FIG. 2 is formed on the reading object R by printing or the like.
  • the type of the information code 100 to be read may be a one-dimensional code such as a bar code, or may be a two-dimensional code such as a QR code (registered trademark), a data matrix coat, or a maxi code.
  • the marker light irradiation part 50 is comprised by the well-known marker light source etc., and is comprised so that the illumination light source 21 may irradiate the marker light MK with high directivity, for example on the same side as the side which irradiates light. Yes.
  • the imaging unit 23 includes a light receiving sensor (for example, an area sensor in which light receiving elements such as C-MOS and CCD are two-dimensionally arranged) that can image the information code 100, and irradiates the reading object R and the information code 100.
  • a light receiving sensor for example, an area sensor in which light receiving elements such as C-MOS and CCD are two-dimensionally arranged
  • the imaging unit 23 is disposed so that incident light incident through the imaging lens 27 can be received by the light receiving surface 23a.
  • the filter 25 is an optical low-pass filter that allows passage of light that is less than or equal to the wavelength of the reflected light Lr, for example, and can block passage of light that exceeds the wavelength, and is connected to the reading port 14 formed in the case 12. It is provided between the image lens 27. Thereby, unnecessary light exceeding the wavelength equivalent of the reflected light Lr is prevented from entering the imaging unit 23.
  • the imaging lens 27 includes, for example, a lens barrel and a plurality of condensing lenses accommodated in the lens barrel.
  • the reading port 14 for example, FIG. 3
  • the reflected light Lr incident thereon is collected, and a code image of the information code 100 is formed on the light receiving surface 23a of the imaging unit 23.
  • the microcomputer system includes an amplification circuit 31, an A / D conversion circuit 33, a memory 35, an address generation circuit 36, a synchronization signal generation circuit 38, a control circuit 40, an operation switch 42, a microphone 43, a sound generation unit 44, a sensor unit 46, and a communication unit. It consists of 48 grades.
  • This microcomputer system is configured around a control circuit 40 and a memory 35 that can function as a microcomputer (information processing apparatus), and the image signal of the information code 100 captured by the optical system described above is signaled in hardware and software. It can be processed.
  • An image signal (analog signal) output from the image pickup unit 23 of the optical system is input to the amplification circuit 31 and amplified by a predetermined gain, and then input to the A / D conversion circuit 33, and the analog signal is converted into a digital signal.
  • the digitized image signal that is, image data (image information) is input to the memory 35 and stored in the image data storage area of the memory 35.
  • the synchronization signal generation circuit 38 is configured to be able to generate a synchronization signal for the imaging unit 23 and the address generation circuit 36.
  • the address generation circuit 36 is based on the synchronization signal supplied from the synchronization signal generation circuit 38. Thus, the storage address of the image data stored in the memory 35 can be generated.
  • the memory 35 is constituted by a semiconductor memory device or the like, for example, RAM (DRAM, SRAM, etc.), ROM (EPROM, EEPROM, etc.) and the like.
  • the RAM of the memory 35 is configured to be able to secure a work area and a reading condition table used by the control circuit 40 in each processing such as arithmetic operation and logical operation.
  • the ROM stores in advance a predetermined program that can execute a reading process, which will be described later, and a system program that can control each hardware such as the illumination light source 21 and the imaging unit 23.
  • the control circuit 40 is a microcomputer that can control the entire information code reader 10, and includes a CPU, a system bus, an input / output interface, and the like, and has an information processing function.
  • Various input / output devices peripheral devices
  • the control circuit 40 via a built-in input / output interface.
  • the power switch 41, the operation switch 42, the microphone 43, and the sound generation unit 44 are connected.
  • the sensor unit 46, the communication unit 48, and the like are connected.
  • the communication unit 48 is configured as a known communication interface that performs wired communication or wireless communication, and communicates with an external device provided outside the case 12 to transmit information to the external device or from the external device. It functions to receive information.
  • a computer HST a stationary personal computer, a portable personal computer, or the like
  • a wired or wireless for example, a publicly known device
  • Wireless LAN communication or bluetooth (registered trademark) communication for example,
  • the power supply system includes a power switch 41, a battery 49, and the like.
  • the power switch 41 managed by the control circuit 40 is turned on and off, the conduction of the drive voltage supplied from the battery 49 to each device and each circuit described above is established. And shut-off are controlled.
  • the battery 49 is a secondary battery that can generate a predetermined DC voltage, and corresponds to, for example, a lithium ion battery.
  • the portable information code reader 10 includes an imaging unit 23 capable of imaging the information code 100, and a processing unit (control circuit 40 (FIG. 2) that decodes the information code 100 when the information code 100 is captured by the imaging unit 23. )), A case 12 that holds the imaging unit 23 and the processing unit, and an attachment unit 60 that is provided integrally with the case 12 or as a separate body, and attaches the case 12 to one of the user's ears. It has.
  • the case 12 is provided with a reading port 14 into which light from the information code can be introduced, and the mounting portion 60 is arranged such that the case 12 is arranged in a lateral position of the user's face Fa as shown in FIG. 14 is configured to face the front side of the user P, and the case 12 is attached to the ear Ey of the user P.
  • the case 12 includes an extending portion 12 c extending in a predetermined direction (specifically, the longitudinal direction of the case 12) from the position of the mounting portion 60, and is attached to the extending portion 12 c.
  • the reading port 14 is provided at a position near the end opposite to the portion 60 (specifically, the front wall 312c provided at the front end of the case 12).
  • the attachment part 60 becomes a structure which attaches the case 12 to a user's ear Ey by the structure by which the extension part 12c is extended at least to the front side (side to which a user's face Fa faces) from a user's ear.
  • the direction in which the mounting portion 60 and the reading port 14 are arranged is the front-rear direction of the reading device 10, and the reading port 14 side is the front side and the opposite side is the rear side with respect to the mounting portion 60. .
  • the direction perpendicular to the front-rear direction and the ear insertion portion 61 protrudes is the left-right direction of the reading apparatus 10.
  • the front-rear direction and the direction orthogonal to the left-right direction are defined as the vertical direction of the reading apparatus 10.
  • the direction in which the face Fa faces with respect to the user's face Fa will be described as the front side of the face Fa
  • the occipital side will be described as the back side of the face Fa.
  • the case 12 has a front wall portion 312c at the front end portion and a rear wall portion 312d at the rear end portion in such a definition.
  • the side wall part 13b is provided in the left-right direction one side (attachment part 60 side), and the side wall part 13a is provided in the opposite side.
  • an upper wall portion 312e is provided at the upper end portion, and a lower wall portion 312f is provided at the lower end portion.
  • the storage part which stores electronic parts, such as an image pick-up part and a control circuit is a box-like composition enclosed by these front wall part, rear wall part, side wall part, upper wall part, and lower wall part in front and rear, right and left, and up and down. It is configured.
  • the attachment portion 60 includes an ear insertion portion 61 that is inserted into the hole of the user's ear Ey, and an ear hook portion 62 that is hung on the user's ear.
  • the main body portion of the case 12 is formed in a longitudinal and box shape, and the ear insertion portion 61 is formed so as to protrude from the side wall portion 13b on one end side in the longitudinal direction of the main body portion.
  • An ear hooking portion 62 is provided so as to extend in an arc shape from the vicinity of the base end portion (near the base of the protrusion) of the ear insertion portion 61. 1 and 4 to 8, the extension destination of the ear hook 62 is omitted.
  • the ear hooking portion 62 is actually configured to be bent in an arc shape as shown in FIGS. 3 and 9 and bendable, and the ear insertion portion 61 is inserted into the hole of the ear Ey as shown in FIG. When it is, it has a structure that can be hung on the portion of the ear Ey facing the head side.
  • the ear hooking portion 62 can be attached to and detached from a part of the case 12 or a connecting portion connected to the case 12.
  • a part of the case 12 or a connection part connected to the case 12 includes a first fixing part 71 to which the ear hooking part 62 should be fixed when the ear hooking part 62 is attached to the left ear of the user,
  • a second fixing portion 72 to which the ear hook 62 should be fixed is formed.
  • the first fixing portion 71 is configured as, for example, a first hole portion that opens downward on the proximal end side of the protruding ear insertion portion 61, and, for example, an ear hook 62 configured as a curved member. 9 is inserted and fitted into the first hole, and is fixed to the right ear as shown in FIG. 9A.
  • fixed part 72 is comprised as a 2nd hole part opened upwards in the base end side of the protrusion-shaped ear insertion part 61, for example, for example, the ear hook comprised as a curved member
  • the case 12 is provided with a reading port 14 through which light from the information code can be introduced, and the attachment portion 60 is attached to the left ear of the user by the arrangement as shown in FIG. 9B. Even when the case 12 is attached to the right ear of the user by the arrangement as shown in FIG. 9A, the case 12 can be attached to the user's ear with the reading opening 14 facing the front side of the user. (See also FIGS. 7A and 7B).
  • the illumination light source 21 that irradiates illumination light and the marker light irradiation unit 50 that irradiates marker light are provided, and the illumination light and marker light irradiation unit 50 from the illumination light source 21 are provided.
  • Each of the marker lights is irradiated from the front wall portion 312c to the front side of the reading device 10.
  • the illumination light from the illumination light source 21 is irradiated to the front side via the illumination light exit 16, and the marker light from the marker light irradiation unit 50 is directed to the front side via the marker light exit 17. It comes to be irradiated.
  • the attachment part 60 is a user's left part by arrangement
  • the attachment part 60 is a user's left part by arrangement
  • the front wall portion 312c faces the front side of the face Fa, and the irradiation light from the illumination light source 21 and the marker light from the marker light irradiation unit 50 are irradiated to the front side of the user.
  • the case 12 can be attached to the user's ear. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 7A, the illumination light outlet 16 and the marker light outlet 17 are respectively arranged on the left and right of the reading port 14, and the mounting portion 60 is arranged by the arrangement as shown in FIG. 7B.
  • the marker light outlet 17 is arranged on the inner side in the left-right direction of the reading port 14. More specifically, when viewed from the front as shown in FIG. 7, the marker light outlet 17 and the illumination light outlet 16 are substantially line symmetric about a vertical center line G3 passing through the center G1 of the reading port 14. The marker light outlet 17, the illumination light outlet 16, and the reading port 14 are arranged on a line G2 passing through the center G1 and orthogonal to the center line G3.
  • the reading device 10 includes a cable 80 that is held by the case 12 and is electrically connected to an external device provided outside the case 12. 80 is drawn out of the case 12 from one side in the short direction (specifically, below the mounting portion 60 provided near one side in the longitudinal direction of the case 12) near one side in the longitudinal direction of the case 12.
  • An operation switch that can be externally operated at a position on the back side of the mounting portion 60 on the wall portion (side wall portion 13a) opposite to the wall portion (side wall portion 13b) provided with the mounting portion 60 in the case 12. 42 is provided.
  • the operation switch 42 since the operation switch 42 is operated on the back side of the attachment portion 60 serving as the rotation center portion, even if a pressing operation or the like is performed on the operation switch 42, the operation force causes the vicinity of the attachment portion 60 and the center. Since the moment is not easily generated, the case 12 is difficult to rotate. Therefore, the relative orientation of the entire reading apparatus with respect to the user's face is easily maintained stably.
  • the reading apparatus 10 specifically, for example, when the user presses the operation switch 42, irradiation of illumination light from the illumination light source 21 and irradiation of marker light from the marker light irradiation unit 50 are started. And the imaging by the imaging part 23 is started. Then, when the reading object to which the information code 100 is attached is arranged on the front side of the reading device 10 (that is, the front side of the user's face) as shown in FIG. 9, the information code 100 is imaged and read. become.
  • the imaging area from the reading device 10 is preferably within a range that can be reached by the user (particularly, a range in which the user can easily place an object by holding it), for example, 10 cm to 150 cmm (more preferably 20 cm to 100 cm).
  • the sound generation unit 44 corresponds to an example of a “notification unit” and functions to notify at least a processing result in the processing unit.
  • the ear insertion unit 61 is provided with a derivation unit (derivation hole 61a) for deriving the sound from the sound generation unit 44, and the sound emitted from the sound generation unit 44 through the derivation unit is transmitted to the user. It comes to be transmitted in the ear.
  • the sound generation unit 44 itself may be in the ear insertion unit 61 or outside the ear insertion unit 61 as long as the route for guiding the sound from the sound generation unit 44 is configured to the derivation unit.
  • the decoded data in FIG. 10, QR code data (QR code is a registered trademark)
  • the external device analyzes the content of the decoded data and transmits guide information to the reading device 10.
  • the position information of the product corresponding to the slip code, the number to be read, the data about the product number information, and the voice information are transmitted to the reading device 10 as the guide information.
  • the user can read the target product by moving to a designated position based on the voice information, and when the information code of the product is read by the reading device 10 thereafter, the decoded data is read every time the reading is performed. Is output to the external device and collation is performed on the external device side.
  • the control circuit 40 and the sound generation unit 44 correspond to an example of a “voice guide unit”, and the processing unit responds after decoding the decoding information based on the decoding information obtained by decoding the information code. It functions to provide voice guidance for information to be played.
  • Patent Document 1 In the configuration of Patent Document 1 and the configuration in which a reading device is fixed by fitting a band or the like on the user's head as shown in FIG. 1 of Patent Document 2, it is difficult to apply when a wearing device is worn on the user's head. There is a problem. For example, when a reading operation is performed after wearing a helmet, a hat, or the like, it is difficult to apply the head-mounted reading device disclosed in these patent documents, and there is a concern that it may take time to wear. In addition, as in Patent Document 1, the configuration in which the reading device is attached on the screen that covers the eyes has a problem that it is difficult to apply when working with glasses.
  • the structure attached to parts other than a user's head is also disclosed by FIG.
  • the reading device if the reading device is fixed to an arm, a torso or the like, the reading device can be fixed without any trouble even when a helmet or glasses are used together.
  • the reading direction of the reading device cannot be linked to the movement of the user's face, and the direction the user is looking at and the reading direction of the reading device are likely to deviate.
  • the user is conscious of the article to be read, such as bringing the arm or body close to the article to be read, and eventually the workability is the same as that of a conventional portable terminal.
  • the case 12 holding the imaging unit 23 and the processing unit can be attached to the user's ear by the attachment unit 60. Therefore, the reading operation can be performed while attaching the reading device to a portion other than the hand, and the user can easily use both hands for other purposes than the reading operation.
  • the reading device is attached to one ear, the movement of the face and the entire reading device are linked, and the reading direction can be determined in accordance with the movement of the user's face.
  • the attachment position is one ear, it is easy to attach even the case 12 where other wearing tools (such as a helmet and glasses) are used.
  • the case 12 includes a reading port 14 into which light from the information code can be introduced, and the mounting portion 60 is configured such that the case 12 is disposed in a lateral position of the user's face and the reading port 14 is on the front side of the user.
  • the case 12 is configured to be attached to the user's ear. According to this configuration, the orientation of the user's face and the reading direction are easily linked well, and the information code arranged on the side facing the user's face can be read smoothly and smoothly.
  • the case 12 includes an extension portion extending in a predetermined direction from the position of the attachment portion 60, and the reading port 14 is provided near the end portion of the extension portion opposite to the attachment portion 60.
  • Reference numeral 60 denotes a configuration in which the case 12 is attached to the user's ear in such a configuration that the extending portion extends at least to the front side from the user's ear. In this way, when the case 12 is extended slightly ahead of the ear and the information code is read through the reading port 14 on the end side, the space in front of the face is removed by removing the user's face from the imaging area as much as possible. It becomes easy to image more widely.
  • the attachment part 60 has the ear
  • the mounting portion 60 has an ear hooking portion 62 that can be hung on the user's ear. According to this configuration, the case 12 can be easily held stably by the user's ear.
  • the ear hook 62 is detachable from a part of the case 12 or a connecting part connected to the case 12, and is used for a part of the case 12 or a connecting part connected to the case 12.
  • the second fixing portion 72 to be formed is formed. According to this configuration, the reading device can be attached to either the right ear or the left ear of the user, and when attaching to each ear, the ear hooking portion 62 can be fixed at a position corresponding to the ear. .
  • the case 12 includes a reading port 14 through which light from the information code can be introduced, and the attachment portion 60 is attached to the user's right ear even when the attachment portion 60 is attached to the user's left ear. Even when attached, the case 12 can be attached to the user's ear in a configuration in which the reading port 14 faces the front side of the user. According to this configuration, it is possible to satisfactorily link the orientation of the user's face and the reading direction, whether attached to the user's right ear or the left ear.
  • the illumination light source 21 which irradiates illumination light
  • the marker light irradiation part 50 which irradiates marker light
  • the case 12 can be attached to the user's ear in a configuration in which the irradiation light from the illumination light source 21 and the marker light from the marker light irradiation unit 50 are irradiated to the front side of the user. .
  • this configuration it is possible to irradiate illumination light and marker light to the front side of the user on the reading side, whether attached to the right ear of the user or attached to the left ear.
  • a sensor unit 46 is provided inside or outside the case 12, and the processing unit decodes the information code on the condition that a predetermined detection result is obtained at least by the sensor unit 46.
  • the decoding process by the processing unit can be stopped to save power, and the predetermined detection result can be generated by the sensor unit 46. Can be restored to the decoding start state.
  • the sensor unit 46 can detect a predetermined state in which the attachment unit 60 is attached to the user's ear, and the processing unit can detect the information code on the condition that the predetermined state is detected by the sensor unit 46. It is the structure which decodes. In this configuration, until the attachment portion 60 is attached to the user's ear, the decoding process by the processing portion can be stopped to save power, and when the attachment portion 60 is attached to the ear, decoding starts. It can be returned to the state.
  • At least one of the illumination light source 21 and the marker light irradiation unit 50 that irradiates the illumination light and the marker light irradiation unit 50 that emits the marker light, and at least one of the illumination light source 21 and the marker light irradiation unit 50 are provided on the condition that a predetermined state has occurred.
  • An irradiation control unit that is operated and starts irradiation of at least one of illumination light and marker light.
  • a communication unit 48 that communicates with an external device provided outside the case 12 is provided, and the communication unit 48 can transmit information to the external device or receive information from the external device. According to this configuration, since information can be exchanged with the external apparatus, a part can be shared by the external apparatus without having all the processing functions in the reading apparatus. Therefore, it is easy to simplify the reading device, which is advantageous in terms of size and weight.
  • a notification unit that notifies at least the reading result of the processing unit is provided. According to this configuration, the reading result of the processing unit can be satisfactorily transmitted to the user. In particular, since the notification is made near the ear, the notification is easily transmitted to the user reliably.
  • the attachment part 60 has the ear
  • a deriving unit for deriving is provided. According to this structure, it can function not only as a member for attaching the ear insertion portion 61 but also as an earphone. Further, with this mounting structure, the sound generated in the reader can be transmitted directly to the ear from the portion inserted into the ear, so that the content can be reliably transmitted to the user even with a small sound output. . Such an effect becomes more remarkable in case 12 where noise is assumed during use.
  • the processing unit has a voice guidance unit that provides voice guidance of information to be dealt with after decoding the decoded information. According to this configuration, it becomes easy for the user to respond quickly and appropriately after decoding the information code. Furthermore, since the reading device is attached to the ear and the voice guidance is emitted from a position close to the ear, the user can easily hear the voice guidance.
  • a cable 80 that is held by the case 12 and is electrically connected to an external device provided outside the case 12 is provided.
  • the case 12 is configured in a longitudinal shape, and one of the longitudinal directions of the case 12 is provided.
  • a mounting portion 60 is provided on the side, and the cable 80 is drawn out of the case 12 from one side in the short direction of the case 12 on one side in the longitudinal direction of the case 12.
  • an operation switch 42 capable of external operation is provided at a position on the back side of the mounting portion 60 on the wall portion opposite to the wall portion where the mounting portion 60 is provided in the case 12.
  • the operation switch 42 since the operation switch 42 is operated on the back side of the attachment portion 60 serving as the rotation center portion, even if a pressing operation or the like is performed on the operation switch 42, the operation force causes the vicinity of the attachment portion 60 and the center. Since the moment is not easily generated, the case 12 is difficult to rotate. Therefore, the relative orientation of the entire reading apparatus with respect to the user's face is easily maintained stably.
  • the reading apparatus 10 includes all the features of the first embodiment, and further features are added. Therefore, the configuration shown in FIGS. 1 to 11 is the same as that of the first embodiment, and a detailed description thereof will be omitted, and FIGS. 1 to 11 will be referred to as appropriate.
  • the reading process in FIG. 17 is a process that is executed on the condition that a predetermined start condition is satisfied.
  • the light receiving sensor (imaging unit) 23 continuously captures an imaging range set outside the case. (S201).
  • S201 the area irradiated with the illumination light is imaged while illuminating the illumination light from the illumination light source 21 shown in FIG. 2 toward the imaging range (see the upper diagram of FIG. 18).
  • the code image of the captured information code is analyzed (S202).
  • S202 a known decoding process is attempted on the code image of the information code.
  • the decoding process is successful, the data recorded in the information code is acquired (S203).
  • the data acquired in S203 (data recorded in the information code) is collated with an expected value stored in advance in the memory 35 (FIG. 2) (S204), and whether or not the data matches the expected value. Judgment is made (S205).
  • one or a plurality of expected values are registered in advance. If the decoded data obtained in S203 matches the expected value registered in the memory 35, the process proceeds to OK in S205. Conversely, if the decrypted data obtained in S203 does not match the expected value registered in the memory 35, the process proceeds to NG in S205.
  • an expected value three product number lists of “1234567890001”, “1234567890002”, and “1234567890003” are stored in the memory 35, and the decryption data of the information code obtained in S203 is “1234567890001”. Since the data matches the expected value, the process proceeds to OK in S205, and the process of S206 is performed. On the other hand, when the decrypted data of the information code obtained in S203 is “1234567890009”, the decrypted data does not match the expected value, so that the process proceeds to NG in S205 and the process of S207 is performed.
  • the illumination light of the illumination light source 21 that has been irradiated from S201 is turned off in S206 (see the lower left diagram in FIG. 18). Since the illumination light is turned off in this manner is a signal for matching the matching result, the user can grasp the matching result by turning off the illumination light.
  • the illumination light of the illumination light source 21 that has been irradiated from S201 is blinked (see the lower right diagram in FIG. 18). The fact that the illumination light is blinked in this way is a signal of the mismatch of the collation result, and thus the user can grasp the mismatch of the collation result by the blinking of the illumination light.
  • the illumination light source 21 corresponds to an example of a “light source”, is provided integrally with the case 12, and functions to irradiate light to the outside of the case 12.
  • the imaging unit 23 corresponds to an example of an “imaging unit”, and has a function of imaging the outside of the case 12 in a state where light is emitted toward the outside of the case 12 by the “light source”.
  • the control circuit 40 (FIG. 2) corresponds to a “processing unit” and a “decoding unit”, and has a function of decoding data recorded in an information code imaged by the imaging unit 23. Specifically, It functions to decode the code imaged by the imaging unit 23 in a state where light is irradiated outside the case 12 by the “light source”.
  • control circuit 40 corresponds to an example of a “determination unit” and the decoding result of the information code by the “decoding unit” is in a predetermined success state (in the above example, the decoded data and the memory obtained in S203 are And the expected value stored in the memory 35 in the above-described example and the predetermined failure state that is not the predetermined success state (in the above example, the expected value stored in the memory 35). Function in the case of not matching).
  • the control circuit 40 corresponds to an example of an “irradiation state control unit”, and after the information code is attempted to be decoded by the “decoding unit”, the irradiation state of the light from the “light source” is determined by the “determination unit”. It functions to control the state according to the result.
  • the lighting time or the extinguishing time of the light from the “light source” when it is determined by the “determination unit” to be a predetermined success state The time interval is controlled to be different from the time interval of either the lighting time or the light-off time of the light from the “light source” when the “determination unit” determines that the predetermined failure state has occurred. Yes.
  • the user can irradiate light from the “light source”. Depending on the state, the decoding result of the information code can be grasped.
  • the device configuration can be easily simplified.
  • the reading apparatus 10 includes all the features of the first embodiment, and further features are added. Therefore, the configuration shown in FIGS. 1 to 11 is the same as that of the first embodiment, and a detailed description thereof will be omitted, and FIGS. 1 to 11 will be referred to as appropriate.
  • the reading process in FIG. 19 is a process that is executed on condition that a predetermined start condition is satisfied.
  • the light receiving sensor (imaging unit) 23 continuously captures an imaging range set outside the case. (S211).
  • the area irradiated with the illumination light is imaged while illuminating the illumination light from the illumination light source 21 (illumination light irradiation unit) shown in FIG. 2 toward the imaging range (see the upper diagram of FIG. 20).
  • the code image of the captured information code is analyzed (S212).
  • S212 a known decoding process is attempted on the code image of the information code.
  • the data recorded in the information code is acquired (S213).
  • the data acquired in S213 (data recorded in the information code) is collated with an expected value stored in advance in the memory 35 (FIG. 2) (S214), and whether or not the data matches the expected value. Judgment is made (S215).
  • the decrypted data of the information code obtained in S213 is “1234567890009”, the decrypted data does not match the expected value, so the process proceeds to NG in S215, and the process of S217 is performed.
  • the illumination light of the illumination light source 21 that has been irradiated from S211 is turned off, and blue (first color) light is emitted from the blue LED (not shown in FIG. 2) (FIG. 2). 20 (see lower left figure).
  • the fact that the blue light is irradiated in this manner is a signal for the matching of the matching results, so that the user can grasp the matching of the matching results by the blue light.
  • the illumination light of the illumination light source 21 that has been continuously irradiated from S211 is turned off, and red (second color) light is emitted by the red LED (not shown in FIG. 2). (See the lower right diagram in FIG. 20). Since irradiation with red light in this way is a signal of a mismatch in the collation result, the user can grasp the mismatch in the collation result with the red light.
  • the blue LED and the red LED described above correspond to an example of a “light source”, and are provided integrally with the case 12 and function to irradiate the outside of the case 12 with light.
  • the illumination light source 21 corresponds to an example of an “illumination light irradiating unit” in the present configuration, is configured as a light source different from the “light source”, and functions to irradiate light toward the outside of the case.
  • the imaging unit 23 corresponds to an example of an “imaging unit”, and has a function of imaging the outside of the case 12 in a state where light is emitted toward the outside of the case 12 by the “illumination light irradiation unit”.
  • the control circuit 40 (FIG.
  • the “illumination light irradiating unit” functions to decode the code imaged by the imaging unit 23 in a state where light is irradiated outside the case 12.
  • the control circuit 40 corresponds to an example of a “determination unit” and the decoding result of the information code by the “decoding unit” is in a predetermined success state (in the above example, the decoded data and memory obtained in S213 are And the expected value stored in the memory 35 in the example described above and the expected value stored in the memory 35 (in the above example). Function in the case of not matching).
  • the control circuit 40 corresponds to an example of an “irradiation state control unit”. After the information code is attempted to be decoded by the “decoding unit”, the irradiation state of light from the blue LED and the red LED (light source) is expressed as “ It functions to control the state according to the determination result by the “determination unit”, specifically, when it is determined by the “determination unit” that the predetermined successful state is satisfied (in the above example, in the case of OK in S215) ), A first color irradiation state in which blue (first color) light is emitted from a blue LED and a red LED (light source), and the “determination unit” determines a predetermined failure state (in the above example, S215) In the case of NG), a second color irradiation state in which red (second color) light different from the first color is emitted from the blue LED and the red LED (light source) is used.
  • the same effects as those of the first embodiment can be obtained. Further, even with this configuration, the user can grasp the decoding result of the information code according to the irradiation state of the light from the “light source”. become able to. Furthermore, in this configuration, since the decoding result of the information code can be notified using a light source different from the light source that emits illumination light (illumination light irradiation unit) at the time of imaging by the imaging unit, a light source suitable for notification Can be selected more freely.
  • the reading apparatus 10 includes all the features of the first embodiment, and further features are added. Therefore, the configuration shown in FIGS. 1 to 11 is the same as that of the first embodiment, and a detailed description thereof will be omitted, and FIGS. 1 to 11 will be referred to as appropriate.
  • a specific process at the time of reading the information code is added as a feature, and specifically, the reading process is performed in the flow as shown in FIG.
  • the reading process in FIG. 21 is a process that is executed on condition that a predetermined start condition is satisfied.
  • the light receiving sensor (imaging unit) 23 continuously captures an imaging range set outside the case. (S221).
  • S221 the area irradiated with the illumination light is imaged while illuminating the illumination light toward the imaging range from the illumination light source 21 (illumination light irradiation unit) shown in FIG. 2 (see the left figure in FIG. 22A). ).
  • the code image of the captured information code is analyzed (S222).
  • S222 a known decoding process is attempted on the code image of the information code, and when the decoding process is successful, the data recorded in the information code is acquired (S223). Then, the data acquired in S223 (data recorded in the information code) is collated with the expected value stored in advance in the memory 35 (FIG. 2) (S224), and whether or not the data matches the expected value. Judgment is made (S225).
  • the decrypted data of the information code obtained in S223 is “1234567890009”, the decrypted data does not match the expected value, so the process proceeds to NG in S225, and the process of S227 is performed.
  • the illumination light of the illumination light source 21 that has been irradiated from S221 is turned off, and character information corresponding to S226 (predetermined success) is displayed by the character information display unit (not shown in FIG. 2).
  • Character information corresponding to the state is displayed on the screen (right diagram in FIG. 22A).
  • the character information display unit can use various known configurations as long as the device can display the character information on the screen.
  • the character information displayed in S226 is, for example, information as shown in FIG. 22B.
  • the decrypted data decrypted in S223 and the information indicating that the collation in S224 is successful ie, S223).
  • the information indicating that the decrypted data decrypted in step 1 matches the expected value) is displayed as character information.
  • the user can grasp the coincidence of the collation results with this information.
  • the illumination light of the illumination light source 21 that has been irradiated from S211 is turned off, and character information corresponding to S227 (predetermined in FIG. 2) is displayed by the character information display unit (not shown in FIG. 2). (Character information corresponding to the failure state) is displayed on the screen (right diagram in FIG. 22A).
  • the character information displayed in S227 is, for example, information as shown in FIG. 22C.
  • the decrypted data decrypted in S223 and the information indicating that the collation in S224 has failed ie, S223).
  • Information indicating that the decrypted data decrypted in step 2 does not match the expected value is displayed as character information.
  • the information indicating that the verification has failed is displayed as a signal indicating a mismatch in the verification result, the user can grasp the mismatch in the verification result from this information.
  • the character information display unit described above corresponds to an example of a “light source”, is provided integrally with the case 12, and functions to irradiate light to the outside of the case 12.
  • the illumination light source 21 corresponds to an example of an “illumination light irradiating unit” in the present configuration, is configured as a light source different from the “light source”, and functions to irradiate light toward the outside of the case.
  • the imaging unit 23 corresponds to an example of an “imaging unit”, and has a function of imaging the outside of the case 12 in a state where light is emitted toward the outside of the case 12 by the “illumination light irradiation unit”.
  • the control circuit 40 (FIG.
  • the “illumination light irradiating unit” functions to decode the code imaged by the imaging unit 23 in a state where light is irradiated outside the case 12.
  • the control circuit 40 corresponds to an example of a “determination unit” and the decoding result of the information code by the “decoding unit” is in a predetermined success state (in the above example, the decoded data and memory obtained in S213 are And the expected value stored in the memory 35 in the example described above and the expected value stored in the memory 35 (in the above example). Function in the case of not matching).
  • control circuit 40 corresponds to an example of an “irradiation state control unit”. After the information code is attempted to be decoded by the “decoding unit”, the irradiation state of light from the character information display unit (light source) is determined by “determination”.
  • the character information Function to control the state according to the determination result by the “part”, specifically, when it is determined by the “determination unit” to be either a predetermined success state or a predetermined failure state, the character information
  • the irradiation state of light from the display unit (light source) is set as a first display state in which predetermined information is displayed on the irradiation object irradiated with light from the character information display unit (light source), and the other state Is determined, the irradiation state of the light from the character information display unit (light source) is set to an irradiation state different from the first display state.
  • the user can grasp the decoding result of the information code according to the irradiation state of the light from the “light source”. it can. Further, in this configuration, since information can be displayed outside at least in a predetermined success state or a predetermined failure state, the user is provided from the device even in a situation where it is difficult for the user to see the case. It becomes easy to grasp specific information. For example, as shown in FIGS. 22B and 22C, the first information corresponding to the predetermined success state is displayed in the predetermined success state, and the first information corresponding to the predetermined failure state is displayed in the predetermined failure state. If 2 information is displayed, since the user can grasp
  • the control circuit 40 is provided inside the case 12, and the configuration in which the information code is decoded by the control circuit 40 is exemplified.
  • a memory, a control circuit, and a communication unit similar to the memory 35, the control circuit 40, and the communication unit 48 may be provided in an information processing device (external device) that is communicably connected to the internal device in the case 12. Good.
  • the data of the information code image picked up by the image pickup unit 23 in the case 12 is transmitted to the external device by the control circuit 40 and the communication unit 48 (FIG. 2), and is decoded by the control circuit of the external device. You may make it collate with the expected value memorize
  • control circuit 40 and the communication unit 48 in the case 12 correspond to an example of a processing unit
  • control circuit of the external device corresponds to an example of an external processing unit, a decoding unit, and a determination unit.
  • the control circuit and the communication unit of the external device transmit the collation result (determination result) to the case 12 side, and the control circuit 40 corresponding to the illumination state control unit performs the process of S206 or S207 based on the collation result Should be done.
  • the case where the decoded data of the information code matches the expected value registered in advance is set as the “predetermined success state”, and the case where they do not match is set as the “predetermined failure”
  • success in decoding the information code may be a “predetermined success state”
  • failure in decoding the information code may be a “predetermined failure state”.
  • when encrypted data is recorded in the information code the fact that the decryption of the encrypted data recorded in the information code has been successfully decrypted is set as a “predetermined successful state” and recorded in the information code.
  • the failure of the decryption of the encrypted data may be defined as a “predetermined failure state”.
  • the portable information code reader 10 according to the third embodiment is different from the first embodiment only in the form, and the electrical configuration is the same as that in the first embodiment. Therefore, detailed description of the electrical configuration will be omitted, and FIG. 2 will be referred to as appropriate.
  • the portable information code reading device 10 having this configuration is mainly composed of a device main body 311 and a mounting portion 360.
  • the apparatus main body 311 includes an imaging unit 23 (such as FIG. 2) that can capture the information code 100, a processing unit (control circuit 40 (FIG. 2)) that processes an image of the information code 100 captured by the imaging unit 23,
  • the configuration includes an imaging unit 23 and a case 312 that holds the processing unit.
  • it is provided as a separate body from the case 312, and includes a mounting portion 360 that attaches the imaging unit 23 to the user in a configuration that images the side facing the user's face.
  • the mounting portion 360 includes a flexible body mounting portion (mounting portion) 362 that can be bent and deformed, and a mounting portion 366 to which the case 312 is attached and detached, and is configured to be hung on the human body of the user.
  • the case 312 functions to be attached to the user's ear.
  • the apparatus main body 311 contains various electronic components shown in FIG. 2 inside the case 312. In this configuration, the apparatus main body 311 can be attached to the mounting portion 360 as shown in FIGS. 30 and 31 can be detached.
  • the case 312 is formed in a longitudinal and box shape as a whole.
  • the front-rear direction, the width direction (horizontal direction), and the vertical direction of the apparatus main body 311 are defined as follows.
  • the center direction (optical axis direction) of the field of view of the imaging unit 23 is the front-rear direction
  • the longitudinal direction of the case 312 is the front-rear direction.
  • the thickness direction of the case 312 is the width direction (lateral direction) in the direction orthogonal to the front-rear direction, and the opposite wall portion 312a of the case 312 and the opposite wall portion of the opposite wall portion 312a (front side wall).
  • the direction facing the portion 312b) is the width direction (lateral direction).
  • the direction orthogonal to the said front-back direction and the width direction is the up-down direction.
  • the front-rear direction is the X-axis direction
  • the up-down direction is the Y-axis direction
  • the width direction (lateral direction) is the Z-axis direction.
  • the front direction is the X-axis positive direction
  • the rear direction is the X-axis negative direction.
  • the upward direction is the Y-axis positive direction
  • the downward direction is the Y-axis negative direction.
  • the attachment portion 360 side is the Z-axis negative direction
  • the side opposite to the attachment portion 360 is the Z-axis positive direction.
  • the case 312 is provided with a front wall portion 312c at the front end portion and a rear wall portion 312d at the rear end portion in such a definition.
  • a side wall portion (opposing wall portion 312a) is provided on one side in the width direction (left and right direction) (attachment portion 360 side), and a front side wall portion 312b is provided on the opposite side.
  • a wall portion 312e is provided at one end portion in the vertical direction
  • a wall portion 312f is provided at the other end portion in the vertical direction.
  • the front wall part, the rear wall part, the side wall part, and the wall part constitute a housing part for housing electronic components such as the imaging part 23 and the control circuit 40 in a box-like configuration surrounded by the front, rear, left, right, and top and bottom. Yes.
  • the direction in which the face Fa faces with respect to the user's face Fa is defined as the front side of the face Fa, and the occipital side is described as the back side of the face Fa.
  • the case 312 includes a reading port 314 through which light from the information code can be introduced, and a light-transmitting cover member 315 is provided so as to cover the reading port 314.
  • the case 312 includes an extending portion (a portion extending from the portion that contacts the mounting portion 360 to the front side) extending in a predetermined direction from the mounting position on the mounting portion 360, and A reading port 314 is provided near the end of the extension portion opposite to the attachment portion 360.
  • a cover member 315 that covers the reading port 314 is configured as a front wall portion 312c. Then, as shown in FIGS.
  • the attachment portion 360 is configured such that the case 312 is arranged in a lateral position of the user's face Fa and the reading port 14 faces the front side of the user P. It is configured to be attached to the ear Ey. In this way, the case 312 is attached by the attachment portion 360 so that the imaging portion 23 faces the same side as the user's face.
  • the wall portion 312 e on one side in the vertical direction is provided with an operation switch 42 a capable of external operation
  • the wall portion 312 f on the other side is provided with an operation switch 42 b capable of external operation.
  • the operation switch 42a functions as a trigger switch
  • the operation switch 42b functions as an operation switch other than the trigger switch.
  • setting information indicating whether a trigger function is set for one of the operation switches 42a and 42b and a function other than the trigger function is set for the remaining switches, or setting (allocation) thereof.
  • the setting information can be rewritten by the external device PC when the case 312 is connected to the external device PC such as a computer as shown in FIG.
  • an illumination light source 21 that emits illumination light
  • a marker light irradiation unit 50 that emits marker light
  • an imaging unit 23 that images the outside of the case 312 are provided inside the case 312. Both the illumination light from the illumination light source 21 and the marker light from the marker light irradiation unit 50 are irradiated from the front wall portion 312c to the front side of the case 312 via the reading port 314.
  • the imaging unit 23 and the lens 27 are disposed slightly above the center in the vertical direction, and the light receiving optical axis G is positioned slightly above the center in the vertical direction.
  • the illumination light source 21 is disposed below the center in the vertical direction, and the marker light irradiation unit 50 is disposed between the illumination light source 21 and the imaging unit 23.
  • the lens 27, the lens 50a of the marker light irradiation unit 50, and the lens 21a of the illumination light source 21 are arranged at a position near the front wall 312c.
  • the lens 50a of the irradiation unit 50 has a positional relationship closer to the lens 27 (light receiving lens).
  • the marker light path can be made closer to the light receiving optical axis G.
  • the attachment portion 360 includes a flexible body attachment portion 362 that can be bent and deformed, and an attachment portion 366 to which the case 312 is attached and detached. Is provided as a separate body.
  • This mounting portion 360 is a portion that is hung on the user's human body and held by the human body, specifically, a portion that protrudes from the neck of the user on the structure of the body (in the following example, By being hung on the both ear portions), it is held by the human body and positioned at a predetermined position of the human body. As shown in FIG. 23, FIG. 29, FIG.
  • the mounting portion 360 has the case 312 disposed in the lateral position of the user's face Fa and the reading port 314 facing the side where the user's face Fa faces.
  • the case 312 is attached to at least the user's ear Ey.
  • the body wearing part 362 is a part to be worn at least partly in direct contact with the user. Specifically, the body wearing part 362 is configured as an ear hooking part that is hung on both ears of the user. As shown in FIGS. 24 to 28, the body wearing portion 362 is configured to be maintained in a predetermined shape in a natural state when worn without being attached to the user, and is configured to be elastically deformable and flexible. It has a sex structure.
  • the body mounting part 362 has a configuration in which both ends are respectively connected to a right side mounting part 370 and a left side mounting part 380 described later, and has a substantially U-shaped configuration as a whole.
  • the body wearing portion 362 includes a right ear mounting portion (right ear hooking portion) 362a that is formed in a curved position adjacent to the right wearing portion 370 so as to protrude upward when worn on the user, A left ear mounting portion (left ear hook) 362b formed away from the right ear mounting portion 362a and curved at an adjacent position near the left mounting portion 380 so as to protrude upward, and these right An intermediate connecting portion 362c that connects the ear attaching portion 362a and the left ear attaching portion 362b is provided.
  • the intermediate connecting portion 362c is a portion that is wound around the user's back head or neck when the mounting portion 360 is attached to the user's ear as shown in FIG.
  • the mounting portion 366 has a right side mounting portion 370 that is arranged on the right side of the user's face and can be attached to and detached from the case, and a left side mounting portion 380 that is arranged on the left side of the user's face and that can be attached and detached from the case. is doing.
  • the body mounting portion 362 extends forward from a right ear attachment portion 362a (the right ear attachment portion 362a corresponds to an example of a supported portion) that is hung on the user's right ear and supported by the right ear.
  • the portion 363a extends to the front side (the side opposite to the intermediate coupling portion 362c).
  • the right mounting portion 370 functions as a holding portion that holds the case 312 by being connected to the front end portion of the front extending portion 363a in the body mounting portion 362.
  • the front extension portion 363a is arranged to extend to the front side of the right ear attachment portion 362a (supported portion), and the right side
  • the right mounting part 370 (holding part) is arranged in front of the ear hole of the right ear of the user who supports the ear attaching part 362a (supported part).
  • the right mounting part 370 (holding part) includes a back surface part 371 that is supported facing the user's face at a position before the ear hole of the right ear when mounted on the human body as shown in FIGS. And a surface portion 372 disposed on the opposite side of 371. Both the back surface portion 371 and the front surface portion 372 have a flat outer surface. For example, the outer surface of the back surface portion 371 (the surface supported by the user's face) and the outer surface of the surface portion 372 (when the case 312 is attached) The surface in contact with the case 312) is substantially parallel. The thickness between the back surface portion 371 and the front surface portion 372 is larger than the thickness of the right ear mounting portion 362a, and as shown in FIG.
  • the surface portion 372 side has a right ear mounting portion (right ear hooking portion). ) It protrudes laterally from 362a.
  • the case 312 is held by the surface portion 372 by the right side mounting portion 370 configured as described above. The holding structure will be described in detail later.
  • the left ear mounting portion 362b (the left ear mounting portion 362b is a portion of the supported portion) that is hung on the left ear of the user and supported by the left ear.
  • the front extension part 363b extends from the front side (corresponding to an example) to the front side (the side opposite to the intermediate coupling part 362c).
  • the left mounting portion 380 functions as a holding portion that is connected to the front end portion of the front extending portion 363 b in the body mounting portion 362 and holds the case 312. In this configuration, when the attachment portion 360 is attached to the user as shown in FIGS.
  • the front extension portion 363b is located on the front side of the left ear attachment portion 362b (supported portion).
  • the left mounting part 380 (holding part) is arranged in front of the ear hole of the left ear of the user who extends and is arranged and supports the left ear attaching part 362b (supported part).
  • the left mounting portion 380 (holding portion) is a back surface that is supported facing the user's face at a position before the ear hole of the left ear when mounted on a human body as shown in FIGS. 23, 29, 44, and 46.
  • a portion 381 and a surface portion 382 disposed on the opposite side of the back surface portion 381.
  • Both the back surface portion 381 and the front surface portion 382 have a flat outer surface.
  • the outer surface of the back surface portion 381 (the surface supported by the user's face) and the outer surface of the surface portion 382 (when the case 312 is attached) The surface in contact with the case 312) is substantially parallel.
  • the thickness between the back surface portion 381 and the front surface portion 382 is larger than the thickness of the left ear mounting portion 362b, and as shown in FIG. 24 and the like, the front surface portion 382 side has a left ear mounting portion (left ear hooking portion). ) It protrudes laterally from 362a.
  • the case 312 is held by the surface portion 382 by the left mounting portion 380 configured as described above. The holding structure will be described in detail later.
  • the guide portion 350 removably connects the case 312 to each mounting portion 366 provided on the mounting portion 360, and each mounting portion 366 is connected at the time of the connection. It functions to guide the case 312 so that the posture of the case 312 becomes a predetermined posture.
  • the guide part 350 includes at least two case side connecting parts (first case side connecting part 351 and second case side connecting part 352) provided on the case 312 side and at least two right side mounting parts 370 side.
  • Right connection part first right connection part 373a, second right connection part 373b
  • at least two left connection parts provided on the left mounting part 380 side first left connection part 383a, second left connection part 383b
  • case side connection parts first case side connection part 351 and second case side connection part 352 and at least two right side connection parts (first right side connection part 373a, second right side connection part 373b).
  • case 312 is attached to the right mounting part 370, and at least two case side connection parts (first case side connection part 351 and second case side connection part 352) and at least two left side connection parts (first 1 left connecting portion 383a and second left connecting portion 383b) are connected to each other so that case 312 is attached to the left mounting portion (first left connecting portion 383a and second left connecting portion 383b).
  • two case side connecting portions (first case side connecting portion 351 and second case side connecting portion 352) and two right side connecting portions (first right side connecting portion).
  • 373a and the second right connecting portion 373b) correspond to the first guide portion
  • the case 312 is detachably connected to the right mounting portion 370 and the case 312 is connected to the right mounting portion 370.
  • the case 312 is guided so that the posture of the case 312 with respect to the right mounting portion 370 becomes the first predetermined posture.
  • first case side connecting portion 351 and second case side connecting portion 352 and two left side connecting portions first left side connecting portion 383a and second left side connecting portion 383b
  • the case 312 is detachably connected to the left mounting portion 380 and the case 312 is connected to the left mounting portion 380 when the case 312 is connected to the left mounting portion 380. Guide to a predetermined posture.
  • the first case-side coupling portion 351 configured as a permanent magnet and the second case-side coupling configured as a permanent magnet.
  • Part 352 is provided.
  • a first right side connecting portion 373a configured as a permanent magnet and a second right side connecting portion 373b configured as a permanent magnet are provided, and as the two left side connecting portions, as a permanent magnet
  • a first left connecting portion 383a configured and a second left connecting portion 383b configured as a permanent magnet are provided.
  • the first case-side connecting portion 351 has a polarity different from that of the first right-side connecting portion 373a and the first left-side connecting portion 383a, and has the same polarity as the second right-side connecting portion 373b and the second left-side connecting portion 383b.
  • the second case-side connecting portion 352 has a polarity different from that of the second right-side connecting portion 373b and the second left-side connecting portion 383b, and has the same polarity as the first right-side connecting portion 373a and the first left-side connecting portion 383a.
  • the first case side connecting portion 351 and the first right side connecting portion 373a have different polarities, and the first case side connecting portion 351 and the first right side connecting portion 373a are connected to each other by suction.
  • the first case side connecting part 351 is configured as a permanent magnet whose surface part is configured as an N pole
  • the first right side connecting part 373a is configured as a permanent magnet whose surface part is configured as an S pole.
  • the second case side connecting portion 352 and the second right side connecting portion 373b have different polarities, and the second case side connecting portion 352 and the second right side connecting portion 373b are connected to each other by suction.
  • the second case side connecting portion 352 is configured as a permanent magnet whose surface portion is configured as an S pole
  • the second right side connecting portion 373b is configured as a permanent magnet whose surface portion is configured as an N pole.
  • first case side connecting portion 351 and the second right side connecting portion 373b have the same polarity
  • the second case side connecting portion 352 and the first right side connecting portion 373a have the same polarity
  • the first case side connecting portion 351 has a surface portion configured as an N pole
  • the second right side connecting portion 373b also has a surface portion configured as an N pole. Sometimes they are repelling each other.
  • the second case side connecting portion 352 has a surface portion configured as an S pole
  • the first right side connecting portion 373a also has a surface portion configured as an S pole. It comes to meet each other.
  • the polarities of the first case side connecting part 351 and the first left side connecting part 383a are different from each other, and the first case side connecting part 351 and the first left side connecting part 383a are sucked and connected to each other.
  • It has a configuration.
  • the first case side connecting portion 351 is configured as a permanent magnet whose surface portion is configured as an N pole
  • the first left side connecting portion 383a is configured as a permanent magnet whose surface portion is configured as an S pole.
  • the second case side connecting portion 352 and the second left side connecting portion 383b have different polarities, and the second case side connecting portion 352 and the second left side connecting portion 383b are connected to each other by suction.
  • the second case side connecting portion 352 is configured as a permanent magnet whose surface portion is configured as an S pole
  • the second left side connecting portion 383b is configured as a permanent magnet whose surface portion is configured as an N pole.
  • first case side connecting portion 351 and the second left side connecting portion 383b have the same polarity
  • the second case side connecting portion 352 and the first left side connecting portion 383a have the same polarity
  • the first case side connecting portion 351 has a surface portion configured as an N pole
  • the second left side connecting portion 383b also has a surface portion configured as an N pole. Sometimes they are repelling each other.
  • the second case side connecting portion 352 has a surface portion configured as an S pole
  • the first left side connecting portion 383a also has a surface portion configured as an S pole. It comes to meet each other.
  • the case 312 can be attached to each mounting portion 366 by such a guide portion 350, and the orientation of the case 312 (that is, the orientation in the reading direction) is stabilized at the time of attachment. Further, by the mounting portion 366 and the guide portion 350, a front portion of the case 312 (an extension portion extending forward from the portion supported by the mounting portion 366 in the case 312) extends at least forward from the user's ear. The configuration allows the case 312 to be attached to the user's ear.
  • the side wall portion (opposing wall portion 312 a) on the user side of the case 312 is configured to be fitted to the right fitting portion (surface portion 372) formed in the right mounting portion 370, and the left mounting portion 380.
  • a stepped portion 313 (fitting portion) having a shallow bottom shape that can be fitted to the left fitting portion (surface portion 382) formed on the right side mounting portion 370 is formed.
  • the step 313 (fitting part) and the right fitted part (surface part 372) are fitted, and when the case 312 is attached to the left mounting part 380, the step part 313 (fitting part) and The left fitting portion (surface portion 382) is configured to be fitted.
  • the structure is highly effective in suppressing displacement when the switches 42a and 42b are pressed.
  • a plurality of lead-out holes 320 for leading out sound are formed in the wall portion (opposing wall portion 312a) on the side where the case 312 is attached to the attachment portion 360.
  • the lead-out hole 320 functions as a sound emission hole that leads to the outside the sound emitted by a sound generation unit (speaker or the like) provided inside the case 312.
  • a sound generation unit speaker or the like
  • the position of the two-dot chain line 366a in FIG. 34 is a position that contacts the surface portion 372 or the surface portion 382 when the case 312 is attached to the mounting portion 366 and is covered by the surface portion 372 or the surface portion 382.
  • the apparatus main body 311 can be detached from the attachment section 360, and the apparatus main body 311 can be used or maintained separately from the attachment section 360.
  • the apparatus main body 311 has a configuration in which a holding member 390 for holding the cable 302 is attached to the case 312.
  • the holding member 390 can be attached and detached as shown in FIGS. It has become a structure.
  • the holding member 390 is formed with a holding portion 391 that fits the cable 302 and holds the cable 302.
  • the cable 302 is detached from the holding portion 391 for use or management.
  • the cable 302 can be held and used by the holding portion 391, and can be managed.
  • the holding portion 391 is arranged at a position directly behind the attached portion (the portion held by the attaching portion 360 in the case 312), and the holding portion 391 causes the cable 302 to move to the moment. Therefore, even if the cable 302 is pulled, the direction of the case 312 is hardly changed as indicated by an arrow.
  • the attachment portion 360 is first put on both ears of the user, and then, for example, as shown in FIGS. If the apparatus main body 311 is attached to any one of the left mounting parts 380, it can be attached quickly and easily. Further, the present invention is not limited to this method, and the reader 10 may be attached to the user after being assembled as shown in FIG.
  • the reading apparatus 10 can also perform information code reading processing continuously each time a predetermined trigger condition is satisfied or after a predetermined start condition is satisfied. For example, when the operation switch is pressed, the imaging start trigger is used, and after the operation switch is pressed, the imaging process is continuously performed by the imaging unit 23, and the information code is read each time the information code enters the imaging range. It may be. Alternatively, reading may be started on the condition that a predetermined state is detected by a sensor different from the operation switch 42. For example, a known proximity sensor that detects the proximity of an object in the forward direction of the case 312 may be provided, and when an object approaches, an illumination light source or an imaging unit may be operated to perform imaging and decoding.
  • the voice input from the microphone is analyzed, and it is determined whether or not the voice corresponds to the predetermined voice (for example, whether or not a volume of a predetermined amount or more is detected or whether or not a voice having a predetermined waveform is detected). do it.
  • This determination process may be performed by the reading device 10 or an external device.
  • Such processing can also be performed in a flow as shown in FIG. 43, for example.
  • the voice data is transmitted from the reading device 10 to an information terminal such as a smartphone.
  • this information terminal receives transmission of audio data from the reader 10, it transmits the audio data to the management server via a communication line such as the Internet.
  • the management server analyzes the voice data and converts it into information such as characters and symbols, and transmits the converted information (decoding information obtained by decoding the voice) to the information terminal again.
  • a plurality of commands are prepared in advance in the information terminal, and when the decryption information transmitted from the management server corresponds to any command, an instruction is given to transmit the command to the reading device 10. .
  • the information “start” is a start command registered in the information terminal
  • the voice is analyzed by the management server, Thereafter, decrypted information “start” after analysis is transmitted to the information terminal.
  • the information terminal receives such information (decoding information corresponding to the start command) from the management server, the information terminal transmits instruction information instructing the reading start to the reading device 10, and the reading device 10 receives the information from the information terminal.
  • the reading process is started by receiving such instruction information as a trigger.
  • the reading apparatus according to this configuration is not limited to the mounting method and the usage method as shown in FIGS. 23 and 29, and can be used in various usage methods.
  • the external device D (FIG. 47) connected to the cable 302 may be used on the waist as shown in FIG. 23, or used in the chest pocket of the user as shown in FIG. May be. 45 and 46, the apparatus main body 311 may be temporarily or continuously removed from the attachment portion 360 and used for reading. In this case, as shown in FIGS.
  • the device D can be placed in various places.
  • the cable 302 is detachably attached to the external device D (external device used when the reading operation is used), and as shown in FIG. It can be connected to an external device PC that is removed from the external device D and different from the external device D.
  • the external device D may function as a supply source for supplying power to the device main body 311 and information from the device main body 311 (decoded data when the information code is decoded by the device main body 311). May function as a storage medium for storing.
  • a control circuit such as a CPU may be mounted on the external device D, and the code image captured by the imaging unit 23 may be decoded by the external device D.
  • the attachment portion 360 is configured as a separate body from the case 312, and is disposed on the right side of the user's face, and is disposed on the right side of the user's face and the left side of the user's face. And a left mounting portion to which the case can be attached and detached.
  • the case can be mounted on the right side or the left side of the user's face, and the degree of freedom of mounting increases.
  • the attachment portion 360 is a right ear attachment portion attached to the user's right ear, a left ear attachment portion attached to the user's left ear, and a connecting portion that connects the right ear attachment portion and the left ear attachment portion. And have.
  • the attachment portion is attached to both ears, the stability at the time of wearing increases, and it becomes easier to link the movement of the face and the case more stably. Further, since the case can be attached to the ear, it is easy to attach to the human body even when other wearing tools (such as a helmet or glasses) are used.
  • a magnet is arranged in one of the case and the mounting portion, and a suction portion that is attracted by the magnet is arranged in the other.
  • the case can be easily mounted using the attractive force of the magnet regardless of whether the case is mounted on the right side or the left side of the face. Moreover, it becomes easy to remove or replace the case from the mounting portion.
  • the case or other parts assembled to the case can be fitted to the right mating part formed on the right mounting part and can be mated to the left mating part formed on the left mounting part.
  • the fitting part and the right mating part are fitted, and when the case is attached to the left mounting part, the fitting part is formed. It is the structure which a part and a left side fitting part fit.
  • the first guide that guides the case so that the case with respect to the right mounting part becomes the first predetermined attitude when the case is detachably connected to the right mounting part and the case is connected to the right mounting part.
  • a second guide that guides the case so that the posture of the case with respect to the left mounting portion becomes a second predetermined posture when the case is connected to the left mounting portion and the case is connected to the left mounting portion.
  • a guide portion that guides the case so that the case with respect to the right mounting part becomes the first predetermined attitude when the case is detachably connected to the right mounting part and the case is connected to the right mounting part.
  • a second guide that guides the case so that the posture of the case with respect to the left mounting portion becomes a second predetermined posture when the case is connected to the left mounting portion and the case is connected to the left mounting portion.
  • the guide portion includes at least two case side connecting portions provided in the case, at least two right connecting portions provided in the right mounting portion, and at least two left connecting portions provided in the left mounting portion,
  • the case is attached to the right mounting portion by connecting at least two case-side connecting portions and at least two right-side connecting portions, and at least two case-side connecting portions and at least two left-side connecting portions are provided. And the case are connected to the left mounting portion.
  • connection portions provided in the case (with respect to at least two connection portions defined in the attachment portion) (Case side connecting portion) is connected so as to be matched, and therefore, it becomes easier to set the case more accurately so that the direction of the case faces a desired direction.
  • a first case side connection portion configured as a permanent magnet and a second case side connection portion configured as a permanent magnet are provided, and as the two right side connection portions, a permanent magnet A first right connecting portion configured as a permanent magnet, a second right connecting portion configured as a permanent magnet, and as two left connecting portions, a first left connecting portion configured as a permanent magnet, and a permanent magnet And a first case-side connecting part having a polarity different from that of the first right-side connecting part and the first left-side connecting part, and a second right-side connecting part and a second left-side connecting part.
  • the polarity is the same, and the second case side connecting portion has a different polarity from the second right connecting portion and the second left connecting portion, and the same polarity as the first right connecting portion and the first left connecting portion.
  • the case can be guided more strongly and more accurately to an appropriate position by using the force with which the magnets attract at least two positions. It is possible to reduce the burden of alignment and connection. Furthermore, even when the case is attached to the right side of the face or the left side, when the connection parts that do not correspond are attached so as to match each other, the connection parts that do not correspond have the same polarity. The connecting parts repel each other at the position, and are not connected. Therefore, whether the case is mounted on the right side or the left side of the face, it is easier to align the case with the mounting portion more accurately and quickly when it is in the correct orientation. This abnormal connection can be prevented more reliably.
  • the attachment portion is supported by being supported on one of the user's ears, a front extending portion extending from the supported portion, a holding portion connected to the front extending portion and holding the case
  • the front extension portion is arranged to extend to the front side of the supported portion, and is held at a position in front of the ear hole of the ear that supports the supported portion.
  • the part is arranged.
  • the holding portion includes a back surface portion facing the user's face at a position before the ear canal and a surface portion disposed on the opposite side of the back surface portion, and is configured to hold the case by the surface portion. ing.
  • a lead-out hole that leads out sound is formed in the wall portion of the case that is attached to the attachment portion.
  • a covering portion that forms a part of the attachment portion. At least a part of the hole is covered, and when the case is removed after being detached from the attachment portion, a portion of the lead-out hole that is covered by the covering portion at the time of attachment is exposed.
  • the sound when the case is placed near the face, the sound can be relatively suppressed by closing the outlet hole, even when the sound source is near the user's ear, It can suppress that a loud sound reaches a user too much.
  • the case when the case is not worn easily away from the face, the sound can be made relatively loud by exposing the lead-out hole, even if the sound source is some distance away from the user's ear Makes it easier for people to reach.
  • a cable support portion for supporting the cable may be provided.
  • the attachment portion 60 is provided on the one wall portion (side wall portion 13b) side of the case 12, but in the wall portion (side wall portion 13a) opposite to the one wall portion of the case 12.
  • a cable support portion that supports the cable 80 drawn from the case 12 may be formed at a position on the back side of the attachment portion 60. For example, you may make it provide the cyclic
  • the cable 80 may be held by a part of the case 12 (for example, a hole through which the cable 80 is conducted) such that the position where the cable 80 is pulled out is the position behind the attachment portion 60.
  • the case 12 is pulled to some extent, the cable 80 is received on the back side of the attachment portion 60 that becomes the center of rotation, and a moment around the vicinity of the attachment portion 60 does not easily occur, so the case 12 is difficult to rotate. . Therefore, the relative orientation of the entire reading apparatus with respect to the user's face is easily maintained stably.
  • the ear hook 62 illustrated in the first embodiment may be provided so as to be displaceable with respect to a part of the case 12 or a connecting part (for example, the ear insertion part 61) connected to the case 12. And in this case, if it can be positioned at the first position when attaching the ear hook 62 to the left ear of the user and the second position when attaching the ear hook 62 to the right ear of the user. Good.
  • the reading device can be attached to the right ear or the left ear of the user, and when attaching to each ear, the position of the ear hook 62 is positioned at a position corresponding to the ear. Can do.
  • the sensor unit 46 is provided inside or outside the case 12.
  • the processing unit is provided that a predetermined detection result is obtained at least by the sensor unit 46.
  • the information code may be decoded.
  • the sensor unit 46 is configured to detect a predetermined state in which the mounting unit 60 is mounted on the user's ear, and illumination light source or marker light irradiation is performed on condition that the sensor unit 46 detects the predetermined state.
  • the imaging unit may start imaging and the imaging unit may start imaging, and the processing unit may decode the information code accordingly.
  • the sensor unit 46 is configured by a multi-axis acceleration sensor (triaxial acceleration sensor or the like), and the acceleration sensor (triaxial acceleration sensor or the like) is in a predetermined acceleration state (for example, an acceleration state in which almost no movement is detected). This state may be the “predetermined state”. Alternatively, it may be configured by a three-axis sensor or the like, and irradiation or decoding may be started with a “predetermined state” when gravity acceleration occurs in a predetermined direction. Alternatively, a predetermined acceleration change due to the impact may be detected on the assumption that a command is given by impact due to tooth meshing or a foot lifting / lowering motion.
  • the imaging unit 23 can capture images outside the case 12 continuously or intermittently, and the processing unit has confirmed that the image captured by the imaging unit 23 is in a predetermined state.
  • the information code captured by the imaging unit 23 after the condition is satisfied may be decoded.
  • detection of gesture instructions changing movement by hand shape such as goo, choki, par
  • motion detection moving during operation, (There is no movement when reading the code, so it is possible to detect the continuation of a predetermined still image)
  • monitoring the image without using the indicator illumination with an object such as a setting QR code detection of what appears to be a code, detection of a finger, etc. .
  • the decoding process by the processing unit can be stopped to save power, and the image of the predetermined state is captured by the imaging unit 23. By taking such measures, it is possible to return to the decoding start state.
  • voice input from a microphone may be used as a trigger for decoding or lighting start.
  • the sound input from the microphone may be analyzed to determine whether or not the sound corresponds to the predetermined sound. This determination process may be performed by the reading device 10 or an external device.
  • the reading port may be extended to the vicinity of the eyes, a blink detection sensor as shown in FIG. 13 may be provided, and irradiation or decoding may be started on condition that a predetermined detection result is obtained by the blink detection sensor. .
  • an instruction can be given according to the number of blinks or the time during which the eyes are closed.
  • the blink detection sensor is configured as shown in FIG. 12, for example, and may detect a state where the eyelashes block light and the light returns to the light receiving element as a blink occurrence state.
  • a proximity sensor may be provided so that the proximity sensor can detect the proximity of the user's face when the reader 10 is attached to the ear.
  • irradiation and decoding may be started on condition that a predetermined detection result is obtained by the proximity sensor.
  • a known distance measuring sensor laser method, ultrasonic method, etc.
  • Irradiation and decoding may be started on condition that a predetermined detection result is obtained by the sensor.
  • a change in facial muscles may be detected using a myoelectric sensor.
  • irradiation and decoding may be started on condition that a predetermined detection result is obtained by the myoelectric sensor.
  • the ear insertion portion 61 and the ear hook portion 62 are provided as the attachment portion 60, but the ear insertion portion 61 and / or the ear hook portion 62 may be detachable.
  • the ear insertion portion 61 configured as an earphone can be made detachable as shown in FIGS.
  • a terminal 69 is provided in an ear insertion portion 61 configured as an earphone, and this terminal 69 can be inserted into a hole (terminal) 18 formed in the case.
  • the terminal 69 When the terminal 69 is inserted into the hole 18, an audio signal is transmitted from the case 12 side to the ear insertion portion 61 side, and sound is emitted from the ear insertion portion 61 based on this audio signal.
  • the earphone when the earphone is not inserted into the hole 18 (for example, when nothing is inserted into the hole 18, or the medium to which the audio signal is transmitted is inserted). If not, information can be notified by an information not shown (not shown) provided on the case 12 side.
  • the information notification unit may be, for example, a speaker. In this case, when the ear insertion unit 61 is not inserted into the hole 18, a sound is emitted from the speaker instead of the ear insertion unit 61.
  • the information notification unit may be a display unit (a monitor, a lamp, or the like), a vibrator, or the like.
  • the attachment portion is removed from the case, and for example, it can be easily used as a handheld type. Further, even when the attachment portion is removed and used, information can be notified, and convenience is further enhanced.
  • the ear insertion part and the ear hook part detachable and exchangeable, it is possible to cope with changing the mounting part for each user. Therefore, it is useful for a user who does not want to use a part used by another person for attachment to the ear. In addition, it is possible to replace the ear insertion portion and the ear hook portion with a large number of sizes.
  • the side wall portion 13b has a hole having the same configuration and function as the hole 18 (hole for inserting the terminal 69) as shown in FIG. It may be formed on the side wall portion 13a on the opposite side to that so that the terminal 69 can be inserted.
  • the terminal 69 of the ear insertion portion 61 is fixed so as to be inserted into the hole 18, and when attaching to the left ear, the terminal 69 of the ear insertion portion 61 is defined as the hole 18. What is necessary is just to fix so that it may insert in the hole of the other side.
  • FIG. 16 shows an example in which an attachment member (clip) 160 is attached to the case 12 instead of the ear insertion part 61 when the ear insertion part 61 is detachable as shown in FIGS. Yes.
  • the mounting member 160 is provided with an elastic member 162 such as an elastically deformable metal material, one end 162a of the elastic member 162 is fixed to the main body 164, and the other end 162b side is configured to be able to bend and deform.
  • the main body 164 is biased toward the side in contact with it. And an object can be inserted
  • a volume adjusting unit that adjusts the volume of a sound emitted from the sound generation unit 44 (for example, a sound emitted from the ear insertion unit 61 configured as an earphone) may be provided.
  • an operation unit such as a knob or a volume adjustment button (a volume increase button, a volume decrease button, etc.) is provided on the case 12, and when an increase instruction is given by this operation unit, the sound from the sound generation unit 44 is transmitted by a known method. If the instruction is given by the operation unit to decrease, the sound from the sound generation unit 44 may be decreased by a known method. According to this configuration, the volume of the sound emitted from the information code reading device can be adjusted within the device.
  • control circuit 40 is illustrated as an example of the processing unit, and the configuration in which the code image of the information code is decoded as the processing of the information code image captured by the imaging unit by the control circuit 40 is illustrated.
  • the processing of the information code image captured by the imaging unit is not limited to this.
  • the processing may be such that image data of an information code imaged by the imaging unit is transmitted to an external device.
  • the image data may be decoded by an external device (such as a host device).
  • the configuration including all of the features of the first embodiment has been illustrated.
  • a representative example or modification of the second embodiment You may perform control like an example.
  • the control as in the representative example or the modified example of the second embodiment may be performed.
  • a sound generating unit such as a speaker or an earphone
  • the driving method of these sound generating units is a dynamic type, a magnetic type, a balanced armature type, a hybrid type, a piezoelectric type, and a crystal type.
  • Various known driving methods such as a mold and an electrostatic type can be used.
  • any drive system capable of transmitting sound to the user may be used.
  • a bone conduction type speaker or earphone that transmits sound to the user by bone conduction may be used.
  • the image data of the information code captured by the imaging unit 23 may be transmitted from the apparatus main body to an external apparatus and decoded by the external apparatus.
  • the battery may be provided in a case attached to the body, or may be provided in an external device connected to the case via a cable.
  • the configuration in which the right mounting portion and the left mounting portion are provided has been illustrated, but the configuration of only the right mounting portion or the configuration of only the left mounting portion may be used (that is, either one of the ears). It may be configured to be attached only to the side). In this case, it is only necessary to mount only one of the mounting portions from the configuration of the third embodiment.
  • the configuration in which the magnets are arranged in both the case 312 and the attachment portion 360 is illustrated, but the magnet is arranged in one of them, and the other is a magnetic body such as iron (attraction attracted by the magnet). Part) may be arranged.
  • the same magnet as that of the third embodiment is arranged on the case 312 side, and the first right connecting portion and the second right connecting portion of the right mounting portion 370 and the first left connecting portion of the left mounting portion 380 are arranged. And you may make it replace a 2nd left side connection part with magnetic bodies, such as iron.
  • the case 312 when the case 312 is attached to the right attachment portion 370, the case 312 and the right attachment portion 370 are held by the suction of the magnet and the suction portion, and the case 312 is attached to the left attachment portion 380. In such a case, the case 312 and the left mounting part 380 are held by suction between the magnet and the suction part.
  • a magnetic material such as iron may be disposed on the case 312 side, and a magnet may be disposed on the attachment portion 360 side.
  • the portable information code reader 10A is an image pickup unit that picks up an information code.
  • a processing unit that processes an image of an information code captured by the imaging unit 23
  • a case 512 that holds the imaging unit 23 and the processing unit, and a case 512 are provided separately.
  • an attachment member 560 that is attached to the user while being held.
  • the information code reader 10A is configured as a code reader capable of reading an information code such as a one-dimensional code or a two-dimensional code in hardware.
  • various electronic components are accommodated in the case.
  • the information code reader 10A mainly includes an illumination light source 21, a marker light irradiation unit 50, an imaging unit 23, a filter 25, an imaging lens 27, and other optical systems, a memory 35, and a control.
  • the circuit is composed of a microcomputer (hereinafter referred to as “microcomputer”) such as an operation switch 42 and a power supply system such as a power switch 41 and a battery 49. These are mounted on a printed wiring board (not shown) or housed in a case. These electrical configurations and operations thereof are the same as or equivalent to those described above.
  • the portable information code reader 10A is mainly composed of an apparatus main body 511 and an attachment member 560.
  • the apparatus main body 511 includes an imaging unit 23 capable of imaging the information code 100, a processing unit (control circuit 40 (see FIG. 2 described above)) that processes an image of the information code 100 captured by the imaging unit 23, imaging It is the structure provided with the case 512 holding the part 23 and a process part.
  • the attachment member 560 is provided as a separate body from the case 512, and includes a flexible body mounting portion (mounting portion) 562 that can be bent and deformed, and a mounting portion 566 to which the case 512 is attached and detached.
  • the apparatus main body 511 is configured such that the above-described various electronic components shown in FIG. 2 are accommodated in the case 512. In this configuration, the apparatus main body 511 can be attached to the attachment member 560 as shown in FIG. 55 and FIG. 56 are made detachable.
  • the case 512 has a longitudinal and box shape as a whole.
  • the front-rear direction, the width direction (lateral direction), and the up-down direction of the apparatus main body 511 are defined as follows.
  • the center direction (optical axis direction) of the field of view of the imaging unit 23 is the front-rear direction
  • the longitudinal direction of the case 512 is the front-rear direction.
  • the thickness direction of the case 512 is the width direction (lateral direction)
  • the direction in which the facing wall portion 512a of the case 512 faces the mounting wall portion 566a of the mounting portion 566 is the width direction. (Lateral direction).
  • the direction orthogonal to the said front-back direction and the width direction is the up-down direction.
  • the front-rear direction is the X-axis direction
  • the vertical direction is the Y-axis direction
  • the width direction (lateral direction) is the Z-axis direction.
  • the front direction is the X-axis positive direction
  • the rear direction is the X-axis negative direction.
  • the upward direction is the Y-axis positive direction
  • the downward direction is the Y-axis negative direction.
  • the attachment member 560 side when viewed from the case 512 side is the Z-axis negative direction
  • the opposite side of the attachment member 560 is the Z-axis positive direction.
  • the case 512 is provided with a front wall portion 513c at a front end portion and a rear wall portion 513d at a rear end portion in such a definition. Further, a side wall 513b is provided on one side (the mounting member 560 side) in the width direction (left and right direction), and a side wall 513a is provided on the opposite side. Further, an upper wall portion 513e is provided at the upper end portion, and a lower wall portion 513f is provided at the lower end portion.
  • the storage part which stores electronic parts, such as an image pick-up part and a control circuit is a box-like composition enclosed by these front wall part, rear wall part, side wall part, upper wall part, and lower wall part in front and rear, right and left, and up and down. It is configured. And one side wall part 513b functions as the opposing wall part 512a facing the attachment member 560.
  • the direction in which the face Fa faces with respect to the user's face Fa is defined as the front side of the face Fa, and the occipital side is described as the back side of the face Fa.
  • the front wall 513c provided at the front end of the case 512 is provided with a reading port 514 through which light from the information code can be introduced.
  • the mounting member 560 is configured such that the case 512 is disposed at a lateral position of the user's face Fa and the reading port 514 faces the front side of the user P. It is configured to be attached to.
  • the case 512 is attached by the attachment member 560 so that the imaging unit 23 faces the same side as the side where the user's face faces.
  • an operation switch 42 (42a, 42b) (see FIG. 2) capable of external operation is provided on the upper wall portion 513e.
  • the case 512 is provided with an illumination light source 21 for illuminating illumination light and a marker light irradiation unit 50 for irradiating marker light as shown in FIG. 2, and the illumination light and marker from the illumination light source 21 are provided. Any marker light from the light irradiation unit 50 is irradiated to the front side of the case 512 from the front wall portion 513c.
  • the mounting member 560 includes a flexible body mounting portion 562 that can be bent and deformed, a mounting portion 566 to which the case 512 is attached and detached, and a base portion 565 that supports the body mounting portion 562, and is separate from the case 512. It is provided as.
  • the attachment member 560 is configured to attach the case 512 to the user's ear Ey with a configuration in which the reading port 514 faces the side where the user's face Fa faces.
  • the body wearing portion 562 is configured as an ear hooking portion that is hung on both ears of the user, and is configured to be maintained in a predetermined shape in a natural state when worn, as shown in FIG. 49, and can be elastically deformed. It is configured.
  • the body mounting portion 562 is configured to extend from the base portion 565, and has a U-shaped configuration as a whole.
  • the body wearing part 562 includes a right ear hook part 562a that is curved so as to protrude upward, and a left ear hook that is formed away from the right ear hook part 562a and is curved so as to protrude upward.
  • the connecting portion 562c is a portion that wraps around the user's back or neck when the mounting member 560 is mounted on the user's ear as shown in FIG.
  • the base portion 565 is connected to the back surface side (the surface opposite to the mounting wall portion 566a) in the vicinity of the central portion in the longitudinal direction of the mounting portion 566 configured in a longitudinal shape, and protrudes from the back surface side of the base portion 565.
  • wearing part 562 is curved and formed by the structure extended from the surrounding wall part of a base part.
  • the mounting portion 566 is configured in a plate shape as a whole, and the base portion 565 is connected to one plate surface side, and the case 512 is detachably connected to the other plate surface side.
  • a wall portion on the plate surface side to which the case 512 is connected is configured as an attachment wall portion 566a, and the case 512 can be attached to and detached from the attachment wall portion 566a.
  • the guide portion 550 connects the case 512 to the attachment portion 566 of the attachment member 560 in a detachable manner, and the posture of the case 512 with respect to the attachment portion 566 during the connection is a predetermined posture (specifically, the user P It functions so as to guide the face so that the reading port 514 faces in the direction in which the face faces (the side in which the line of sight faces).
  • the guide portion 550 includes two case-side connecting portions (first case-side connecting portion 551 and second case-side connecting portion 552) provided in the case 512 and two attaching portions 566 provided in the attaching member 560.
  • attachment member side connection part (the 1st attachment member side connection part 553 and the 2nd attachment member side connection part 554), and two case side connection parts and two attachment member side connection parts are connected, respectively.
  • the attachment member 560 and the case 512 are coupled.
  • the two case-side connecting portions are composed of a first case-side connecting portion 551 and a second case-side connecting portion 552 configured as magnets, and the two mounting member-side connecting portions are on the first mounting member side configured as magnets. It consists of a connecting portion 553 and a second attachment member side connecting portion 554.
  • the first case side connecting portion 551 and the second case side connecting portion 552 correspond to an example of a one side magnet or a magnetic body
  • the first mounting member side connecting portion 553 and the second mounting member side connecting portion 554 are: It corresponds to an example of a magnetic body or one side magnet.
  • the first case side connecting portion 551 and the first mounting member side connecting portion 553 have different polarities, and the first case side connecting portion 551 and the first mounting member side connecting portion 553 are sucked and connected to each other. It has become.
  • the first case side connecting portion 551 is configured as a permanent magnet whose surface portion is configured as an N pole
  • the first mounting member side connecting portion 553 is configured as a permanent magnet whose surface portion is configured as an S pole. They are sucked together when their surface portions face each other.
  • the polarities of the second case side connecting portion 552 and the second mounting member side connecting portion 554 are different from each other, and the second case side connecting portion 552 and the second mounting member side connecting portion 554 are sucked and connected to each other.
  • the second case side connecting portion 552 is configured as a permanent magnet whose surface portion is configured as an S pole
  • the second mounting member side connecting portion 554 is configured as a permanent magnet whose surface portion is configured as an N pole. They are sucked together when their surface portions face each other.
  • first case side connecting portion 551 and the second mounting member side connecting portion 554 have the same polarity
  • the second case side connecting portion 552 and the first mounting member side connecting portion 553 have the same polarity
  • the first case side connecting portion 551 has a surface portion configured as an N pole
  • the second attachment member side connecting portion 554 is also configured as a surface portion having an N pole. When they face each other, they repel each other.
  • the surface part of the second case side connecting part 552 is configured as an S pole
  • the surface part of the first attachment member side connecting part 553 is also configured as an S pole, the surface parts face each other. Have come to repel each other.
  • a displacement adjustment unit 564 provided with a displacement adjustment unit 564 that can change the displacement of the imaging unit 23 with respect to the opposing wall portion 512a or the displacement of the attachment portion 566 with respect to the base portion 565 is known, for example.
  • the ratchet mechanism is configured such that the attachment portion 566 can be rotated around a predetermined rotation axis, and the rotational position of the attachment portion 566 can be changed stepwise.
  • the reading apparatus 10A configured as described above can continuously read the information code every time a predetermined trigger condition is satisfied or after a predetermined start condition is satisfied. For example, when the operation switch is pressed, the imaging start trigger is used, and after the operation switch is pressed, the imaging process is continuously performed by the imaging unit 23, and the information code is read each time the information code enters the imaging range. It may be. Alternatively, reading may be started on the condition that a predetermined state is detected by a sensor different from the operation switch 42. For example, a known proximity sensor that detects the proximity of an object in the forward direction of the case 512 may be provided, and when an object approaches, an illumination light source or an imaging unit may be operated to perform imaging and decoding.
  • the voice input from the microphone is analyzed, and it is determined whether or not the voice corresponds to the predetermined voice (for example, whether or not a volume of a predetermined amount or more is detected or whether or not a voice having a predetermined waveform is detected). do it.
  • This determination process may be performed by the reading device 10A or an external device.
  • the body mounting portion 562 is configured to be maintained in a predetermined shape in a natural state when being worn, and is configured to be elastically deformable. Since the body mounting portion 562 that is to be maintained in the prescribed shape by the elastic restoring force is attached in this way, it is easy to omit a complicated knotting operation or the like when attaching to the body, and further facilitate the mounting. be able to.
  • the body wearing part 562 is configured as an ear hook part that is hung on the user's ear.
  • the reading device 10A since the reading device 10A is attached to the ear, the movement of the face and the entire reading device 10A are interlocked, and the reading direction can be easily determined in accordance with the movement of the user's face. Further, since the attachment position is the ear, it is easy to wear even when other wearing tools (such as a helmet or glasses) are used.
  • the case 512 is detachably connected to a predetermined attachment portion 566 of the attachment member 560, and the posture of the case 12 with respect to the attachment portion 566 at the time of the connection is a predetermined posture (specifically, the user P's A guide portion 550 is provided for guiding the face so that the reading port 514 faces in the direction in which the face faces (the side in which the line of sight faces).
  • the case side in the configuration in which the reader 10A can be used by being attached to the body without being grasped by the hand, the case side can be easily detached from the body, and can be easily reattached after the removal. It is possible to realize a configuration that can be performed.
  • the case 512 when remounting, the case 512 is guided more accurately by the guide portion 550 so that the posture of the case 512 becomes a predetermined posture with respect to the attachment portion 566 that is left attached to the user. It becomes easy to mount quickly so as to be in the position and orientation.
  • the guide portion 550 includes at least two case-side coupling portions provided in the case 512 and at least two attachment member-side coupling portions provided in the attachment portion 566 of the attachment member 560.
  • the attachment member 560 and the case 512 are connected by connecting the case side connection portion and the two attachment member side connection portions, respectively.
  • two connection parts (case side connection part) provided in case 512 may match with at least two connection parts (attachment member side connection part) defined in attachment member 560. For this reason, it is easier to set the case 512 more accurately so that the direction of the case 512 is in a desired direction.
  • the guide portion 550 includes a one-side magnet provided on one of the case 512 and the attachment portion 566 and a magnetic body provided on the other of the case 512 and the attachment portion 566 and attracted by the one-side magnet. According to this configuration, the case 512 can be guided to a predetermined position of the mounting member 560 using the attractive force generated between the one-side magnet and the other-side magnetic body, thereby further reducing the burden of alignment and connection. can do.
  • the two case-side coupling portions include a first case-side coupling portion 551 and a second case-side coupling portion 552 configured as magnets, and the two attachment member-side coupling portions are configured as magnets. It consists of a first attachment member side connection portion 553 and a second attachment member side connection portion 554. And the polarity of the 1st case side connection part 551 and the 1st attachment member side connection part 553 is mutually different, These 1st case side connection part 551 and the 1st attachment member side connection part 553 are mutually sucked and connected. It is the composition which becomes.
  • the polarities of the second case side connecting portion 552 and the second mounting member side connecting portion 554 are different from each other, and the second case side connecting portion 552 and the second mounting member side connecting portion 554 are sucked and connected to each other. It is the composition which becomes. Furthermore, the 1st case side connection part 551 and the 2nd attachment member side connection part 554 are the same polarity, and the 2nd case side connection part 552 and the 1st attachment member side connection part 553 are the same polarity. Yes.
  • connection parts that do not correspond to each other that is, the first case side connection part 551 and the second attachment member side connection part 554, the second case side connection part 552, and the first attachment member side connection part 553) have the same polarity.
  • the attachment member 560 includes a base portion 565 that is connected to the attachment portion 566, and a body attachment portion (attachment portion) 562 extends from the base portion 565.
  • the case 512 includes an opposing wall portion (attached portion) 512 a that is connected to the attaching portion 566 by the guide portion 550.
  • a displacement adjustment unit 64 that can change the displacement of the mounting portion 566 relative to the base portion 565 is provided. In this configuration, since the displacement adjustment unit 564 can adjust the displacement of the attachment portion 566 with respect to the base portion 565, the orientation of the imaging unit 23 when the case 512 is attached to the attachment portion 566 is more desirable. It becomes easier to fine-tune the direction.
  • This modified example differs from the fourth embodiment only in power supply, and is otherwise the same as the fourth embodiment.
  • a cable (connection cable) 19 is provided so as to connect the attachment member 560 and the case 512.
  • the cable 519 is configured to supply power to the case 512 from the attachment member 560 or a battery electrically connected to the attachment member 560.
  • the electrical configuration can be divided into the case side (reading side) and the mounting member side, and the electronic components on the case side can be more easily reduced, making it easier to reduce the size and weight of the case side. Become.
  • the cable 519 may be used for information communication, not for power supply. Or you may use together for an electric power supply and information communication.
  • the communication unit 48 shown in FIG. 2 described above is provided in a device provided on the attachment member 560 or in a device electrically connected to the attachment member 560, and data (for example, from the apparatus main body 511 side to the attachment member 560 side). (Decryption data) is transmitted, and data (decryption data) is transmitted from the communication unit 48 provided in the device provided on the attachment member 560 or in the device electrically connected to the attachment member 560 to the external device. It may be configured.
  • the imaging unit 23 may be provided on the apparatus main body 511 side, and the control circuit 40 and the memory 35 may be provided in a device provided on the mounting member 560 or in a device electrically connected to the mounting member 560. .
  • data (image data) imaged by the imaging unit 23 is decoded by the control circuit 40 provided in the device provided on the attachment member 560 or in the device electrically connected to the attachment member 560. May be.
  • the cable 519 shown in FIG. 58 may be configured to be accommodated in the case 512, or may be configured to be accommodated in an accommodating portion (not shown) provided in the attachment member 560.
  • an automatic winding mechanism for the cable 519 may be provided in the accommodating portion.
  • the fifth embodiment is different from the fourth embodiment or the modified example of the fourth embodiment only in the configuration of the facing wall portion of the case, the configuration of the mounting wall portion of the mounting member, and the configuration of the guide portion. This is the same as the modification of the embodiment or the fourth embodiment. Accordingly, the rest of the description is the same as the fourth embodiment or the modification of the fourth embodiment, and a detailed description thereof is omitted.
  • the case 712 is detachably connected to the predetermined mounting portion 766 of the mounting member 760, and the posture of the case 712 with respect to the mounting portion 766 at the time of the connection is a predetermined posture (specifically, FIG. Similarly, a guide unit 750 is provided for guiding the user P so that the face of the user P faces (the posture in which the reading port 514 faces in the direction in which the line of sight faces).
  • the guide portion 750 used in the fifth embodiment includes two case side connecting portions 751 and 752 provided in the case 712 and two attachment member side connecting portions 753 and 754 provided in the attaching portion 766 of the attaching member 760. And.
  • the two case-side connecting portions 751 and 752 and the two attachment member-side connecting portions 753 and 754 are connected to each other so that the attachment member 760 and the case 712 are connected.
  • the two case side connecting portions 751 and 752 function as one side sheet material
  • the two mounting member side connecting portions 753 and 754 function as the other side sheet material
  • the connecting portion 753 is connected as a hook-and-loop fastener
  • the case-side connecting portion 752 and the attachment member-side connecting portion 754 are connected as a hook-and-loop fastener.
  • the case 512 can be guided to a predetermined position of the mounting member 560 by utilizing the action of the one side sheet material and the other side sheet material to be combined.
  • the sixth embodiment is different from the fourth embodiment or the modified example of the fourth embodiment only in the configuration of the facing wall portion of the case, the configuration of the mounting wall portion of the mounting member, and the configuration of the guide portion. This is the same as the modification of the embodiment or the fourth embodiment. Accordingly, the rest of the description is the same as the fourth embodiment or the modification of the fourth embodiment, and a detailed description thereof is omitted.
  • the case 812 is detachably connected to the predetermined mounting portion 866 of the mounting member 860, and the posture of the case 812 with respect to the mounting portion 366 at the time of the connection is a predetermined posture (specifically, FIG. Similarly, a guide unit 850 is provided to guide the user P so that the face of the user P faces (the posture in which the reading port 514 faces in the direction in which the line of sight faces).
  • the guide portion 850 used in the sixth embodiment includes two case side connecting portions 851 and 852 provided in the case 812 and two attachment member side connecting portions 853 and 854 provided in the attaching portion 866 of the attaching member 860. And.
  • the two case-side connecting portions 851 and 852 and the two attaching member-side connecting portions 853 and 854 are connected to each other, thereby connecting the attaching member 860 and the case 812.
  • the two case-side connecting portions 851 and 852 function as one-side fitting portions, and the two attachment member-side connecting portions 853 and 854 function as fitted portions, and the case-side connecting portion 851 and the attachment member
  • the side connecting portion 853 is connected with a fitting structure, and the case side connecting portion 852 and the attachment member side connecting portion 854 are connected with a fitting structure.
  • the case 512 can be guided to a predetermined position of the mounting member 560 by utilizing the action of the one side fitting portion and the fitted portion to be fitted. Further, the case 512 can be stably attached to the attachment member 560 without using a special material or a complicated structure.
  • 7th Embodiment differs from the modification of 4th Embodiment or 4th Embodiment only in the structure of an attachment member, and other than that is the same as the modification of 4th Embodiment or 4th Embodiment.
  • the base part and the body wearing part are different from the modification example of the fourth embodiment or the fourth embodiment, and the other parts are the same as the modification example of the fourth embodiment or the fourth embodiment.
  • the apparatus main body 511 is the same as that in the fourth embodiment.
  • the attachment member 960 used in the seventh embodiment has the same structure of the attachment portion 966 as that of the attachment portion 566 used in the fourth embodiment.
  • the body mounting part 962 is configured as a band member that is hung on the user's arm or finger.
  • the body mounting portion 962 is configured in a substantially annular shape as a whole, with a pair of curved portions 962a and 962b arranged to face each other. And the front-end
  • an attachment member is attached to the user's finger by inserting the finger between the curved portions 962a and 962b and holding it in a ring shape. 960 can be installed.
  • the body wearing portion 962 is configured to have a general wrist size, the wrist is placed between the curved portions 962a and 962b and held in a bracelet so that the user's arm can be attached.
  • a mounting member 960 can be attached.
  • the apparatus main body 511 is attached to a finger or an arm, it is easy to be interlocked with the movement of the hand while realizing a configuration that can be operated without being gripped by the hand.
  • the configuration of the opposing wall portion, the configuration of the mounting wall portion, and the configuration of the guide portion may be the same as in the fifth embodiment or the sixth embodiment. .
  • the mounting member 560 (FIG. 55, etc.) of the fourth embodiment and the mounting member 960 (FIGS. 61, 62, etc.) of the seventh embodiment can be used. .
  • the configuration of the apparatus main body 511 is the same as that of the fourth embodiment. Even in this configuration, the apparatus main body 511 also captures an image of the information code imaged by the imaging unit 23 that images the information code and the imaging unit 23.
  • a processing unit for processing, and a case 512 for holding the imaging unit 23 and the processing unit are provided.
  • Each attachment member includes a body mounting portion and an attachment portion to which the case 512 is attached and detached, and is configured as a separate body from the case 512.
  • attachment members 560 and 960 can be attached to the user, and the case 12 is connected to the attached attachment member regardless of which attachment member is attached to the user. It is possible.
  • the attachment member 560 and the attachment member 960 may be used alternatively, and both the attachment members 560 and 960 are attached, and the case 512 is attached to one of the attachment members. Also good.
  • any one of a plurality of types of attachment members 560 prepared in advance can be selected and used, and can be mounted at an appropriate position in accordance with the use situation.
  • the case side can be used in common, so there is no need to prepare a case-side structure for each type of mounting member 560, reducing the number of parts and cost. It becomes easy to reduce.
  • the type of the attachment portion to which the case 512 is connected may be determined.
  • the mounting member 560 is configured such that a protrusion is provided at the position of the alternate long and short dash line A shown in FIG. 55, and the protrusion is also provided at the position of the alternate long and short dash line B shown in FIG.
  • the first hole and the second hole may be formed so as to correspond to the position A and the position B, respectively.
  • the protrusion formed at the position A is configured to be inserted into the first hole formed in the case 512
  • the mounting member 960 When the case 512 is attached, the protrusion formed at the position B may be inserted into the second hole formed in the case 512.
  • the above-described sensor and the control circuit correspond to an example of a determination unit.
  • the apparatus main body 511 may perform a corresponding process according to the type determined by the determination unit. For example, when the determination unit detects that the case 512 is attached to the attachment member 560, the reading mode is set to the first mode, and the determination unit determines that the case 12 is attached to the attachment member 960. If detected, the mode can be switched so that the reading mode is the second mode.
  • the first mode when worn on the ear an auto sense mode may be employed in which imaging processing is continuously performed and reading processing is automatically performed every time an information code is captured.
  • the second mode when worn on a finger or an arm may be a mode in which a reading process is performed each time the operation switch 42 is pressed.
  • the control circuit 40 corresponds to an example of a response processing unit, and functions to perform response processing according to the type determined by the determination unit.
  • the method of determining the type of the attachment member connected to the case 512 is not limited to this method.
  • the user may be able to input information on the type of attachment member into the case 512.
  • each attachment member may be provided with a communication means so that a signal specifying its type can be transmitted from each attachment member to the case 512 side.
  • the fourth embodiment only the configuration of the attachment member 560 (specifically, the configuration of the base portion 1065 that connects the attachment portion 566 and the body mounting portion 562 (configuration of the displacement adjustment portion 1064)) is the fourth embodiment. Otherwise, the rest is the same as in the fourth embodiment. Accordingly, the rest of the description is the same as that of the fourth embodiment, and a detailed description thereof is omitted.
  • the displacement adjusting unit 1064 used in the eighth embodiment is configured as a ball joint that connects the body mounting unit 562 side and the mounting unit 566 side with a spherical pair structure.
  • the orientation of the mounting portion 566 relative to the base portion 1065 can be changed three-dimensionally by connecting the base portion 1065 and the mounting portion 566 with a spherical pair structure.
  • the configuration of the opposing wall portion, the configuration of the mounting wall portion, and the configuration of the guide portion may be the same as in the fifth embodiment or the sixth embodiment.
  • the structure of the base portion of the eighth embodiment may be applied to the seventh embodiment or a modification of the seventh embodiment.
  • the attachment member 60 is the same as that of the first embodiment.
  • the electrical configuration in the apparatus main body 1111 is the same as that in the first embodiment, and the imaging unit 23 that images the information code, and the control circuit 40 that processes the image of the information code captured by the imaging unit 23. (Processing unit) is provided.
  • the imaging unit 23 and the processing unit are accommodated in the case 1112 and integrated.
  • the mounting member 560 has the same configuration as that of the first embodiment, is configured as a separate body from the case 1112, and includes a body mounting portion 562, a base portion 565, and a mounting portion 66 that are the same as those in FIG. .
  • the imaging unit 23 is configured to be rotatable about a rotation axis C1 in a predetermined direction intersecting the plane direction of the light receiving surface of the imaging unit 23, and the imaging unit 23 can be switched to at least two rotational positions.
  • a rotation mechanism 1120 is provided. In the example of FIG. 64, a part on the front end side (rotating portion 1112b) of the case 1112 can be switched between the solid line position and the two-dot chain line position of FIG. 64.
  • a wide visual field range AR2 is set in the direction.
  • the rotation axis C1 is an axis in the front-rear direction, and is, for example, the direction of the optical axis that is the center of the visual field range.
  • the external shape of the rotation part 1112b is notionally shown with the dashed-dotted line, and the internal structure of the rotation part 1112 is shown as the continuous line.
  • the imaging unit 23 is configured to be rotatable around a rotation axis C1 in a predetermined direction intersecting the plane direction of the light receiving surface of the imaging unit 23, and the imaging unit 23 can be switched to at least two rotational positions.
  • a mechanism 1120 is included. In this configuration, the orientation of the imaging unit 23 can be easily changed to a more appropriate orientation in accordance with the wearing state on the body.
  • control method by the control circuit is different from the modified example of the seventh embodiment, and other than that is the same as the modified example of the seventh embodiment.
  • the configuration of the apparatus main body 511 is the same as that of the fourth embodiment. Even in this configuration, the apparatus main body 511 also captures an image of the information code imaged by the imaging unit 23 that images the information code and the imaging unit 23. A processing unit for processing, and a case 512 for holding the imaging unit 23 and the processing unit are provided. And the attachment member 560 (FIG. 55 etc.) of 4th Embodiment and the attachment member 960 (FIG. 61, FIG. 62 etc.) of 7th Embodiment can be used for an attachment member. Each attachment member includes a body mounting portion and an attachment portion to which the case 512 is attached and detached, and is configured as a separate body from the case 512.
  • attachment members 560 and 960 can be attached to the user, and the case 512 is connected to the attached attachment member regardless of which attachment member is attached to the user. It is possible.
  • the attachment member 560 and the attachment member 960 may be used alternatively, and both the attachment members 560 and 960 are attached, and the case 512 is attached to one of the attachment members. Also good.
  • the attachment position of the case 512 can be detected by the detection unit, and the range corresponding to the detection result of the detection unit is selected from the image captured by the imaging unit 23.
  • the case 512 is connected to any one of the plurality of types of attachment members 560 and 960, the attachment portion to which the case 512 is connected is shown.
  • the type is determined, and the determination unit (the sensor for detecting the type of the attachment member and the control circuit 40) used in the modified example of the seventh embodiment corresponds to an example of the detection unit.
  • the vertically long range B2 is selected from the range B1 of all captured images and used for image processing as shown in FIG.
  • a horizontally long range B3 is selected from the range B1 of all captured images and used for image processing. Good.
  • the control circuit 40 corresponds to an example of a selection unit, and functions to select a range corresponding to the detection result of the detection unit from the image captured by the light receiving sensor 23 (imaging unit).
  • control method by the control circuit is different from the modified example of the seventh embodiment, and other than that is the same as the modified example of the seventh embodiment.
  • the configuration of the apparatus main body 511 is the same as that of the fourth embodiment. Even in this configuration, the apparatus main body 511 also captures an image of the information code captured by the imaging unit 23 that images the information code and the imaging unit 23. A processing unit for processing, and a case 512 for holding the imaging unit 23 and the processing unit are provided. And the attachment member 560 (FIG. 55 etc.) of 4th Embodiment and the attachment member 960 (FIG. 61, FIG. 62 etc.) of 7th Embodiment can be used for an attachment member. Each attachment member includes a body mounting portion and an attachment portion to which the case 512 is attached and detached, and is configured as a separate body from the case 512.
  • attachment members 560 and 960 can be attached to the user, and the case 512 is connected to the attached attachment member regardless of which attachment member is attached to the user. It is possible.
  • the attachment member 560 and the attachment member 960 may be used alternatively, and both the attachment members 560 and 960 are attached, and the case 512 is attached to one of the attachment members. Also good.
  • the control circuit 40 is configured to transmit information specifying the type to the external device HST when the type of the mounting member to which the case 512 is mounted is determined. For example, when the attachment member 560 is of type 1 and the attachment member 960 is of type 2, the control circuit 40 confirms that the case 512 is attached to the attachment member 560, and if the attachment member 560 is of the type 1, Send information. At this time, the external device HST transmits a program corresponding to type 1 to the device main body 511. In addition, when the control circuit 40 confirms that the case 512 is attached to the attachment member 960, the control circuit 40 transmits type 2 information to the external device HST. At this time, the external apparatus HST transmits a program corresponding to type 2 to the apparatus main body 11.
  • control circuit 40 and the communication interface 48 correspond to an example of a transmission control unit, and function to transmit information on the mounting position of the case 512 detected by the detection unit to an external device.
  • control circuit 40 and the communication interface 48 transmit information about the attachment position of the case 12 to the external device HST by the transmission control unit according to an example of a receiving unit, the attachment position of the case 12 is transmitted from the external device HST. It functions to receive response information corresponding to this information.
  • control circuit 40 is illustrated as an example of the processing unit, and the configuration of decoding the code image of the information code as the processing of the image of the information code 100 captured by the imaging unit 23 is illustrated.
  • the processing of the image of the information code 100 captured by the image 23 is not limited to this.
  • the processing may be such that the image data of the information code 100 imaged by the imaging unit 23 is transmitted to the external device HST.
  • the image data may be decoded by an external device HST (host device or the like).
  • the body wearing part configured to be hung on both ears is exemplified, but the body wearing part may be configured to be hung on either ear.
  • the body wearing part attached to the user's ear, finger, arm or the like is exemplified, but the body wearing part may be configured as a band member attached to the user's head.
  • the body wearing part may be configured as a band member having a structure such as a bee shape, a hair band shape, or a headband shape.
  • the attachment member of the fourth embodiment, the attachment member of the seventh embodiment, and the attachment member of this configuration are used as candidates for use.
  • a member may be selected and used.
  • the apparatus main body may be configured to be attached to any of these three types.
  • the attachment member having the body attachment portion configured to be hung or wound on the user's ear, finger, arm, head, etc. has been exemplified. , Gloves, clothes) or the like.
  • an opposing wall part You may be comprised so that adjustment of the displacement of the imaging part 23 on the basis of 512a is possible.
  • a portable information code reader 10B according to the twelfth embodiment (hereinafter also simply referred to as an information code reader 10B or a reader 10B) has an appearance as shown in FIG. 67, for example.
  • the reading device 10B includes an imaging unit 23 that captures an image in a predetermined imaging range AR (see FIG. 75), and a processing unit (control circuit 40 (FIG. 68)) that processes a captured image obtained by the imaging unit 23.
  • the marker light irradiation unit 50 that irradiates the marker light Mk (FIG. 68) toward the imaging range AR (see FIG. 75) of the imaging unit 23, and the illumination light Lf (FIG. 68) different from the marker light Mk (FIG. 68).
  • the illumination light source 21 which irradiates is provided. Furthermore, the case 12 that holds the marker light irradiation unit 50, the illumination light source 21, the imaging unit 23, and the like is provided integrally with the case 12 or as a separate body from the case 12, and the user's body or the user's wearing items And an attachment member 60 to be attached.
  • the information code reader 10B is configured as a code reader capable of reading the information code 100 (FIG. 68) such as a one-dimensional code or a two-dimensional code in terms of hardware.
  • An outer case of the apparatus main body 11 is constituted by the case 12 shown, and various electronic components are accommodated in the case 12.
  • the information code reader 10B mainly includes an optical system such as an illumination light source 21, a marker light irradiation unit 50, an imaging unit 23, a filter 25, and an imaging lens 27, a memory 35, and a control circuit 40. And a microcomputer (hereinafter referred to as “microcomputer”) system such as an operation switch 42 and a power system such as a power switch 41 and a battery 49. These are mounted on a printed wiring board (not shown) or housed in a case.
  • the optical system includes an illumination light source 21, an imaging unit 23, a filter 25, an imaging lens 27, a marker light irradiation unit 50, and the like, similar to the configuration of FIG.
  • the marker light irradiation unit 50 is configured by a known marker light source such as an LED or a laser light source.
  • the marker light irradiation unit 50 has, for example, a highly directional marker light Mk (see FIG. 68).
  • the marker light Mk (FIG. 68) is irradiated toward the range (imaging range AR) that can be imaged by the imaging unit 23.
  • the optical axis (center axis) of the marker light Mk irradiated by the marker light irradiation unit 50 is conceptually indicated by a one-dot chain line Mk1.
  • the imaging unit 23 is configured to capture an image of a predetermined imaging range AR set outside the case 12, as shown in FIG.
  • the microcomputer system includes an amplifier circuit 31, an A / D conversion circuit 33, a memory 35, an address generation circuit 36, a synchronization signal generation circuit 38, a control circuit 40, an operation switch 42 (42a, 42B), a microphone 43, The sound generating unit 44, the sensor unit 46, the communication unit 48, and the like are included.
  • the external device is not limited to such an example of a personal computer, and any information processing device can be used as long as it is arranged outside the information code reader 10B and can communicate with the information code reader 10B. It may be a simple configuration.
  • the communication unit 48 cooperates with the control circuit 40 and functions as a “transmission unit”. For example, after the information code 100 is decoded, after a predetermined time has elapsed, the decoded data obtained by decoding the information code 100 is “ Function to send to "external device”.
  • the electrical configuration of the information code reader 10B is basically the same as that described in FIG.
  • the mounting structure is the same as that of FIG. 49 described above, but a part of the mounting structure will be described in order to improve the overall description of the embodiment.
  • the portable information code reader 10B is mainly configured by an apparatus main body 511 and an attachment member 560.
  • the apparatus main body 511 includes an imaging unit 23 that can image the information code 100, a processing unit (control circuit 40 (FIG. 68), an imaging unit 23, and a processing unit that processes an image of the information code 100 captured by the imaging unit 23.
  • the mounting member 560 is provided as a separate body from the case 512, and is a flexible body mounting portion (mounting portion) 562 that can be bent and deformed. And a mounting portion 566 to which the case 512 is attached and detached.
  • the attachment / detachment structure between the attachment portion 566 and the case 512 may be, for example, a configuration in which the case 512 is attached by the attachment portion 566 with a fastening member such as a screw, or the like.
  • the fitting portion such as a portion may be attached by engaging with an engaged portion (for example, a fitted portion such as a recess) formed on the attachment portion 566.
  • the structure attached by the attractive force of the magnet fixed to either one of the case 512 or the attaching part 566 and the magnetic body (metal member or magnet) fixed to the other may be sufficient.
  • an example in which the case 512 and the mounting member 560 are configured as separate bodies is shown, but the case 512 and the mounting member 560 may be connected to each other, and may be integrally formed, for example.
  • the apparatus main body 511 shown in FIG. 67 and the like has various electronic components shown in FIG. 68 housed inside the case 512, and can be attached to the attachment member 560 as shown in FIG. Further, it can be removed from the mounting member 560.
  • the case 512 that forms the outer shell of the apparatus main body 511 is formed in a longitudinal and box shape as a whole.
  • the front-rear direction, the width direction (lateral direction), and the up-down direction of the apparatus main body 511 are defined as follows.
  • the center direction of the field of view of the imaging unit 23 (the direction of the optical axis G shown in FIG. 75) is the front-rear direction
  • the longitudinal direction of the case 512 is the front-rear direction.
  • the thickness direction of the case 512 is the width direction (lateral direction) in the direction orthogonal to the front-rear direction.
  • the direction orthogonal to the said front-back direction and the width direction is the up-down direction.
  • the case 512 is provided with a front wall portion 513c at the front end portion and a rear wall portion 513d at the rear end portion. Further, a side wall portion is provided on one side (the mounting member 560 side) in the width direction (left and right direction), and a side wall portion 513a is provided on the opposite side.
  • the front wall 513c provided at the front end of the case 512 is provided with a reading port 514 through which light from the information code can be introduced.
  • the mounting member 560 has a structure that can be hung on both ears of the user P at the time of use, for example.
  • the case 512 is disposed in the lateral position of the face Fa of the user P and the reading port 514 is provided. It is the structure which attaches the said case 512 to the user's P ear Ey by the structure which faces the user's P front side.
  • the case 512 is attached by the attachment member 560 so that the imaging unit 23 faces the same side as the side where the face Fa of the user P faces.
  • the upper wall 513e of the case 512 is provided with operation switches 42 (42a, 42b) capable of external operation (for example, pressing operation from the upper side to the lower side).
  • operation switches 42 42a, 42b
  • an illumination light source 21 that emits illumination light and a marker light irradiation unit 50 that emits marker light are provided inside the case 512, and the illumination light Lf and marker light from the illumination light source 21 are provided. Any of the marker lights Mk from the irradiation unit 50 is irradiated to the front side of the case 512 from the front wall portion 513c.
  • the mounting member 560 includes a flexible body mounting portion 562 that can be bent and deformed, a mounting portion 566 to which the case 512 is attached and detached, and a base portion 565 that supports the body mounting portion 562, and is separate from the case 512. It is provided as.
  • the body wearing part 562 is configured as an ear hooking part that is hung on both ears of the user P, and as shown in FIG. 67, the body wearing part 562 is maintained in a predetermined shape in a natural state when worn. And is configured to be elastically deformable.
  • the base part 565 and the attachment part 566 are also the same as the structure shown in FIG.
  • the reading process shown in FIG. 70 is executed by the control circuit 40 when a predetermined start condition is satisfied (for example, when the power is turned on or when a predetermined pressing operation is performed on the operation switch 42). During the reading process of FIG. 70, the information code reading process can be continuously performed.
  • Reference symbol S indicates a step.
  • the marker light irradiation unit 50 is first operated to emit the marker light Mk (S1).
  • the illumination light source 21 is not operated and the illumination light Lf is not irradiated.
  • the illumination light Lf is not irradiated until the irradiation of the illumination light Lf is started in S13.
  • the shutter speed in the image pickup unit 23 is set to a first shutter speed that is relatively slower (longer) than a second shutter speed described later (S2). That is, in S2, the setting of the exposure time when imaging by the imaging unit 23 is set longer than the exposure time set in S12 described later. Then, the imaging range is imaged by the imaging unit 23 with the shutter speed of the imaging unit 23 set to the first shutter speed in this way (S3). Thereby, a captured image (first captured image) by the imaging unit 23 in a state where the first shutter speed is set is generated.
  • the “feature detection area” in the captured image (first captured image) obtained in S3 is calculated.
  • the captured image (first captured image) obtained in S3 is analyzed, and the marker light Mk is extracted from the first captured image. What is necessary is just to specify the irradiation area ARm. Then, the marker light irradiation area ARm may be set as a “feature detection area”. Specifically, for example, in the first captured image, a region (region ARm) having a light reception amount equal to or greater than a predetermined value is detected, and a rectangular region or a circular region including all the region ARm is defined as a marker light irradiation region. do it.
  • a region having a predetermined shape is detected from the captured image (first captured image) obtained in S3, and the region is detected. It is good also as an irradiation area of marker light.
  • the memory 35 is made to function as a position data storage unit, and position data indicating the position of the irradiation area of the marker light Mk in the captured image obtained by the imaging unit 23 is stored. You may make it leave.
  • the position data includes, for example, center data indicating the center position of the irradiation area of the marker light Mk and size data indicating the size centered on the center position. For example, as shown in FIG.
  • the irradiation direction (the direction of the central axis (optical axis) Mk1) of the marker light Mk by the marker light irradiation unit 50 is substantially parallel to the central axis (optical axis G) of the imaging range AR1, and
  • the center position of the irradiation area by the marker light Mk is substantially the center pixel of the captured image.
  • the coordinate data of the central pixel in the captured image generated by the imaging unit 23 is used as the central data, and the diameter of the irradiation spot (the diameter of the marker light) assumed in advance with the marker light Mk. )
  • the marker light irradiation region for example, the center of the irradiation region
  • the captured image first captured image
  • control circuit 40 corresponding to the detection unit uses the captured image (first captured image) obtained in S3 based on the position data stored in the memory 35 (position data storage unit) by the process of S4. It functions to specify the position of the irradiation area of the marker light Mk, and in the process of S5, it functions to detect a feature pattern from the irradiation area ARm in the first captured image.
  • the marker light irradiation unit 50 may irradiate the marker light Mk along the central axis G of the imaging range AR by the imaging unit 23.
  • the position data may not be stored in the memory 35.
  • the control circuit 40 corresponding to the detection section
  • a predetermined central region for example, a position specified by the center of the irradiation region and the diameter of the irradiation region described above
  • feature detection a feature pattern including the central portion of the captured image (first captured image) obtained in S3
  • area a feature pattern may be detected from the “feature detection area” specified in this way.
  • the feature pattern is detected from the “feature detection area” specified in S4.
  • the information code 100 to be read is a known QR code (registered trademark) as shown in FIG. 71
  • the position detection pattern (cutout symbol) FP included in the QR code is expressed as “feature pattern”. ”Is detected by a known detection method. Specifically, for example, scanning is performed in a predetermined direction at a plurality of positions in the “feature detection area” specified in S4, and each region width is 1: in a region where light cells and dark cells are alternately arranged. A region of 1: 3: 1: 1 is detected.
  • the light color cell is a cell having a relatively higher lightness than the dark color cell, and is white when the dark color cell is black, for example.
  • a dark cell is a cell of a color having a lightness relatively lower than that of a light cell, and is, for example, black when the light cell is white.
  • International standard ISO / IEC 18004, second edition 2006-09-01, page 109, Annex M,“ M1 ” Symbol contrast ” etc.
  • the feature pattern detected in S5 is not limited to the feature pattern as shown in FIG.
  • a plurality of types of feature patterns to be detected in S5 may be assumed.
  • a part of the arrangement of the light color bar Ws (space) and dark color bar Bs (bar) of the barcode as shown in FIG. It may be a “feature pattern”.
  • FIG. 73 when a part of the barcode (information code 100) located in the marker light irradiation area ARm is tried to be decoded by a known method, and a part of the barcode can be decoded
  • the process may proceed to Yes in S6.
  • the process may proceed to Yes in S6, or when at least a predetermined character can be decoded, the process may proceed to Yes in S6. Good.
  • FIG. 71 the example which irradiates marker light is shown so that the rectangular marker light irradiation area
  • region ARm may be comprised.
  • the marker light may be irradiated so that a linear marker light irradiation area ARm is formed as shown in FIG.
  • examples of the marker light irradiation area ARm are not limited to these, and for example, various configurations as shown in FIG. 74 can be adopted.
  • the process proceeds to Yes in S6, and the feature detection count is incremented by one.
  • the value of the number of feature detections counted up in S8 is set (initialized) to 0 immediately after execution of the process of S1, for example, and is incremented every time the process of S8 is performed. It has become.
  • S8 it is determined whether or not the number of feature detections has reached a specified number of times (for example, 3 times) (S9), and when the number of feature detections counted up in S8 has reached the specified number of times. Advances to Yes in S9.
  • the illumination light source 21 is operated to start illumination light irradiation (S11), and the shutter speed at the imaging unit 23 is relatively faster (shorter) than the first shutter speed set at S2.
  • the shutter speed is set (S12). That is, in S12, the exposure time when capturing with the imaging unit 23 is set shorter than the exposure time set in S2. Then, the operation of the marker light irradiation unit 50 is stopped and the marker light is turned off (S13).
  • control circuit 40 corresponds to an example of the light source control unit, and the first control (control of S1 to S10) for driving the marker light irradiation unit 50 without driving the illumination light source 21 and the illumination light source 21.
  • Control for switching to the second control (control of S11 to S19) for driving is performed.
  • the control circuit 40 corresponding to the detection unit detects a feature pattern from the captured image (first captured image) acquired in S3
  • the first control is performed on the marker light irradiation unit 50 and the illumination light source 21.
  • the second control controls the second control.
  • the imaging unit 23 performs the captured image (first captured image) by the process of S3 in a state in which the marker light is irradiated according to the first control by the light source control unit until the process proceeds to Yes in S9.
  • the control circuit 40 corresponding to the light source control unit detects the feature pattern continuously for a predetermined number of times by the detection unit in the plurality of first captured images (that is, In the case of advancing to Yes in S9), the first control is switched to the second control.
  • a timeout time T is set (S14), and time measurement up to this time T is started. Then, it is determined whether or not the measurement time started in S14 has passed the timeout time T. If the time after the processing in S14 has passed the timeout time T, the imaging range is set by the imaging unit 23. An image is taken (S16). As a result, a captured image (second captured image) by the imaging unit 23 in a state where the second shutter speed is set is generated. Then, the information code included in the second captured image obtained in S16 is decoded by a known method (S17).
  • the information code included in the vicinity of the feature detection area stored in S10 (for example, a region within a certain range from the center of the feature detection area stored in S10 in the second captured image obtained in S16). Is decoded by a known method. If the decoding is successful in S17, the process proceeds to Yes in S18, and the data decrypted in S17 (data recorded in the information code 100) is transmitted to an external device (for example, the host computer HST in FIG. 68). (S19). After S19, the illumination light source 21 is stopped, the illumination is turned off (S20), and the process returns to S1 again. On the other hand, if the decoding fails in S17, the process proceeds to No in S18. In this process, until the time-out time T elapses from S14, the process after S16 is repeated every time the process proceeds to No in S18.
  • the control circuit 40 that performs the processes of S2 and S12 corresponds to an example of a setting unit, and when a feature pattern is detected by the detection unit (specifically, when the process proceeds to Yes in S9), imaging is performed.
  • the shutter speed at the unit 23 functions to change the setting to a second shutter speed that is faster than the first shutter speed before the feature pattern is detected by the detection unit.
  • the process returns to S1 and the process of S2 is performed. That is, after the second captured image is processed by the processing unit, the control circuit 40 corresponding to the setting unit performs the process of S2 again, and returns the shutter speed at the imaging unit 23 to the first shutter speed again. It is like that.
  • the control circuit 40 corresponds to an example of a processing unit, and processes the second captured image obtained by the imaging unit 23 in a state where illumination light is irradiated according to the second control by the light source control unit. More specifically, after the feature pattern is detected from the first captured image at the first shutter speed by the detection unit, the imaging unit whose setting is changed to the second shutter speed by the setting unit It functions so as to process the second captured image obtained in the above.
  • the processing unit as processing of the second captured image, processing for decoding the information code included in the second captured image obtained in S16 and processing for transmitting the decoded data to the external device are performed.
  • the process for the two captured images may be a process for displaying or storing decoded data of the information code included in the second captured image. Or the process which memorize
  • the light source control unit switches between the first control for driving the marker light irradiation unit 50 without driving the illumination light source 21 and the second control for driving the illumination light source 21. Until the feature pattern is detected, detection of the feature pattern is attempted using the first captured image obtained in the state where the marker light is irradiated. After the feature pattern is detected, the illumination light source 21 is driven to obtain the feature pattern. The information code is processed by the second captured image.
  • the illumination light source 21 is driven to capture the second captured image, the information code intended by the user can be selectively decoded, and the illumination light source 21 is always driven. Compared to a configuration that attempts to decode the information code, it is easier to prevent unintentional decoding of the information code. Further, since the illumination light source 21 is driven when there is a high possibility that an information code exists in the direction in which the reading device 10B faces, power consumption can be effectively suppressed.
  • the detection unit analyzes the irradiation region of the marker light in the first captured image obtained in S3, and detects a feature pattern from the irradiation region. In this way, it is possible to more reliably detect whether or not the information code is present at the marker light irradiation destination, and more reliably read the information code existing at the marker light irradiation destination. Will be able to.
  • the second example described in the process of S4 includes a position data storage unit (memory 35) that stores position data indicating the position of the marker light irradiation region in the captured image obtained by the imaging unit 23.
  • the detection unit specifies the position of the marker light irradiation region in the first captured image based on the position data stored in the position data storage unit, and the feature pattern is determined from the marker light irradiation region in the first captured image. Is detected. In this way, when analyzing the irradiation area of the marker light in the first captured image, the position of the irradiation area of the marker light can be grasped more accurately and analyzed.
  • the position data includes center data indicating the center position of the irradiation region and size data indicating the size around the center position.
  • the marker light irradiation unit 50 is configured to irradiate the marker light Mk along the central axis G of the imaging range AR by the imaging unit 23.
  • the detection unit A feature pattern is detected from a predetermined central region including the central portion of one captured image. In this way, when analyzing the irradiation area of the marker light in the first captured image, the position of the irradiation area of the marker light can be grasped more accurately and analyzed.
  • the imaging unit 23 acquires the first captured image a plurality of times in a state in which the marker light is irradiated according to the first control by the light source control unit, and the light source control unit performs the first imaging for a plurality of times.
  • the first control is switched to the second control.
  • an unintended information code temporarily changes the imaging range by chance. In a case of crossing (for example, a case where a feature pattern is detected only once), it is easy to eliminate the decoding process for an unintended information code.
  • the marker light irradiation unit 50 has a shape including a linear shape in which the irradiation shape on a plane orthogonal to the irradiation direction of the marker light extends in a predetermined direction (FIG. 74 (D), (E)), the marker light is irradiated so as to have a substantially rectangular shape (see FIG. 74A) and a substantially circular shape (see FIGS. 74B and 74C).
  • a substantially rectangular shape see FIG. 74A
  • FIGS. 74B and 74C substantially circular shape
  • the shutter speed of the image pickup unit 23 is set to be relatively slow (long) until the feature pattern is detected, and the image is relatively easily blurred.
  • the feature pattern of the information code can be made difficult to detect, and the information code can be made difficult to read.
  • the information code desired by the user can be easily read, and the information code not desired by the user can be more reliably excluded.
  • the second captured image that is likely to contain the intended information code is captured more clearly by setting the shutter speed to be faster (shorter). This makes it easier to read the desired information code more reliably.
  • the setting unit is configured to return the shutter speed at the imaging unit to the first shutter speed again after the second captured image is processed by the processing unit.
  • the setting can be made so that unwanted information codes can be easily excluded again by returning to the first shutter speed again. That is, every time the second captured image is processed, it is possible to return to a state in which only a desired information code can be easily selected, and reading can be performed more efficiently.
  • the reading process is performed according to the flow shown in FIG.
  • the processes of S251 to S268 are the same as the processes of S1 to S18 of FIG. 70, and thus detailed description of these processes will be omitted.
  • a cancel waiting time T2 is set in S270, and time measurement is started until the elapsed time after the processing in S270 reaches time T2 (S270). Then, the operation of the illumination light source 21 is stopped and the illumination light Lf is turned off (S271). Then, it is determined whether or not the measurement time started in S270 has passed the cancellation waiting time T2 (S272), and if the elapsed time after the processing in S270 has passed the cancellation waiting time T2, S272 Proceed to Yes.
  • the decrypted data (processed data) decrypted in S267 is transferred to an external device (for example, the host computer HST in FIG. 68). Note that the processing of S267 is the same as the processing of S19 of FIG.
  • a “predetermined code reading operation by the portable information code reader 10B” can be used.
  • the process proceeds to No in S272
  • the process proceeds to Yes in S273, and is not so.
  • the process proceeds to No in S273.
  • the extinguishing process of S271 may be performed after S275 or after S274.
  • the “dedicated code” for example, an information code in which unique identification information (identification information indicating a dedicated code) is recorded may be used. Alternatively, a specific type of information code assumed as a dedicated code may be used.
  • the “predetermined canceling operation” determined in S273 it can be set as “a predetermined pressing operation on the operation switch 42”.
  • the process proceeds to No in S272
  • the process proceeds to Yes in S273, and if not, the process proceeds to S273.
  • the “predetermined pressing operation” can be, for example, a long pressing operation in which the operation switch 42 is continuously pressed for a certain period of time or an operation in which the operation switch 42 is repeatedly pressed a certain number of times.
  • the read code assumed in the third example is not limited to the information code read in the latest S267.
  • a process of deleting the decoded data of the information code may be performed in S275.
  • the decrypted data of the information code is still stored in the memory 35, it is desirable to erase the decrypted data from the memory 35.
  • a command for deleting the decrypted data of the information code may be transmitted to the external device.
  • the predetermined external operation includes an operation of pressing the operation switch 42, and an example of “read code already read by the portable information code reading device 10B” is the latest S267.
  • the information code decrypted by the above process is listed.
  • such an information code (information code read in the latest S267) is read with the operation switch 42 pressed. If so, the decrypted data of the information code is erased in S275.
  • the assumed read code is not limited to the information code read in the latest S267.
  • the reading device 10B before the latest S267 is read again with the pressing of the operation switch 42, a process of deleting the decoded data of the information code is performed in S275. Good.
  • the decrypted data of the information code is still stored in the memory 35, it is desirable to erase the decrypted data from the memory 35. If the decrypted data of the information code has already been transmitted to an external device (such as the host computer HST in FIG. 68), a command for deleting the decrypted data of the information code is transmitted to the external device. May be.
  • an “operation for continuously capturing the information code by the image capturing unit for a predetermined time or longer” may be used.
  • the process proceeds to No in S272
  • the process proceeds to Yes in S273.
  • the process proceeds to No in S273.
  • the information code assumed in the fifth example may be a dedicated code as in the first example, or may be a read code as in the third example or the fourth example.
  • a read code if it is determined that there has been an “operation to continue imaging the read code for a predetermined time or longer by the imaging unit 23”, the process proceeds to Yes in S273 and the read code is decoded.
  • a process of deleting data may be performed. For example, when the read code is an information code decoded in the latest processing of S267, such information code is continuously captured for a predetermined time after the processing of S271 until the cancellation waiting time T2 elapses. If the process is continued, the decrypted data of this information code may be deleted in S275.
  • the read code is an information code read by the reading device 10B before the latest S267, and such read code is read again after the processing of S270, the information code of the information code is read in S275. You may make it perform the process which erases decoding data. Also in this case, when the decrypted data of the information code is still stored in the memory 35, it is desirable to erase the decrypted data from the memory 35. In addition, when the decrypted data of the information code has already been transmitted to the external device, a command for deleting the decrypted data of the information code may be transmitted to the external device.
  • the control circuit 40 corresponding to the processing unit functions as a decoding unit that decodes the captured image obtained by the imaging unit 23, and further decodes until a certain time elapses after decoding the captured image. It also functions as a transmission unit that stops transmission of the decrypted data obtained by the unit and transmits the decrypted data to an external device provided outside the portable information code reader after a lapse of a certain time. Then, the control circuit 40 corresponding to the corresponding unit erases the decrypted data when a predetermined instruction operation is performed on the portable information code reader 10B after a certain time has elapsed after the captured image is decrypted. Processing is performed, and the transmission unit is configured not to perform processing for transmitting the decrypted data to the external device when the decrypted data is erased by the corresponding unit.
  • the memory 35 (setting data storage unit) that stores the value of the “certain time” (cancellation waiting time T2 in S270)
  • the control circuit 40 corresponding to the transmission unit includes the memory 35 (setting data setting unit).
  • the control circuit 40 corresponding to the transmission unit includes the memory 35 (setting data setting unit).
  • transmission of decrypted data (data decrypted in S267) in S272 and S273 is stopped for a certain time (cancellation waiting time T2).
  • stored in the memory 35 (setting data storage part) can be changed.
  • the value of a predetermined time (cancellation waiting time T2) can be updated by an operation on the operation switch 42 or data input from the outside.
  • the user can arbitrarily set and change the cancellation waiting time T2 (fixed time) that can be canceled in the apparatus, and the convenience is further improved.
  • the control circuit 40 corresponding to the corresponding unit performs cancel control. Yes.
  • the user can cancel the existing processing data by performing a simple operation of reading the dedicated code by the portable information code reader 10B.
  • cancellation can be performed by the same response (code reading operation) as in normal reading, cancellation using a characteristic hands-free configuration is possible.
  • the control circuit 40 corresponding to the corresponding unit performs the cancel control. According to this configuration, the user can cancel the existing processing data by performing a simple operation of operating the operation switch 42.
  • the processing unit An erasure process for erasing the processed data of the processed read code is performed.
  • the user can cancel the existing processing data by performing a simple operation of reading the read code with the portable information code reader 10B.
  • cancellation can be performed by the same response (code reading operation) as in normal reading, cancellation using a characteristic hands-free configuration is possible.
  • the processing data to be canceled can be specifically designated and cancelled, unnecessary data can be reliably selected and canceled when there are a plurality of processing data.
  • the read code that has been read by the portable information code reader 10B while the predetermined external operation is performed on the operation switch 42 is again the portable information.
  • an erasing process for erasing the processed data of the processed read code is performed.
  • unnecessary data can be reliably selected and canceled.
  • the operation of the operation switch is set as a cancellation condition, it is easy to prevent erroneous processing data that is not desired to be canceled.
  • the portable information code reader according to the fourteenth embodiment is the same as the thirteenth embodiment except for “predetermined cancel operation”, and the reading process is performed in the flow as shown in FIG. Further, the processing is the same as that of the twelfth and thirteenth embodiments except for the reading process of FIG.
  • the “predetermined cancel operation” to be determined in S273 is “the captured image of the information code decrypted in S267 (the captured image captured in S266 (second captured image))”. “Operation in which the information code is imaged by the imaging unit 23 in a direction rotated from a direction by a predetermined angle or more (for example, 90 ° or more)”.
  • the attitude of the information code (second imaging attitude) in the captured image (third captured image) can be specified by the positions of the three position detection patterns FP. Then, by comparing these images, it is possible to determine whether or not “an operation for imaging the information code by the imaging unit 23 in a direction rotated by a predetermined angle or more (for example, 90 ° or more)” has been performed. .
  • the control circuit 40 that performs the processing of FIG. 76 corresponds to an example of a corresponding unit, and an information code included in a captured image obtained by the imaging unit 23 (second captured image obtained in S266) is a predetermined value.
  • the processing data decrypted data decoded in S267) is generated by the processing unit when it is in the first imaging posture, the second imaging in which the orientation differs from the first imaging posture by a predetermined angle or more by the imaging unit 23 thereafter.
  • the cancel control for the processing data for example, the deletion of the decoded data obtained by decoding the information code from the memory 35 or the command for deleting the decoded data obtained by decoding the information code For example, processing to transmit to the apparatus).
  • the user can cancel the existing processing data by performing a simple operation of reading the information code by the portable information code reader 10B.
  • cancellation can be performed by the same response (code reading operation) as in normal reading, cancellation using a characteristic hands-free configuration is possible.
  • cancel control is performed when the processing unit reads the image in a second imaging posture different from the processing target posture (first imaging posture), the user cancels with a simple change “change the reading posture”. Is possible.
  • the concept of the fourteenth embodiment is not limited to the reading process as shown in FIG. 76, but is limited to the case where the information code is decoded in the flow of S251 to S268 in FIG. Absent.
  • the present invention can be similarly applied when information codes are read in the order as shown in FIG.
  • an operation for reading the information code is performed by the reading device 10B as in S301 (S301). Thereafter, if it is not necessary to cancel the decoded data of the information code, the operator does not need to perform a special operation. On the other hand, if it is desired to cancel the decoded data of the information code after the operation of S301, the operator reads the information code in S301 while maintaining the information code in the imaging range of the imaging unit 23 from the time of reading in S301. The information code is rotated by 90 ° or more from the imaging posture (first imaging posture) of the current information code (S302). Then, the information code thus rotated is read by the reading device 10B (S303). Thereafter, in S304, a cancel command is executed by the reading apparatus 10B (S304).
  • the control circuit 40 maintains the information code within the imaging range of the imaging unit 23 from the time of reading. It is determined whether or not an image of the imaging posture (second imaging posture) rotated 90 ° or more from the imaging posture (first imaging posture) of the information code at the time of reading is obtained.
  • an image having an imaging posture (second imaging posture) rotated by 90 ° or more from the imaging posture (first imaging posture) of the information code at the time of reading is obtained, the decoding data of the information code is read by the reading device 10B.
  • a command for instructing the external device to erase the decrypted data of the information code may be transmitted.
  • the portable information code reader according to the fifteenth embodiment is the same as that of the thirteenth embodiment except for the “predetermined cancel operation”, and the reading process is performed according to the flow shown in FIG. Further, except for the reading process of FIG. 76, this embodiment is the same as the twelfth and thirteenth embodiments.
  • the “predetermined cancel operation” to be determined in S273 is “determination of the information code processed by the processing unit from the imaging range AR (FIG. 75) of the imaging unit 23 and within a certain period of time after the removal. “For example, an operation for entering the information code into the imaging range AR (FIG. 75) within a predetermined time shorter than the above-described cancel waiting time T2”.
  • the process proceeds to No in S272
  • the information code processed by the processing unit is removed from the imaging range AR (FIG. 75) of the imaging unit 23 and removed. If it is determined that there has been an “operation for causing the information code to enter the imaging range within a certain period of time”, the process proceeds to Yes in S273, and if not, the process proceeds to No in S273.
  • the control circuit 40 corresponds to an example of a corresponding unit, and the information code processed by the processing unit (the information code decoded in S267) does not exist in the imaging range AR (FIG. 75) of the imaging unit 23.
  • the information code enters the imaging range AR (FIG. 75) within a certain period of time after it no longer exists, cancel control for the processing data (information code decoded in S267) (for example, decoding by decoding the information code)
  • the data is deleted from the memory 35, or a process for transmitting a command for deleting the decoded data obtained by decoding the information code to an external device).
  • the user can cancel the existing processing data by performing a simple operation of once removing the processed information code from the imaging range and reentering the imaging range within a predetermined time. It becomes like this.
  • cancellation can be performed by the same response (code reading operation) as in normal reading, cancellation using a characteristic hands-free configuration is possible.
  • the idea of the fifteenth embodiment is not limited to the reading process as shown in FIG. 76, but is limited to the case where the information code is decoded in the flow of S251 to S268 in FIG. Absent.
  • the present invention can be similarly applied when information codes are read in the order as shown in FIG.
  • the operator performs an operation of reading the information code by the reading device 10B as in S401 (S301). Thereafter, if it is not necessary to cancel the decoded data of the information code, the operator does not need to perform a special operation. On the other hand, if it is desired to cancel the decoded data of the information code after the operation of S401, the operator removes the information code from the reading field of view (imaging range by the imaging unit 23) and then reads the reading field (imaging again). It is only necessary to perform an operation of returning the information code to within the imaging range by the unit 23 (S402) and cause the reading device 10B to read the information code.
  • the reader 10B reads the information code read in S401 if the time outside the imaging range is within a predetermined time. Cancel the decrypted data. On the other hand, if the time outside the imaging range exceeds a certain time, the decoded data of the information code read in S403 is stored in the memory 35 as new data.
  • the control circuit 40 removes the information code from the imaging range of the imaging unit 23 and is constant after being removed. It is determined whether or not the information code has entered the imaging range of the imaging unit 23 again in time.
  • the decoded data of the information code Are deleted from the reading device 10B. Further, when the decrypted data of the information code has already been transmitted to the external device, a command for instructing the external device to erase the decrypted data of the information code may be transmitted.
  • the portable information code reader according to the sixteenth embodiment is the same as that of the thirteenth embodiment except for the “predetermined cancel operation”, and the reading process is performed according to the flow shown in FIG. Further, except for the reading process of FIG. 76, this embodiment is the same as the twelfth and thirteenth embodiments.
  • the “predetermined cancel operation” to be determined in S273 is “an operation in which a plurality of information codes are simultaneously imaged by the imaging unit”. In such a configuration, when the process proceeds to No in S272, if it is determined that there has been an “operation for simultaneously imaging a plurality of information codes by the imaging unit”, the process proceeds to Yes in S273, and otherwise Will proceed to No in S273.
  • the control circuit 40 that performs the process of FIG. 76 corresponds to an example of a corresponding unit.
  • the processing data decoded data obtained in S267)
  • the imaging unit 23 generates a plurality of information codes.
  • the cancel control is performed on the processing data (decoded data obtained in S267).
  • the user can cancel the existing processing data by performing a simple operation of reading a plurality of information codes by the portable information code reader 10B.
  • cancellation can be performed by the same response (code reading operation) as in normal reading, cancellation using a characteristic hands-free configuration is possible.
  • reading at the time of cancellation can be distinguished from normal reading by a simple response of simultaneously imaging a plurality of information codes.
  • the portable information code may be such that when a plurality of information codes are simultaneously imaged by the reading device and the plurality of information codes are read, cancel control is performed on the processing data corresponding to the plurality of information codes. According to this configuration, it is possible to reliably specify a plurality of processing data desired to be canceled and cancel them all at once, so that the convenience is very high.
  • any idea of the sixteenth embodiment is not limited to the reading process as shown in FIG. 76, but is limited to the case where the information code is decoded in the flow like S251 to S268 in FIG. It is not a thing.
  • the present invention can be similarly applied when information codes are read in the order as shown in FIG.
  • FIG. 79 schematically illustrates the order of the cancel operation in the case where already decoded data is stored in the reader 10B.
  • the operator Arranges a plurality of information codes within the imaging range of the imaging unit 23 (S501), and causes the reader 10B to read the plurality of information codes (S502). Thereafter, a cancel command is executed in the reading device 10B (S503).
  • the control circuit 40 determines whether or not images of a plurality of information codes are obtained after the information code is read. When images of a plurality of information codes are obtained, the latest decoded data of the information code or the decoded data of the plurality of information codes is erased from the reading device 10B. Further, a condition is added, and after the information code is read, the control circuit 40 determines whether or not a plurality of information code images are obtained in a predetermined arrangement. When the data is obtained in a predetermined arrangement, the decoded data of the latest information code or the decoded data of the plurality of information codes may be erased from the reading device 10B.
  • control circuit 40 is illustrated as an example of the processing unit, and the configuration of decoding the code image of the information code as the processing of the image of the information code 100 captured by the imaging unit 23 is illustrated.
  • the processing of the image of the information code 100 captured by the image 23 is not limited to this.
  • the processing may be such that the image data of the information code 100 imaged by the imaging unit 23 is transmitted to the external device HST.
  • the image data may be decoded by an external device HST (host device or the like).
  • the case 12 is attached to the body, and the reader 10B can communicate with an external device that is not attached to the body.
  • the reader 12B may be communicable with the external device attached to the body.
  • the body wearing part configured to be hung on both ears is exemplified, but the body wearing part may be configured to be hung on either ear.
  • the body wearing part attached to the user's ear, finger, arm or the like is exemplified, but the body wearing part may be configured as a band member attached to the user's head.
  • the body wearing part may be configured as a band member having a structure such as a bee shape, a hair band shape, or a headband shape.
  • the attachment member having the body attachment portion configured to be hung or wound on the user's ear, finger, arm, head, etc. has been exemplified. , Gloves, clothes) or the like.
  • cancel control an example of erasing the immediately previous processing data (decoded data) is shown, but the present invention is not limited to such an example.
  • the past processing data (decoded data) stored in the reading device 10B may be erased all at once.
  • a command may be issued to the external device so as to erase the past processing data (decoded data) transmitted to.
  • the information code (information code decoded in S267) is read within a certain time (viewing range AR (FIG. 75)). If the operation for reading the information code again is performed at least once, it is recognized as a cancel command. In such a case, the decrypted data of the information code (the information code decrypted in S267) is deleted.
  • the example which performs such cancellation control was shown, it is not restricted to such an example. For example, when such an operation is repeated n times, the nth previous decoded data may be canceled from the latest decoded data. Alternatively, if the information code is removed from the reading field within a certain time and returned, and then the information code is read n times while held in the field of view, the nth previous decoding data is decoded. You may make it cancel data.
  • the process proceeds to Yes in S273, and is decoded in the latest S267.
  • the decoding data to be erased may be determined by the number of times the operation switch 42 is pressed. For example, when the pressing operation of the operation switch 42 is repeated n times, the n-th previous decoded data may be canceled from the latest decoded data.
  • any of the examples of the “predetermined cancel operation” described above can be used together, and a plurality of types of instruction operations are defined as predetermined instruction operations for the portable information code reader 10B.
  • a cancel command (deletion of the latest decrypted data, erase of the nth previous cancel data, batch erase of the stored decrypted data, etc.) may be determined in association with.
  • one of the cancel commands (for example, deletion of the latest decoded data, deletion of the nth previous cancel data, accumulated decoded data) Any one of the above-mentioned batch erasure may be executed.
  • 2nd case side connection part (case side connection part, one side magnet) 553 ... 1st attachment member side connection part (attachment member side connection part, magnetic body) 554 ... 2nd attachment member side connection part (attachment member side connection part, magnetic body) 560, 760, 860, 960, ... attachment member 562 ... body attachment part (attachment part) 564 ... Displacement adjustment part 565, 1065 ... Base part 566 ... Mounting part 962 ... Band member (body mounting part) 751 ... 1st case side connection part (case side connection part, one side sheet material) 752 ... 2nd case side connection part (case side connection part, one side sheet material) 753 ...

Landscapes

  • Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
  • Electromagnetism (AREA)
  • Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Health & Medical Sciences (AREA)
  • General Health & Medical Sciences (AREA)
  • Toxicology (AREA)
  • Artificial Intelligence (AREA)
  • Computer Vision & Pattern Recognition (AREA)
  • General Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
  • Theoretical Computer Science (AREA)
  • Image Input (AREA)
  • Telephone Set Structure (AREA)

Abstract

A portable information code reading device (1) is provide with: an image capturing unit (23) that captures an image of an information code; a processing unit that deciphers the information code an image of which has been captured by the image capturing unit (23), a case (12) that holds the image capturing unit and processing unit; and an attachment part (60) that is provided integrally with the case (12) or separately from the case (12) in order to attach the case (12) to an ear of a user.

Description

携帯型情報コード読取装置Portable information code reader
　本発明は、携帯型情報コード読取装置に関するものである。 The present invention relates to a portable information code reader.
　従来から提供されている携帯型の情報コード読取装置は、使用者が装置を手で持って情報コードに向ける操作を行い、その情報コードを読み取るような方式のものが一般的である。しかしながら、このように手で持つことを必須とする構成では、使用者の片手が他の作業に使えなくなってしまうという問題があり、作業性を高めにくかった。 Conventionally, portable information code readers that have been provided are generally of a type in which a user holds the device with his hand and points it toward the information code and reads the information code. However, in such a configuration that it is essential to hold by hand, there is a problem that one hand of the user cannot be used for other work, and it is difficult to improve workability.
特開平８－２７２４８４号公報JP-A-8-272484 特許第３０２０９４３号広報Japanese Patent No. 3020943
　ところで、特許文献１、２には、使用者が装置を手で持たなくても情報コードを読み取ることができる構成が開示されている。例えば特許文献１で開示される携帯型トランザクション端末は、使用者の頭に嵌めるバンド１２を備え、このバンド１２から顔の前方側にアーム２２が伸びており、眼鏡状のスクリーン３４が設けられている。そして、そのスクリーン３４の上部にバーコード読取り装置２４が設けられている。また、特許文献２の図１で開示される携帯型コード読取装置では、使用者の頭にハチマキ状に取り付けられるバンド２に２次元撮像ユニット１００が固定された構成となっている。 Incidentally, Patent Documents 1 and 2 disclose a configuration in which a user can read an information code without holding the device by hand. For example, a portable transaction terminal disclosed in Patent Document 1 includes a band 12 that fits on a user's head, an arm 22 extends from the band 12 to the front side of the face, and a glasses-like screen 34 is provided. Yes. A bar code reader 24 is provided above the screen 34. Further, the portable code reader disclosed in FIG. 1 of Patent Document 2 has a configuration in which a two-dimensional imaging unit 100 is fixed to a band 2 attached to the user's head in a bee-like shape.
　しかしながら、特許文献１の構成や、特許文献２の図１のように、読取装置をバンドなどに完全に固定した上で使用者の頭にバンドなどを嵌めて取り付けるような構成では、使用者の顔が向く側を読取エリアとするように読取装置の向きをより正確に定めて装着するといった作業を迅速且つ容易に行いにくいという問題がある。 However, as shown in FIG. 1 of Patent Document 1 or FIG. 1 of Patent Document 2, the reader is completely fixed to the band and then the band is fitted on the user's head and attached. There is a problem that it is difficult to quickly and easily perform an operation of determining and mounting the reader more accurately so that the side facing the face is a reading area.
　しかしながら、特許文献１の構成は、読取装置を一旦使用者に取り付けてしまうと容易に取り外しができない構成であるため、一時的に装置を取り外して使用することが困難であった。例えば、既に装着された読取装置を取り外して使用する場合、使用者に固定される固定部分（バンドやヘッドセットなど）ごと一体的に読取装置を取り外さなければならないため、取り外し作業に手間や時間が非常にかかるものであった。 However, since the configuration of Patent Document 1 cannot be easily removed once the reading device is attached to the user, it is difficult to temporarily remove the device and use it. For example, when removing and using an already mounted reader, the reader must be removed together with the fixed part (band, headset, etc.) fixed to the user. It was very expensive.
　また、読取装置を着脱可能に構成する場合、使用者からの取り外し作業だけでなく、使用者への取り付け作業も問題となる。例えば、読取装置を手で持たずに身体に取り付けて使用するケースにおいて、事情により読取装置を一時的に身体から取り外す必要が生じた場合、その取り外した状態での使用が終わった後には、読取装置を元の位置に再装着する必要がある。しかしながら、特許文献１や特許文献２のような構成では、一旦取り外した読取装置を正しい位置に正しい姿勢で配置することが容易ではないため、装着や位置合わせに伴う負担が大きく、再装着に時間がかかることが避けられなかった。 Also, when the reader is configured to be detachable, not only the removal work from the user but also the attachment work to the user becomes a problem. For example, in the case of using the reader attached to the body without holding it by hand, if it becomes necessary to temporarily remove the reader from the body due to circumstances, after the use in the removed state is finished, The device needs to be reinstalled in its original position. However, in the configurations such as Patent Document 1 and Patent Document 2, it is not easy to place the reader once removed at the correct position in the correct posture. Was inevitable.
　また、情報コードを読み込む場合、偶然入り込んだ情報コードの解読データが残存してしまい、不要な解読データの蓄積や表示などを強いることを排除すること望ましい。また、不要なデータが蓄積されることで、例えば、物品と情報コードを紐付けて管理する場合など、情報コードの読取数と物品数がずれてしまうなどの問題も回避したい。 In addition, when reading an information code, it is desirable to eliminate the fact that the decrypted data of the information code that accidentally entered remains, forcing the accumulation and display of unnecessary decrypted data. In addition, since unnecessary data is accumulated, for example, when an article and an information code are associated with each other and managed, it is desired to avoid a problem that the number of information codes read and the number of articles are deviated.
　本発明は、上述した課題を解決するためになされたものであり、使用者が両手を読取作業以外の他の用途に使いやすく、且つ使用者の顔の動きと連動させて読み取る方向を定めることができ、更に、身体への装着を行いやすい携帯型情報コード読取装置を提供することを第１の目的とする。 The present invention has been made to solve the above-described problems, and it is easy for the user to use both hands for purposes other than reading work, and to determine the reading direction in conjunction with the movement of the user's face. In addition, a first object is to provide a portable information code reader that can be easily worn on the body.
　また、本発明は、上述した課題を解決するためになされたものであり、読取装置を手で握らずに身体又は身体の装着品に装着して使用することが可能な構成であって、更に、身体又は身体の装着品からの装置本体の取り外しを容易に行うことができ、且つ再装着する際に、より正確な装着位置により迅速に装着しやすい構成を提供することを第２の目的とする。 The present invention has been made in order to solve the above-described problem, and is configured to be used by being attached to a body or a body-mounted product without grasping the reader with a hand, Second object of the present invention is to provide a configuration in which the apparatus main body can be easily detached from the body or a body-mounted product, and can be quickly mounted at a more accurate mounting position when re-mounted. To do.
　さらに、本発明は、上述した課題を解決するためになされたものであり、読取装置を手で握らずに身体又は身体の装着品に装着して使用することが可能な構成であって、身体又は装着品に装着する際の自由度が大きく、且つ身体又は装着品からの読取装置の取り外しを容易に行うことができる構成を提供することを第３の目的とする。 Furthermore, the present invention has been made to solve the above-described problems, and is a configuration that can be used by attaching the reading device to a body or a body-mounted product without grasping it by a hand. Alternatively, it is a third object of the present invention to provide a configuration that has a high degree of freedom when being attached to a wearable product and can easily remove the reader from the body or the wearable product.
　さらに、本発明は、上述した課題を解決するためになされたものであり、読取装置を手で握らずに身体又は身体の装着品に装着して使用することが可能な構成であって、希望する情報コードの解読データを取得しやすく、希望しない情報コードの解読データを排除しやすい構成を提供することを第４の目的とする。 Furthermore, the present invention has been made in order to solve the above-described problems, and is a configuration that can be used by attaching the reader to a body or a body-attached product without grasping it by hand. It is a fourth object of the present invention to provide a configuration in which it is easy to obtain decrypted data of an information code to be performed and to easily eliminate decrypted data of an undesired information code.
　前記した第１の目的を達成するため、本発明の第１の態様として、情報コードを撮像する撮像部と、前記撮像部によって撮像された前記情報コードの画像を処理する処理部と、前記撮像部及び前記処理部を保持するケースと、前記ケースとは別体として設けられ、使用者の顔が向く側を撮像する構成で前記撮像部を使用者に取り付ける取付部と、を備えた携帯型情報コード読取装置が提供される。 In order to achieve the first object described above, as a first aspect of the present invention, an imaging unit that images an information code, a processing unit that processes an image of the information code captured by the imaging unit, and the imaging And a case that holds the processing unit, and a mounting unit that is provided separately from the case, and that attaches the imaging unit to the user in a configuration that images the side facing the user's face An information code reader is provided.
　この態様によれば、撮像部及び処理部を保持するケースを取付部によって使用者の顔が向く側に向けるように取り付けることが可能となる。従って、手以外の部分に撮像部等を取り付けながら顔の向きに合わせた読取作業を行うことができ、使用者が両手を読取作業以外の他の用途に使いやすくなる。 According to this aspect, it is possible to attach the case that holds the imaging unit and the processing unit so that the user's face faces the mounting unit. Accordingly, it is possible to perform a reading operation in accordance with the orientation of the face while attaching an imaging unit or the like to a portion other than the hand, and the user can easily use both hands for other purposes than the reading operation.
　また、第１の目的を達成するため、本発明の第２の態様として、情報コードを撮像する撮像部と、前記撮像部によって撮像された前記情報コードの画像を処理する処理部と、前記撮像部及び前記処理部を保持するケースと、前記ケースと一体的又は前記ケースとは別体として設けられ、前記ケースを、少なくとも使用者のいずれか一方の耳に取り付ける取付部と、を備えた携帯型情報コード読取装置が提供される。 In order to achieve the first object, as a second aspect of the present invention, an imaging unit that images an information code, a processing unit that processes an image of the information code captured by the imaging unit, and the imaging And a case that holds the processing unit, and a mounting unit that is provided integrally with the case or as a separate body, and that attaches the case to at least one ear of a user. A type information code reader is provided.
　この態様によれば、撮像部及び処理部を保持するケースを耳に取り付けることができるため、顔の動きとケースが連動することになり、使用者の顔の動きに合わせて撮像する方向を定めることができる。更に、ケースを耳に取り付けることができるため、他の装着具（ヘルメットや眼鏡等）が使用される場合でも装着しやすくなる。 According to this aspect, since the case holding the imaging unit and the processing unit can be attached to the ear, the movement of the face is linked to the case, and the imaging direction is determined according to the movement of the user's face. be able to. Furthermore, since the case can be attached to the ear, it is easy to wear even when other wearing tools (such as a helmet or glasses) are used.
　第２の目的を達成するため、本発明の第３の態様として、情報コードを撮像する撮像部と、前記撮像部によって撮像された前記情報コードの画像を処理する処理部と、前記撮像部及び前記処理部を保持するケースと、前記ケースとは別体として設けられ、使用者に取り付けられる取付部材と、前記取付部材の所定の取付部に対して前記ケースを着脱可能に連結し、且つその連結の際に前記取付部に対する前記ケースの姿勢が所定姿勢となるようにガイドするガイド部と、を有する携帯型情報コード読取装置が提供される。 In order to achieve the second object, as a third aspect of the present invention, an imaging unit that images an information code, a processing unit that processes an image of the information code captured by the imaging unit, the imaging unit, A case that holds the processing unit; and a case that is provided separately from the case, is attached to a user, and the case is detachably connected to a predetermined mounting portion of the mounting member; and There is provided a portable information code reading device having a guide portion that guides the case so that the posture of the case with respect to the attachment portion becomes a predetermined posture at the time of connection.
　この態様によれば、読取装置を手で握らずに身体に装着して使用することが可能な構成において、身体からのケース側の取り外しを容易に行うことができ、且つ取り外し後の再装着も容易に行い得る構成を実現することができる。特に、再装着の際には、取付済みの取付部に対してケースの姿勢が所定姿勢となるようにガイド部によってガイドされるため、ケース側がより正確な位置及び向きになるように迅速に装着しやすくなる。 According to this aspect, it is possible to easily remove the case side from the body in a configuration in which the reader can be used by being attached to the body without grasping with a hand, and reattachment after removal is also possible. A configuration that can be easily performed can be realized. In particular, when remounting, the guide is guided by the guide so that the case is in a predetermined position with respect to the mounted part, so it can be quickly mounted so that the case is in a more accurate position and orientation. It becomes easy to do.
　第３の目的を達成するため、本発明の第４の態様として、情報コードを撮像する撮像部と、前記撮像部によって撮像された前記情報コードの画像を処理する処理部と、前記撮像部及び前記処理部を保持するケースと、撓み変形可能な可撓性の身体装着部と、前記ケースが着脱される取付部と、を備え、前記ケースとは別体として設けられる取付部材と、を有する携帯型情報コード読取装置が提供される。 In order to achieve the third object, as a fourth aspect of the present invention, an imaging unit that images an information code, a processing unit that processes an image of the information code captured by the imaging unit, the imaging unit, A case that holds the processing unit; a flexible body mounting unit that can be bent and deformed; and a mounting unit to which the case is attached and detached, and an mounting member that is provided separately from the case. A portable information code reader is provided.
　この態様によれば、情報コード読取装置を手で握らずに身体に装着して使用することが可能な構成を実現できる。更にこの構成では、身体に装着される部分（身体装着部）を身体に取り付けた状態で、ケース側を分離するように取り外すことができるため、取り外し作業の容易化を図ることができる。更に、身体装着部は、撓み変形可能な可撓性の構造であるため、身体に装着する際の自由度も大きくなる。 According to this aspect, it is possible to realize a configuration in which the information code reader can be worn and used without being held by hand. Further, in this configuration, since the case side can be detached while the part to be worn on the body (body wearing part) is attached to the body, the removal work can be facilitated. Furthermore, since the body mounting portion has a flexible structure that can be bent and deformed, the degree of freedom when mounting on the body is increased.
　なお、この第３の目的を達成するためには、更に様々な態様を採ることができ、それらは後述する実施形態により明らかになる。 It should be noted that in order to achieve the third object, various aspects can be taken, which will become apparent from the embodiments described later.
　さらに、第４の目的を達成するため、本発明の第５の態様として、所定の撮像範囲の画像を撮像する撮像部と、前記撮像範囲に向けてマーカ光を照射するマーカ光照射部と、前記マーカ光とは異なる照明光を照射する照明光源と、少なくとも前記マーカ光照射部と、前記照明光源と、前記撮像部とを保持するケースと、前記ケースと一体的に、又は前記ケースとは別体として設けられ、使用者の身体又は使用者の装着物に取り付けられる取付部材と、前記照明光源を駆動させずに前記マーカ光照射部を駆動させる第１制御と、前記照明光源を駆動させる第２制御とを切り替える光源制御部と、前記光源制御部による前記第１制御に応じて前記マーカ光が照射された状態で前記撮像部によって得られた第１撮像画像から、情報コードの所定の特徴パターンを検出する検出部と、前記光源制御部による前記第２制御に応じて前記照明光が照射された状態で前記撮像部によって得られた第２撮像画像を処理する処理部と、を備え、前記光源制御部は、前記検出部が前記第１撮像画像から前記特徴パターンを検出した場合に、前記マーカ光照射部及び前記照明光源に対する制御を前記第１制御から前記第２制御に切り替えるように構成された携帯型情報コード読取装置が提供される。 Furthermore, in order to achieve the fourth object, as a fifth aspect of the present invention, an imaging unit that captures an image of a predetermined imaging range, a marker light irradiation unit that irradiates marker light toward the imaging range, An illumination light source that emits illumination light different from the marker light, a case that holds at least the marker light irradiation unit, the illumination light source, and the imaging unit, and a case that is integrated with the case or the case A mounting member that is provided as a separate body and is attached to a user's body or a user's body, a first control that drives the marker light irradiation unit without driving the illumination light source, and the illumination light source is driven. A light source control unit for switching between the second control and a first captured image obtained by the imaging unit in a state in which the marker light is irradiated according to the first control by the light source control unit; A detection unit that detects a characteristic pattern; and a processing unit that processes a second captured image obtained by the imaging unit in a state where the illumination light is irradiated according to the second control by the light source control unit. The light source control unit switches control of the marker light irradiation unit and the illumination light source from the first control to the second control when the detection unit detects the feature pattern from the first captured image. A portable information code reader configured as described above is provided.
　この態様によれば、光源制御部により、照明光源を駆動させずにマーカ光照射部を駆動させる第１制御と、照明光源を駆動させる第２制御とを切り替える構成となっている。そして、特徴パターンを検出するまでは、マーカ光を照射した状態で得られた第１撮像画像によって特徴パターンの検出を試み、特徴パターンが検出された後は、照明光源を駆動して得られた第２撮像画像によって情報コードの処理を行っている。 According to this aspect, the light source control unit is configured to switch between the first control for driving the marker light irradiation unit without driving the illumination light source and the second control for driving the illumination light source. Until the feature pattern is detected, detection of the feature pattern is attempted using the first captured image obtained in the state of irradiation with the marker light. After the feature pattern is detected, the illumination light source is driven. The information code is processed by the second captured image.
　マーカ光を照射した状態で得られた第１撮像画像によって特徴パターンが検出された場合、使用者が意図する方向（読取装置を向けている方向）に情報コードが存在する可能性が高く、このような検出結果が得られた場合に照明光源を駆動して第２撮像画像を撮像すれば、使用者が意図する情報コードを選択的に解読することができ、照明光源を常に駆動して情報コードの解読を試みる構成と比べると意図しない情報コードの解読を防ぎやすくなる。また、読取装置が向く方向に情報コードが存在する可能性が高い場合に照明光源が駆動されるため、電力消費を効果的に抑制することができる。 When the feature pattern is detected by the first captured image obtained in the state where the marker light is irradiated, there is a high possibility that the information code exists in the direction intended by the user (direction in which the reading device is directed). If such a detection result is obtained, if the second picked-up image is picked up by driving the illumination light source, the information code intended by the user can be selectively decoded, and the information is always driven by driving the illumination light source. Compared to a configuration that attempts to decode the code, it becomes easier to prevent unintentional decoding of the information code. Further, since the illumination light source is driven when there is a high possibility that an information code exists in the direction in which the reading device faces, power consumption can be effectively suppressed.
　なお、この第４の目的を達成するためには、更に様々な態様を採ることができ、それらは後述する実施形態により明らかになる。 In order to achieve the fourth object, various aspects can be taken, which will become apparent from the embodiments described later.
　添付図面において：
図１は、本発明の第１実施形態に係る携帯型情報コード読取装置を概略的に例示する斜視図である。 図２は、図１の携帯型情報コード読取装置の電気的構成を概略的に例示するブロック図である。 図３は、図１の携帯型情報コード読取装置の使用状態を示す説明図である。 図４は、図１の携帯型情報コード読取装置を横方向一方側から見た側面図である。 図５は、図１の携帯型情報コード読取装置を図４とは異なる側から見た側面図である。 図６は、図１の携帯型情報コード読取装置の底面図である。 図７（Ａ）は、図１の携帯型情報コード読取装置の正面図であり、図７（Ｂ）は、図７（Ａ）の状態から上下逆にした状態を示す図である。 図８は、図１の携帯型情報コード読取装置の背面図である。 図９（Ａ）は、図１の携帯型情報コード読取装置を右耳に取り付けるときの耳掛け部の配置構造等を簡略的に説明図であり、図９（Ｂ）は、その携帯型情報コード読取装置を左耳に取り付けるときの耳掛け部の配置構造等を簡略的に示す説明図である。 図１０は、図１の携帯型情報コード読取装置と外部装置とで行われる連携処理の一例を示すチャートである。 図１１は、図１の携帯型情報コード読取装置が実際に使用されている様子を概略的に示す図である。 図１２は、センサ部の一例としての瞬き検出センサを概略的に例示する説明図である。 図１３は、図１２の瞬き検出センサでの瞬きの検出の考え方を説明する説明図である。 図１４は、耳挿入部を着脱可能に構成した例を概略的に示す斜視図である。 図１５は、図１４の構成の正面図である。 図１６（Ａ）は、図１４のように耳挿入部を取り外し、別部材を取り付ける様子を概略的に示す正面図であり、図１６（Ｂ）は、その別部材を図１６（Ａ）とは異なる角度から見た図である。 図１７は、第２実施形態に係る携帯型情報コード読取装置で行われる読取処理の流れを例示するフローチャートである。 図１８は、第２実施形態に係る携帯型情報コード読取装置で行われる読み取りの様子を概念的に説明する説明図である。 図１９は、第２実施形態の変更例１に係る携帯型情報コード読取装置で行われる読取処理の流れを例示するフローチャートである。 図２０は、第２実施形態の変更例１に係る携帯型情報コード読取装置で行われる読み取りの様子を概念的に説明する説明図である。 図２１は、第２実施形態の変更例２に係る携帯型情報コード読取装置で行われる読取処理の流れを例示するフローチャートである。 図２２（Ａ）は、第２実施形態の変更例２に係る携帯型情報コード読取装置で行われる読み取りの様子を概念的に説明する説明図であり、図２２（Ｂ）は、所定の成功状態のときの光源による表示例を示す説明図であり、図２２（Ｃ）は、所定の失敗状態のときの光源による表示例を示す説明図である。 図２３は、第３実施形態に係る携帯型情報コード読取装置が使用される様子を例示する説明図である。 図２４は、第３実施形態に係る携帯型情報コード読取装置を概略的に例示する斜視図である。 図２５は、第３実施形態に係る携帯型情報コード読取装置を図２４とは異なる方向から見た斜視図である。 図２６は、第３実施形態に係る携帯型情報コード読取装置を図２４、図２５とは異なる方向から見た斜視図である。 図２７は、第３実施形態に係る携帯型情報コード読取装置を図２４～図２６とは異なる方向から見た斜視図である。 図２８は、第３実施形態に係る携帯型情報コード読取装置において、装置本体を左側装着部に装着した様子を例示する斜視図である。 図２９は、第３実施形態に係る携帯型情報コード読取装置が装着された使用者の顔付近を例示する説明図である。 図３０は、図２５の構成から装置本体及び保持部材を分解した様子を示す斜視図である。 図３１は、第３実施形態に係る携帯型情報コード読取装置において、ケースを取付部から取り外した様子を簡略的に示す斜視図である。 図３２は、第３実施形態に係る携帯型情報コード読取装置の一部である取付部を例示する斜視図である。 図３３は、第３実施形態に係る携帯型情報コード読取装置の一部である装置本体を例示する側面図である。 図３４は、図３３の装置本体を図３３とは反対側から見た側面図である。 図３５は、図３３、図３４に示す装置本体がケーブルに接続された様子を例示する斜視図である。 図３６は、ケース内に収容された部品をケース前方側から見た図であり、ケース内に収容された撮像部やレンズ等の構成を例示する図である。 図３７は、ケースから保持部材が離脱した状態を示す説明図である。 図３８は、ケースに保持部材が取り付けられ、その保持部材にケーブルが保持された状態を示す説明図である。 図３９は、使用者への取付部の取り付け方を説明する説明図である。 図４０は、使用者に取付部が取り付けられた状態を、使用者の顔の前側から見た状態を示す説明図である。 図４１は、ケースに保持部材が取り付けられ、その保持部材にケーブルが保持された状態で装置本体を取付部に取り付けた様子を示す斜視図である。 図４２は、取付部に取り付けられたケースの向きを微調整する様子を説明する説明図である。 図４３は、第３実施形態に係る携帯型情報コード読取装置での制御の流れを説明する説明図である。 図４４は、第３実施形態に係る携帯型情報コード読取装置の図２３とは異なる使用方法を説明する説明図である。 図４５は、第３実施形態に係る携帯型情報コード読取装置の図２３、図４４とは異なる使用方法を説明する説明図である。 図４６は、図４５のような使用方法がなされる場面を説明する説明図である。 図４７は、装置本体と電気的に接続される外部装置等を概略的に示す斜視図である。 図４８は、装置本体を外部機器に接続する様子を説明する説明図である。 図４９は、第４実施形態に係る携帯型情報コード読取装置を概略的に例示する斜視図である。 図５０は、図４９の携帯型情報コード読取装置の使用状態を示す説明図である。 図５１は、図４９の携帯型情報コード読取装置の装置本体を横方向一方側から見た外形を簡略的に示す説明図である。 図５２（Ａ）は、図４９の携帯型情報コード読取装置の装置本体を示す斜視図であり、図５２（Ｂ）は、図５２（Ａ）とは異なる方向から見た斜視図である。 図５３（Ａ）は、図４９の携帯型情報コード読取装置内のカメラの構成を示す斜視図であり、図５３（Ｂ）は、図５３（Ａ）とは異なる方向から見た斜視図である。 図５４は、図４９の携帯型情報コード読取装置の装置本体を示す斜視図である。 図５５は、図４９の携帯型情報コード読取装置の取付部材を示す斜視図である。 図５６は、取付部からケースを取り外した状態を説明する説明図である。 図５７は、図４９の携帯型情報コード読取装置においてガイド部付近で切断した様子を概略的に示す断面概略図である。 図５８は、図４９の携帯型情報コード読取装置において、装置本体が取付部材から取り外された様子を概略的に示す説明図である。 図５９は、第５実施形態に係る携帯型情報コード読取装置において、取付部からケースを取り外した状態を説明する説明図である。 図６０は、第６実施形態に係る携帯型情報コード読取装置において、取付部からケースを取り外した状態を説明する説明図である。 図６１は、第７実施形態の携帯型情報コード読取装置の取付部材を示す斜視図である。 図６２は、図６１の取付部材を図６１とは異なる方向から見た斜視図である。 図６３は、第１１実施形態の携帯型情報コード読取装置の取付部材を概略的に示す説明図である。 図６４は、第６実施形態の携帯型情報コード読取装置のケース内の構成を示す斜視図であり、 図６５（Ａ）は、第６実施形態の携帯型情報コード読取装置において、撮像部が第１回転位置のときの様子を示す説明図であり、図６５（Ｂ）は、撮像部が第２回転位置のときの様子を示す説明図である。 図６６は、撮像画像からの切り出し範囲を説明する説明図である。 図６７は、第１２実施形態に係る携帯型情報コード読取装置を概略的に例示する斜視図である。 図６８は、図６７の携帯型情報コード読取装置の電気的構成を概略的に例示するブロック図である。 図６９は、図６７の携帯型情報コード読取装置の使用状態を示す説明図である。 図７０は、図６７の携帯型情報コード読取装置での読取処理の流れを例示するフローチャートである。 図７１は、ＱＲコード（登録商標）が撮像範囲に入っているときの撮像画像を概念的に説明する説明図である。 図７２は、図７１とは異なる照射エリアのマーカ光が照射される例に関し、バーコードが撮像範囲に入っているときの撮像画像を概念的に説明する説明図である。 図７３は、図７２のマーカ光の例に関し、バーコードが傾いた状態で撮像範囲に入っているときの撮像画像を概念的に説明する説明図である。 図７４は、マーカ光が平面に照射されたときの照射形状のいくつかの例を説明する説明図である。 図７５は、撮像部による撮像範囲とマーカ光の照射方向との関係等を説明する説明図である。 図７６は、第１３実施形態に係る携帯型情報コード読取装置での読取処理の流れを例示するフローチャートである。 図７７は、第１４実施形態に係る携帯型情報コード読取装置を使用する場合のキャンセル動作の流れを説明する説明図である。 図７８は、第１５実施形態に係る携帯型情報コード読取装置を使用する場合のキャンセル動作の流れを説明する説明図である。 図７９は、第１６実施形態に係る携帯型情報コード読取装置を使用する場合のキャンセル動作の流れを説明する説明図である。 In the attached drawing:
FIG. 1 is a perspective view schematically illustrating a portable information code reader according to the first embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 2 is a block diagram schematically illustrating an electrical configuration of the portable information code reader of FIG. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram showing a usage state of the portable information code reader of FIG. 4 is a side view of the portable information code reader of FIG. 1 as viewed from one side in the lateral direction. FIG. 5 is a side view of the portable information code reader of FIG. 1 viewed from a side different from that in FIG. 6 is a bottom view of the portable information code reader of FIG. FIG. 7A is a front view of the portable information code reader of FIG. 1, and FIG. 7B is a diagram showing a state that is upside down from the state of FIG. 7A. FIG. 8 is a rear view of the portable information code reader of FIG. FIG. 9 (A) is a simplified explanatory diagram showing the arrangement structure of the ear hook when the portable information code reader of FIG. 1 is attached to the right ear, and FIG. 9 (B) shows the portable information. It is explanatory drawing which shows simply the arrangement structure of the ear hooking part, etc. when attaching a code reader to a left ear. FIG. 10 is a chart showing an example of cooperation processing performed between the portable information code reader of FIG. 1 and an external device. FIG. 11 is a diagram schematically showing how the portable information code reader of FIG. 1 is actually used. FIG. 12 is an explanatory diagram schematically illustrating a blink detection sensor as an example of a sensor unit. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the concept of blink detection by the blink detection sensor of FIG. FIG. 14 is a perspective view schematically showing an example in which the ear insertion part is configured to be detachable. FIG. 15 is a front view of the configuration of FIG. FIG. 16 (A) is a front view schematically showing a state in which the ear insertion part is removed and another member is attached as shown in FIG. 14, and FIG. 16 (B) is a diagram showing the separate member as shown in FIG. 16 (A). Is a view from a different angle. FIG. 17 is a flowchart illustrating the flow of a reading process performed by the portable information code reading device according to the second embodiment. FIG. 18 is an explanatory diagram for conceptually explaining a state of reading performed by the portable information code reader according to the second embodiment. FIG. 19 is a flowchart illustrating the flow of a reading process performed by the portable information code reading device according to the first modification of the second embodiment. FIG. 20 is an explanatory diagram conceptually illustrating a state of reading performed by the portable information code reading device according to the first modification of the second embodiment. FIG. 21 is a flowchart illustrating the flow of a reading process performed by the portable information code reading device according to the second modification of the second embodiment. FIG. 22 (A) is an explanatory diagram conceptually illustrating a state of reading performed by the portable information code reader according to the second modification of the second embodiment, and FIG. 22 (B) is a predetermined success. FIG. 22C is an explanatory diagram showing a display example by a light source in a predetermined failure state. FIG. 23 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the use of the portable information code reading device according to the third embodiment. FIG. 24 is a perspective view schematically illustrating a portable information code reader according to the third embodiment. FIG. 25 is a perspective view of the portable information code reader according to the third embodiment viewed from a direction different from that in FIG. FIG. 26 is a perspective view of the portable information code reader according to the third embodiment as seen from a direction different from FIGS. FIG. 27 is a perspective view of the portable information code reader according to the third embodiment as seen from a direction different from that in FIGS. FIG. 28 is a perspective view illustrating a state in which the apparatus main body is mounted on the left mounting portion in the portable information code reader according to the third embodiment. FIG. 29 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the vicinity of the user's face on which the portable information code reader according to the third embodiment is mounted. FIG. 30 is a perspective view showing a state in which the apparatus main body and the holding member are disassembled from the configuration of FIG. FIG. 31 is a perspective view schematically showing a state in which the case is removed from the attachment portion in the portable information code reader according to the third embodiment. FIG. 32 is a perspective view illustrating an attachment portion that is a part of the portable information code reader according to the third embodiment. FIG. 33 is a side view illustrating a device main body which is a part of the portable information code reading device according to the third embodiment. 34 is a side view of the apparatus main body of FIG. 33 viewed from the side opposite to FIG. FIG. 35 is a perspective view illustrating a state in which the apparatus main body illustrated in FIGS. 33 and 34 is connected to a cable. FIG. 36 is a diagram of components housed in the case as viewed from the front side of the case, and is a diagram illustrating the configuration of an imaging unit, a lens, and the like housed in the case. FIG. 37 is an explanatory view showing a state in which the holding member is detached from the case. FIG. 38 is an explanatory view showing a state in which the holding member is attached to the case and the cable is held by the holding member. FIG. 39 is an explanatory diagram for explaining how to attach the attachment portion to the user. FIG. 40 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a state in which the attachment portion is attached to the user as viewed from the front side of the user's face. FIG. 41 is a perspective view showing a state in which the apparatus main body is attached to the attachment portion in a state where the holding member is attached to the case and the cable is held by the holding member. FIG. 42 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a state in which the orientation of the case attached to the attachment portion is finely adjusted. FIG. 43 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the flow of control in the portable information code reader according to the third embodiment. FIG. 44 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a method of using the portable information code reader according to the third embodiment, which is different from FIG. FIG. 45 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a method of using the portable information code reader according to the third embodiment, which is different from FIGS. 23 and 44. FIG. 46 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a scene in which the usage method shown in FIG. 45 is performed. FIG. 47 is a perspective view schematically showing an external device and the like electrically connected to the apparatus main body. FIG. 48 is an explanatory diagram for explaining how the apparatus main body is connected to an external device. FIG. 49 is a perspective view schematically illustrating a portable information code reader according to the fourth embodiment. FIG. 50 is an explanatory diagram showing a usage state of the portable information code reader of FIG. FIG. 51 is an explanatory diagram simply showing the outer shape of the apparatus main body of the portable information code reader of FIG. 49 as viewed from one side in the horizontal direction. 52A is a perspective view showing the main body of the portable information code reader of FIG. 49, and FIG. 52B is a perspective view seen from a direction different from FIG. 52A. 53A is a perspective view showing the configuration of the camera in the portable information code reader of FIG. 49, and FIG. 53B is a perspective view seen from a direction different from FIG. 53A. is there. FIG. 54 is a perspective view showing an apparatus main body of the portable information code reader of FIG. FIG. 55 is a perspective view showing an attachment member of the portable information code reader of FIG. FIG. 56 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a state where the case is removed from the attachment portion. FIG. 57 is a schematic cross-sectional view schematically showing a state in which the portable information code reader of FIG. 49 is cut near the guide portion. FIG. 58 is an explanatory view schematically showing a state in which the apparatus main body is removed from the attachment member in the portable information code reader of FIG. FIG. 59 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a state in which the case is removed from the attachment portion in the portable information code reader according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 60 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a state in which the case is removed from the attachment portion in the portable information code reader according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 61 is a perspective view showing an attachment member of the portable information code reader according to the seventh embodiment. 62 is a perspective view of the attachment member of FIG. 61 viewed from a direction different from that of FIG. FIG. 63 is an explanatory diagram schematically showing an attachment member of the portable information code reader according to the eleventh embodiment. FIG. 64 is a perspective view showing the configuration inside the case of the portable information code reader of the sixth embodiment; FIG. 65A is an explanatory diagram showing a state when the imaging unit is at the first rotation position in the portable information code reader of the sixth embodiment, and FIG. It is explanatory drawing which shows a mode at the time of a rotation position. FIG. 66 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a cut-out range from a captured image. FIG. 67 is a perspective view schematically illustrating a portable information code reader according to the twelfth embodiment. FIG. 68 is a block diagram schematically illustrating an electrical configuration of the portable information code reader of FIG. FIG. 69 is an explanatory diagram showing a usage state of the portable information code reader of FIG. FIG. 70 is a flowchart illustrating the flow of reading processing in the portable information code reading device of FIG. FIG. 71 is an explanatory diagram conceptually illustrating a captured image when a QR code (registered trademark) is within the imaging range. FIG. 72 is an explanatory diagram conceptually illustrating a captured image when the barcode is in the imaging range, regarding an example in which marker light in an irradiation area different from that in FIG. 71 is irradiated. FIG. 73 is an explanatory diagram conceptually illustrating a captured image when the barcode is in the imaging range with respect to the example of the marker light in FIG. 72. FIG. 74 is an explanatory diagram for explaining some examples of irradiation shapes when marker light is irradiated onto a plane. FIG. 75 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the relationship between the imaging range by the imaging unit and the irradiation direction of the marker light. FIG. 76 is a flowchart illustrating the flow of a reading process in the portable information code reading device according to the thirteenth embodiment. FIG. 77 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the flow of a cancel operation when using the portable information code reader according to the fourteenth embodiment. FIG. 78 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the flow of a cancel operation when using the portable information code reader according to the fifteenth embodiment. FIG. 79 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the flow of a cancel operation when using the portable information code reader according to the sixteenth embodiment.
　[第１実施形態]
　以下、本発明を具現化した第１実施形態について、図面を参照して説明する。 [First embodiment]
Hereinafter, a first embodiment embodying the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings.
　（全体構成）
　図１に示すように、第１実施形態に係る携帯型情報コード読取装置１０（以下、単に情報コード読取装置１０又は読取装置１９とも称する）は、情報コードを撮像する撮像部２３と、撮像部２３によって撮像された情報コードの画像を処理する処理部（制御回路４０（図２））と、撮像部２３及び処理部を保持するケース１２と、ケース１２と一体的又はケース１２とは別体として設けられ、ケース１２を使用者のいずれか一方の耳に取り付ける取付部６０とを備えている。 (overall structure)
As shown in FIG. 1, a portable information code reader 10 (hereinafter also simply referred to as an information code reader 10 or a reader 19) according to the first embodiment includes an imaging unit 23 that images an information code, and an imaging unit. 23, a processing unit (control circuit 40 (FIG. 2)) that processes the image of the information code imaged by 23, a case 12 that holds the imaging unit 23 and the processing unit, and a case 12 that is integral with or separate from the case 12. And an attachment portion 60 for attaching the case 12 to one of the user's ears.
　まず、情報コード読取装置１０の電気的構成について説明する。図２に示すように、情報コード読取装置１０は、ハードウェア的には二次元コードを読取可能なコードリーダとして構成されており、ケース１２によって外郭が構成され、このケース１２内に各種電子部品が収容された構成をなしている。 First, the electrical configuration of the information code reader 10 will be described. As shown in FIG. 2, the information code reader 10 is configured as a code reader capable of reading a two-dimensional code in hardware, and an outer case is formed by a case 12, and various electronic components are included in the case 12. Is housed.
　この情報コード読取装置１０は、主に、照明光源２１、マーカ光照射部５０、撮像部２３、フィルタ２５、結像レンズ２７等の光学系と、メモリ３５、制御回路４０、操作スイッチ４２等のマイクロコンピュータ（以下「マイコン」という）系と、電源スイッチ４１、電池４９等の電源系と、から構成されている。なお、これらは、図略のプリント配線板に実装あるいはケース１２内に内装されている。 The information code reader 10 mainly includes an illumination light source 21, a marker light irradiation unit 50, an imaging unit 23, a filter 25, an imaging lens 27, and other optical systems, a memory 35, a control circuit 40, an operation switch 42, and the like. A microcomputer (hereinafter referred to as “microcomputer”) system and a power supply system such as a power switch 41 and a battery 49 are included. These are mounted on a printed wiring board (not shown) or housed in the case 12.
　光学系は、照明光源２１、撮像部２３、フィルタ２５、結像レンズ２７、マーカ光照射部５０等から構成されている。照明光源２１は、照明光Ｌｆを発光可能な照明光源として機能するもので、例えば、赤色のＬＥＤとこのＬＥＤの出射側に設けられる拡散レンズ、集光レンズ等とから構成されている。本実施形態では、ケースに形成された照射口１６を介して読取対象物Ｒに向けて照明光Ｌｆを照射可能に構成されている。この読取対象物Ｒとしては、例えば、樹脂材料、金属材料等の様々な対象が考えられ、このような読取対象物Ｒに例えば図２のような情報コード１００が印刷などによって形成されている。なお、読み取り対象となる情報コード１００の種類はバーコードなどの一次元コードであってもよく、ＱＲコード（登録商標）、データマトリックスコート、マキシコードなどの二次元コードであってもよい。また、マーカ光照射部５０は、公知のマーカ光源等によって構成されており、照明光源２１が光を照射する側と同じ側に、例えば指向性の高いマーカ光ＭＫを照射するように構成されている。 The optical system includes an illumination light source 21, an imaging unit 23, a filter 25, an imaging lens 27, a marker light irradiation unit 50, and the like. The illumination light source 21 functions as an illumination light source capable of emitting illumination light Lf, and includes, for example, a red LED and a diffusion lens, a condensing lens, and the like provided on the emission side of the LED. In this embodiment, the illumination light Lf can be irradiated toward the reading object R through the irradiation port 16 formed in the case. As the reading object R, for example, various objects such as a resin material and a metal material can be considered, and an information code 100 as shown in FIG. 2 is formed on the reading object R by printing or the like. Note that the type of the information code 100 to be read may be a one-dimensional code such as a bar code, or may be a two-dimensional code such as a QR code (registered trademark), a data matrix coat, or a maxi code. Moreover, the marker light irradiation part 50 is comprised by the well-known marker light source etc., and is comprised so that the illumination light source 21 may irradiate the marker light MK with high directivity, for example on the same side as the side which irradiates light. Yes.
　撮像部２３は、情報コード１００を撮像可能な受光センサ（例えば、Ｃ－ＭＯＳやＣＣＤ等の受光素子を２次元に配列したエリアセンサ等）によって構成され、読取対象物Ｒや情報コード１００に照射されて反射した反射光Ｌｒを受光可能に構成されるものである。この撮像部２３は、結像レンズ２７を介して入射する入射光を受光面２３ａで受光可能に配置されている。 The imaging unit 23 includes a light receiving sensor (for example, an area sensor in which light receiving elements such as C-MOS and CCD are two-dimensionally arranged) that can image the information code 100, and irradiates the reading object R and the information code 100. Thus, the reflected light Lr reflected and reflected is configured to be received. The imaging unit 23 is disposed so that incident light incident through the imaging lens 27 can be received by the light receiving surface 23a.
　フィルタ２５は、例えば反射光Ｌｒの波長相当以下の光の通過を許容し、当該波長相当を超える光の通過を遮断し得る光学的なローパスフィルタで、ケース１２に形成された読取口１４と結像レンズ２７との間に設けられている。これにより、反射光Ｌｒの波長相当を超える不要な光が撮像部２３に入射することを抑制している。また、結像レンズ２７は、例えば、鏡筒とこの鏡筒内に収容される複数の集光レンズとによって構成されており、本実施形態では、ケース１２に形成された読取口１４（例えば図３参照）に入射する反射光Ｌｒを集光し、撮像部２３の受光面２３ａに情報コード１００のコード画像を結像するように構成されている。 The filter 25 is an optical low-pass filter that allows passage of light that is less than or equal to the wavelength of the reflected light Lr, for example, and can block passage of light that exceeds the wavelength, and is connected to the reading port 14 formed in the case 12. It is provided between the image lens 27. Thereby, unnecessary light exceeding the wavelength equivalent of the reflected light Lr is prevented from entering the imaging unit 23. In addition, the imaging lens 27 includes, for example, a lens barrel and a plurality of condensing lenses accommodated in the lens barrel. In the present embodiment, the reading port 14 (for example, FIG. 3), the reflected light Lr incident thereon is collected, and a code image of the information code 100 is formed on the light receiving surface 23a of the imaging unit 23.
　マイコン系は、増幅回路３１、Ａ／Ｄ変換回路３３、メモリ３５、アドレス発生回路３６、同期信号発生回路３８、制御回路４０、操作スイッチ４２、マイク４３、発音部４４、センサ部４６、通信部４８等から構成されている。このマイコン系は、マイコン（情報処理装置）として機能し得る制御回路４０及びメモリ３５を中心として構成され、前述した光学系によって撮像された情報コード１００の画像信号をハードウェア的およびソフトウェア的に信号処理し得るものである。 The microcomputer system includes an amplification circuit 31, an A / D conversion circuit 33, a memory 35, an address generation circuit 36, a synchronization signal generation circuit 38, a control circuit 40, an operation switch 42, a microphone 43, a sound generation unit 44, a sensor unit 46, and a communication unit. It consists of 48 grades. This microcomputer system is configured around a control circuit 40 and a memory 35 that can function as a microcomputer (information processing apparatus), and the image signal of the information code 100 captured by the optical system described above is signaled in hardware and software. It can be processed.
　光学系の撮像部２３から出力される画像信号（アナログ信号）は、増幅回路３１に入力されることで所定ゲインで増幅された後、Ａ／Ｄ変換回路３３に入力され、アナログ信号からディジタル信号に変換される。そして、ディジタル化された画像信号、つまり画像データ（画像情報）は、メモリ３５に入力され、当該メモリ３５の画像データ蓄積領域に蓄積される。なお、同期信号発生回路３８は、撮像部２３およびアドレス発生回路３６に対する同期信号を発生可能に構成されており、またアドレス発生回路３６は、この同期信号発生回路３８から供給される同期信号に基づいて、メモリ３５に格納される画像データの格納アドレスを発生可能に構成されている。 An image signal (analog signal) output from the image pickup unit 23 of the optical system is input to the amplification circuit 31 and amplified by a predetermined gain, and then input to the A / D conversion circuit 33, and the analog signal is converted into a digital signal. Is converted to The digitized image signal, that is, image data (image information) is input to the memory 35 and stored in the image data storage area of the memory 35. The synchronization signal generation circuit 38 is configured to be able to generate a synchronization signal for the imaging unit 23 and the address generation circuit 36. The address generation circuit 36 is based on the synchronization signal supplied from the synchronization signal generation circuit 38. Thus, the storage address of the image data stored in the memory 35 can be generated.
　メモリ３５は、半導体メモリ装置などによって構成され、例えばＲＡＭ（ＤＲＡＭ、ＳＲＡＭ等）やＲＯＭ（ＥＰＲＯＭ、ＥＥＰＲＯＭ等）等がこれに相当する。このメモリ３５のうちのＲＡＭには、前述した画像データ蓄積領域のほかに、制御回路４０が算術演算や論理演算等の各処理時に利用する作業領域や読取条件テーブルも確保可能に構成されている。またＲＯＭには、後述する読取処理等を実行可能な所定プログラムやその他、照明光源２１、撮像部２３等の各ハードウェアを制御可能なシステムプログラム等が予め格納されている。 The memory 35 is constituted by a semiconductor memory device or the like, for example, RAM (DRAM, SRAM, etc.), ROM (EPROM, EEPROM, etc.) and the like. In addition to the above-described image data storage area, the RAM of the memory 35 is configured to be able to secure a work area and a reading condition table used by the control circuit 40 in each processing such as arithmetic operation and logical operation. . The ROM stores in advance a predetermined program that can execute a reading process, which will be described later, and a system program that can control each hardware such as the illumination light source 21 and the imaging unit 23.
　制御回路４０は、情報コード読取装置１０全体を制御可能なマイコンで、ＣＰＵ、システムバス、入出力インタフェース等からなるものであり、情報処理機能を有している。この制御回路４０には、内蔵された入出力インタフェースを介して種々の入出力装置（周辺装置）が接続されており、本構成の場合、電源スイッチ４１、操作スイッチ４２、マイク４３、発音部４４、センサ部４６、通信部４８等が接続されている。また、通信部４８は、有線通信又は無線通信を行う公知の通信インタフェースとして構成されており、ケース１２の外側に設けられた外部装置と通信を行い、外部装置への情報送信又は外部装置からの情報受信を行うように機能している。なお、図２の例では、「外部装置」として、情報コード読取装置１０の上位システムに相当するコンピュータＨＳＴ（据置型のパーソナルコンピュータや携帯型のパーソナルコンピュータ等）と有線又は無線（例えば、公知の無線ＬＡＮ通信やbluetooth（登録商標）通信等）にて通信可能に接続されている。 The control circuit 40 is a microcomputer that can control the entire information code reader 10, and includes a CPU, a system bus, an input / output interface, and the like, and has an information processing function. Various input / output devices (peripheral devices) are connected to the control circuit 40 via a built-in input / output interface. In the case of this configuration, the power switch 41, the operation switch 42, the microphone 43, and the sound generation unit 44 are connected. The sensor unit 46, the communication unit 48, and the like are connected. The communication unit 48 is configured as a known communication interface that performs wired communication or wireless communication, and communicates with an external device provided outside the case 12 to transmit information to the external device or from the external device. It functions to receive information. In the example of FIG. 2, as the “external device”, a computer HST (a stationary personal computer, a portable personal computer, or the like) corresponding to a host system of the information code reader 10 and a wired or wireless (for example, a publicly known device) Wireless LAN communication or bluetooth (registered trademark) communication).
　電源系は、電源スイッチ４１、電池４９等により構成されており、制御回路４０により管理される電源スイッチ４１のオンオフによって、上述した各装置や各回路に、電池４９から供給される駆動電圧の導通や遮断が制御されている。なお、電池４９は、所定の直流電圧を発生可能な２次電池で、例えば、リチウムイオン電池等がこれに相当する。 The power supply system includes a power switch 41, a battery 49, and the like. When the power switch 41 managed by the control circuit 40 is turned on and off, the conduction of the drive voltage supplied from the battery 49 to each device and each circuit described above is established. And shut-off are controlled. The battery 49 is a secondary battery that can generate a predetermined DC voltage, and corresponds to, for example, a lithium ion battery.
　（装着構造等）
　次に、携帯型情報コード読取装置１０の主要な特徴である装着構造等について説明する。 (Mounting structure etc.)
Next, a mounting structure, which is a main feature of the portable information code reader 10, will be described.
　携帯型情報コード読取装置１０は、情報コード１００を撮像可能な撮像部２３と、撮像部２３によって情報コード１００が撮像された場合にこの情報コード１００を解読する処理部（制御回路４０（図２））と、撮像部２３及び処理部を保持するケース１２と、ケース１２と一体的又はケース１２とは別体として設けられ、ケース１２を使用者のいずれか一方の耳に取り付ける取付部６０とを備えている。そして、ケース１２は、情報コードからの光を導入可能な読取口１４を備えており、取付部６０は、図３のようにケース１２が使用者の顔Ｆａの横位置に配置され且つ読取口１４が使用者Ｐの前側を向く構成で当該ケース１２を使用者Ｐの耳Ｅｙに取り付ける構成となっている。 The portable information code reader 10 includes an imaging unit 23 capable of imaging the information code 100, and a processing unit (control circuit 40 (FIG. 2) that decodes the information code 100 when the information code 100 is captured by the imaging unit 23. )), A case 12 that holds the imaging unit 23 and the processing unit, and an attachment unit 60 that is provided integrally with the case 12 or as a separate body, and attaches the case 12 to one of the user's ears. It has. The case 12 is provided with a reading port 14 into which light from the information code can be introduced, and the mounting portion 60 is arranged such that the case 12 is arranged in a lateral position of the user's face Fa as shown in FIG. 14 is configured to face the front side of the user P, and the case 12 is attached to the ear Ey of the user P.
　図３から図８に示すように、ケース１２は、取付部６０の位置から所定方向（具体的には当該ケース１２の長手方向）に延びる延出部１２ｃを備え、且つ延出部１２ｃにおける取付部６０とは反対側の端部寄りの位置（具体的にはケース１２の前端部に設けられる前壁部３１２ｃ）に読取口１４が設けられている。そして、取付部６０は、延出部１２ｃが使用者の耳から少なくとも前側（使用者の顔Ｆａが向く側）に延びる構成でケース１２を使用者の耳Ｅｙに取り付ける構成となっている。 As shown in FIGS. 3 to 8, the case 12 includes an extending portion 12 c extending in a predetermined direction (specifically, the longitudinal direction of the case 12) from the position of the mounting portion 60, and is attached to the extending portion 12 c. The reading port 14 is provided at a position near the end opposite to the portion 60 (specifically, the front wall 312c provided at the front end of the case 12). And the attachment part 60 becomes a structure which attaches the case 12 to a user's ear Ey by the structure by which the extension part 12c is extended at least to the front side (side to which a user's face Fa faces) from a user's ear.
　なお、本明細書では、取付部６０と読取口１４とが並ぶ方向を読取装置１０の前後方向としており、取付部６０を基準として読取口１４側を前側、それとは反対側を後ろ側としている。また、この前後方向と直交する方向であって且つ耳挿入部６１が突出する向きを読取装置１０の左右方向としている。更にこれら前後方向及び左右方向と直交する方向を読取装置１０の上下方向としている。また、本明細書では、使用者の顔Ｆａを基準として顔Ｆａが向く方向を顔Ｆａの前側、後頭部側を顔Ｆａの後ろ側として説明する。 In the present specification, the direction in which the mounting portion 60 and the reading port 14 are arranged is the front-rear direction of the reading device 10, and the reading port 14 side is the front side and the opposite side is the rear side with respect to the mounting portion 60. . In addition, the direction perpendicular to the front-rear direction and the ear insertion portion 61 protrudes is the left-right direction of the reading apparatus 10. Further, the front-rear direction and the direction orthogonal to the left-right direction are defined as the vertical direction of the reading apparatus 10. Further, in this specification, the direction in which the face Fa faces with respect to the user's face Fa will be described as the front side of the face Fa, and the occipital side will be described as the back side of the face Fa.
　図４～図８に示すように、ケース１２は、このような定義において前端部に前壁部３１２ｃが設けられ、後端部に後壁部３１２ｄが設けられている。更に、左右方向一方側（取付部６０側）に側壁部１３ｂが設けられ、これとは反対側に側壁部１３ａが設けられている。更に、上端部には上壁部３１２ｅが設けられ、下端部には下壁部３１２ｆが設けられている。そして、これら前壁部、後壁部、側壁部、上壁部、下壁部により、前後左右及び上下が囲まれる箱状構成で、撮像部や制御回路などの電子部品を収容する収容部が構成されている。 As shown in FIGS. 4 to 8, the case 12 has a front wall portion 312c at the front end portion and a rear wall portion 312d at the rear end portion in such a definition. Furthermore, the side wall part 13b is provided in the left-right direction one side (attachment part 60 side), and the side wall part 13a is provided in the opposite side. Further, an upper wall portion 312e is provided at the upper end portion, and a lower wall portion 312f is provided at the lower end portion. And the storage part which stores electronic parts, such as an image pick-up part and a control circuit, is a box-like composition enclosed by these front wall part, rear wall part, side wall part, upper wall part, and lower wall part in front and rear, right and left, and up and down. It is configured.
　取付部６０は、具体的には、使用者の耳Ｅｙの穴に挿入される耳挿入部６１と、使用者の耳に掛けられる耳掛け部６２とを有している。本構成では、ケース１２の本体部が長手状且つ箱状に構成され、この本体部の長手方向一端側において側壁部１３ｂから突出する構成で耳挿入部６１が形成されている。そしてこの耳挿入部６１の基端部付近（突出の根元付近）から円弧状に延びる構成で耳掛け部６２が設けられている。なお、図１、図４～図８では耳掛け部６２の延出先を省略して示している。この耳掛け部６２は、実際は、図３、図９のように円弧状に湾曲し、撓み変形しうる構成となっており、図３のように耳挿入部６１が耳Ｅｙの穴に挿入されたときに、耳のＥｙにおける頭部側に面する部分に掛けられる構造となっている。 Specifically, the attachment portion 60 includes an ear insertion portion 61 that is inserted into the hole of the user's ear Ey, and an ear hook portion 62 that is hung on the user's ear. In this configuration, the main body portion of the case 12 is formed in a longitudinal and box shape, and the ear insertion portion 61 is formed so as to protrude from the side wall portion 13b on one end side in the longitudinal direction of the main body portion. An ear hooking portion 62 is provided so as to extend in an arc shape from the vicinity of the base end portion (near the base of the protrusion) of the ear insertion portion 61. 1 and 4 to 8, the extension destination of the ear hook 62 is omitted. The ear hooking portion 62 is actually configured to be bent in an arc shape as shown in FIGS. 3 and 9 and bendable, and the ear insertion portion 61 is inserted into the hole of the ear Ey as shown in FIG. When it is, it has a structure that can be hung on the portion of the ear Ey facing the head side.
　また、図９（Ａ）（Ｂ）に示すように、耳掛け部６２は、ケース１２の一部又はケース１２に連結された連結部に対して着脱可能とされている。そして、ケース１２の一部又はケース１２に連結された連結部には、使用者の左耳に耳掛け部６２を取り付ける場合に耳掛け部６２が固定されるべき第１固定部７１と、使用者の右耳に耳掛け部６２を取り付ける場合に耳掛け部６２が固定されるべき第２固定部７２とが形成されている。第１固定部７１は、例えば、突出形状の耳挿入部６１の基端側において下方側に開口する第１孔部として構成されており、例えば、湾曲状の部材として構成される耳掛け部６２の一端部をこの第１孔部に挿入・嵌合して固定することで、図９（Ａ）のように右耳用の配置構成とすることが可能となっている。また、第２固定部７２は、例えば、突出形状の耳挿入部６１の基端側において上方側に開口する第２孔部として構成されており、例えば、湾曲状の部材として構成される耳掛け部６２の一端部をこの第２孔部に挿入・嵌合して固定することで、図９（Ｂ）のように、左耳用の配置構成とすることができるようになっている。 Further, as shown in FIGS. 9A and 9B, the ear hooking portion 62 can be attached to and detached from a part of the case 12 or a connecting portion connected to the case 12. In addition, a part of the case 12 or a connection part connected to the case 12 includes a first fixing part 71 to which the ear hooking part 62 should be fixed when the ear hooking part 62 is attached to the left ear of the user, When the ear hook 62 is attached to the right ear of the person, a second fixing portion 72 to which the ear hook 62 should be fixed is formed. The first fixing portion 71 is configured as, for example, a first hole portion that opens downward on the proximal end side of the protruding ear insertion portion 61, and, for example, an ear hook 62 configured as a curved member. 9 is inserted and fitted into the first hole, and is fixed to the right ear as shown in FIG. 9A. Moreover, the 2nd fixing | fixed part 72 is comprised as a 2nd hole part opened upwards in the base end side of the protrusion-shaped ear insertion part 61, for example, for example, the ear hook comprised as a curved member By inserting and fitting one end portion of the portion 62 into the second hole portion and fixing it, the arrangement configuration for the left ear can be made as shown in FIG. 9B.
　また、ケース１２には、情報コードからの光を導入可能な読取口１４を備えており、取付部６０は、図９（Ｂ）のような配置によって取付部６０が使用者の左耳に取り付けられた場合でも、図９（Ａ）のような配置によって使用者の右耳に取り付けられた場合でも、読取口１４が使用者の前側を向く構成でケース１２を使用者の耳に取り付け可能とされている（図７（Ａ）、（Ｂ）も参照）。 The case 12 is provided with a reading port 14 through which light from the information code can be introduced, and the attachment portion 60 is attached to the left ear of the user by the arrangement as shown in FIG. 9B. Even when the case 12 is attached to the right ear of the user by the arrangement as shown in FIG. 9A, the case 12 can be attached to the user's ear with the reading opening 14 facing the front side of the user. (See also FIGS. 7A and 7B).
　また、上述したように、本構成では、照明光を照射する照明光源２１及びマーカ光を照射するマーカ光照射部５０が設けられており、照明光源２１からの照明光及びマーカ光照射部５０からのマーカ光はいずれも、前壁部３１２ｃから当該読取装置１０における前側に照射されるようになっている。具体的には、照明光源２１からの照明光は照明光導出口１６を介して前側に照射されるようになっており、マーカ光照射部５０からのマーカ光は、マーカ光導出口１７を介して前側に照射されるようになっている。そして、取付部６０は、図９（Ｂ）のような配置によって取付部６０が使用者の左耳に取り付けられた場合でも、図９（Ａ）のような配置によって取付部６０が使用者の右耳に取り付けられた場合でも、前壁部３１２ｃが顔Ｆａの前側に面し且つ照明光源２１からの照射光及びマーカ光照射部５０からのマーカ光が使用者の前側に照射される構成でケース１２を使用者の耳に取り付け可能とされている。より具体的には、図７（Ａ）のように、読取口１４の左右に照明光導出口１６及びマーカ光導出口１７がそれぞれ配置されており、図７（Ｂ）のような配置によって取付部６０が使用者の左耳に取り付けられた場合でも、図７（Ａ）のような配置によって取付部６０が使用者の右耳に取り付けられた場合でも、読取口１４の左右方向外側に照明光導出口１６が配され、読取口１４の左右方向内側にマーカ光導出口１７が配された位置関係となっている。より具体的には、図７のように正面視したときに、読取口１４の中心Ｇ１を通る上下方向の中心線Ｇ３を中心としてマーカ光導出口１７と照明光導出口１６とが略線対称となっており、中心Ｇ１を通り中心線Ｇ３と直交する線Ｇ２上にマーカ光導出口１７と照明光導出口１６と読取口１４とが並ぶ位置関係となっている。 Further, as described above, in this configuration, the illumination light source 21 that irradiates illumination light and the marker light irradiation unit 50 that irradiates marker light are provided, and the illumination light and marker light irradiation unit 50 from the illumination light source 21 are provided. Each of the marker lights is irradiated from the front wall portion 312c to the front side of the reading device 10. Specifically, the illumination light from the illumination light source 21 is irradiated to the front side via the illumination light exit 16, and the marker light from the marker light irradiation unit 50 is directed to the front side via the marker light exit 17. It comes to be irradiated. And even if the attachment part 60 is attached to a user's left ear by arrangement | positioning like FIG.9 (B), the attachment part 60 is a user's left part by arrangement | positioning like FIG.9 (A). Even when attached to the right ear, the front wall portion 312c faces the front side of the face Fa, and the irradiation light from the illumination light source 21 and the marker light from the marker light irradiation unit 50 are irradiated to the front side of the user. The case 12 can be attached to the user's ear. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 7A, the illumination light outlet 16 and the marker light outlet 17 are respectively arranged on the left and right of the reading port 14, and the mounting portion 60 is arranged by the arrangement as shown in FIG. 7B. 7 is attached to the left ear of the user, or even when the attachment portion 60 is attached to the right ear of the user by the arrangement as shown in FIG. 16 is arranged, and the marker light outlet 17 is arranged on the inner side in the left-right direction of the reading port 14. More specifically, when viewed from the front as shown in FIG. 7, the marker light outlet 17 and the illumination light outlet 16 are substantially line symmetric about a vertical center line G3 passing through the center G1 of the reading port 14. The marker light outlet 17, the illumination light outlet 16, and the reading port 14 are arranged on a line G2 passing through the center G1 and orthogonal to the center line G3.
　また、図４から図８に示すように、読取装置１０は、ケース１２に保持されると共にケース１２の外部に設けられた外部装置に電気的に接続されるケーブル８０を備えており、このケーブル８０は、ケース１２の長手方向一方側寄りにおいて短手方向一方側（具体的にはケース１２の長手方向一方寄りに設けられた取付部６０の下方側）からケース１２外に引き出されている。 As shown in FIGS. 4 to 8, the reading device 10 includes a cable 80 that is held by the case 12 and is electrically connected to an external device provided outside the case 12. 80 is drawn out of the case 12 from one side in the short direction (specifically, below the mounting portion 60 provided near one side in the longitudinal direction of the case 12) near one side in the longitudinal direction of the case 12.
　また、ケース１２において取付部６０が設けられた壁部（側壁部１３ｂ）とは反対側の壁部（側壁部１３ａ）には、取付部６０の裏側の位置に、外部操作が可能な操作スイッチ４２が設けられている。この構成では、回転中心部となる取付部６０の裏側で操作スイッチ４２が操作されるため、操作スイッチ４２に対して押圧操作等がなされたとしても、その操作力によって取付部６０付近と中心とするモーメントが生じにくいため、ケース１２が回転しにくくなる。従って、使用者の顔に対する読取装置全体の相対的な向きが安定的に維持されやすくなる。 An operation switch that can be externally operated at a position on the back side of the mounting portion 60 on the wall portion (side wall portion 13a) opposite to the wall portion (side wall portion 13b) provided with the mounting portion 60 in the case 12. 42 is provided. In this configuration, since the operation switch 42 is operated on the back side of the attachment portion 60 serving as the rotation center portion, even if a pressing operation or the like is performed on the operation switch 42, the operation force causes the vicinity of the attachment portion 60 and the center. Since the moment is not easily generated, the case 12 is difficult to rotate. Therefore, the relative orientation of the entire reading apparatus with respect to the user's face is easily maintained stably.
　（使用方法等）
　次に、読取装置１０と外部装置（ここでは、パーソナルコンピュータやスマートフォンなどのホスト装置を例示）との間で行われる連携処理について説明する。本実施形態に係る読取装置１０では、具体的には例えば使用者が操作スイッチ４２を押したときに照明光源２１からの照明光の照射及びマーカ光照射部５０からのマーカ光の照射が開始され、且つ撮像部２３による撮像が開始される。そして、図９のように読取装置１０の前側（即ち、使用者の顔の前側）に情報コード１００が付された読取対象物が配置されたときには、その情報コード１００が撮像され、読み取られることになる。なお、読取装置１０からの撮像エリアは、使用者の手が届く範囲（特に、使用者が物を手に持って配置しやすい範囲）であることが望ましく、例えば、１０ｃｍ～１５０ｃｍｍ（より望ましくは２０ｃｍ～１００ｃｍｍ）程度とするとよい。 (How to use etc.)
Next, cooperation processing performed between the reading device 10 and an external device (here, a host device such as a personal computer or a smartphone is illustrated) will be described. In the reading apparatus 10 according to the present embodiment, specifically, for example, when the user presses the operation switch 42, irradiation of illumination light from the illumination light source 21 and irradiation of marker light from the marker light irradiation unit 50 are started. And the imaging by the imaging part 23 is started. Then, when the reading object to which the information code 100 is attached is arranged on the front side of the reading device 10 (that is, the front side of the user's face) as shown in FIG. 9, the information code 100 is imaged and read. become. The imaging area from the reading device 10 is preferably within a range that can be reached by the user (particularly, a range in which the user can easily place an object by holding it), for example, 10 cm to 150 cmm (more preferably 20 cm to 100 cm).
　そして、読み取りが成功した場合には、発音部４４から所定の報知音を発する。なお、読み取りが失敗した場合には、この所定の報知音とは異なるエラー音を発するようにしてもよい。本構成では、発音部４４が「報知部」の一例に相当し、少なくとも処理部での処理結果を報知するように機能する。 When the reading is successful, a predetermined notification sound is emitted from the sound generation unit 44. If reading fails, an error sound different from the predetermined notification sound may be generated. In this configuration, the sound generation unit 44 corresponds to an example of a “notification unit” and functions to notify at least a processing result in the processing unit.
　また、本構成では、耳挿入部６１において発音部４４からの音を導出する導出部（導出孔６１ａ）が設けられて、この導出部を介して発音部４４から発せられた音が使用者の耳内に伝わるようになっている。なお、発音部４４からの音を導く経路が導出部まで構成されていれば、発音部４４自体は耳挿入部６１の中にあってよく、耳挿入部６１の外にあってもよい。 In this configuration, the ear insertion unit 61 is provided with a derivation unit (derivation hole 61a) for deriving the sound from the sound generation unit 44, and the sound emitted from the sound generation unit 44 through the derivation unit is transmitted to the user. It comes to be transmitted in the ear. It should be noted that the sound generation unit 44 itself may be in the ear insertion unit 61 or outside the ear insertion unit 61 as long as the route for guiding the sound from the sound generation unit 44 is configured to the derivation unit.
　例えば、図１０、図１１のようなケースにおいて、読取装置１０により伝票に付された情報コードを解読した場合には、まず、その解読データ（図１０では、ＱＲコードデータ（ＱＲコードは登録商標）と図示）を外部装置に出力する。そして、外部装置（ホスト）では、その解読データの内容を解析し、読取装置１０に対して案内情報を送信する。図１０の例では、案内情報として、伝票のコードに対応する製品の位置情報と、読み取るべき個数と、品番情報についてのデータ及び音声情報を読取装置１０に伝達している。この場合、使用者はその音声情報を基に指定された位置に移動して対象製品を読み取ることができ、その後に読取装置１０によって製品の情報コードが読み取られたときには、その読取毎に解読データを外部装置に出力して外部装置側で照合を図っている。なお、本構成では、制御回路４０及び発音部４４が「音声案内部」の一例に相当し、処理部が情報コードを解読して得られた解読情報に基づき、当該解読情報の解読後に対応すべき情報を音声案内するように機能する。 For example, in the cases as shown in FIGS. 10 and 11, when the information code attached to the slip is read by the reader 10, first, the decoded data (in FIG. 10, QR code data (QR code is a registered trademark)). ) And (illustrated) are output to the external device. Then, the external device (host) analyzes the content of the decoded data and transmits guide information to the reading device 10. In the example of FIG. 10, the position information of the product corresponding to the slip code, the number to be read, the data about the product number information, and the voice information are transmitted to the reading device 10 as the guide information. In this case, the user can read the target product by moving to a designated position based on the voice information, and when the information code of the product is read by the reading device 10 thereafter, the decoded data is read every time the reading is performed. Is output to the external device and collation is performed on the external device side. In this configuration, the control circuit 40 and the sound generation unit 44 correspond to an example of a “voice guide unit”, and the processing unit responds after decoding the decoding information based on the decoding information obtained by decoding the information code. It functions to provide voice guidance for information to be played.
　（第１実施形態の主な効果）
　特許文献１の構成や、特許文献２の図１のように使用者の頭にバンドなどを嵌めて読取装置を固定する構成では、使用者の頭に何らかの装着具を着用する場合に適用しにくいという問題がある。例えば、ヘルメットや帽子などを装着した上で読取作業を行う場合、これら特許文献で開示される頭部装着型の読取装置では、適用が難しかったり、装着に手間取ることが懸念される。また、特許文献１のように、眼を覆うスクリーンの上に読取装置を取り付ける構成では、眼鏡を付けて作業をする場合に適用しにくいという問題もある。また、特許文献２の図７等には、使用者の頭以外の部分に取り付ける構成も開示されている。例えば、図７のように、腕や胴体などに読取装置を固定すれば、ヘルメットや眼鏡などを併用する場合でも、読取装置を支障なく固定可能となる。しかしながら、このような固定構造では、読取装置の読取方向を使用者の顔の動きに連動させることができず、使用者が見ている方向と読取装置の読取る方向がずれやすくなる。例えば、腕や胴体を読取りたい物品に近づける等、読取りたい物品を意識することになり、結局、従来の携帯端末と使用と変わらない作業性となる。 (Main effects of the first embodiment)
In the configuration of Patent Document 1 and the configuration in which a reading device is fixed by fitting a band or the like on the user's head as shown in FIG. 1 of Patent Document 2, it is difficult to apply when a wearing device is worn on the user's head. There is a problem. For example, when a reading operation is performed after wearing a helmet, a hat, or the like, it is difficult to apply the head-mounted reading device disclosed in these patent documents, and there is a concern that it may take time to wear. In addition, as in Patent Document 1, the configuration in which the reading device is attached on the screen that covers the eyes has a problem that it is difficult to apply when working with glasses. Moreover, the structure attached to parts other than a user's head is also disclosed by FIG. For example, as shown in FIG. 7, if the reading device is fixed to an arm, a torso or the like, the reading device can be fixed without any trouble even when a helmet or glasses are used together. However, with such a fixed structure, the reading direction of the reading device cannot be linked to the movement of the user's face, and the direction the user is looking at and the reading direction of the reading device are likely to deviate. For example, the user is conscious of the article to be read, such as bringing the arm or body close to the article to be read, and eventually the workability is the same as that of a conventional portable terminal.
　これに対し、本構成によれば、撮像部２３及び処理部を保持するケース１２を取付部６０によって使用者の耳に取り付けることが可能となる。従って、手以外の部分に読取装置を取り付けながら読取作業を行うことができ、使用者が両手を読取作業以外の他の用途に使いやすくなる。また、読取装置が一方の耳に取り付けられるため、顔の動きと読取装置全体が連動することになり、使用者の顔の動きに合わせて読み取る方向を定めることができる。更に、取り付ける位置が一方の耳であるため、他の装着具（ヘルメットや眼鏡等）が使用されるケース１２でも容易に装着しやすくなる。 On the other hand, according to this configuration, the case 12 holding the imaging unit 23 and the processing unit can be attached to the user's ear by the attachment unit 60. Therefore, the reading operation can be performed while attaching the reading device to a portion other than the hand, and the user can easily use both hands for other purposes than the reading operation. In addition, since the reading device is attached to one ear, the movement of the face and the entire reading device are linked, and the reading direction can be determined in accordance with the movement of the user's face. Furthermore, since the attachment position is one ear, it is easy to attach even the case 12 where other wearing tools (such as a helmet and glasses) are used.
　また、耳に取り付けるタイプであるため、手持ち方式と比べてブレ（手ブレ等）が生じにくくなる。また、撮像時のブレが少ないため、シャッタスピードを比較的遅くすることができ、十分な受光量を確保しやすくなる。従って、照明光の光量低下を図りやすくなる。また、ブレが少ないため、複雑な補正機構が省略でき、装置構成の簡素化、コンパクト化、低廉化を図りやすくなる。 Also, because it is a type that is attached to the ear, blurring (hand shaking, etc.) is less likely to occur compared to the hand-held method. Further, since there is little blur at the time of imaging, the shutter speed can be made relatively slow, and it becomes easy to ensure a sufficient amount of received light. Therefore, it is easy to reduce the amount of illumination light. In addition, since there is little blurring, a complicated correction mechanism can be omitted, and it is easy to simplify, compact, and reduce the device configuration.
　また、ケース１２は、情報コードからの光を導入可能な読取口１４を備えており、取付部６０は、ケース１２が使用者の顔の横位置に配置され且つ読取口１４が使用者の前側を向く構成で当該ケース１２を使用者の耳に取り付ける構成となっている。この構成によれば、使用者の顔の向きと読み取りの方向が良好に連動しやすくなり、使用者の顔が向く側に配置された情報コードを違和感なくスムーズに読み取りやすくなる。 In addition, the case 12 includes a reading port 14 into which light from the information code can be introduced, and the mounting portion 60 is configured such that the case 12 is disposed in a lateral position of the user's face and the reading port 14 is on the front side of the user. The case 12 is configured to be attached to the user's ear. According to this configuration, the orientation of the user's face and the reading direction are easily linked well, and the information code arranged on the side facing the user's face can be read smoothly and smoothly.
　更に、ケース１２は、取付部６０の位置から所定方向に延びる延出部を備え、且つ延出部における取付部６０とは反対側の端部寄りに読取口１４が設けられており、取付部６０は、延出部が使用者の耳から少なくとも前側に延びる構成でケース１２を使用者の耳に取り付ける構成となっている。このようにケース１２を耳よりもやや前に延出させ、その端部側の読取口１４を介して情報コードを読み取るようにすると、使用者の顔を極力撮像エリアから除いて顔の前の空間をより広く撮像しやすくなる。 Furthermore, the case 12 includes an extension portion extending in a predetermined direction from the position of the attachment portion 60, and the reading port 14 is provided near the end portion of the extension portion opposite to the attachment portion 60. Reference numeral 60 denotes a configuration in which the case 12 is attached to the user's ear in such a configuration that the extending portion extends at least to the front side from the user's ear. In this way, when the case 12 is extended slightly ahead of the ear and the information code is read through the reading port 14 on the end side, the space in front of the face is removed by removing the user's face from the imaging area as much as possible. It becomes easy to image more widely.
　また、取付部６０は、使用者の耳の穴に挿入される耳挿入部６１を有している。この構成によれば、耳の穴を利用してケース１２を保持することができる。更に、取付部６０の位置と耳の穴の位置を正確に位置合わせすることができるため、耳の穴を基準としてケース１２の位置を正確に定めやすくなる。 Moreover, the attachment part 60 has the ear | edge insertion part 61 inserted in a user's ear | edge hole. According to this configuration, the case 12 can be held using the hole in the ear. Furthermore, since the position of the mounting portion 60 and the position of the ear hole can be accurately aligned, the position of the case 12 can be accurately determined with reference to the ear hole.
　また、取付部６０は、使用者の耳に掛けられる耳掛け部６２を有している。この構成によれば、ケース１２を使用者の耳により安定的に保持しやすくなる。 Further, the mounting portion 60 has an ear hooking portion 62 that can be hung on the user's ear. According to this configuration, the case 12 can be easily held stably by the user's ear.
　また、耳掛け部６２は、ケース１２の一部又はケース１２に連結された連結部に対して着脱可能とされており、ケース１２の一部又はケース１２に連結された連結部には、使用者の左耳に耳掛け部６２を取り付ける場合に耳掛け部６２が固定されるべき第１固定部７１と、使用者の右耳に耳掛け部６２を取り付ける場合に耳掛け部６２が固定されるべき第２固定部７２とが形成されている。この構成によれば、使用者の右の耳にも左の耳にも読取装置を取り付けることができ、各耳に取り付けるときには、耳掛け部６２をその耳に合わせた位置に固定することができる。 The ear hook 62 is detachable from a part of the case 12 or a connecting part connected to the case 12, and is used for a part of the case 12 or a connecting part connected to the case 12. A first fixing portion 71 to which the ear hooking portion 62 should be fixed when attaching the ear hooking portion 62 to the user's left ear, and an ear hooking portion 62 when the ear hooking portion 62 is attached to the user's right ear. The second fixing portion 72 to be formed is formed. According to this configuration, the reading device can be attached to either the right ear or the left ear of the user, and when attaching to each ear, the ear hooking portion 62 can be fixed at a position corresponding to the ear. .
　また、ケース１２は、情報コードからの光を導入可能な読取口１４を備えており、取付部６０は、当該取付部６０が使用者の左耳に取り付けられた場合でも使用者の右耳に取り付けられた場合でも、読取口１４が使用者の前側を向く構成でケース１２を使用者の耳に取り付け可能とされている。この構成によれば、使用者の右の耳に取り付けた場合でも、左の耳に取り付けた場合でも、使用者の顔の向きと読み取りの方向を良好に連動させることができる。 Further, the case 12 includes a reading port 14 through which light from the information code can be introduced, and the attachment portion 60 is attached to the user's right ear even when the attachment portion 60 is attached to the user's left ear. Even when attached, the case 12 can be attached to the user's ear in a configuration in which the reading port 14 faces the front side of the user. According to this configuration, it is possible to satisfactorily link the orientation of the user's face and the reading direction, whether attached to the user's right ear or the left ear.
　また、照明光を照射する照明光源２１及びマーカ光を照射するマーカ光照射部５０を有し、取付部６０は、当該取付部６０が使用者の左耳に取り付けられた場合でも使用者の右耳に取り付けられた場合でも、照明光源２１からの照射光及びマーカ光照射部５０からのマーカ光が使用者の前側に照射される構成でケース１２を使用者の耳に取り付け可能とされている。この構成によれば、使用者の右の耳に取り付けた場合でも、左の耳に取り付けた場合でも、読取側である使用者の前側に照明光及びマーカ光を照射可能となる。 Moreover, it has the illumination light source 21 which irradiates illumination light, and the marker light irradiation part 50 which irradiates marker light, and even when the said attachment part 60 is attached to a user's left ear, the attachment part 60 is right of a user. Even when attached to the ear, the case 12 can be attached to the user's ear in a configuration in which the irradiation light from the illumination light source 21 and the marker light from the marker light irradiation unit 50 are irradiated to the front side of the user. . According to this configuration, it is possible to irradiate illumination light and marker light to the front side of the user on the reading side, whether attached to the right ear of the user or attached to the left ear.
　また、ケース１２の内部又は外部には、センサ部４６が設けられており、処理部は、少なくともセンサ部４６で所定の検出結果が得られたことを条件として情報コードの解読を行う。この構成では、センサ部４６で所定の検出結果が検出されるまでは、処理部による解読処理を停止させて省電力化を図ることができ、センサ部４６で所定の検出結果が生じるように対応をとることで解読開始状態に復帰させることができる。 Also, a sensor unit 46 is provided inside or outside the case 12, and the processing unit decodes the information code on the condition that a predetermined detection result is obtained at least by the sensor unit 46. In this configuration, until the predetermined detection result is detected by the sensor unit 46, the decoding process by the processing unit can be stopped to save power, and the predetermined detection result can be generated by the sensor unit 46. Can be restored to the decoding start state.
　また、センサ部４６は、取付部６０が使用者の耳に取り付けられた所定状態を検知可能とされており、処理部は、センサ部４６により所定状態が検知されたことを条件として、情報コードの解読を行う構成となっている。この構成では、取付部６０が使用者の耳に取り付けられるまでは、処理部による解読処理を停止させて省電力化を図ることができ、取付部６０が耳に取り付けられた場合には解読開始状態に復帰させることができる。 The sensor unit 46 can detect a predetermined state in which the attachment unit 60 is attached to the user's ear, and the processing unit can detect the information code on the condition that the predetermined state is detected by the sensor unit 46. It is the structure which decodes. In this configuration, until the attachment portion 60 is attached to the user's ear, the decoding process by the processing portion can be stopped to save power, and when the attachment portion 60 is attached to the ear, decoding starts. It can be returned to the state.
　また、照明光を照射する照明光源２１及びマーカ光を照射するマーカ光照射部５０の少なくともいずれかと、所定状態が生じたことを条件として、照明光源２１及びマーカ光照射部５０の少なくともいずれかを動作させ、照明光及びマーカ光の少なくともいずれかの照射を開始する照射制御部とを有している。この構成では、所定状態が生じるまでは照明光源２１及びマーカ光照射部５０の少なくともいずれかを動作させずに一層の省電力化を図ることができ、所定状態が生じるように対応することで、照明光源２１及びマーカ光照射部５０の少なくともいずれかを動作させ、読み取りを行いやすくすることができる。 In addition, at least one of the illumination light source 21 and the marker light irradiation unit 50 that irradiates the illumination light and the marker light irradiation unit 50 that emits the marker light, and at least one of the illumination light source 21 and the marker light irradiation unit 50 are provided on the condition that a predetermined state has occurred. An irradiation control unit that is operated and starts irradiation of at least one of illumination light and marker light. In this configuration, it is possible to achieve further power saving without operating at least one of the illumination light source 21 and the marker light irradiation unit 50 until a predetermined state occurs, and by responding so that the predetermined state occurs, Reading can be facilitated by operating at least one of the illumination light source 21 and the marker light irradiation unit 50.
　また、ケース１２の外側に設けられた外部装置と通信を行う通信部４８を備え、通信部４８により外部装置への情報送信又は外部装置からの情報受信が可能とされている。この構成によれば、外部装置との間で情報のやり取りを行うことができるため、読取装置内に全ての処理機能を持たせずに一部を外部装置で分担することができる。従って、読取装置の簡素化を図りやすくなり、小型化、軽量化の面で有利となる。 Also, a communication unit 48 that communicates with an external device provided outside the case 12 is provided, and the communication unit 48 can transmit information to the external device or receive information from the external device. According to this configuration, since information can be exchanged with the external apparatus, a part can be shared by the external apparatus without having all the processing functions in the reading apparatus. Therefore, it is easy to simplify the reading device, which is advantageous in terms of size and weight.
　また、ケース１２内又はケース１２に取り付けられる部分には、少なくとも処理部での読取結果を報知する報知部が設けられている。この構成によれば、処理部の読取結果を使用者に良好に伝達することができる。特に、耳の近くで報知がなされるため、報知されたことが使用者により確実に伝達されやすくなる。 In the case 12 or a portion attached to the case 12, a notification unit that notifies at least the reading result of the processing unit is provided. According to this configuration, the reading result of the processing unit can be satisfactorily transmitted to the user. In particular, since the notification is made near the ear, the notification is easily transmitted to the user reliably.
　また、取付部６０は、使用者の耳の穴に挿入される耳挿入部６１を有し、耳挿入部６１には、音声を発する発音部４４、又は音声を発する発音部４４からの音を導出する導出部が設けられている。この構成によれば、耳挿入部６１を取り付ける部材として機能させるだけでなく、イヤホンとしても機能させることができる。更に、この取付構造では、読取装置内で発生する音声を耳に挿入された部分から直接的に耳に伝達することができるため、小さな音声出力でもその内容を確実に使用者に伝えることができる。このような効果は、使用時に騒音が想定されるケース１２で一層顕著となる。 Moreover, the attachment part 60 has the ear | edge insertion part 61 inserted in a user's ear hole, and the sound from the sound generation part 44 which emits a sound, or the sound generation part 44 which emits a sound is transmitted to the ear insertion part 61. A deriving unit for deriving is provided. According to this structure, it can function not only as a member for attaching the ear insertion portion 61 but also as an earphone. Further, with this mounting structure, the sound generated in the reader can be transmitted directly to the ear from the portion inserted into the ear, so that the content can be reliably transmitted to the user even with a small sound output. . Such an effect becomes more remarkable in case 12 where noise is assumed during use.
　また、処理部が情報コードを解読して得られた解読情報に基づき、当該解読情報の解読後に対応すべき情報を音声案内する音声案内部を有する。この構成によれば、情報コードの解読後に使用者が迅速且つ適切に対応しやすくなる。更に、読取装置は耳に取り付けられ、音声案内は耳に近い位置から発せられるため、使用者は音声案内を良好に聞き取りやすくなる。 Also, based on the decoded information obtained by the processing unit decoding the information code, the processing unit has a voice guidance unit that provides voice guidance of information to be dealt with after decoding the decoded information. According to this configuration, it becomes easy for the user to respond quickly and appropriately after decoding the information code. Furthermore, since the reading device is attached to the ear and the voice guidance is emitted from a position close to the ear, the user can easily hear the voice guidance.
　また、ケース１２に保持されると共にケース１２の外部に設けられた外部装置に電気的に接続されるケーブル８０を備えており、ケース１２は、長手状に構成され、当該ケース１２の長手方向一方寄りに取付部６０が設けられ、ケース１２の長手方向一方側において当該ケース１２の短手方向一方側からケーブル８０がケース１２外に引き出されている。この構成によれば、ケース１２がある程度引っ張られてもケース１２に回転力が生じにくいため、使用者の顔に対する読取装置全体の相対的な向きが安定的に維持されやすくなる。 In addition, a cable 80 that is held by the case 12 and is electrically connected to an external device provided outside the case 12 is provided. The case 12 is configured in a longitudinal shape, and one of the longitudinal directions of the case 12 is provided. A mounting portion 60 is provided on the side, and the cable 80 is drawn out of the case 12 from one side in the short direction of the case 12 on one side in the longitudinal direction of the case 12. According to this configuration, even if the case 12 is pulled to some extent, it is difficult for rotational force to be generated in the case 12, so that the relative orientation of the entire reading apparatus with respect to the user's face is easily maintained stably.
　また、ケース１２において取付部６０が設けられた壁部とは反対側の壁部には、取付部６０の裏側の位置に、外部操作が可能な操作スイッチ４２が設けられている。この構成では、回転中心部となる取付部６０の裏側で操作スイッチ４２が操作されるため、操作スイッチ４２に対して押圧操作等がなされたとしても、その操作力によって取付部６０付近と中心とするモーメントが生じにくいため、ケース１２が回転しにくくなる。従って、使用者の顔に対する読取装置全体の相対的な向きが安定的に維持されやすくなる。 Further, an operation switch 42 capable of external operation is provided at a position on the back side of the mounting portion 60 on the wall portion opposite to the wall portion where the mounting portion 60 is provided in the case 12. In this configuration, since the operation switch 42 is operated on the back side of the attachment portion 60 serving as the rotation center portion, even if a pressing operation or the like is performed on the operation switch 42, the operation force causes the vicinity of the attachment portion 60 and the center. Since the moment is not easily generated, the case 12 is difficult to rotate. Therefore, the relative orientation of the entire reading apparatus with respect to the user's face is easily maintained stably.
　[第２実施形態]
　次に、第２実施形態について説明する。 [Second Embodiment]
Next, a second embodiment will be described.
　第２実施形態に係る読取装置１０は、第１実施形態の特徴を全て含み、更なる特徴が付加されている。よって、図１～図１１で示した構成は、第１実施形態と同一であるとして詳細な説明は省略し、適宜、図１～図１１を参照することとする。 The reading apparatus 10 according to the second embodiment includes all the features of the first embodiment, and further features are added. Therefore, the configuration shown in FIGS. 1 to 11 is the same as that of the first embodiment, and a detailed description thereof will be omitted, and FIGS. 1 to 11 will be referred to as appropriate.
　まず、第２実施形態の代表例について説明する。 First, a representative example of the second embodiment will be described.
　本構成では、第１実施形態の構成に加え、情報コードの読取時の具体的処理が特徴として付加されており、具体的には、図１７のような流れで読取処理が行われる。図１７の読取処理は、所定の開始条件の成立を条件として実行される処理であり、処理開始に伴い、受光センサ（撮像部）２３がケース外に設定された撮像範囲を継続的に撮像する（Ｓ２０１）。このＳ２０１では、図２に示す照明光源２１から撮像範囲に向けて照明光を照射しながら、照明光が照射されたエリアを撮像する（図１８の上図参照）。そして、撮像範囲に情報コードが入り込み、情報コードが撮像された場合には、その撮像された情報コードのコード画像を解析する（Ｓ２０２）。このＳ２０２では、情報コードのコード画像に対して公知のデコード処理を試み、デコード処理が成功した場合、情報コードに記録されたデータを取得する（Ｓ２０３）。そして、Ｓ２０３で取得されたデータ（情報コードに記録されたデータ）を、予めメモリ３５（図２）に記憶された期待値と照合し（Ｓ２０４）、データが期待値と一致するか否かを判断する（Ｓ２０５）。 In this configuration, in addition to the configuration of the first embodiment, specific processing at the time of reading the information code is added as a feature, and specifically, the reading processing is performed in the flow as shown in FIG. The reading process in FIG. 17 is a process that is executed on the condition that a predetermined start condition is satisfied. As the process starts, the light receiving sensor (imaging unit) 23 continuously captures an imaging range set outside the case. (S201). In S201, the area irradiated with the illumination light is imaged while illuminating the illumination light from the illumination light source 21 shown in FIG. 2 toward the imaging range (see the upper diagram of FIG. 18). When the information code enters the imaging range and the information code is captured, the code image of the captured information code is analyzed (S202). In S202, a known decoding process is attempted on the code image of the information code. When the decoding process is successful, the data recorded in the information code is acquired (S203). The data acquired in S203 (data recorded in the information code) is collated with an expected value stored in advance in the memory 35 (FIG. 2) (S204), and whether or not the data matches the expected value. Judgment is made (S205).
　メモリ３５には、１又は複数の期待値が予め登録されており、Ｓ２０３で得られた解読データが、メモリ３５に登録された期待値と一致する場合には、Ｓ２０５にてＯＫに進む。逆に、Ｓ２０３で得られた解読データが、メモリ３５に登録された期待値と一致しない場合には、Ｓ２０５にてＮＧに進む。例えば、期待値として、「1234567890001」、「1234567890002」、「1234567890003」の３つの品番リストがメモリ３５に記憶されており、Ｓ２０３で得られた情報コードの解読データが「1234567890001」である場合、解読データが期待値と一致するため、Ｓ２０５にてＯＫに進み、Ｓ２０６の処理を行う。一方、Ｓ２０３で得られた情報コードの解読データが「1234567890009」である場合、解読データが期待値と一致しないため、Ｓ２０５にてＮＧに進み、Ｓ２０７の処理を行う。 In the memory 35, one or a plurality of expected values are registered in advance. If the decoded data obtained in S203 matches the expected value registered in the memory 35, the process proceeds to OK in S205. Conversely, if the decrypted data obtained in S203 does not match the expected value registered in the memory 35, the process proceeds to NG in S205. For example, as an expected value, three product number lists of “1234567890001”, “1234567890002”, and “1234567890003” are stored in the memory 35, and the decryption data of the information code obtained in S203 is “1234567890001”. Since the data matches the expected value, the process proceeds to OK in S205, and the process of S206 is performed. On the other hand, when the decrypted data of the information code obtained in S203 is “1234567890009”, the decrypted data does not match the expected value, so that the process proceeds to NG in S205 and the process of S207 is performed.
　Ｓ２０５でＯＫに進む場合、Ｓ２０６では、Ｓ２０１から照射され続けていた照明光源２１の照明光を消灯させる（図１８の左下図参照）。このように照明光が消灯されたことが、照合結果の一致の合図となるため、使用者は、照明光の消灯によって照合結果の一致を把握することができる。一方、Ｓ２０５でＮＧに進む場合、Ｓ２０７では、Ｓ２０１から照射され続けていた照明光源２１の照明光を点滅させる（図１８の右下図参照）。このように照明光が点滅されたことが、照合結果の不一致の合図となるため、使用者は、照明光の点滅によって照合結果の不一致を把握することができる。 When the process proceeds to OK in S205, the illumination light of the illumination light source 21 that has been irradiated from S201 is turned off in S206 (see the lower left diagram in FIG. 18). Since the illumination light is turned off in this manner is a signal for matching the matching result, the user can grasp the matching result by turning off the illumination light. On the other hand, when the process proceeds to NG in S205, in S207, the illumination light of the illumination light source 21 that has been irradiated from S201 is blinked (see the lower right diagram in FIG. 18). The fact that the illumination light is blinked in this way is a signal of the mismatch of the collation result, and thus the user can grasp the mismatch of the collation result by the blinking of the illumination light.
　本構成では、照明光源２１が「光源」の一例に相当し、ケース１２と一体的に設けられ、ケース１２の外部に光を照射するように機能する。また、撮像部２３が「撮像部」の一例に相当し、「光源」によってケース１２の外部に向けて光が照射された状態でケース１２の外部を撮像する機能を有する。また、制御回路４０（図２）が「処理部」、「解読部」に相当し、撮像部２３によって撮像された情報コードに記録されたデータを解読する機能を有し、具体的には、「光源」によってケース１２の外部に光が照射された状態で撮像部２３によって撮像されたコードを解読するように機能する。また、制御回路４０が「判定部」の一例に相当し、「解読部」による情報コードの解読結果が、所定の成功状態である場合（上述の例では、Ｓ２０３で得られた解読データとメモリ３５に記憶された期待値とが一致する場合）と、所定の成功状態ではない所定の失敗状態である場合（上述の例では、Ｓ２０３で得られた解読データとメモリ３５に記憶された期待値とが一致しない場合）とを判定するように機能する。また、制御回路４０が「照射状態制御部」の一例に相当し、「解読部」によって情報コードの解読が試みられた後、「光源」からの光の照射状態を、「判定部」による判定結果に応じた状態に制御するように機能し、具体的には、「判定部」によって所定の成功状態であると判定された場合の「光源」からの光の点灯時間又は消灯時間のいずれかの時間の間隔を、「判定部」によって所定の失敗状態と判定された場合の「光源」からの光の点灯時間又は消灯時間のいずれかの時間の間隔と異ならせる制御を行う構成となっている。 In this configuration, the illumination light source 21 corresponds to an example of a “light source”, is provided integrally with the case 12, and functions to irradiate light to the outside of the case 12. The imaging unit 23 corresponds to an example of an “imaging unit”, and has a function of imaging the outside of the case 12 in a state where light is emitted toward the outside of the case 12 by the “light source”. The control circuit 40 (FIG. 2) corresponds to a “processing unit” and a “decoding unit”, and has a function of decoding data recorded in an information code imaged by the imaging unit 23. Specifically, It functions to decode the code imaged by the imaging unit 23 in a state where light is irradiated outside the case 12 by the “light source”. In addition, when the control circuit 40 corresponds to an example of a “determination unit” and the decoding result of the information code by the “decoding unit” is in a predetermined success state (in the above example, the decoded data and the memory obtained in S203 are And the expected value stored in the memory 35 in the above-described example and the predetermined failure state that is not the predetermined success state (in the above example, the expected value stored in the memory 35). Function in the case of not matching). The control circuit 40 corresponds to an example of an “irradiation state control unit”, and after the information code is attempted to be decoded by the “decoding unit”, the irradiation state of the light from the “light source” is determined by the “determination unit”. It functions to control the state according to the result. Specifically, either the lighting time or the extinguishing time of the light from the “light source” when it is determined by the “determination unit” to be a predetermined success state The time interval is controlled to be different from the time interval of either the lighting time or the light-off time of the light from the “light source” when the “determination unit” determines that the predetermined failure state has occurred. Yes.
　以上のような本構成でも、第１実施形態と同様の効果が得られる。 Even with this configuration as described above, the same effects as in the first embodiment can be obtained.
　更に、本構成によれば、図１８のようにケース１２を使用者の身体に装着してケース１２を直接的に目視しにくい状態であっても、使用者は「光源」からの光の照射状態によって、情報コードの解読結果を把握することができるようになる。 Further, according to the present configuration, even when the case 12 is attached to the user's body and the case 12 is difficult to see directly as shown in FIG. 18, the user can irradiate light from the “light source”. Depending on the state, the decoding result of the information code can be grasped.
　また、撮像部２３での撮像時に用いる光源を利用して情報コードの解読結果を報知することができるため、装置構成の簡素化を図りやすくなる。 In addition, since the information code decoding result can be notified using the light source used at the time of image pickup by the image pickup unit 23, the device configuration can be easily simplified.
　また、この構成によれば、「光源」からの光の点灯時間又は消灯時間を調整することによって情報コードの解読結果を報知することができるため、ハードウェア的な負担を抑え、より簡易な制御によって報知することが可能となる。 In addition, according to this configuration, it is possible to notify the decoding result of the information code by adjusting the lighting time or light extinguishing time of the light from the “light source”, thereby reducing hardware burden and simpler control. Can be notified.
　[第２実施形態の変更例１] 
　次に、第２実施形態の変更例１について説明する。 [Modification 1 of the second embodiment]
Next, Modification 1 of the second embodiment will be described.
　第２実施形態の変更例１に係る読取装置１０は、第１実施形態の特徴を全て含み、更なる特徴が付加されている。よって、図１～図１１で示した構成は、第１実施形態と同一であるとして詳細な説明は省略し、適宜、図１～図１１を参照することとする。 The reading apparatus 10 according to the first modification of the second embodiment includes all the features of the first embodiment, and further features are added. Therefore, the configuration shown in FIGS. 1 to 11 is the same as that of the first embodiment, and a detailed description thereof will be omitted, and FIGS. 1 to 11 will be referred to as appropriate.
　変更例１でも、第１実施形態の構成に加え、情報コードの読取時の具体的処理が特徴として付加されており、具体的には、図１９のような流れで読取処理が行われる。図１９の読取処理は、所定の開始条件の成立を条件として実行される処理であり、処理開始に伴い、受光センサ（撮像部）２３がケース外に設定された撮像範囲を継続的に撮像する（Ｓ２１１）。このＳ２１１では、図２に示す照明光源２１（照明光照射部）から撮像範囲に向けて照明光を照射しながら、照明光が照射されたエリアを撮像する（図２０の上図参照）。そして、撮像範囲に情報コードが入り込み、情報コードが撮像された場合には、その撮像された情報コードのコード画像を解析する（Ｓ２１２）。このＳ２１２では、情報コードのコード画像に対して公知のデコード処理を試み、デコード処理が成功した場合、情報コードに記録されたデータを取得する（Ｓ２１３）。そして、Ｓ２１３で取得されたデータ（情報コードに記録されたデータ）を、予めメモリ３５（図２）に記憶された期待値と照合し（Ｓ２１４）、データが期待値と一致するか否かを判断する（Ｓ２１５）。 Also in the first modification, in addition to the configuration of the first embodiment, specific processing at the time of reading the information code is added as a feature, and specifically, the reading processing is performed in the flow as shown in FIG. The reading process in FIG. 19 is a process that is executed on condition that a predetermined start condition is satisfied. As the process starts, the light receiving sensor (imaging unit) 23 continuously captures an imaging range set outside the case. (S211). In S211, the area irradiated with the illumination light is imaged while illuminating the illumination light from the illumination light source 21 (illumination light irradiation unit) shown in FIG. 2 toward the imaging range (see the upper diagram of FIG. 20). When the information code enters the imaging range and the information code is captured, the code image of the captured information code is analyzed (S212). In S212, a known decoding process is attempted on the code image of the information code. When the decoding process is successful, the data recorded in the information code is acquired (S213). The data acquired in S213 (data recorded in the information code) is collated with an expected value stored in advance in the memory 35 (FIG. 2) (S214), and whether or not the data matches the expected value. Judgment is made (S215).
　本構成でも、メモリ３５には、１又は複数の期待値が予め登録されており、Ｓ２１３で得られた解読データが、メモリ３５に登録された期待値と一致する場合には、Ｓ２１５にてＯＫに進む。逆に、Ｓ２１３で得られた解読データが、メモリ３５に登録された期待値と一致しない場合には、Ｓ２１５にてＮＧに進む。例えば、期待値として、「1234567890001」、「1234567890002」、「1234567890003」の３つの品番リストがメモリ３５に記憶されており、Ｓ２１３で得られた情報コードの解読データが「1234567890001」である場合、解読データが期待値と一致するため、Ｓ２１５にてＯＫに進み、Ｓ２１６の処理を行う。一方、Ｓ２１３で得られた情報コードの解読データが「1234567890009」である場合、解読データが期待値と一致しないため、Ｓ２１５にてＮＧに進み、Ｓ２１７の処理を行う。 Also in this configuration, when one or a plurality of expected values are registered in the memory 35 in advance, and the decrypted data obtained in S213 matches the expected value registered in the memory 35, it is OK in S215. Proceed to Conversely, if the decrypted data obtained in S213 does not match the expected value registered in the memory 35, the process proceeds to NG in S215. For example, as an expected value, three product number lists of “1234567890001”, “1234567890002”, and “1234567890003” are stored in the memory 35, and the decryption data of the information code obtained in S213 is “1234567890001”. Since the data matches the expected value, the process proceeds to OK in S215, and the process of S216 is performed. On the other hand, if the decrypted data of the information code obtained in S213 is “1234567890009”, the decrypted data does not match the expected value, so the process proceeds to NG in S215, and the process of S217 is performed.
　Ｓ２１５でＯＫに進む場合、Ｓ２１６では、Ｓ２１１から照射され続けていた照明光源２１の照明光を消灯させ、青色ＬＥＤ（図２では図示略）によって青色（第１色）の光を照射する（図２０の左下図参照）。このように青色の光が照射されたことが、照合結果の一致の合図となるため、使用者は、青色の光によって照合結果の一致を把握することができる。一方、Ｓ２１５でＮＧに進む場合、Ｓ２１７では、Ｓ２１１から照射され続けていた照明光源２１の照明光を消灯させ、赤色ＬＥＤ（図２では図示略）によって赤色（第２色）の光を照射する（図２０の右下図参照）。このように赤色の光が照射されたことが、照合結果の不一致の合図となるため、使用者は、赤色の光によって照合結果の不一致を把握することができる。 When the process proceeds to OK in S215, in S216, the illumination light of the illumination light source 21 that has been irradiated from S211 is turned off, and blue (first color) light is emitted from the blue LED (not shown in FIG. 2) (FIG. 2). 20 (see lower left figure). The fact that the blue light is irradiated in this manner is a signal for the matching of the matching results, so that the user can grasp the matching of the matching results by the blue light. On the other hand, when proceeding to NG in S215, in S217, the illumination light of the illumination light source 21 that has been continuously irradiated from S211 is turned off, and red (second color) light is emitted by the red LED (not shown in FIG. 2). (See the lower right diagram in FIG. 20). Since irradiation with red light in this way is a signal of a mismatch in the collation result, the user can grasp the mismatch in the collation result with the red light.
　本構成では、上述の青色ＬＥＤ及び赤色ＬＥＤが「光源」の一例に相当し、ケース１２と一体的に設けられ、ケース１２の外部に光を照射するように機能する。また、照明光源２１は、本構成では、「照明光照射部」の一例に相当し、上記「光源」とは別光源として構成され、ケースの外部に向けて光を照射するように機能する。また、撮像部２３が「撮像部」の一例に相当し、「照明光照射部」によってケース１２の外部に向けて光が照射された状態でケース１２の外部を撮像する機能を有する。また、制御回路４０（図２）が「処理部」、「解読部」に相当し、撮像部２３によって撮像された情報コードに記録されたデータを解読する機能を有し、具体的には、「照明光照射部」によってケース１２の外部に光が照射された状態で撮像部２３によって撮像されたコードを解読するように機能する。また、制御回路４０が「判定部」の一例に相当し、「解読部」による情報コードの解読結果が、所定の成功状態である場合（上述の例では、Ｓ２１３で得られた解読データとメモリ３５に記憶された期待値とが一致する場合）と、所定の成功状態ではない所定の失敗状態である場合（上述の例では、Ｓ２１３で得られた解読データとメモリ３５に記憶された期待値とが一致しない場合）とを判定するように機能する。また、制御回路４０が「照射状態制御部」の一例に相当し、「解読部」によって情報コードの解読が試みられた後、青色ＬＥＤ及び赤色ＬＥＤ（光源）からの光の照射状態を、「判定部」による判定結果に応じた状態に制御するように機能し、具体的には、「判定部」によって所定の成功状態であると判定された場合（上述の例では、Ｓ２１５でＯＫの場合）、青色ＬＥＤ及び赤色ＬＥＤ（光源）から青色（第１色）の光を照射する第１色照射状態とし、「判定部」によって所定の失敗状態と判定された場合（上述の例では、Ｓ２１５でＮＧの場合）、青色ＬＥＤ及び赤色ＬＥＤ（光源）から第１色とは異なる赤色（第２色）の光を照射する第２色照射状態とする構成となっている。 In this configuration, the blue LED and the red LED described above correspond to an example of a “light source”, and are provided integrally with the case 12 and function to irradiate the outside of the case 12 with light. The illumination light source 21 corresponds to an example of an “illumination light irradiating unit” in the present configuration, is configured as a light source different from the “light source”, and functions to irradiate light toward the outside of the case. The imaging unit 23 corresponds to an example of an “imaging unit”, and has a function of imaging the outside of the case 12 in a state where light is emitted toward the outside of the case 12 by the “illumination light irradiation unit”. The control circuit 40 (FIG. 2) corresponds to a “processing unit” and a “decoding unit”, and has a function of decoding data recorded in an information code imaged by the imaging unit 23. Specifically, The “illumination light irradiating unit” functions to decode the code imaged by the imaging unit 23 in a state where light is irradiated outside the case 12. Further, when the control circuit 40 corresponds to an example of a “determination unit” and the decoding result of the information code by the “decoding unit” is in a predetermined success state (in the above example, the decoded data and memory obtained in S213 are And the expected value stored in the memory 35 in the example described above and the expected value stored in the memory 35 (in the above example). Function in the case of not matching). The control circuit 40 corresponds to an example of an “irradiation state control unit”. After the information code is attempted to be decoded by the “decoding unit”, the irradiation state of light from the blue LED and the red LED (light source) is expressed as “ It functions to control the state according to the determination result by the “determination unit”, specifically, when it is determined by the “determination unit” that the predetermined successful state is satisfied (in the above example, in the case of OK in S215) ), A first color irradiation state in which blue (first color) light is emitted from a blue LED and a red LED (light source), and the “determination unit” determines a predetermined failure state (in the above example, S215) In the case of NG), a second color irradiation state in which red (second color) light different from the first color is emitted from the blue LED and the red LED (light source) is used.
　以上のような本構成でも、第１実施形態と同様の効果が得られ、更に、本構成でも、使用者は「光源」からの光の照射状態によって、情報コードの解読結果を把握することができるようになる。更に、この構成では、撮像部での撮像時に照明光を照射する光源（照明光照射部）とは異なる光源を利用して情報コードの解読結果を報知することができるため、報知に適した光源をより自由に選定しやすくなる。 Even with this configuration as described above, the same effects as those of the first embodiment can be obtained. Further, even with this configuration, the user can grasp the decoding result of the information code according to the irradiation state of the light from the “light source”. become able to. Furthermore, in this configuration, since the decoding result of the information code can be notified using a light source different from the light source that emits illumination light (illumination light irradiation unit) at the time of imaging by the imaging unit, a light source suitable for notification Can be selected more freely.
　また、この構成では、所定の成功状態のときの報知色と、所定の失敗状態のときの報知色とが異なるため、各状態をより確実に把握しやすくなる。 Further, in this configuration, since the notification color in the predetermined success state and the notification color in the predetermined failure state are different, it becomes easier to grasp each state more reliably.
　[第２実施形態の変更例２] 
　次に、第２実施形態の変更例２について説明する。 [Second Modification of Second Embodiment]
Next, a second modification of the second embodiment will be described.
　第２実施形態の変更例２に係る読取装置１０は、第１実施形態の特徴を全て含み、更なる特徴が付加されている。よって、図１～図１１で示した構成は、第１実施形態と同一であるとして詳細な説明は省略し、適宜、図１～図１１を参照することとする。 The reading apparatus 10 according to the second modification of the second embodiment includes all the features of the first embodiment, and further features are added. Therefore, the configuration shown in FIGS. 1 to 11 is the same as that of the first embodiment, and a detailed description thereof will be omitted, and FIGS. 1 to 11 will be referred to as appropriate.
　変更例２でも、第１実施形態の構成に加え、情報コードの読取時の具体的処理が特徴として付加されており、具体的には、図２１のような流れで読取処理が行われる。図２１の読取処理は、所定の開始条件の成立を条件として実行される処理であり、処理開始に伴い、受光センサ（撮像部）２３がケース外に設定された撮像範囲を継続的に撮像する（Ｓ２２１）。このＳ２２１では、図２に示す照明光源２１（照明光照射部）から撮像範囲に向けて照明光を照射しながら、照明光が照射されたエリアを撮像する（図２２（Ａ）の左図参照）。そして、撮像範囲に情報コードが入り込み、情報コードが撮像された場合には、その撮像された情報コードのコード画像を解析する（Ｓ２２２）。このＳ２２２では、情報コードのコード画像に対して公知のデコード処理を試み、デコード処理が成功した場合、情報コードに記録されたデータを取得する（Ｓ２２３）。そして、Ｓ２２３で取得されたデータ（情報コードに記録されたデータ）を、予めメモリ３５（図２）に記憶された期待値と照合し（Ｓ２２４）、データが期待値と一致するか否かを判断する（Ｓ２２５）。 Also in the modified example 2, in addition to the configuration of the first embodiment, a specific process at the time of reading the information code is added as a feature, and specifically, the reading process is performed in the flow as shown in FIG. The reading process in FIG. 21 is a process that is executed on condition that a predetermined start condition is satisfied. As the process starts, the light receiving sensor (imaging unit) 23 continuously captures an imaging range set outside the case. (S221). In S221, the area irradiated with the illumination light is imaged while illuminating the illumination light toward the imaging range from the illumination light source 21 (illumination light irradiation unit) shown in FIG. 2 (see the left figure in FIG. 22A). ). When the information code enters the imaging range and the information code is captured, the code image of the captured information code is analyzed (S222). In S222, a known decoding process is attempted on the code image of the information code, and when the decoding process is successful, the data recorded in the information code is acquired (S223). Then, the data acquired in S223 (data recorded in the information code) is collated with the expected value stored in advance in the memory 35 (FIG. 2) (S224), and whether or not the data matches the expected value. Judgment is made (S225).
　本構成でも、メモリ３５には、１又は複数の期待値が予め登録されており、Ｓ２２３で得られた解読データが、メモリ３５に登録された期待値と一致する場合には、Ｓ２２５にてＯＫに進む。逆に、Ｓ２２３で得られた解読データが、メモリ３５に登録された期待値と一致しない場合には、Ｓ２２５にてＮＧに進む。例えば、期待値として、「1234567890001」、「1234567890002」、「1234567890003」の３つの品番リストがメモリ３５に記憶されており、Ｓ２２３で得られた情報コードの解読データが「1234567890001」である場合、解読データが期待値と一致するため、Ｓ２２５にてＯＫに進み、Ｓ２２６の処理を行う。一方、Ｓ２２３で得られた情報コードの解読データが「1234567890009」である場合、解読データが期待値と一致しないため、Ｓ２２５にてＮＧに進み、Ｓ２２７の処理を行う。 Also in this configuration, when one or a plurality of expected values are registered in the memory 35 in advance, and the decrypted data obtained in S223 matches the expected value registered in the memory 35, it is OK in S225. Proceed to Conversely, if the decrypted data obtained in S223 does not match the expected value registered in the memory 35, the process proceeds to NG in S225. For example, as an expected value, three product number lists of “1234567890001”, “1234567890002”, and “1234567890003” are stored in the memory 35, and the decryption data of the information code obtained in S223 is “1234567890001”. Since the data matches the expected value, the process proceeds to OK in S225, and the process of S226 is performed. On the other hand, if the decrypted data of the information code obtained in S223 is “1234567890009”, the decrypted data does not match the expected value, so the process proceeds to NG in S225, and the process of S227 is performed.
　Ｓ２２５でＯＫに進む場合、Ｓ２２６では、Ｓ２２１から照射され続けていた照明光源２１の照明光を消灯させ、文字情報表示部（図２では図示略）により、Ｓ２２６に対応する文字情報（所定の成功状態に対応する文字情報）をスクリーン表示する（図２２（Ａ）の右図）。この文字情報表示部は、文字情報をスクリーン表示できる装置であれば公知の様々な構成を用いることができる。Ｓ２２６で表示される文字情報は、例えば図２２（Ｂ）のような情報であり、この例では、Ｓ２２３で解読された解読データと、Ｓ２２４での照合が成功したことを示す情報（即ち、Ｓ２２３で解読された解読データが期待値と一致していることを示す情報）とを文字情報として表示している。このように、照合が成功したことを示す情報が表示されたことが、照合結果の一致の合図となるため、使用者は、この情報によって照合結果の一致を把握することができる。一方、Ｓ２１５でＮＧに進む場合、Ｓ２１７では、Ｓ２１１から照射され続けていた照明光源２１の照明光を消灯させ、文字情報表示部（図２では図示略）により、Ｓ２２７に対応する文字情報（所定の失敗状態に対応する文字情報）をスクリーン表示する（図２２（Ａ）の右図）。Ｓ２２７で表示される文字情報は、例えば図２２（Ｃ）のような情報であり、この例では、Ｓ２２３で解読された解読データと、Ｓ２２４での照合が失敗したことを示す情報（即ち、Ｓ２２３で解読された解読データが期待値と一致していないことを示す情報）とを文字情報として表示している。このように、照合が失敗したことを示す情報が表示されたことが、照合結果の不一致の合図となるため、使用者は、この情報によって照合結果の不一致を把握することができる。 When the process proceeds to OK in S225, in S226, the illumination light of the illumination light source 21 that has been irradiated from S221 is turned off, and character information corresponding to S226 (predetermined success) is displayed by the character information display unit (not shown in FIG. 2). Character information corresponding to the state) is displayed on the screen (right diagram in FIG. 22A). The character information display unit can use various known configurations as long as the device can display the character information on the screen. The character information displayed in S226 is, for example, information as shown in FIG. 22B. In this example, the decrypted data decrypted in S223 and the information indicating that the collation in S224 is successful (ie, S223). The information indicating that the decrypted data decrypted in step 1 matches the expected value) is displayed as character information. In this way, since the information indicating that the collation is successful is displayed as a cue of matching of the collation results, the user can grasp the coincidence of the collation results with this information. On the other hand, when proceeding to NG in S215, in S217, the illumination light of the illumination light source 21 that has been irradiated from S211 is turned off, and character information corresponding to S227 (predetermined in FIG. 2) is displayed by the character information display unit (not shown in FIG. 2). (Character information corresponding to the failure state) is displayed on the screen (right diagram in FIG. 22A). The character information displayed in S227 is, for example, information as shown in FIG. 22C. In this example, the decrypted data decrypted in S223 and the information indicating that the collation in S224 has failed (ie, S223). Information indicating that the decrypted data decrypted in step 2 does not match the expected value) is displayed as character information. Thus, since the information indicating that the verification has failed is displayed as a signal indicating a mismatch in the verification result, the user can grasp the mismatch in the verification result from this information.
　本構成では、上述の文字情報表示部が「光源」の一例に相当し、ケース１２と一体的に設けられ、ケース１２の外部に光を照射するように機能する。また、照明光源２１は、本構成では、「照明光照射部」の一例に相当し、上記「光源」とは別光源として構成され、ケースの外部に向けて光を照射するように機能する。また、撮像部２３が「撮像部」の一例に相当し、「照明光照射部」によってケース１２の外部に向けて光が照射された状態でケース１２の外部を撮像する機能を有する。また、制御回路４０（図２）が「処理部」、「解読部」に相当し、撮像部２３によって撮像された情報コードに記録されたデータを解読する機能を有し、具体的には、「照明光照射部」によってケース１２の外部に光が照射された状態で撮像部２３によって撮像されたコードを解読するように機能する。また、制御回路４０が「判定部」の一例に相当し、「解読部」による情報コードの解読結果が、所定の成功状態である場合（上述の例では、Ｓ２１３で得られた解読データとメモリ３５に記憶された期待値とが一致する場合）と、所定の成功状態ではない所定の失敗状態である場合（上述の例では、Ｓ２１３で得られた解読データとメモリ３５に記憶された期待値とが一致しない場合）とを判定するように機能する。また、制御回路４０が「照射状態制御部」の一例に相当し、「解読部」によって情報コードの解読が試みられた後、文字情報表示部（光源）からの光の照射状態を、「判定部」による判定結果に応じた状態に制御するように機能し、具体的には、「判定部」によって所定の成功状態又は所定の失敗状態のいずれか一方の状態と判定された場合、文字情報表示部（光源）からの光の照射状態を、文字情報表示部（光源）からの光が照射される照射対象物に対して所定の情報を表示する第１表示状態とし、いずれか他方の状態と判定された場合、文字情報表示部（光源）からの光の照射状態を、第１表示状態とは異なる照射状態とする構成となっている。 In this configuration, the character information display unit described above corresponds to an example of a “light source”, is provided integrally with the case 12, and functions to irradiate light to the outside of the case 12. The illumination light source 21 corresponds to an example of an “illumination light irradiating unit” in the present configuration, is configured as a light source different from the “light source”, and functions to irradiate light toward the outside of the case. The imaging unit 23 corresponds to an example of an “imaging unit”, and has a function of imaging the outside of the case 12 in a state where light is emitted toward the outside of the case 12 by the “illumination light irradiation unit”. The control circuit 40 (FIG. 2) corresponds to a “processing unit” and a “decoding unit”, and has a function of decoding data recorded in an information code imaged by the imaging unit 23. Specifically, The “illumination light irradiating unit” functions to decode the code imaged by the imaging unit 23 in a state where light is irradiated outside the case 12. Further, when the control circuit 40 corresponds to an example of a “determination unit” and the decoding result of the information code by the “decoding unit” is in a predetermined success state (in the above example, the decoded data and memory obtained in S213 are And the expected value stored in the memory 35 in the example described above and the expected value stored in the memory 35 (in the above example). Function in the case of not matching). Further, the control circuit 40 corresponds to an example of an “irradiation state control unit”. After the information code is attempted to be decoded by the “decoding unit”, the irradiation state of light from the character information display unit (light source) is determined by “determination”. Function to control the state according to the determination result by the “part”, specifically, when it is determined by the “determination unit” to be either a predetermined success state or a predetermined failure state, the character information The irradiation state of light from the display unit (light source) is set as a first display state in which predetermined information is displayed on the irradiation object irradiated with light from the character information display unit (light source), and the other state Is determined, the irradiation state of the light from the character information display unit (light source) is set to an irradiation state different from the first display state.
　以上のような本構成でも、第１実施形態と同様の効果が得られ、更に、本構成でも、使用者は「光源」からの光の照射状態によって、情報コードの解読結果を把握することができる。更に、本構成では、少なくとも所定の成功状態又は所定の失敗状態のときに外部に情報を表示することができるため、使用者は、ケースを目視しにくい状況であっても、装置から提供される具体的な情報を把握しやすくなる。例えば、図２２（Ｂ）（Ｃ）のように、所定の成功状態のときには、所定の成功状態に対応する第１情報を表示し、所定の失敗状態のときには、所定の失敗状態に対応する第２情報を表示すれば、使用者は、各情報によって解読結果を明確且つ具体的に把握することができるため、利便性がより高まる。 Even with this configuration as described above, the same effects as those of the first embodiment can be obtained. Further, even with this configuration, the user can grasp the decoding result of the information code according to the irradiation state of the light from the “light source”. it can. Further, in this configuration, since information can be displayed outside at least in a predetermined success state or a predetermined failure state, the user is provided from the device even in a situation where it is difficult for the user to see the case. It becomes easy to grasp specific information. For example, as shown in FIGS. 22B and 22C, the first information corresponding to the predetermined success state is displayed in the predetermined success state, and the first information corresponding to the predetermined failure state is displayed in the predetermined failure state. If 2 information is displayed, since the user can grasp | ascertain the decoding result clearly and concretely by each information, the convenience improves more.
　第２実施形態の代表例や各変更例では、ケース１２の内部に制御回路４０が設けられ、この制御回路４０で情報コードを解読する構成を例示したが、代表例及び各変更例のいずれの構成でも、ケース１２内の内部装置と通信可能に接続された情報処理装置（外部装置）にメモリ３５、制御回路４０、通信部４８と同様のメモリ、制御回路、通信部を設けるようにしてもよい。そして、ケース１２内の撮像部２３で撮像された情報コードの画像のデータを、制御回路４０及び通信部４８（図２）によって外部装置に送信し、その外部装置の制御回路によって解読し、外部装置のメモリに記憶された期待値と照合するようにしてもよい。この場合、ケース１２内の制御回路４０及び通信部４８が処理部の一例に相当し、外部装置の制御回路が外部処理部、解読部、判定部の一例に相当する。この場合、外部装置の制御回路及び通信部がその照合結果（判定結果）をケース１２側に送信し、照明状態制御部に相当する制御回路４０が、その照合結果に基づいてＳ２０６又はＳ２０７の処理を行うようにすればよい。 In the representative example and each modified example of the second embodiment, the control circuit 40 is provided inside the case 12, and the configuration in which the information code is decoded by the control circuit 40 is exemplified. Even in the configuration, a memory, a control circuit, and a communication unit similar to the memory 35, the control circuit 40, and the communication unit 48 may be provided in an information processing device (external device) that is communicably connected to the internal device in the case 12. Good. Then, the data of the information code image picked up by the image pickup unit 23 in the case 12 is transmitted to the external device by the control circuit 40 and the communication unit 48 (FIG. 2), and is decoded by the control circuit of the external device. You may make it collate with the expected value memorize | stored in the memory of the apparatus. In this case, the control circuit 40 and the communication unit 48 in the case 12 correspond to an example of a processing unit, and the control circuit of the external device corresponds to an example of an external processing unit, a decoding unit, and a determination unit. In this case, the control circuit and the communication unit of the external device transmit the collation result (determination result) to the case 12 side, and the control circuit 40 corresponding to the illumination state control unit performs the process of S206 or S207 based on the collation result Should be done.
　第２実施形態の代表例や各変更例では、情報コードの解読データが予め登録された期待値と一致している場合を「所定の成功状態」とし、一致していない場合を「所定の失敗状態」としたが、この例に限られない。いずれの例でも、情報コードのデコードが成功したことを「所定の成功状態」とし、情報コードのデコードが失敗したことを「所定の失敗状態」としてもよい。或いは、いずれの例でも、情報コードに暗号データが記録されているような場合、情報コードに記録された暗号データの暗号の解読が成功したことを「所定の成功状態」とし、情報コードに記録された暗号データの暗号の解読が失敗したことを「所定の失敗状態」としてもよい。 In the representative example and each modified example of the second embodiment, the case where the decoded data of the information code matches the expected value registered in advance is set as the “predetermined success state”, and the case where they do not match is set as the “predetermined failure” However, the present invention is not limited to this example. In any of the examples, success in decoding the information code may be a “predetermined success state”, and failure in decoding the information code may be a “predetermined failure state”. Alternatively, in any example, when encrypted data is recorded in the information code, the fact that the decryption of the encrypted data recorded in the information code has been successfully decrypted is set as a “predetermined successful state” and recorded in the information code. The failure of the decryption of the encrypted data may be defined as a “predetermined failure state”.
　[第３実施形態]
　次に、第３実施形態について説明する。 [Third embodiment]
Next, a third embodiment will be described.
　第３実施形態に係る携帯型情報コード読取装置１０は、形態のみが第１実施形態と異なり、電気的構成は第１実施形態と同一である。よって、電気的構成については、詳細な説明を省略し、適宜図２を参照することとする。 The portable information code reader 10 according to the third embodiment is different from the first embodiment only in the form, and the electrical configuration is the same as that in the first embodiment. Therefore, detailed description of the electrical configuration will be omitted, and FIG. 2 will be referred to as appropriate.
　（全体構成）
　本構成の携帯型情報コード読取装置１０は、主に、装置本体３１１と取付部３６０とによって構成されている。装置本体３１１は、情報コード１００を撮像可能な撮像部２３（図２等）と、撮像部２３によって撮像された情報コード１００の画像を処理する処理部（制御回路４０（図２））と、撮像部２３及び処理部を保持するケース３１２とを備えた構成となっている。また、ケース３１２とは別体として設けられると共に使用者の顔が向く側を撮像する構成で撮像部２３を使用者に取り付ける取付部３６０を備えている。この取付部３６０は、撓み変形可能な可撓性の身体装着部（装着部）３６２と、ケース３１２が着脱される装着部３６６とを有し、使用者の人体に掛けられる構成となっており、ケース３１２を使用者の耳に取り付けるように機能するものである。 (overall structure)
The portable information code reading device 10 having this configuration is mainly composed of a device main body 311 and a mounting portion 360. The apparatus main body 311 includes an imaging unit 23 (such as FIG. 2) that can capture the information code 100, a processing unit (control circuit 40 (FIG. 2)) that processes an image of the information code 100 captured by the imaging unit 23, The configuration includes an imaging unit 23 and a case 312 that holds the processing unit. In addition, it is provided as a separate body from the case 312, and includes a mounting portion 360 that attaches the imaging unit 23 to the user in a configuration that images the side facing the user's face. The mounting portion 360 includes a flexible body mounting portion (mounting portion) 362 that can be bent and deformed, and a mounting portion 366 to which the case 312 is attached and detached, and is configured to be hung on the human body of the user. The case 312 functions to be attached to the user's ear.
　まず、装置本体３１１の構成について説明する。 First, the configuration of the apparatus main body 311 will be described.
　装置本体３１１は、ケース３１２の内部に図２に示す各種電子部品が収容されてなるものであり、本構成では、取付部３６０に対して図２３～図２８のように装着可能とされており、図３０、図３１のように離脱可能とされている。 The apparatus main body 311 contains various electronic components shown in FIG. 2 inside the case 312. In this configuration, the apparatus main body 311 can be attached to the mounting portion 360 as shown in FIGS. 30 and 31 can be detached.
　図３３～図３５等に示すように、ケース３１２は、全体として長手状且つ箱状に構成されている。なお、本構成では、装置本体３１１の前後方向、幅方向（横方向）、上下方向を以下のように規定する。まず、撮像部２３の視野範囲の中心の方向（光軸方向）を前後方向としており、ケース３１２の長手方向が前後方向となっている。そして、前後方向と直交する方向においてケース３１２の厚さ方向が幅方向（横方向）となっており、ケース３１２の対向壁部３１２ａと、対向壁部３１２ａの反対側の壁部（表側の側壁部３１２ｂ）とが向かい合う方向が幅方向（横方向）となっている。そして、上記前後方向及び幅方向と直交する方向が上下方向となっている。なお、以下では、前後方向をＸ軸方向とし、上下方向をＹ軸方向とし、幅方向（横方向）をＺ軸方向として説明する。そして、前方向をＸ軸正方向、後ろ方向をＸ軸負方向とする。更に、上方向をＹ軸正方向、下方向をＹ軸負方向とする。そして、ケース３１２側から見て取付部３６０側をＺ軸負方向とし、取付部３６０とは反対側をＺ軸正方向とする。 As shown in FIGS. 33 to 35 and the like, the case 312 is formed in a longitudinal and box shape as a whole. In this configuration, the front-rear direction, the width direction (horizontal direction), and the vertical direction of the apparatus main body 311 are defined as follows. First, the center direction (optical axis direction) of the field of view of the imaging unit 23 is the front-rear direction, and the longitudinal direction of the case 312 is the front-rear direction. The thickness direction of the case 312 is the width direction (lateral direction) in the direction orthogonal to the front-rear direction, and the opposite wall portion 312a of the case 312 and the opposite wall portion of the opposite wall portion 312a (front side wall). The direction facing the portion 312b) is the width direction (lateral direction). And the direction orthogonal to the said front-back direction and the width direction is the up-down direction. In the following description, the front-rear direction is the X-axis direction, the up-down direction is the Y-axis direction, and the width direction (lateral direction) is the Z-axis direction. The front direction is the X-axis positive direction, and the rear direction is the X-axis negative direction. Furthermore, the upward direction is the Y-axis positive direction, and the downward direction is the Y-axis negative direction. Then, when viewed from the case 312 side, the attachment portion 360 side is the Z-axis negative direction, and the side opposite to the attachment portion 360 is the Z-axis positive direction.
　図３１、図３３～図３５のように、ケース３１２は、このような定義において前端部に前壁部３１２ｃが設けられ、後端部に後壁部３１２ｄが設けられている。更に、幅方向（左右方向）一方側（取付部３６０側）に側壁部（対向壁部３１２ａ）が設けられ、これとは反対側に表側の側壁部３１２ｂが設けられている。更に、上下方向の一端部には壁部３１２ｅが設けられ、上下方向の他端部には壁部３１２ｆが設けられている。そして、これら前壁部、後壁部、側壁部、壁部により、前後左右及び上下が囲まれる箱状構成で、撮像部２３や制御回路４０などの電子部品を収容する収容部が構成されている。 As shown in FIGS. 31 and 33 to 35, the case 312 is provided with a front wall portion 312c at the front end portion and a rear wall portion 312d at the rear end portion in such a definition. Further, a side wall portion (opposing wall portion 312a) is provided on one side in the width direction (left and right direction) (attachment portion 360 side), and a front side wall portion 312b is provided on the opposite side. Further, a wall portion 312e is provided at one end portion in the vertical direction, and a wall portion 312f is provided at the other end portion in the vertical direction. The front wall part, the rear wall part, the side wall part, and the wall part constitute a housing part for housing electronic components such as the imaging part 23 and the control circuit 40 in a box-like configuration surrounded by the front, rear, left, right, and top and bottom. Yes.
　また、本構成では、使用者の顔Ｆａを基準として顔Ｆａが向く方向を顔Ｆａの前側、後頭部側を顔Ｆａの後ろ側として説明する。 In this configuration, the direction in which the face Fa faces with respect to the user's face Fa is defined as the front side of the face Fa, and the occipital side is described as the back side of the face Fa.
　このケース３１２は、情報コードからの光を導入可能な読取口３１４を備えており、この読取口３１４を覆う構成で光透過性のカバー部材３１５が設けられている。また、図２６、図２９等に示すように、ケース３１２は、取付部３６０への装着位置から所定方向に延びる延出部（取付部３６０に当接する部分から前側に延びる部分）を備え、且つその延出部における取付部３６０とは反対側の端部寄りに読取口３１４が設けられている。そして、この読取口３１４を覆うカバー部材３１５が前壁部３１２ｃとして構成されている。そして、取付部３６０は、図２３、図２９のようにケース３１２が使用者の顔Ｆａの横位置に配置され且つ読取口１４が使用者Ｐの前側を向く構成で当該ケース３１２を使用者Ｐの耳Ｅｙに取り付ける構成となっている。このように、使用者の顔が向く側と同じ側に撮像部２３が向くように取付部３６０によってケース３１２が取り付けられている。 The case 312 includes a reading port 314 through which light from the information code can be introduced, and a light-transmitting cover member 315 is provided so as to cover the reading port 314. As shown in FIG. 26, FIG. 29, and the like, the case 312 includes an extending portion (a portion extending from the portion that contacts the mounting portion 360 to the front side) extending in a predetermined direction from the mounting position on the mounting portion 360, and A reading port 314 is provided near the end of the extension portion opposite to the attachment portion 360. A cover member 315 that covers the reading port 314 is configured as a front wall portion 312c. Then, as shown in FIGS. 23 and 29, the attachment portion 360 is configured such that the case 312 is arranged in a lateral position of the user's face Fa and the reading port 14 faces the front side of the user P. It is configured to be attached to the ear Ey. In this way, the case 312 is attached by the attachment portion 360 so that the imaging portion 23 faces the same side as the user's face.
　また、ケース３１２において上下方向一方側の壁部３１２ｅには、外部操作が可能な操作スイッチ４２ａが設けられており、他方側の壁部３１２ｆには、外部操作が可能な操作スイッチ４２ｂが設けられている。操作スイッチ４２ａは、トリガスイッチとして機能し、操作スイッチ４２ｂは、トリガスイッチ以外の操作スイッチとして機能している。なお、メモリ３５には、操作スイッチ４２ａ，４２ｂのうちのいずれか一方のスイッチにトリガ機能を設定し、残りのスイッチにトリガー機能以外の機能を設定するのか、その設定（割当）を示す設定情報が記憶されており、操作スイッチ４２ａ，４２ｂは、この設定情報に従って動作するようになっている。また、この設定情報は、ケース３１２が図４８のようにコンピュータなどの外部機器ＰＣに接続された場合に、この外部機器ＰＣによって書き換えることができるようになっている。 In the case 312, the wall portion 312 e on one side in the vertical direction is provided with an operation switch 42 a capable of external operation, and the wall portion 312 f on the other side is provided with an operation switch 42 b capable of external operation. ing. The operation switch 42a functions as a trigger switch, and the operation switch 42b functions as an operation switch other than the trigger switch. In the memory 35, setting information indicating whether a trigger function is set for one of the operation switches 42a and 42b and a function other than the trigger function is set for the remaining switches, or setting (allocation) thereof. Are stored, and the operation switches 42a and 42b operate according to the setting information. The setting information can be rewritten by the external device PC when the case 312 is connected to the external device PC such as a computer as shown in FIG.
　また、ケース３１２の内部には、図３６のように照明光を照射する照明光源２１、マーカ光を照射するマーカ光照射部５０、ケース３１２の外部を撮像する撮像部２３が設けられており、照明光源２１からの照明光及びマーカ光照射部５０からのマーカ光はいずれも、読取口３１４を介して前壁部３１２ｃからケース３１２の前側に照射されるようになっている。また、本構成では、撮像部２３及びレンズ２７が上下方向中心部よりもやや上寄りに配置され、受光光軸Ｇが上下方向中心部よりもやや上寄りに位置している。また、照明光源２１は、上下方向中心部よりも下寄りに配置されており、照明光源２１と撮像部２３の間にマーカ光照射部５０が配置されるようになっている。図３６のように、前壁部３１２ｃ寄りの位置には、レンズ２７、マーカ光照射部５０のレンズ５０ａ、照明光源２１のレンズ２１ａが配置されており、照明光源２１のレンズ２１ａよりもマーカ光照射部５０のレンズ５０ａのほうが、レンズ２７（受光レンズ）に近い位置関係となっている。これにより、マーカ光の経路を、より受光光軸Ｇに近づけることができるようになっている。 In addition, an illumination light source 21 that emits illumination light, a marker light irradiation unit 50 that emits marker light, and an imaging unit 23 that images the outside of the case 312 are provided inside the case 312. Both the illumination light from the illumination light source 21 and the marker light from the marker light irradiation unit 50 are irradiated from the front wall portion 312c to the front side of the case 312 via the reading port 314. In this configuration, the imaging unit 23 and the lens 27 are disposed slightly above the center in the vertical direction, and the light receiving optical axis G is positioned slightly above the center in the vertical direction. The illumination light source 21 is disposed below the center in the vertical direction, and the marker light irradiation unit 50 is disposed between the illumination light source 21 and the imaging unit 23. As shown in FIG. 36, the lens 27, the lens 50a of the marker light irradiation unit 50, and the lens 21a of the illumination light source 21 are arranged at a position near the front wall 312c. The lens 50a of the irradiation unit 50 has a positional relationship closer to the lens 27 (light receiving lens). Thus, the marker light path can be made closer to the light receiving optical axis G.
　次に、取付部３６０について説明する。 Next, the attachment portion 360 will be described.
　図２３～図２９等に例示されるように、取付部３６０は、撓み変形可能な可撓性の身体装着部３６２と、ケース３１２が着脱される装着部３６６とを備えており、ケース３１２とは別体として設けられている。この取付部３６０は、使用者の人体に掛けられて人体に保持される部分であり、具体的には、使用者の首から上の部分において体の構造上突出した部分（以下の例では、両耳部分）に掛けられることで、人体に保持されると共に人体の所定位置に位置決めされるようになっている。図２３、図２９、図４３等に示すように、この取付部３６０は、ケース３１２が使用者の顔Ｆａの横位置に配置されると共に使用者の顔Ｆａが向く側に読取口３１４が向く構成でケース３１２を少なくとも使用者の耳Ｅｙに取り付ける構成となっている。 As illustrated in FIGS. 23 to 29 and the like, the attachment portion 360 includes a flexible body attachment portion 362 that can be bent and deformed, and an attachment portion 366 to which the case 312 is attached and detached. Is provided as a separate body. This mounting portion 360 is a portion that is hung on the user's human body and held by the human body, specifically, a portion that protrudes from the neck of the user on the structure of the body (in the following example, By being hung on the both ear portions), it is held by the human body and positioned at a predetermined position of the human body. As shown in FIG. 23, FIG. 29, FIG. 43, etc., the mounting portion 360 has the case 312 disposed in the lateral position of the user's face Fa and the reading port 314 facing the side where the user's face Fa faces. In the configuration, the case 312 is attached to at least the user's ear Ey.
　身体装着部３６２は、少なくとも一部が使用者に直接接触して装着される部分であり、具体的には、使用者の両耳に掛けられる耳掛け部として構成されている。この身体装着部３６２は、図２４～図２８のように、使用者に取り付けられていない被装着時の自然状態において所定形状で維持される構成であり、且つ弾性変形可能に構成され、可撓性の構造となっている。この身体装着部３６２は、後述する右側装着部３７０及び左側装着部３８０のそれぞれに両端部がそれぞれ連結された構成となっており、全体として略Ｕ字状の構成となっている。この身体装着部３６２には、使用者への装着時に上方側に凸となるように右側装着部３７０寄りの隣接位置に湾曲して形成された右耳取付部（右耳掛け部）３６２ａと、右耳取付部３６２ａから離れて形成されると共に上方側に凸となるように左側装着部３８０寄りの隣接位置に湾曲して形成された左耳取付部（左耳掛け部）３６２ｂと、これら右耳取付部３６２ａと左耳取付部３６２ｂとを連結する中間連結部３６２ｃとを備えている。中間連結部３６２ｃは、図２３等のように取付部３６０を使用者の耳に掛けて装着したときに、使用者の後頭部又は首に当てられるように巻き付く部分である。 The body wearing part 362 is a part to be worn at least partly in direct contact with the user. Specifically, the body wearing part 362 is configured as an ear hooking part that is hung on both ears of the user. As shown in FIGS. 24 to 28, the body wearing portion 362 is configured to be maintained in a predetermined shape in a natural state when worn without being attached to the user, and is configured to be elastically deformable and flexible. It has a sex structure. The body mounting part 362 has a configuration in which both ends are respectively connected to a right side mounting part 370 and a left side mounting part 380 described later, and has a substantially U-shaped configuration as a whole. The body wearing portion 362 includes a right ear mounting portion (right ear hooking portion) 362a that is formed in a curved position adjacent to the right wearing portion 370 so as to protrude upward when worn on the user, A left ear mounting portion (left ear hook) 362b formed away from the right ear mounting portion 362a and curved at an adjacent position near the left mounting portion 380 so as to protrude upward, and these right An intermediate connecting portion 362c that connects the ear attaching portion 362a and the left ear attaching portion 362b is provided. The intermediate connecting portion 362c is a portion that is wound around the user's back head or neck when the mounting portion 360 is attached to the user's ear as shown in FIG.
　装着部３６６は、使用者の顔の右側に配置されると共にケースを着脱可能な右側装着部３７０と、使用者の顔の左側に配置されると共にケースを着脱可能な左側装着部３８０とを有している。本構成では、身体装着部３６２において、使用者の右耳に掛けられて右耳に支持される右耳取付部３６２ａ（右耳取付部３６２ａは、被支持部の一例に相当）から前側延出部３６３ａが前側（中間連結部３６２ｃとは反対側）に延びている。そして、右側装着部３７０は、身体装着部３６２における前側延出部３６３ａの先端部に連結されてケース３１２を保持する保持部として機能している。この構成では、図２３、図２９のように使用者に取付部３６０を取り付けた取付時に、前側延出部３６３ａが右耳取付部３６２ａ（被支持部）よりも前側に延びて配置され、右耳取付部３６２ａ（被支持部）を支持する使用者の右耳の耳孔よりも前位置に右側装着部３７０（保持部）が配置される構成となっている。 The mounting portion 366 has a right side mounting portion 370 that is arranged on the right side of the user's face and can be attached to and detached from the case, and a left side mounting portion 380 that is arranged on the left side of the user's face and that can be attached and detached from the case. is doing. In this configuration, the body mounting portion 362 extends forward from a right ear attachment portion 362a (the right ear attachment portion 362a corresponds to an example of a supported portion) that is hung on the user's right ear and supported by the right ear. The portion 363a extends to the front side (the side opposite to the intermediate coupling portion 362c). The right mounting portion 370 functions as a holding portion that holds the case 312 by being connected to the front end portion of the front extending portion 363a in the body mounting portion 362. In this configuration, when the attachment portion 360 is attached to the user as shown in FIGS. 23 and 29, the front extension portion 363a is arranged to extend to the front side of the right ear attachment portion 362a (supported portion), and the right side The right mounting part 370 (holding part) is arranged in front of the ear hole of the right ear of the user who supports the ear attaching part 362a (supported part).
　右側装着部３７０（保持部）は、図２３、図２９のような人体への装着時に右耳の耳孔よりも前位置において使用者の顔に対向して支持される裏面部３７１と、裏面部３７１の反対側に配置された表面部３７２とを備えている。裏面部３７１と表面部３７２は、いずれも外面が平坦に構成されており、例えば、裏面部３７１の外面（使用者の顔に支持される面）と表面部３７２の外面（ケース３１２の取付時にケース３１２と接触する面）とが略平行になっている。裏面部３７１と表面部３７２の間の厚さは、右耳取付部３６２ａの太さよりも大きくなっており、図２６等に示すように、表面部３７２側が、右耳取付部（右耳掛け部）３６２ａよりも横に突出した構成となっている。そして、このように構成される右側装着部３７０により、ケース３１２を表面部３７２で保持する構成となっている。なお、保持構造については、後に詳述する。 The right mounting part 370 (holding part) includes a back surface part 371 that is supported facing the user's face at a position before the ear hole of the right ear when mounted on the human body as shown in FIGS. And a surface portion 372 disposed on the opposite side of 371. Both the back surface portion 371 and the front surface portion 372 have a flat outer surface. For example, the outer surface of the back surface portion 371 (the surface supported by the user's face) and the outer surface of the surface portion 372 (when the case 312 is attached) The surface in contact with the case 312) is substantially parallel. The thickness between the back surface portion 371 and the front surface portion 372 is larger than the thickness of the right ear mounting portion 362a, and as shown in FIG. 26 and the like, the surface portion 372 side has a right ear mounting portion (right ear hooking portion). ) It protrudes laterally from 362a. The case 312 is held by the surface portion 372 by the right side mounting portion 370 configured as described above. The holding structure will be described in detail later.
　図２５等に示すように、右側と同様、身体装着部３６２において、使用者の左耳に掛けられて左耳に支持される左耳取付部３６２ｂ（左耳取付部３６２ｂは、被支持部の一例に相当）から前側延出部３６３ｂが前側（中間連結部３６２ｃとは反対側）に延びている。そして、左側装着部３８０は、身体装着部３６２における前側延出部３６３ｂの先端部に連結されてケース３１２を保持する保持部として機能している。この構成では、図２３、図２９、図４４、図４６のように使用者に取付部３６０を取り付けた取付時に、前側延出部３６３ｂが左耳取付部３６２ｂ（被支持部）よりも前側に延びて配置され、左耳取付部３６２ｂ（被支持部）を支持する使用者の左耳の耳孔よりも前位置に左側装着部３８０（保持部）が配置される構成となっている。 As shown in FIG. 25 and the like, as in the right side, in the body wearing portion 362, the left ear mounting portion 362b (the left ear mounting portion 362b is a portion of the supported portion) that is hung on the left ear of the user and supported by the left ear. The front extension part 363b extends from the front side (corresponding to an example) to the front side (the side opposite to the intermediate coupling part 362c). The left mounting portion 380 functions as a holding portion that is connected to the front end portion of the front extending portion 363 b in the body mounting portion 362 and holds the case 312. In this configuration, when the attachment portion 360 is attached to the user as shown in FIGS. 23, 29, 44, and 46, the front extension portion 363b is located on the front side of the left ear attachment portion 362b (supported portion). The left mounting part 380 (holding part) is arranged in front of the ear hole of the left ear of the user who extends and is arranged and supports the left ear attaching part 362b (supported part).
　左側装着部３８０（保持部）は、図２３、図２９、図４４、図４６のような人体への装着時に左耳の耳孔よりも前位置において使用者の顔に対向して支持される裏面部３８１と、裏面部３８１の反対側に配置された表面部３８２とを備えている。裏面部３８１と表面部３８２は、いずれも外面が平坦に構成されており、例えば、裏面部３８１の外面（使用者の顔に支持される面）と表面部３８２の外面（ケース３１２の取付時にケース３１２と接触する面）とが略平行になっている。裏面部３８１と表面部３８２の間の厚さは、左耳取付部３６２ｂの太さよりも大きくなっており、図２４等に示すように、表面部３８２側が、左耳取付部（左耳掛け部）３６２ａよりも横に突出した構成となっている。そして、このように構成される左側装着部３８０により、ケース３１２を表面部３８２で保持する構成となっている。なお、保持構造については、後に詳述する。 The left mounting portion 380 (holding portion) is a back surface that is supported facing the user's face at a position before the ear hole of the left ear when mounted on a human body as shown in FIGS. 23, 29, 44, and 46. A portion 381 and a surface portion 382 disposed on the opposite side of the back surface portion 381. Both the back surface portion 381 and the front surface portion 382 have a flat outer surface. For example, the outer surface of the back surface portion 381 (the surface supported by the user's face) and the outer surface of the surface portion 382 (when the case 312 is attached) The surface in contact with the case 312) is substantially parallel. The thickness between the back surface portion 381 and the front surface portion 382 is larger than the thickness of the left ear mounting portion 362b, and as shown in FIG. 24 and the like, the front surface portion 382 side has a left ear mounting portion (left ear hooking portion). ) It protrudes laterally from 362a. The case 312 is held by the surface portion 382 by the left mounting portion 380 configured as described above. The holding structure will be described in detail later.
　図３１、図３２、図３４のように、ガイド部３５０は、取付部３６０に設けられた各装着部３６６に対してケース３１２を着脱可能に連結し、且つその連結の際に各装着部３６６に対するケース３１２の姿勢が所定姿勢となるようにガイドするように機能する。このガイド部３５０は、ケース３１２側に設けられた２つのケース側連結部（第１ケース側連結部３５１及び第２ケース側連結部３５２）と、右側装着部３７０側に設けられた少なくとも２つの右側連結部（第１右側連結部３７３ａ，第２右側連結部３７３ｂ）と、左側装着部３８０側に設けられた少なくとも２つの左側連結部（第１左側連結部３８３ａ，第２左側連結部３８３ｂ）とを備えている。そして、少なくとも２つのケース側連結部（第１ケース側連結部３５１及び第２ケース側連結部３５２）と少なくとも２つの右側連結部（第１右側連結部３７３ａ，第２右側連結部３７３ｂ）とがそれぞれ連結されることによりケース３１２が右側装着部３７０に取り付けられ、少なくとも２つのケース側連結部（第１ケース側連結部３５１及び第２ケース側連結部３５２）と少なくとも２つの左側連結部（第１左側連結部３８３ａ，第２左側連結部３８３ｂ）とがそれぞれ連結されることによりケース３１２が左側装着部（第１左側連結部３８３ａ，第２左側連結部３８３ｂ）に取り付けられる構成となっている。 31, 32, and 34, the guide portion 350 removably connects the case 312 to each mounting portion 366 provided on the mounting portion 360, and each mounting portion 366 is connected at the time of the connection. It functions to guide the case 312 so that the posture of the case 312 becomes a predetermined posture. The guide part 350 includes at least two case side connecting parts (first case side connecting part 351 and second case side connecting part 352) provided on the case 312 side and at least two right side mounting parts 370 side. Right connection part (first right connection part 373a, second right connection part 373b) and at least two left connection parts provided on the left mounting part 380 side (first left connection part 383a, second left connection part 383b) And. And at least two case side connection parts (first case side connection part 351 and second case side connection part 352) and at least two right side connection parts (first right side connection part 373a, second right side connection part 373b). By being connected to each other, the case 312 is attached to the right mounting part 370, and at least two case side connection parts (first case side connection part 351 and second case side connection part 352) and at least two left side connection parts (first 1 left connecting portion 383a and second left connecting portion 383b) are connected to each other so that case 312 is attached to the left mounting portion (first left connecting portion 383a and second left connecting portion 383b). .
　図３１、図３２、図３４のように、本構成では、２つのケース側連結部（第１ケース側連結部３５１及び第２ケース側連結部３５２）と２つの右側連結部（第１右側連結部３７３ａ，第２右側連結部３７３ｂ）が第１ガイド部に相当し、右側装着部３７０に対してケース３１２を着脱可能に連結し、且つ右側装着部３７０に対してケース３１２を連結した際に右側装着部３７０に対するケース３１２の姿勢が第１所定姿勢となるようにガイドする。また、２つのケース側連結部（第１ケース側連結部３５１及び第２ケース側連結部３５２）と、２つの左側連結部（第１左側連結部３８３ａ，第２左側連結部３８３ｂ）が、第２ガイド部に相当し、左側装着部３８０に対してケース３１２を着脱可能に連結し、且つ左側装着部３８０に対してケース３１２を連結した際に左側装着部３８０に対するケース３１２の姿勢が第２所定姿勢となるようにガイドする。 As shown in FIG. 31, FIG. 32, and FIG. 34, in this configuration, two case side connecting portions (first case side connecting portion 351 and second case side connecting portion 352) and two right side connecting portions (first right side connecting portion). 373a and the second right connecting portion 373b) correspond to the first guide portion, and the case 312 is detachably connected to the right mounting portion 370 and the case 312 is connected to the right mounting portion 370. The case 312 is guided so that the posture of the case 312 with respect to the right mounting portion 370 becomes the first predetermined posture. In addition, two case side connecting portions (first case side connecting portion 351 and second case side connecting portion 352) and two left side connecting portions (first left side connecting portion 383a and second left side connecting portion 383b) The case 312 is detachably connected to the left mounting portion 380 and the case 312 is connected to the left mounting portion 380 when the case 312 is connected to the left mounting portion 380. Guide to a predetermined posture.
　図３１、図３２、図３４のように、本構成では、２つのケース側連結部として、永久磁石として構成される第１ケース側連結部３５１と、永久磁石として構成される第２ケース側連結部３５２とが設けられる。また、２つの右側連結部として、永久磁石として構成される第１右側連結部３７３ａと、永久磁石として構成される第２右側連結部３７３ｂとが設けられ、２つの左側連結部として、永久磁石として構成される第１左側連結部３８３ａと、永久磁石として構成される第２左側連結部３８３ｂとが設けられる。そして、第１ケース側連結部３５１は、第１右側連結部３７３ａ及び第１左側連結部３８３ａと極性が異なり、且つ第２右側連結部３７３ｂ及び第２左側連結部３８３ｂと極性が同じであり、第２ケース側連結部３５２は、第２右側連結部３７３ｂ及び第２左側連結部３８３ｂと極性が異なり、第１右側連結部３７３ａ及び第１左側連結部３８３ａと極性が同じになっている。 As shown in FIGS. 31, 32, and 34, in this configuration, as the two case-side coupling portions, the first case-side coupling portion 351 configured as a permanent magnet and the second case-side coupling configured as a permanent magnet. Part 352 is provided. Further, as the two right side connecting portions, a first right side connecting portion 373a configured as a permanent magnet and a second right side connecting portion 373b configured as a permanent magnet are provided, and as the two left side connecting portions, as a permanent magnet A first left connecting portion 383a configured and a second left connecting portion 383b configured as a permanent magnet are provided. The first case-side connecting portion 351 has a polarity different from that of the first right-side connecting portion 373a and the first left-side connecting portion 383a, and has the same polarity as the second right-side connecting portion 373b and the second left-side connecting portion 383b. The second case-side connecting portion 352 has a polarity different from that of the second right-side connecting portion 373b and the second left-side connecting portion 383b, and has the same polarity as the first right-side connecting portion 373a and the first left-side connecting portion 383a.
　この構成では、第１ケース側連結部３５１と第１右側連結部３７３ａとの極性が互いに異なり、これら第１ケース側連結部３５１と第１右側連結部３７３ａとが互いに吸引して連結される構成となっている。例えば、第１ケース側連結部３５１は、表面部がＮ極として構成された永久磁石として構成され、第１右側連結部３７３ａは、表面部がＳ極として構成された永久磁石として構成されており、互いの表面部が対向したときに吸引し合うようになっている。また、第２ケース側連結部３５２と第２右側連結部３７３ｂとの極性が互いに異なり、これら第２ケース側連結部３５２と第２右側連結部３７３ｂとが互いに吸引して連結される構成となっている。例えば、第２ケース側連結部３５２は、表面部がＳ極として構成された永久磁石として構成され、第２右側連結部３７３ｂは、表面部がＮ極として構成された永久磁石として構成されており、互いの表面部が対向したときに吸引し合うようになっている。 In this configuration, the first case side connecting portion 351 and the first right side connecting portion 373a have different polarities, and the first case side connecting portion 351 and the first right side connecting portion 373a are connected to each other by suction. It has become. For example, the first case side connecting part 351 is configured as a permanent magnet whose surface part is configured as an N pole, and the first right side connecting part 373a is configured as a permanent magnet whose surface part is configured as an S pole. When the surface portions of each other face each other, they suck each other. In addition, the second case side connecting portion 352 and the second right side connecting portion 373b have different polarities, and the second case side connecting portion 352 and the second right side connecting portion 373b are connected to each other by suction. ing. For example, the second case side connecting portion 352 is configured as a permanent magnet whose surface portion is configured as an S pole, and the second right side connecting portion 373b is configured as a permanent magnet whose surface portion is configured as an N pole. When the surface portions of each other face each other, they suck each other.
　更に、第１ケース側連結部３５１と第２右側連結部３７３ｂとが同極性であり、第２ケース側連結部３５２と、第１右側連結部３７３ａとが同極性である。上述の例では、第１ケース側連結部３５１は、表面部がＮ極として構成され、第２右側連結部３７３ｂも、表面部がＮ極として構成されているため、互いの表面部が対向したときに反発し合うようになっている。また、第２ケース側連結部３５２は、表面部がＳ極として構成され、第１右側連結部３７３ａも、表面部がＳ極として構成されているため、互いの表面部が対向したときに反発し合うようになっている。 Furthermore, the first case side connecting portion 351 and the second right side connecting portion 373b have the same polarity, and the second case side connecting portion 352 and the first right side connecting portion 373a have the same polarity. In the above example, the first case side connecting portion 351 has a surface portion configured as an N pole, and the second right side connecting portion 373b also has a surface portion configured as an N pole. Sometimes they are repelling each other. The second case side connecting portion 352 has a surface portion configured as an S pole, and the first right side connecting portion 373a also has a surface portion configured as an S pole. It comes to meet each other.
　右側と同様に、第１ケース側連結部３５１と第１左側連結部３８３ａとの極性が互いに異なり、これら第１ケース側連結部３５１と第１左側連結部３８３ａとが互いに吸引して連結される構成となっている。例えば、第１ケース側連結部３５１は、表面部がＮ極として構成された永久磁石として構成され、第１左側連結部３８３ａは、表面部がＳ極として構成された永久磁石として構成されており、互いの表面部が対向したときに吸引し合うようになっている。また、第２ケース側連結部３５２と第２左側連結部３８３ｂとの極性が互いに異なり、これら第２ケース側連結部３５２と第２左側連結部３８３ｂとが互いに吸引して連結される構成となっている。例えば、第２ケース側連結部３５２は、表面部がＳ極として構成された永久磁石として構成され、第２左側連結部３８３ｂは、表面部がＮ極として構成された永久磁石として構成されており、互いの表面部が対向したときに吸引し合うようになっている。 Similar to the right side, the polarities of the first case side connecting part 351 and the first left side connecting part 383a are different from each other, and the first case side connecting part 351 and the first left side connecting part 383a are sucked and connected to each other. It has a configuration. For example, the first case side connecting portion 351 is configured as a permanent magnet whose surface portion is configured as an N pole, and the first left side connecting portion 383a is configured as a permanent magnet whose surface portion is configured as an S pole. When the surface portions of each other face each other, they suck each other. In addition, the second case side connecting portion 352 and the second left side connecting portion 383b have different polarities, and the second case side connecting portion 352 and the second left side connecting portion 383b are connected to each other by suction. ing. For example, the second case side connecting portion 352 is configured as a permanent magnet whose surface portion is configured as an S pole, and the second left side connecting portion 383b is configured as a permanent magnet whose surface portion is configured as an N pole. When the surface portions of each other face each other, they suck each other.
　更に、第１ケース側連結部３５１と第２左側連結部３８３ｂとが同極性であり、第２ケース側連結部３５２と、第１左側連結部３８３ａとが同極性である。上述の例では、第１ケース側連結部３５１は、表面部がＮ極として構成され、第２左側連結部３８３ｂも、表面部がＮ極として構成されているため、互いの表面部が対向したときに反発し合うようになっている。また、第２ケース側連結部３５２は、表面部がＳ極として構成され、第１左側連結部３８３ａも、表面部がＳ極として構成されているため、互いの表面部が対向したときに反発し合うようになっている。 Furthermore, the first case side connecting portion 351 and the second left side connecting portion 383b have the same polarity, and the second case side connecting portion 352 and the first left side connecting portion 383a have the same polarity. In the above example, the first case side connecting portion 351 has a surface portion configured as an N pole, and the second left side connecting portion 383b also has a surface portion configured as an N pole. Sometimes they are repelling each other. The second case side connecting portion 352 has a surface portion configured as an S pole, and the first left side connecting portion 383a also has a surface portion configured as an S pole. It comes to meet each other.
　このようなガイド部３５０によってケース３１２を各装着部３６６に取り付けることができるようになっており、取付時にケース３１２の向き（即ち、読取方向の向き）が安定するようになっている。また、装着部３６６及びガイド部３５０により、ケース３１２の前側部分（ケース３１２において、装着部３６６に支持される部分よりも前側に延び出た延出部）が使用者の耳から少なくとも前側に延びる構成でケース３１２を使用者の耳に取り付けることができるようになっている。 The case 312 can be attached to each mounting portion 366 by such a guide portion 350, and the orientation of the case 312 (that is, the orientation in the reading direction) is stabilized at the time of attachment. Further, by the mounting portion 366 and the guide portion 350, a front portion of the case 312 (an extension portion extending forward from the portion supported by the mounting portion 366 in the case 312) extends at least forward from the user's ear. The configuration allows the case 312 to be attached to the user's ear.
　また、ケース３１２における使用者側の側壁部（対向壁部３１２ａ）には、右側装着部３７０に形成された右側被嵌合部（表面部３７２）と嵌合可能に構成され、左側装着部３８０に形成された左側被嵌合部（表面部３８２）と嵌合可能に構成された底の浅い穴状の段差部３１３（嵌合部）が形成されており、ケース３１２が右側装着部３７０に取り付けられる時に、段差部３１３（嵌合部）と右側被嵌合部（表面部３７２）とが嵌合し、ケース３１２が左側装着部３８０に取り付けられる時に、段差部３１３（嵌合部）と左側被嵌合部（表面部３８２）とが嵌合する構成となっている。これにより、磁石による位置保持だけでなく、嵌合による位置保持もなされ、装着時にケース３１２が大きく位置ずれしにくくなっている。特に、スイッチ４２ａや４２ｂを押したときの位置ずれ抑制効果が高い構造となっている。 Further, the side wall portion (opposing wall portion 312 a) on the user side of the case 312 is configured to be fitted to the right fitting portion (surface portion 372) formed in the right mounting portion 370, and the left mounting portion 380. A stepped portion 313 (fitting portion) having a shallow bottom shape that can be fitted to the left fitting portion (surface portion 382) formed on the right side mounting portion 370 is formed. When attached, the step 313 (fitting part) and the right fitted part (surface part 372) are fitted, and when the case 312 is attached to the left mounting part 380, the step part 313 (fitting part) and The left fitting portion (surface portion 382) is configured to be fitted. Thereby, not only the position holding by the magnet but also the position holding by fitting is performed, and the case 312 is not easily displaced greatly at the time of mounting. In particular, the structure is highly effective in suppressing displacement when the switches 42a and 42b are pressed.
　また、ケース３１２において取付部３６０に取り付けられる側の壁部（対向壁部３１２ａ）には、音を導出する複数の導出孔３２０が形成されている。この導出孔３２０は、ケース３１２の内部に設けられた発音部（スピーカ等）で発せられた音を外部に導出する放音孔として機能している。本構成では、ケース３１２が取付部３６０に取り付けられた取り付け時には、取付部３６０の一部をなす被覆部（具体的には、表面部３７２，３８２）によって導出孔３２０の少なくとも一部（例えば全部）が覆われ、ケース３１２が取付部３６０から取り外された取り外し時には、導出孔３２０において取り付け時に被覆部によって覆われる部分が露出する構成となっている。例えば、図２３等のように、ケース３１２が、右側装着部３７０に取り付けられたときには、右側装着部３７０の表面部３７２によって導出孔３２０の全部が覆われ、音の放出が抑制されるようになっている。一方、このような取付状態を解除し、ケース３１２が右側装着部３７０から取り外された取り外し時には、導出孔３２０において取り付け時に表面部３７２によって覆われる部分が露出する構成となっている。左側も同様であり、ケース３１２が、左側装着部３８０に取り付けられたときには、左側装着部３８０の表面部３８２によって導出孔３２０の全部が覆われ、音の放出が抑制されるようになっている。一方、このような取付状態を解除し、ケース３１２が左側装着部３８０から取り外された取り外し時には、導出孔３２０において取り付け時に表面部３８２によって覆われる部分が露出する構成となっている。なお、図３４における二点鎖線３６６ａの位置が、ケース３１２を装着部３６６に取り付けているときに表面部３７２又は表面部３８２に接触し、表面部３７２又は表面部３８２によって覆われる位置である。 Further, a plurality of lead-out holes 320 for leading out sound are formed in the wall portion (opposing wall portion 312a) on the side where the case 312 is attached to the attachment portion 360. The lead-out hole 320 functions as a sound emission hole that leads to the outside the sound emitted by a sound generation unit (speaker or the like) provided inside the case 312. In this configuration, when the case 312 is attached to the attachment portion 360, at least a part (for example, all of the lead-out holes 320) is covered by a covering portion (specifically, the surface portions 372 and 382) that forms a part of the attachment portion 360. When the case 312 is detached from the attachment portion 360 and removed, a portion of the lead-out hole 320 that is covered with the covering portion is exposed at the time of attachment. For example, as shown in FIG. 23 and the like, when the case 312 is attached to the right mounting portion 370, the entire surface of the outlet hole 320 is covered with the surface portion 372 of the right mounting portion 370 so that sound emission is suppressed. It has become. On the other hand, when such a mounting state is released and the case 312 is detached from the right side mounting portion 370 and removed, a portion of the lead-out hole 320 that is covered with the surface portion 372 is exposed. The same applies to the left side. When the case 312 is attached to the left mounting part 380, the entire surface of the outlet hole 320 is covered with the surface part 382 of the left mounting part 380 so that sound emission is suppressed. . On the other hand, when the case 312 is removed from the left mounting portion 380 after the attachment state is released, a portion of the lead-out hole 320 that is covered with the surface portion 382 is exposed. Note that the position of the two-dot chain line 366a in FIG. 34 is a position that contacts the surface portion 372 or the surface portion 382 when the case 312 is attached to the mounting portion 366 and is covered by the surface portion 372 or the surface portion 382.
　また、本構成では、図３３～図３５のように、装置本体３１１を取付部３６０から取り外し、取付部３６０とは別で装置本体３１１を使用したり、メンテナンスしたりすることができる。そして、この装置本体３１１は、ケース３１２に対して、ケーブル３０２を保持する保持部材３９０が取り付けられた構成となっており、この保持部材３９０は、図３０、図３７のように、着脱が可能な構成となっている。また、この保持部材３９０には、ケーブル３０２と嵌合してケーブル３０２を保持する保持部３９１が形成されており、図３５のように、保持部３９１からケーブル３０２を取り外して使用したり、管理したりすることもでき、図３８、図４１のように、保持部３９１でケーブル３０２を保持して使用したり、管理したりすることもできるようになっている。まが、本構成では、図４２のように、保持部３９１が被取付部（ケース３１２において、取付部３６０に保持される部分）の真裏の位置に配置され、保持部３９１によってケーブル３０２がモーメントの中心部付近で保持されるため、ケーブル３０２が引っ張られたとしても、ケース３１２の向きが矢印のように変化しにくい構成となっている。 In this configuration, as shown in FIGS. 33 to 35, the apparatus main body 311 can be detached from the attachment section 360, and the apparatus main body 311 can be used or maintained separately from the attachment section 360. The apparatus main body 311 has a configuration in which a holding member 390 for holding the cable 302 is attached to the case 312. The holding member 390 can be attached and detached as shown in FIGS. It has become a structure. Further, the holding member 390 is formed with a holding portion 391 that fits the cable 302 and holds the cable 302. As shown in FIG. 35, the cable 302 is detached from the holding portion 391 for use or management. As shown in FIGS. 38 and 41, the cable 302 can be held and used by the holding portion 391, and can be managed. In this configuration, as shown in FIG. 42, the holding portion 391 is arranged at a position directly behind the attached portion (the portion held by the attaching portion 360 in the case 312), and the holding portion 391 causes the cable 302 to move to the moment. Therefore, even if the cable 302 is pulled, the direction of the case 312 is hardly changed as indicated by an arrow.
　読取装置１０を使用者に取り付ける場合、図３９、図４０のように、先に取付部３６０を使用者の両耳に掛け、その後、例えば図２３、図２９のように、右側装着部３７０又は左側装着部３８０のいずれかに装置本体３１１を取り付けるようにすれば、迅速且つ容易に取り付けることができる。また、このような方法に限られず、図４１のように組み付けた後に、読取装置１０を使用者に取り付けるようにしてもよい。 When the reading device 10 is attached to the user, as shown in FIGS. 39 and 40, the attachment portion 360 is first put on both ears of the user, and then, for example, as shown in FIGS. If the apparatus main body 311 is attached to any one of the left mounting parts 380, it can be attached quickly and easily. Further, the present invention is not limited to this method, and the reader 10 may be attached to the user after being assembled as shown in FIG.
　次に、読取処理について説明する。本構成に係る読取装置１０でも、所定のトリガ条件の成立毎に、又は所定の開始条件の成立後に継続的に情報コードの読み取り処理を行うことができるようになっている。例えば、操作スイッチが押されたことを撮像開始のトリガとし、操作スイッチが押された後に継続的に撮像部２３による撮像処理を行い、情報コードが撮像範囲に入り込む毎にその情報コードを読み取るようにしてもよい。或いは、操作スイッチ４２とは異なるセンサによって所定状態が検出されたことを条件として読み取りを開始するようにしてもよい。例えば、ケース３１２の前方方向に物体が近接したことを検出する公知の近接センサを設け、物体が近接したときに照明光源や撮像部を動作させて撮像、解読を行うようにしてもよい。 Next, the reading process will be described. The reading apparatus 10 according to this configuration can also perform information code reading processing continuously each time a predetermined trigger condition is satisfied or after a predetermined start condition is satisfied. For example, when the operation switch is pressed, the imaging start trigger is used, and after the operation switch is pressed, the imaging process is continuously performed by the imaging unit 23, and the information code is read each time the information code enters the imaging range. It may be. Alternatively, reading may be started on the condition that a predetermined state is detected by a sensor different from the operation switch 42. For example, a known proximity sensor that detects the proximity of an object in the forward direction of the case 312 may be provided, and when an object approaches, an illumination light source or an imaging unit may be operated to perform imaging and decoding.
　或いは、マイクから入力され音声を解析し、所定音声に該当するか否か（例えば一定量以上の音量が検出されたか否か、或いは所定波形の音声が検出されたか否か）を判断するようにすればよい。なお、この判断処理は、読取装置１０で行ってもよく、外部装置で行ってもよい。 Alternatively, the voice input from the microphone is analyzed, and it is determined whether or not the voice corresponds to the predetermined voice (for example, whether or not a volume of a predetermined amount or more is detected or whether or not a voice having a predetermined waveform is detected). do it. This determination process may be performed by the reading device 10 or an external device.
　このような処理は、例えば図４３のような流れで行うこともできる。この図４３の例では、例えば、装置本体３１１に設けられたマイクから音声入力があった場合、読取装置１０からスマートフォン等の情報端末に音声データを送信する。そして、この情報端末は、読取装置１０から音声データの送信を受けた場合、その音声データをインターネット等の通信回線を介して管理サーバに送信する。そして、管理サーバでは、その音声データを解析して文字や記号などの情報に変換し、その変換後の情報（音声を解読した解読情報）を再び情報端末に送信する。情報端末には、予め複数のコマンドが用意されており、管理サーバから送信されてきた解読情報がいずれかのコマンドに該当する場合には、そのコマンドを読取装置１０に送信するように指令を与える。このような構成では、例えば、「スタート」という情報が情報端末に登録された開始コマンドである場合、使用者が「スタート」という音声を発した場合には、その音声が管理サーバで解析され、その後、情報端末に対し、解析後の「スタート」という解読情報が送信される。情報端末は、このような情報（開始コマンドに該当する解読情報）を管理サーバから受けた場合、読取装置１０に向けて読取開始を指示する指示情報を送信し、読取装置１０は、情報端末からこのような指示情報を受けたことをトリガとして読取処理を開始することになる。 Such processing can also be performed in a flow as shown in FIG. 43, for example. In the example of FIG. 43, for example, when there is a voice input from a microphone provided in the apparatus main body 311, the voice data is transmitted from the reading device 10 to an information terminal such as a smartphone. And when this information terminal receives transmission of audio data from the reader 10, it transmits the audio data to the management server via a communication line such as the Internet. Then, the management server analyzes the voice data and converts it into information such as characters and symbols, and transmits the converted information (decoding information obtained by decoding the voice) to the information terminal again. A plurality of commands are prepared in advance in the information terminal, and when the decryption information transmitted from the management server corresponds to any command, an instruction is given to transmit the command to the reading device 10. . In such a configuration, for example, when the information “start” is a start command registered in the information terminal, when the user utters the voice “start”, the voice is analyzed by the management server, Thereafter, decrypted information “start” after analysis is transmitted to the information terminal. When the information terminal receives such information (decoding information corresponding to the start command) from the management server, the information terminal transmits instruction information instructing the reading start to the reading device 10, and the reading device 10 receives the information from the information terminal. The reading process is started by receiving such instruction information as a trigger.
　本構成に係る読取装置は、図２３、図２９のような装着方法、使用方法に限られず、様々な使用方法で使用することができる。例えば、ケーブル３０２に接続される外部装置Ｄ（図４７）は、図２３のように、腰に掛けて使用してもよく、図４４のように、使用者の胸のポケットに入れて使用してもよい。また、図４５、図４６のように、取付部３６０から装置本体３１１を一時的に或いは継続的に取り外して読み取りに使用してもよく、この場合も、図２３、図４４のように、外部装置Ｄは、様々な場所に配置しておくことができる。 The reading apparatus according to this configuration is not limited to the mounting method and the usage method as shown in FIGS. 23 and 29, and can be used in various usage methods. For example, the external device D (FIG. 47) connected to the cable 302 may be used on the waist as shown in FIG. 23, or used in the chest pocket of the user as shown in FIG. May be. 45 and 46, the apparatus main body 311 may be temporarily or continuously removed from the attachment portion 360 and used for reading. In this case, as shown in FIGS. The device D can be placed in various places.
　また、本構成では、図４７のように、ケーブル３０２は、外部装置Ｄ（読取作業の使用時に用いられる外部装置）に着脱可能に取り付けられるようになっており、図４８のように、外部装置Ｄから取り外して外部装置Ｄとは異なる外部機器ＰＣなどにも接続できるようになっている。外部装置Ｄの機能な様々であるが、装置本体３１１に電力を供給する供給源として機能していてもよく、装置本体３１１から情報（装置本体３１１で情報コードを解読したときの解読データ等）を記憶する記憶媒体として機能していてもよい。或いは、外部装置ＤにＣＰＵ等の制御回路を搭載しておき、撮像部２３で撮像されたコード画像を外部装置Ｄでデコードするようにしてもよい。 Further, in this configuration, as shown in FIG. 47, the cable 302 is detachably attached to the external device D (external device used when the reading operation is used), and as shown in FIG. It can be connected to an external device PC that is removed from the external device D and different from the external device D. Although there are various functions of the external device D, it may function as a supply source for supplying power to the device main body 311 and information from the device main body 311 (decoded data when the information code is decoded by the device main body 311). May function as a storage medium for storing. Alternatively, a control circuit such as a CPU may be mounted on the external device D, and the code image captured by the imaging unit 23 may be decoded by the external device D.
　本構成では、取付部３６０は、ケース３１２とは別体として構成され、使用者の顔の右側に配置されると共にケースを着脱可能な右側装着部と、使用者の顔の左側に配置されると共にケースを着脱可能な左側装着部とを有している。 In this configuration, the attachment portion 360 is configured as a separate body from the case 312, and is disposed on the right side of the user's face, and is disposed on the right side of the user's face and the left side of the user's face. And a left mounting portion to which the case can be attached and detached.
　この構成によれば、ケースを使用者の顔の右側にも左側にも装着可能となり、装着の自由度が増す。 According to this configuration, the case can be mounted on the right side or the left side of the user's face, and the degree of freedom of mounting increases.
　また、取付部３６０は、使用者の右耳に取り付けられる右耳取付部と、使用者の左耳に取り付けられる左耳取付部と、右耳取付部と左耳取付部とを連結する連結部とを有する。 The attachment portion 360 is a right ear attachment portion attached to the user's right ear, a left ear attachment portion attached to the user's left ear, and a connecting portion that connects the right ear attachment portion and the left ear attachment portion. And have.
　この構成によれば、取付部が両耳に取り付けられるため、装着時の安定性が増し、顔の動きとケースとを、より安定的に連動させやすくなる。また、ケースを耳に取り付けることができるため、他の装着具（ヘルメットや眼鏡等）が使用される場合でも人体に装着しやすくなる。 According to this configuration, since the attachment portion is attached to both ears, the stability at the time of wearing increases, and it becomes easier to link the movement of the face and the case more stably. Further, since the case can be attached to the ear, it is easy to attach to the human body even when other wearing tools (such as a helmet or glasses) are used.
　また、ケース及び取付部のいずれか一方には磁石が配置され、他方には磁石に吸引される吸引部が配置されており、ケースが右側装着部に装着される場合には、ケースと右側装着部とが磁石と吸引部との吸引によって保持され、ケースが左側装着部に装着される場合には、ケースと左側装着部とが磁石と吸引部との吸引によって保持される構成となっている。 In addition, a magnet is arranged in one of the case and the mounting portion, and a suction portion that is attracted by the magnet is arranged in the other. When the case is attached to the right attachment portion, the case and the right attachment When the case is mounted on the left side mounting part, the case and the left side mounting part are held by suction between the magnet and the suction part. .
　この構成によれば、ケースを顔の右側に装着する場合でも、左側に装着する場合でも、磁石の吸引力を利用して容易に装着しやすくなる。また、取付部からのケースの取り外しや、付け替えなども容易に行いやすくなる。 According to this configuration, the case can be easily mounted using the attractive force of the magnet regardless of whether the case is mounted on the right side or the left side of the face. Moreover, it becomes easy to remove or replace the case from the mounting portion.
　また、ケース又はケースに組み付けられた他部品には、右側装着部に形成された右側被嵌合部と嵌合可能に構成され、左側装着部に形成された左側被嵌合部と嵌合可能に構成された嵌合部が形成されており、ケースが右側装着部に取り付けられる時に、嵌合部と右側被嵌合部とが嵌合し、ケースが左側装着部に取り付けられる時に、嵌合部と左側被嵌合部とが嵌合する構成となっている。 Also, the case or other parts assembled to the case can be fitted to the right mating part formed on the right mounting part and can be mated to the left mating part formed on the left mounting part. When the case is attached to the right mounting part, the fitting part and the right mating part are fitted, and when the case is attached to the left mounting part, the fitting part is formed. It is the structure which a part and a left side fitting part fit.
　この構成では、ケースが顔の右側に装着される場合でも、左側に装着される場合でも、嵌合状態で取り付けられるため、ケースが位置ずれしにくくなる。 In this configuration, even when the case is attached to the right side or the left side of the face, the case is not easily displaced because it is attached in a fitted state.
　また、右側装着部に対してケースを着脱可能に連結し、且つ右側装着部に対してケースを連結した際に右側装着部に対するケースの姿勢が第１所定姿勢となるようにガイドする第１ガイド部と、左側装着部に対してケースを着脱可能に連結し、且つ左側装着部に対してケースを連結した際に左側装着部に対するケースの姿勢が第２所定姿勢となるようにガイドする第２ガイド部と、を有する。 In addition, the first guide that guides the case so that the case with respect to the right mounting part becomes the first predetermined attitude when the case is detachably connected to the right mounting part and the case is connected to the right mounting part. And a second guide that guides the case so that the posture of the case with respect to the left mounting portion becomes a second predetermined posture when the case is connected to the left mounting portion and the case is connected to the left mounting portion. And a guide portion.
　この構成では、ケースが顔の右側に装着される場合でも、左側に装着される場合でも、取付部に対するケースの姿勢を安定的に定めることができる。 In this configuration, it is possible to stably determine the posture of the case with respect to the mounting portion regardless of whether the case is attached to the right side or the left side of the face.
　また、ガイド部は、ケースに設けられた少なくとも２つのケース側連結部と、右側装着部に設けられた少なくとも２つの右側連結部と、左側装着部に設けられた少なくとも２つの左側連結部と、を備えており、少なくとも２つのケース側連結部と少なくとも２つの右側連結部とがそれぞれ連結されることによりケースが右側装着部に取り付けられ、少なくとも２つのケース側連結部と少なくとも２つの左側連結部とがそれぞれ連結されることによりケースが左側装着部に取り付けられる構成となっている。 Further, the guide portion includes at least two case side connecting portions provided in the case, at least two right connecting portions provided in the right mounting portion, and at least two left connecting portions provided in the left mounting portion, The case is attached to the right mounting portion by connecting at least two case-side connecting portions and at least two right-side connecting portions, and at least two case-side connecting portions and at least two left-side connecting portions are provided. And the case are connected to the left mounting portion.
　この構成によれば、ケースが顔の右側に装着される場合でも、左側に装着される場合でも、取付部に定められた少なくとも２つの連結部に対し、ケースに設けられた２つの連結部（ケース側連結部）を合わせるように連結する構成であるため、ケースの向きが所望の方向を向くように、より正確に設定されやすくなる。 According to this configuration, even when the case is attached to the right side of the face or the left side, the two connection portions provided in the case (with respect to at least two connection portions defined in the attachment portion) (Case side connecting portion) is connected so as to be matched, and therefore, it becomes easier to set the case more accurately so that the direction of the case faces a desired direction.
　また、２つのケース側連結部として、永久磁石として構成される第１ケース側連結部と、永久磁石として構成される第２ケース側連結部とが設けられ、２つの右側連結部として、永久磁石として構成される第１右側連結部と、永久磁石として構成される第２右側連結部とが設けられ、２つの左側連結部として、永久磁石として構成される第１左側連結部と、永久磁石として構成される第２左側連結部とが設けられ、第１ケース側連結部は、第１右側連結部及び第１左側連結部と極性が異なり、且つ第２右側連結部及び第２左側連結部と極性が同じであり、第２ケース側連結部は、第２右側連結部及び第２左側連結部と極性が異なり、第１右側連結部及び第１左側連結部と極性が同じになっている。 In addition, as the two case side connection portions, a first case side connection portion configured as a permanent magnet and a second case side connection portion configured as a permanent magnet are provided, and as the two right side connection portions, a permanent magnet A first right connecting portion configured as a permanent magnet, a second right connecting portion configured as a permanent magnet, and as two left connecting portions, a first left connecting portion configured as a permanent magnet, and a permanent magnet And a first case-side connecting part having a polarity different from that of the first right-side connecting part and the first left-side connecting part, and a second right-side connecting part and a second left-side connecting part. The polarity is the same, and the second case side connecting portion has a different polarity from the second right connecting portion and the second left connecting portion, and the same polarity as the first right connecting portion and the first left connecting portion.
　この構成では、ケースが顔の右側に装着される場合でも、左側に装着される場合でも、少なくとも２位置で磁石同士が引き合う力を利用してケースを適正な位置により強くより正確に導くことができ、位置合わせや連結の負担をより低減することができる。更に、ケースが顔の右側に装着される場合でも、左側に装着される場合でも、対応しない連結部同士を合わせるように逆に取り付けた場合、対応しない連結部同士が同極性であるため、各位置で連結部同士が反発し合うことになり、連結されないことになる。従って、ケースが顔の右側に装着される場合でも、左側に装着される場合でも、正規の向きの場合には、取付部に対するケースの位置合わせをより正確かつ迅速に行い易くなり、逆向きでの異常な連結については、より確実に防ぐことができる。 In this configuration, whether the case is mounted on the right side or the left side of the face, the case can be guided more strongly and more accurately to an appropriate position by using the force with which the magnets attract at least two positions. It is possible to reduce the burden of alignment and connection. Furthermore, even when the case is attached to the right side of the face or the left side, when the connection parts that do not correspond are attached so as to match each other, the connection parts that do not correspond have the same polarity. The connecting parts repel each other at the position, and are not connected. Therefore, whether the case is mounted on the right side or the left side of the face, it is easier to align the case with the mounting portion more accurately and quickly when it is in the correct orientation. This abnormal connection can be prevented more reliably.
　また、取付部は、使用者のいずれかの耳に掛けられて支持される被支持部と、被支持部から延びる前側延出部と、前側延出部に連結されると共にケースを保持する保持部と、を少なくとも備え、使用者に取付部を取り付けた取付時に、前側延出部が被支持部よりも前側に延びて配置され、被支持部を支持する耳の耳孔よりも前位置に保持部が配置される構成となっている。 In addition, the attachment portion is supported by being supported on one of the user's ears, a front extending portion extending from the supported portion, a holding portion connected to the front extending portion and holding the case At the time of attachment when the attachment portion is attached to the user, the front extension portion is arranged to extend to the front side of the supported portion, and is held at a position in front of the ear hole of the ear that supports the supported portion. The part is arranged.
　この構成では、ケースを保持する保持部が使用者の耳孔よりも前位置に配置されるため、保持部が使用者の耳孔を塞ぎにくくなる。 In this configuration, since the holding unit that holds the case is disposed in front of the user's ear canal, it is difficult for the holding unit to block the user's ear canal.
　また、保持部は、耳孔よりも前位置において使用者の顔に対向する裏面部と、裏面部の反対側に配置された表面部とを備えており、ケースを表面部で保持する構成となっている。 The holding portion includes a back surface portion facing the user's face at a position before the ear canal and a surface portion disposed on the opposite side of the back surface portion, and is configured to hold the case by the surface portion. ing.
　この構成では、ケースが使用者の顔から離れた位置に配置される表面部で保持されるため、表面部に保持されるケースが使用者の耳孔を塞ぎにくくなる。 In this configuration, since the case is held by the surface portion arranged at a position away from the user's face, the case held on the surface portion hardly blocks the user's ear canal.
　また、ケースにおいて取付部に取り付けられる側の壁部には、音を導出する導出孔が形成されており、ケースが取付部に取り付けられた取り付け時には、取付部の一部をなす被覆部によって導出孔の少なくとも一部が覆われ、ケースが取付部から取り外された取り外し時には、導出孔において取り付け時に被覆部によって覆われる部分が露出する構成となっている。 In addition, a lead-out hole that leads out sound is formed in the wall portion of the case that is attached to the attachment portion. When the case is attached to the attachment portion, it is led out by a covering portion that forms a part of the attachment portion. At least a part of the hole is covered, and when the case is removed after being detached from the attachment portion, a portion of the lead-out hole that is covered by the covering portion at the time of attachment is exposed.
　この構成では、ケースが顔の近くに配置されるような装着時には、導出孔を塞ぐことで相対的に音を抑制することができ、音発生源が使用者の耳の近くにある場合でも、使用者に大きな音が届きすぎることを抑えることができる。一方、ケースが顔から離れて使用されやすい非装着時には、導出孔を露出させることで相対的に音を大きくすることができ、音発生源が使用者の耳からある程度離れている場合でも、使用者に音が届きやすくなる。 In this configuration, when the case is placed near the face, the sound can be relatively suppressed by closing the outlet hole, even when the sound source is near the user's ear, It can suppress that a loud sound reaches a user too much. On the other hand, when the case is not worn easily away from the face, the sound can be made relatively loud by exposing the lead-out hole, even if the sound source is some distance away from the user's ear Makes it easier for people to reach.
　［第１～第３の実施形態に対する他の実施形態]
　本発明は前述した第１～第３の実施形態に限定されるものではなく、例えば次のような実施形態も本発明の技術的範囲に含まれる。 [Other Embodiments for the First to Third Embodiments]
The present invention is not limited to the first to third embodiments described above. For example, the following embodiments are also included in the technical scope of the present invention.
　第１実施形態の構成に加え、ケーブルを支持するケーブル支持部を設けるようにしてもよい。図１等の例では、取付部６０がケース１２の一方の壁部（側壁部１３ｂ）側に設けられているが、ケース１２の一方の壁部とは反対の壁部（側壁部１３ａ）において取付部６０の裏側の位置に、ケース１２から引き出されたケーブル８０を支持するケーブル支持部が形成されていてもよい。例えば、図５に示す操作スイッチ４２の位置に、側壁部１３ａと一体的に又は側壁部１３ａに固定される環状の通し孔部を設けるようにしてもよい。或いは、他の位置から引き出されたケーブル８０を締結部材や固定治具によって取付部６０の裏側の位置に固定するようにしてもよい。或いは、ケーブル８０を引き出す位置自体を取付部６０の裏側の位置とし、ケース１２の一部（例えば、ケーブル８０を導通させる孔など）によってケーブル８０を保持するようにしてもよい。この構成では、ケース１２がある程度引っ張られても回転中心部となる取付部６０の裏側でケーブル８０が受けられ、取付部６０付近を中心とするモーメントが生じにくいため、ケース１２が回転しにくくなる。従って、使用者の顔に対する読取装置全体の相対的な向きが安定的に維持されやすくなる。 In addition to the configuration of the first embodiment, a cable support portion for supporting the cable may be provided. In the example of FIG. 1 and the like, the attachment portion 60 is provided on the one wall portion (side wall portion 13b) side of the case 12, but in the wall portion (side wall portion 13a) opposite to the one wall portion of the case 12. A cable support portion that supports the cable 80 drawn from the case 12 may be formed at a position on the back side of the attachment portion 60. For example, you may make it provide the cyclic | annular through-hole part fixed to the side wall part 13a integrally with the side wall part 13a in the position of the operation switch 42 shown in FIG. Or you may make it fix the cable 80 pulled out from the other position to the position of the back side of the attaching part 60 with a fastening member or a fixing jig. Alternatively, the cable 80 may be held by a part of the case 12 (for example, a hole through which the cable 80 is conducted) such that the position where the cable 80 is pulled out is the position behind the attachment portion 60. In this configuration, even if the case 12 is pulled to some extent, the cable 80 is received on the back side of the attachment portion 60 that becomes the center of rotation, and a moment around the vicinity of the attachment portion 60 does not easily occur, so the case 12 is difficult to rotate. . Therefore, the relative orientation of the entire reading apparatus with respect to the user's face is easily maintained stably.
　第１実施形態で例示した耳掛け部６２は、ケース１２の一部又はケース１２に連結された連結部（例えば耳挿入部６１）に対して変位可能に設けられていてもよい。そして、この場合、使用者の左耳に耳掛け部６２を取り付ける場合の第１位置と、使用者の右耳に耳掛け部６２を取り付ける場合の第２位置とに位置決め可能とされていればよい。この構成によれば、使用者の右の耳にも左の耳にも読取装置を取り付けることができ、各耳に取り付けるときには、耳掛け部６２の位置をその耳に合わせた位置に位置決めすることができる。 The ear hook 62 illustrated in the first embodiment may be provided so as to be displaceable with respect to a part of the case 12 or a connecting part (for example, the ear insertion part 61) connected to the case 12. And in this case, if it can be positioned at the first position when attaching the ear hook 62 to the left ear of the user and the second position when attaching the ear hook 62 to the right ear of the user. Good. According to this configuration, the reading device can be attached to the right ear or the left ear of the user, and when attaching to each ear, the position of the ear hook 62 is positioned at a position corresponding to the ear. Can do.
　第１実施形態では、ケース１２の内部又は外部にセンサ部４６が設けられているが、いずれの実施形態でも、処理部は、少なくともセンサ部４６で所定の検出結果が得られたことを条件として情報コードの解読を行うようにしてもよい。例えば、取付部６０が使用者の耳に取り付けられた所定状態をセンサ部４６が検知しうるように構成し、センサ部４６により所定状態が検知されたことを条件として、照明光源やマーカ光照射部による照射が開始されると共に撮像部による撮像が開始され、これに応じて処理部が情報コードの解読を行うようにしてもよい。具体的には、センサ部４６を複数軸の加速度センサ（三軸加速度センサ等）によって構成し、加速度センサ（三軸加速度センサ等）が所定の加速度状態（例えば、ほぼ移動が検出されない加速度状態）となった状態を、上記「所定状態」としてもよい。或いは、３軸センサ等で構成し、所定方向に重力加速度が生じている場合を「所定状態」として照射や解読を開始してもよい。或いは、歯のかみ合わせによる衝撃や、足の上げ下げ運動等で衝撃を与え指令をすることを想定し、衝撃に起因する所定の加速度変化を検出するようにしてもよい。 In the first embodiment, the sensor unit 46 is provided inside or outside the case 12. However, in any embodiment, the processing unit is provided that a predetermined detection result is obtained at least by the sensor unit 46. The information code may be decoded. For example, the sensor unit 46 is configured to detect a predetermined state in which the mounting unit 60 is mounted on the user's ear, and illumination light source or marker light irradiation is performed on condition that the sensor unit 46 detects the predetermined state. The imaging unit may start imaging and the imaging unit may start imaging, and the processing unit may decode the information code accordingly. Specifically, the sensor unit 46 is configured by a multi-axis acceleration sensor (triaxial acceleration sensor or the like), and the acceleration sensor (triaxial acceleration sensor or the like) is in a predetermined acceleration state (for example, an acceleration state in which almost no movement is detected). This state may be the “predetermined state”. Alternatively, it may be configured by a three-axis sensor or the like, and irradiation or decoding may be started with a “predetermined state” when gravity acceleration occurs in a predetermined direction. Alternatively, a predetermined acceleration change due to the impact may be detected on the assumption that a command is given by impact due to tooth meshing or a foot lifting / lowering motion.
　いずれの実施形態でも、撮像部２３は、ケース１２の外部の画像を連続的又は断続的に撮像可能とされており、処理部は、撮像部２３によって撮像された画像が所定状態となったことを条件として、その条件成立後に撮像部２３によって撮像された情報コードを解読する構成となっていてもよい。このような撮像部２３（カメラ）によって撮像画像を検出する方法としては、ジェスチャ指示（グー、チョキ、パー等手の形状で動きを変える）の検出、動き検出（動作中は動いているが、コードを読む時は動きがなくなるので所定の静止画像の継続を検出）、設定用ＱＲコードのような物で指示照明を付けずに画像を監視、コードらしきものの検出、指の検出などが挙げられる。この構成では、撮像部２３で撮像された画像が所定状態となるまでは、処理部による解読処理を停止させて省電力化を図ることができ、撮像部２３にて所定状態の画像が撮像されるように対応をとることで解読開始状態に復帰させることができる。 In any embodiment, the imaging unit 23 can capture images outside the case 12 continuously or intermittently, and the processing unit has confirmed that the image captured by the imaging unit 23 is in a predetermined state. As a condition, the information code captured by the imaging unit 23 after the condition is satisfied may be decoded. As a method of detecting a captured image by such an image pickup unit 23 (camera), detection of gesture instructions (changing movement by hand shape such as goo, choki, par), motion detection (moving during operation, (There is no movement when reading the code, so it is possible to detect the continuation of a predetermined still image), monitoring the image without using the indicator illumination with an object such as a setting QR code, detection of what appears to be a code, detection of a finger, etc. . In this configuration, until the image captured by the imaging unit 23 is in a predetermined state, the decoding process by the processing unit can be stopped to save power, and the image of the predetermined state is captured by the imaging unit 23. By taking such measures, it is possible to return to the decoding start state.
　いずれの実施形態でも、解読や照明開始のトリガとしては、マイクからの音声入力であってもよい。この場合、マイクから入力され音声を解析し、所定音声に該当するか否かを判断するようにすればよい。なお、この判断処理は、読取装置１０で行ってもよく、外部装置で行ってもよい。 In any embodiment, voice input from a microphone may be used as a trigger for decoding or lighting start. In this case, the sound input from the microphone may be analyzed to determine whether or not the sound corresponds to the predetermined sound. This determination process may be performed by the reading device 10 or an external device.
　いずれの実施形態でも、目の付近まで読取り口を伸ばし、図１３のように瞬き検出センサを設け、瞬き検出センサによって所定の検出結果が得られることを条件として照射や解読を開始してもよい。この場合、瞬きの回数や、目を閉じている時間によって指示をすることができる。瞬き検出センサは、例えば図１２のように構成し、まつ毛が光を遮り受光素子に光が返ってきた状態を瞬きの発生状態として検出すればよい。 In any embodiment, the reading port may be extended to the vicinity of the eyes, a blink detection sensor as shown in FIG. 13 may be provided, and irradiation or decoding may be started on condition that a predetermined detection result is obtained by the blink detection sensor. . In this case, an instruction can be given according to the number of blinks or the time during which the eyes are closed. The blink detection sensor is configured as shown in FIG. 12, for example, and may detect a state where the eyelashes block light and the light returns to the light receiving element as a blink occurrence state.
　いずれの実施形態でも、近接センサを設け、読取装置１０が耳に取り付けられたときに、使用者の顔の近接を近接センサによって検出できるようにしてもよい。そして、この場合、近接センサで所定の検出結果が得られたことを条件として照射や解読を開始すればよい。或いは、公知の測距センサ（レーザ方式や超音波方式等（を設け、読取装置１０の前側において所定距離以内に物体が配置されたか否かを検出するようにしてもよい。この場合、測距センサで所定の検出結果が得られたことを条件として照射や解読を開始すればよい。 In any of the embodiments, a proximity sensor may be provided so that the proximity sensor can detect the proximity of the user's face when the reader 10 is attached to the ear. In this case, irradiation and decoding may be started on condition that a predetermined detection result is obtained by the proximity sensor. Alternatively, a known distance measuring sensor (laser method, ultrasonic method, etc.) may be provided to detect whether or not an object is disposed within a predetermined distance on the front side of the reading device 10. In this case, distance measurement is performed. Irradiation and decoding may be started on condition that a predetermined detection result is obtained by the sensor.
　いずれの実施形態でも、筋電センサを用い、顔の筋肉（頬筋、笑筋等）の変化を検出するようにしてもよい。この場合、筋電センサで所定の検出結果が得られたことを条件として照射や解読を開始すればよい。 In any of the embodiments, a change in facial muscles (cheek muscles, laughing muscles, etc.) may be detected using a myoelectric sensor. In this case, irradiation and decoding may be started on condition that a predetermined detection result is obtained by the myoelectric sensor.
　第１実施形態では、取付部６０として、耳挿入部６１及び耳掛け部６２を設けていたが、耳挿入部６１又は耳掛け部６２若しくはこれらの両方を着脱可能としてもよい。その一例としては、例えば、イヤホンとして構成される耳挿入部６１を図１４、図１５のように着脱可能とすることができる。図１４の例では、イヤホンとして構成される耳挿入部６１において、端子６９が設けられ、この端子６９がケースに形成された孔（端子）１８に差し込み可能とされている。そして、端子６９が孔１８に差し込まれたときには、ケース１２側から耳挿入部６１側に音声信号が送信され、この音声信号に基づいて耳挿入部６１から音声が発せられるようになっている。一方、図１４、図１５のように、孔１８にイヤホンが挿し込まれていない場合（例えば、孔１８に何も挿し込まれていない場合、或いは、音声信号の伝送対象となる媒体が挿し込まれていない場合）には、ケース１２側に設けられた図示しない情報報知部によって情報の報知が可能とされている。この情報報知部は、例えばスピーカ等であってもよく、この場合、耳挿入部６１が孔１８に差し込まれていない場合、耳挿入部６１に代わってスピーカから音が発せられることになる。また、情報報知部は、表示部（モニタやランプ等）やバイブレータ等であってもよい。 In the first embodiment, the ear insertion portion 61 and the ear hook portion 62 are provided as the attachment portion 60, but the ear insertion portion 61 and / or the ear hook portion 62 may be detachable. As an example, for example, the ear insertion portion 61 configured as an earphone can be made detachable as shown in FIGS. In the example of FIG. 14, a terminal 69 is provided in an ear insertion portion 61 configured as an earphone, and this terminal 69 can be inserted into a hole (terminal) 18 formed in the case. When the terminal 69 is inserted into the hole 18, an audio signal is transmitted from the case 12 side to the ear insertion portion 61 side, and sound is emitted from the ear insertion portion 61 based on this audio signal. On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 14 and 15, when the earphone is not inserted into the hole 18 (for example, when nothing is inserted into the hole 18, or the medium to which the audio signal is transmitted is inserted). If not, information can be notified by an information not shown (not shown) provided on the case 12 side. The information notification unit may be, for example, a speaker. In this case, when the ear insertion unit 61 is not inserted into the hole 18, a sound is emitted from the speaker instead of the ear insertion unit 61. In addition, the information notification unit may be a display unit (a monitor, a lamp, or the like), a vibrator, or the like.
　この構成によれば、取付部をケースから取り外し、例えば手持ち式などとして使用しやすくなる。また、取付部を取り外して使用する場合でも、情報を報知することが可能となり、利便性が一層高まる。 According to this configuration, the attachment portion is removed from the case, and for example, it can be easily used as a handheld type. Further, even when the attachment portion is removed and used, information can be notified, and convenience is further enhanced.
　また、図１４、図１５のように耳挿入部や耳掛け部を着脱可能とし、交換可能とすることで、使う人毎に取付部を交換するといった対応も可能となる。従って、他人が使用した部品を耳への取付に使用することを望まない使用者にとっては有用となる。また、耳挿入部や耳掛け部のサイズを多数揃えて交換可能とするといった対応も可能となる。 Also, as shown in FIGS. 14 and 15, by making the ear insertion part and the ear hook part detachable and exchangeable, it is possible to cope with changing the mounting part for each user. Therefore, it is useful for a user who does not want to use a part used by another person for attachment to the ear. In addition, it is possible to replace the ear insertion portion and the ear hook portion with a large number of sizes.
　また、図１４、図１５のように、耳挿入部を着脱可能に構成する場合、図１４のような孔１８（端子６９を挿入する孔）と同様の構成及び機能を有する孔を側壁部１３ｂとは反対側の側壁部１３ａに形成し、端子６９を挿入できるようにしてもよい。この場合、右耳に装着する場合には、耳挿入部６１の端子６９を孔１８に挿入するように固定し、左耳に装着する場合には耳挿入部６１の端子６９を孔１８とは反対側の孔に挿入するように固定すればよい。 14 and 15, when the ear insertion portion is configured to be detachable, the side wall portion 13b has a hole having the same configuration and function as the hole 18 (hole for inserting the terminal 69) as shown in FIG. It may be formed on the side wall portion 13a on the opposite side to that so that the terminal 69 can be inserted. In this case, when attaching to the right ear, the terminal 69 of the ear insertion portion 61 is fixed so as to be inserted into the hole 18, and when attaching to the left ear, the terminal 69 of the ear insertion portion 61 is defined as the hole 18. What is necessary is just to fix so that it may insert in the hole of the other side.
　また、上述した図１４、図１５の構成のように、耳挿入部６１又は耳掛け部６２若しくはこれらの両方を着脱可能とした場合、これらいずれかの取付部又は両取付部を取り外した後に、その取り外した当該取付部とは異なる他の取付部材を取り付けるようにしてもよい。例えば、図１６の例は、図１４、図１５のように耳挿入部６１を着脱可能とした場合に、耳挿入部６１に代えて取付部材（クリップ）１６０をケース１２に取り付ける例を示している。この取付部材１６０は、弾性変形可能な金属材料などの弾性部材１６２が設けられ、弾性部材１６２の一端部１６２ａが本体部１６４に固定され、他端部１６２ｂ側が撓み変形可能に構成されると共に、本体部１６４に接触する側に付勢されるようになっている。そして、他端部１６２ｂと、本体部１６４との間に物体を挟み込むことができるようになっている。従って、取付部材１６０をケース１２に固定して用いれば、これをクリップとして機能させることでケース１２を服などに取り付けて用いることができる。 In addition, when the ear insertion part 61 or the ear hooking part 62 or both of them are detachable as in the configuration of FIGS. 14 and 15 described above, after removing any one of these attachment parts or both attachment parts, You may make it attach the other attachment member different from the removed said attachment part. For example, the example of FIG. 16 shows an example in which an attachment member (clip) 160 is attached to the case 12 instead of the ear insertion part 61 when the ear insertion part 61 is detachable as shown in FIGS. Yes. The mounting member 160 is provided with an elastic member 162 such as an elastically deformable metal material, one end 162a of the elastic member 162 is fixed to the main body 164, and the other end 162b side is configured to be able to bend and deform. The main body 164 is biased toward the side in contact with it. And an object can be inserted | pinched between the other end part 162b and the main-body part 164. FIG. Therefore, if the attachment member 160 is used while being fixed to the case 12, the case 12 can be attached to clothes or the like by using it as a clip.
　このように取付部を取り外して他機能の別部品と交換できるようにすると、利便性の面で一層有利になる。 ¡In this way, it becomes more advantageous in terms of convenience if the mounting part can be removed and replaced with another part of another function.
　また、上述のいずれの構成においても、発音部４４から発せられる音（例えば、イヤホンとして構成される耳挿入部６１から発せられる音）の音量を調整する音量調整部を設けるようにしてもよい。例えば、ケース１２にツマミや音量調整ボタン（音量増大ボタンや音量減少ボタンなど）などの操作部を設け、この操作部によって増大の指示があった場合には発音部４４からの音を公知の方法で増大させ、操作部によって減少の指示があった場合には、発音部４４からの音を公知の方法で減少させるようにしてもよい。この構成によれば、当該情報コード読取装置で発せられる音の音量を装置内で調整できるようになる。 In any of the above-described configurations, a volume adjusting unit that adjusts the volume of a sound emitted from the sound generation unit 44 (for example, a sound emitted from the ear insertion unit 61 configured as an earphone) may be provided. For example, an operation unit such as a knob or a volume adjustment button (a volume increase button, a volume decrease button, etc.) is provided on the case 12, and when an increase instruction is given by this operation unit, the sound from the sound generation unit 44 is transmitted by a known method. If the instruction is given by the operation unit to decrease, the sound from the sound generation unit 44 may be decreased by a known method. According to this configuration, the volume of the sound emitted from the information code reading device can be adjusted within the device.
　第１実施形態では、処理部の一例として、制御回路４０を例示し、制御回路４０による撮像部によって撮像された情報コードの画像の処理として当該情報コードのコード画像を解読する構成を例示したが、撮像部によって撮像された情報コードの画像の処理はこれに限られない。例えば、撮像部によって撮像された情報コードの画像データを外部装置に送信するような処理であってもよい。この場合、外部装置（ホスト装置等）にて当該画像データを解読すればよい。 In the first embodiment, the control circuit 40 is illustrated as an example of the processing unit, and the configuration in which the code image of the information code is decoded as the processing of the information code image captured by the imaging unit by the control circuit 40 is illustrated. The processing of the information code image captured by the imaging unit is not limited to this. For example, the processing may be such that image data of an information code imaged by the imaging unit is transmitted to an external device. In this case, the image data may be decoded by an external device (such as a host device).
　第２実施形態の代表例及び変更例として、第１実施形態の特徴の全てを含む構成を例示したが、第３実施形態の特徴の全てを含む構成において、第２実施形態の代表例又は変更例のような制御を行ってもよい。或いは、他の実施形態で説明したいずれかの構成において、第２実施形態の代表例又は変更例のような制御を行ってもよい。 As a representative example and modification of the second embodiment, the configuration including all of the features of the first embodiment has been illustrated. However, in the configuration including all of the features of the third embodiment, a representative example or modification of the second embodiment. You may perform control like an example. Alternatively, in any of the configurations described in the other embodiments, the control as in the representative example or the modified example of the second embodiment may be performed.
　上記実施形態では、スピーカやイヤホンなどの発音部を設けた例を示したが、これらの発音部の駆動方式は、ダイナミック型、マグネチック型、バランスド・アーマチュア型、ハイブリッド型、圧電型、クリスタル型、静電型などの公知の様々な駆動方式を用いることができる。また、使用者に音を伝達可能な駆動方式であれば良く、例えば、骨伝導によって使用者に音を伝達する骨伝導式のスピーカやイヤホンなどであってもよい。 In the above embodiment, an example in which a sound generating unit such as a speaker or an earphone is provided has been described. However, the driving method of these sound generating units is a dynamic type, a magnetic type, a balanced armature type, a hybrid type, a piezoelectric type, and a crystal type. Various known driving methods such as a mold and an electrostatic type can be used. Further, any drive system capable of transmitting sound to the user may be used. For example, a bone conduction type speaker or earphone that transmits sound to the user by bone conduction may be used.
　いずれの実施形態のいずれの構成でも、撮像部２３で撮像した情報コードの画像データを装置本体から外部の装置に送信し、外部の装置で解読を行うようにしてもよい。 In any configuration of any of the embodiments, the image data of the information code captured by the imaging unit 23 may be transmitted from the apparatus main body to an external apparatus and decoded by the external apparatus.
　いずれの実施形態のいずれの構成でも、電池は、身体に装着されるケース内に設けられていてもよく、ケースとケーブルを介して接続される外部装置内に設けられていてもよい。 In any configuration of any of the embodiments, the battery may be provided in a case attached to the body, or may be provided in an external device connected to the case via a cable.
　第３実施形態では、右側装着部と左側装着部とが設けられた構成を例示したが、右側装着部のみの構成や左側装着部のみの構成であってもよい（即ち、いずれか一方の耳側のみに取り付ける構成であってもよい）。この場合、第３実施形態の構成から単にいずれかの装着部のみを装着すればよい。 In the third embodiment, the configuration in which the right mounting portion and the left mounting portion are provided has been illustrated, but the configuration of only the right mounting portion or the configuration of only the left mounting portion may be used (that is, either one of the ears). It may be configured to be attached only to the side). In this case, it is only necessary to mount only one of the mounting portions from the configuration of the third embodiment.
　第３実施形態では、ケース３１２及び取付部３６０の両方に磁石が配置された構成を例示したが、いずれか一方に磁石が配置され、他方には鉄等の磁性体（磁石に吸引される吸引部）が配置されていてもよい。例えば、ケース３１２側には、第３実施形態と同様の磁石を配置しておき、右側装着部３７０の第１右側連結部及び第２右側連結部と、左側装着部３８０の第１左側連結部及び第２左側連結部を鉄等の磁性体に代えるようにしてもよい。この場合でも、ケース３１２が右側装着部３７０に装着される場合には、ケース３１２と右側装着部３７０とが磁石と吸引部との吸引によって保持され、ケース３１２が左側装着部３８０に装着される場合には、ケース３１２と左側装着部３８０とが磁石と吸引部との吸引によって保持される構成となっている。或いは、ケース３１２側に鉄等の磁性体を配置し、取付部３６０側に磁石を配置してもよい。 In the third embodiment, the configuration in which the magnets are arranged in both the case 312 and the attachment portion 360 is illustrated, but the magnet is arranged in one of them, and the other is a magnetic body such as iron (attraction attracted by the magnet). Part) may be arranged. For example, the same magnet as that of the third embodiment is arranged on the case 312 side, and the first right connecting portion and the second right connecting portion of the right mounting portion 370 and the first left connecting portion of the left mounting portion 380 are arranged. And you may make it replace a 2nd left side connection part with magnetic bodies, such as iron. Even in this case, when the case 312 is attached to the right attachment portion 370, the case 312 and the right attachment portion 370 are held by the suction of the magnet and the suction portion, and the case 312 is attached to the left attachment portion 380. In such a case, the case 312 and the left mounting part 380 are held by suction between the magnet and the suction part. Alternatively, a magnetic material such as iron may be disposed on the case 312 side, and a magnet may be disposed on the attachment portion 360 side.
　[第４実施形態]
　以下、本発明を具現化した第４実施形態について、図面を参照して説明する。 [Fourth embodiment]
Hereinafter, a fourth embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings.
　なお、この実施形態において前述した実施形態と同一又は同等の構成要素には同一符号を付してその説明を省略又は簡略化する。 In addition, in this embodiment, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the component same or equivalent to embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted or simplified.
　（全体構成）
　図４９及び前述した図２に示すように、第４実施形態に係る携帯型情報コード読取装置１０Ａ（以下、単に情報コード読取装置１０Ａ又は読取装置１０Ａとも称する）は、情報コードを撮像する撮像部２３と、撮像部２３によって撮像された情報コードの画像を処理する処理部（制御回路４０）と、撮像部２３及び処理部を保持するケース５１２と、ケース５１２とは別体として設けられ、ケース５１２保持しつつ使用者に取り付ける取付部材５６０とを備えている。 (overall structure)
As shown in FIG. 49 and FIG. 2 described above, the portable information code reader 10A according to the fourth embodiment (hereinafter also simply referred to as the information code reader 10A or the reader 10A) is an image pickup unit that picks up an information code. 23, a processing unit (control circuit 40) that processes an image of an information code captured by the imaging unit 23, a case 512 that holds the imaging unit 23 and the processing unit, and a case 512 are provided separately. 512, and an attachment member 560 that is attached to the user while being held.
　まず、情報コード読取装置１０Ａの電気的構成について説明する。前述した図２に示すように、情報コード読取装置１０Ａは、ハードウェア的には一次元コードや二次元コードなどの情報コードを読取可能なコードリーダとして構成されており、ケース５１２によって装置本体５１１の外郭が構成され、このケース内に各種電子部品が収容された構成をなしている。 First, the electrical configuration of the information code reader 10A will be described. As shown in FIG. 2 described above, the information code reader 10A is configured as a code reader capable of reading an information code such as a one-dimensional code or a two-dimensional code in hardware. In this case, various electronic components are accommodated in the case.
　前述した図２に示すように、情報コード読取装置１０Ａは、主に、照明光源２１、マーカ光照射部５０、撮像部２３、フィルタ２５、結像レンズ２７等の光学系と、メモリ３５、制御回路４０、操作スイッチ４２等のマイクロコンピュータ（以下「マイコン」という）系と、電源スイッチ４１、電池４９等の電源系と、から構成されている。なお、これらは、図略のプリント配線板に実装あるいはケース内に内装されている。これらの電気的な構成及びその動作は、前述したものを同一又は同等である。 As shown in FIG. 2 described above, the information code reader 10A mainly includes an illumination light source 21, a marker light irradiation unit 50, an imaging unit 23, a filter 25, an imaging lens 27, and other optical systems, a memory 35, and a control. The circuit is composed of a microcomputer (hereinafter referred to as “microcomputer”) such as an operation switch 42 and a power supply system such as a power switch 41 and a battery 49. These are mounted on a printed wiring board (not shown) or housed in a case. These electrical configurations and operations thereof are the same as or equivalent to those described above.
　（装着構造等）
　次に、携帯型情報コード読取装置１０Ａの主要な特徴である装着構造等について説明する。 (Mounting structure etc.)
Next, a mounting structure, which is a main feature of the portable information code reader 10A, will be described.
　携帯型情報コード読取装置１０Ａは、主に、装置本体５１１と取付部材５６０とによって構成されている。装置本体５１１は、情報コード１００を撮像可能な撮像部２３と、撮像部２３によって撮像された情報コード１００の画像を処理する処理部（制御回路４０（前述した図２を参照））と、撮像部２３及び処理部を保持するケース５１２とを備えた構成となっている。また、取付部材５６０は、ケース５１２とは別体として設けられ、撓み変形可能な可撓性の身体装着部（装着部）５６２と、ケース５１２が着脱される取付部５６６とを備えている。 The portable information code reader 10A is mainly composed of an apparatus main body 511 and an attachment member 560. The apparatus main body 511 includes an imaging unit 23 capable of imaging the information code 100, a processing unit (control circuit 40 (see FIG. 2 described above)) that processes an image of the information code 100 captured by the imaging unit 23, imaging It is the structure provided with the case 512 holding the part 23 and a process part. The attachment member 560 is provided as a separate body from the case 512, and includes a flexible body mounting portion (mounting portion) 562 that can be bent and deformed, and a mounting portion 566 to which the case 512 is attached and detached.
　まず、装置本体５１１の構成について説明する。 First, the configuration of the apparatus main body 511 will be described.
　装置本体５１１は、ケース５１２の内部に、前述した図２に示す各種電子部品が収容されてなるものであり、本構成では、取付部材５６０に対して図４９のように装着可能とされており、図５５、図５６のように離脱可能とされている。 The apparatus main body 511 is configured such that the above-described various electronic components shown in FIG. 2 are accommodated in the case 512. In this configuration, the apparatus main body 511 can be attached to the attachment member 560 as shown in FIG. 55 and FIG. 56 are made detachable.
　図５１、図５２に示すように、ケース５１２は、全体として長手状且つ箱状に構成されている。なお、本構成では、装置本体５１１の前後方向、幅方向（横方向）、上下方向を以下のように規定する。まず、撮像部２３の視野範囲の中心の方向（光軸方向）を前後方向としており、ケース５１２の長手方向が前後方向となっている。そして、前後方向と直交する方向においてケース５１２の厚さ方向が幅方向（横方向）となっており、ケース５１２の対向壁部５１２ａと取付部５６６の取付壁部５６６ａとが向かい合う方向が幅方向（横方向）となっている。そして、上記前後方向及び幅方向と直交する方向が上下方向となっている。なお、図５１、図５７等に示すように、以下では、前後方向をＸ軸方向とし、上下方向をＹ軸方向とし、幅方向（横方向）をＺ軸方向として説明する。そして、前方向をＸ軸正方向、後ろ方向をＸ軸負方向とする。更に、上方向をＹ軸正方向、下方向をＹ軸負方向とする。そして、ケース５１２側から見て取付部材５６０側をＺ軸負方向とし、取付部材５６０とは反対側をＺ軸正方向とする。 As shown in FIG. 51 and FIG. 52, the case 512 has a longitudinal and box shape as a whole. In this configuration, the front-rear direction, the width direction (lateral direction), and the up-down direction of the apparatus main body 511 are defined as follows. First, the center direction (optical axis direction) of the field of view of the imaging unit 23 is the front-rear direction, and the longitudinal direction of the case 512 is the front-rear direction. In the direction orthogonal to the front-rear direction, the thickness direction of the case 512 is the width direction (lateral direction), and the direction in which the facing wall portion 512a of the case 512 faces the mounting wall portion 566a of the mounting portion 566 is the width direction. (Lateral direction). And the direction orthogonal to the said front-back direction and the width direction is the up-down direction. As shown in FIG. 51, FIG. 57, and the like, the following description will be made assuming that the front-rear direction is the X-axis direction, the vertical direction is the Y-axis direction, and the width direction (lateral direction) is the Z-axis direction. The front direction is the X-axis positive direction, and the rear direction is the X-axis negative direction. Furthermore, the upward direction is the Y-axis positive direction, and the downward direction is the Y-axis negative direction. Then, the attachment member 560 side when viewed from the case 512 side is the Z-axis negative direction, and the opposite side of the attachment member 560 is the Z-axis positive direction.
　ケース５１２は、このような定義において前端部に前壁部５１３ｃが設けられ、後端部に後壁部５１３ｄが設けられている。更に、幅方向（左右方向）一方側（取付部材５６０側）に側壁部５１３ｂが設けられ、これとは反対側に側壁部５１３ａが設けられている。更に、上端部には上壁部５１３ｅが設けられ、下端部には下壁部５１３ｆが設けられている。そして、これら前壁部、後壁部、側壁部、上壁部、下壁部により、前後左右及び上下が囲まれる箱状構成で、撮像部や制御回路などの電子部品を収容する収容部が構成されている。そして、一方の側壁部５１３ｂが、取付部材５６０と対向する対向壁部５１２ａとして機能している。 The case 512 is provided with a front wall portion 513c at a front end portion and a rear wall portion 513d at a rear end portion in such a definition. Further, a side wall 513b is provided on one side (the mounting member 560 side) in the width direction (left and right direction), and a side wall 513a is provided on the opposite side. Further, an upper wall portion 513e is provided at the upper end portion, and a lower wall portion 513f is provided at the lower end portion. And the storage part which stores electronic parts, such as an image pick-up part and a control circuit, is a box-like composition enclosed by these front wall part, rear wall part, side wall part, upper wall part, and lower wall part in front and rear, right and left, and up and down. It is configured. And one side wall part 513b functions as the opposing wall part 512a facing the attachment member 560.
　また、本構成では、使用者の顔Ｆａを基準として顔Ｆａが向く方向を顔Ｆａの前側、後頭部側を顔Ｆａの後ろ側として説明する。 In this configuration, the direction in which the face Fa faces with respect to the user's face Fa is defined as the front side of the face Fa, and the occipital side is described as the back side of the face Fa.
　図４９、図５０、図５２に示すように、ケース５１２の前端部に設けられる前壁部５１３ｃには、情報コードからの光を導入可能な読取口５１４が設けられている。そして、取付部材５６０は、図５０のようにケース５１２が使用者の顔Ｆａの横位置に配置され且つ読取口５１４が使用者Ｐの前側を向く構成で当該ケース５１２を使用者Ｐの耳Ｅｙに取り付ける構成となっている。このように、使用者の顔が向く側と同じ側に撮像部２３が向くように取付部材５６０によってケース５１２が取り付けられている。 49, 50, and 52, the front wall 513c provided at the front end of the case 512 is provided with a reading port 514 through which light from the information code can be introduced. As shown in FIG. 50, the mounting member 560 is configured such that the case 512 is disposed at a lateral position of the user's face Fa and the reading port 514 faces the front side of the user P. It is configured to be attached to. Thus, the case 512 is attached by the attachment member 560 so that the imaging unit 23 faces the same side as the side where the user's face faces.
　図５２、図５４のように、ケース５１２において上壁部５１３ｅには、外部操作が可能な操作スイッチ４２（４２ａ，４２ｂ）（図２参照）が設けられている。また、ケース５１２の内部には、前述の図２のように照明光を照射する照明光源２１及びマーカ光を照射するマーカ光照射部５０が設けられており、照明光源２１からの照明光及びマーカ光照射部５０からのマーカ光はいずれも、前壁部５１３ｃからケース５１２の前側に照射されるようになっている。 As shown in FIGS. 52 and 54, in the case 512, an operation switch 42 (42a, 42b) (see FIG. 2) capable of external operation is provided on the upper wall portion 513e. The case 512 is provided with an illumination light source 21 for illuminating illumination light and a marker light irradiation unit 50 for irradiating marker light as shown in FIG. 2, and the illumination light and marker from the illumination light source 21 are provided. Any marker light from the light irradiation unit 50 is irradiated to the front side of the case 512 from the front wall portion 513c.
　次に、取付部材５６０について説明する。 Next, the mounting member 560 will be described.
　取付部材５６０は、撓み変形可能な可撓性の身体装着部５６２と、ケース５１２が着脱される取付部５６６と、身体装着部５６２を支持するベース部５６５とを備え、ケース５１２とは別体として設けられている。この取付部材５６０は、使用者の顔Ｆａが向く側に、読取口５１４が向く構成でケース５１２を使用者の耳Ｅｙに取り付ける構成となっている。 The mounting member 560 includes a flexible body mounting portion 562 that can be bent and deformed, a mounting portion 566 to which the case 512 is attached and detached, and a base portion 565 that supports the body mounting portion 562, and is separate from the case 512. It is provided as. The attachment member 560 is configured to attach the case 512 to the user's ear Ey with a configuration in which the reading port 514 faces the side where the user's face Fa faces.
　身体装着部５６２は、使用者の両耳に掛けられる耳掛け部として構成されており、図４９のように、被装着時の自然状態において所定形状で維持される構成であり、且つ弾性変形可能に構成されている。この身体装着部５６２は、ベース部５６５から延出した構成となっており、全体としてＵ字状の構成となっている。この身体装着部５６２には、上方側に凸となるように湾曲した右耳掛け部５６２ａと、右耳掛け部５６２ａから離れて形成されると共に上方側に凸となるように湾曲した左耳掛け部５６２ｂと、これら右耳掛け部５６２ａと左耳掛け部５６２ｂとを連結する連結部５６２ｃとを備えている。連結部５６２ｃは、図５０のように取付部材５６０を使用者の耳に掛けて装着したときに、使用者の後頭部又は首に当てられるように巻き付く部分である。 The body wearing portion 562 is configured as an ear hooking portion that is hung on both ears of the user, and is configured to be maintained in a predetermined shape in a natural state when worn, as shown in FIG. 49, and can be elastically deformed. It is configured. The body mounting portion 562 is configured to extend from the base portion 565, and has a U-shaped configuration as a whole. The body wearing part 562 includes a right ear hook part 562a that is curved so as to protrude upward, and a left ear hook that is formed away from the right ear hook part 562a and is curved so as to protrude upward. Part 562b and a connecting part 562c for connecting the right ear hooking part 562a and the left ear hooking part 562b. The connecting portion 562c is a portion that wraps around the user's back or neck when the mounting member 560 is mounted on the user's ear as shown in FIG.
　ベース部５６５は、長手状に構成される取付部５６６の長手方向中心部付近の裏面側（取付壁部５６６ａとは反対面側）に連結され、ベース部５６５の裏面側から突出した構成となっている。そして、ベース部の周壁部を起点として延び出る構成で身体装着部５６２が湾曲して形成されている。 The base portion 565 is connected to the back surface side (the surface opposite to the mounting wall portion 566a) in the vicinity of the central portion in the longitudinal direction of the mounting portion 566 configured in a longitudinal shape, and protrudes from the back surface side of the base portion 565. ing. And the body mounting | wearing part 562 is curved and formed by the structure extended from the surrounding wall part of a base part.
　取付部５６６は、全体として板状に構成されており、一方の板面側にベース部５６５が連結され、他方の板面側にケース５１２が着脱可能に連結される構成となっている。ケース５１２が連結する板面側の壁部が取付壁部５６６ａとして構成されており、この取付壁部５６６ａにケース５１２が装着及び離脱可能とされている。 The mounting portion 566 is configured in a plate shape as a whole, and the base portion 565 is connected to one plate surface side, and the case 512 is detachably connected to the other plate surface side. A wall portion on the plate surface side to which the case 512 is connected is configured as an attachment wall portion 566a, and the case 512 can be attached to and detached from the attachment wall portion 566a.
　ガイド部５５０は、取付部材５６０の取付部５６６に対してケース５１２を着脱可能に連結し、且つその連結の際に取付部５６６に対するケース５１２の姿勢が所定姿勢（具体的には、使用者Ｐの顔が向く方向（視線が向く側）に読取口５１４が向く姿勢）となるようにガイドするように機能する。このガイド部５５０は、ケース５１２に設けられた２つのケース側連結部（第１ケース側連結部５５１及び第２ケース側連結部５５２）と、取付部材５６０の取付部５６６に設けられた２つの取付部材側連結部（第１取付部材側連結部５５３及び第２取付部材側連結部５５４）とを備えており、２つのケース側連結部と２つの取付部材側連結部とがそれぞれ連結することにより取付部材５６０とケース５１２とを連結する。 The guide portion 550 connects the case 512 to the attachment portion 566 of the attachment member 560 in a detachable manner, and the posture of the case 512 with respect to the attachment portion 566 during the connection is a predetermined posture (specifically, the user P It functions so as to guide the face so that the reading port 514 faces in the direction in which the face faces (the side in which the line of sight faces). The guide portion 550 includes two case-side connecting portions (first case-side connecting portion 551 and second case-side connecting portion 552) provided in the case 512 and two attaching portions 566 provided in the attaching member 560. It is provided with the attachment member side connection part (the 1st attachment member side connection part 553 and the 2nd attachment member side connection part 554), and two case side connection parts and two attachment member side connection parts are connected, respectively. Thus, the attachment member 560 and the case 512 are coupled.
　２つのケース側連結部は、磁石として構成される第１ケース側連結部５５１及び第２ケース側連結部５５２からなり、２つの取付部材側連結部は、磁石として構成される第１取付部材側連結部５５３及び第２取付部材側連結部５５４からなる。なお、第１ケース側連結部５５１及び第２ケース側連結部５５２は、一方側磁石又は磁性体の一例に相当し、第１取付部材側連結部５５３及び第２取付部材側連結部５５４は、磁性体又は一方側磁石の一例に相当する。 The two case-side connecting portions are composed of a first case-side connecting portion 551 and a second case-side connecting portion 552 configured as magnets, and the two mounting member-side connecting portions are on the first mounting member side configured as magnets. It consists of a connecting portion 553 and a second attachment member side connecting portion 554. The first case side connecting portion 551 and the second case side connecting portion 552 correspond to an example of a one side magnet or a magnetic body, and the first mounting member side connecting portion 553 and the second mounting member side connecting portion 554 are: It corresponds to an example of a magnetic body or one side magnet.
　第１ケース側連結部５５１と第１取付部材側連結部５５３との極性が互いに異なり、これら第１ケース側連結部５５１と第１取付部材側連結部５５３とが互いに吸引して連結される構成となっている。例えば、第１ケース側連結部５５１は、表面部がＮ極として構成された永久磁石として構成され、第１取付部材側連結部５５３は、表面部がＳ極として構成された永久磁石として構成されており、互いの表面部が対向したときに吸引し合うようになっている。また、第２ケース側連結部５５２と第２取付部材側連結部５５４との極性が互いに異なり、これら第２ケース側連結部５５２と第２取付部材側連結部５５４とが互いに吸引して連結される構成となっている。例えば、第２ケース側連結部５５２は、表面部がＳ極として構成された永久磁石として構成され、第２取付部材側連結部５５４は、表面部がＮ極として構成された永久磁石として構成されており、互いの表面部が対向したときに吸引し合うようになっている。 The first case side connecting portion 551 and the first mounting member side connecting portion 553 have different polarities, and the first case side connecting portion 551 and the first mounting member side connecting portion 553 are sucked and connected to each other. It has become. For example, the first case side connecting portion 551 is configured as a permanent magnet whose surface portion is configured as an N pole, and the first mounting member side connecting portion 553 is configured as a permanent magnet whose surface portion is configured as an S pole. They are sucked together when their surface portions face each other. Further, the polarities of the second case side connecting portion 552 and the second mounting member side connecting portion 554 are different from each other, and the second case side connecting portion 552 and the second mounting member side connecting portion 554 are sucked and connected to each other. It is the composition which becomes. For example, the second case side connecting portion 552 is configured as a permanent magnet whose surface portion is configured as an S pole, and the second mounting member side connecting portion 554 is configured as a permanent magnet whose surface portion is configured as an N pole. They are sucked together when their surface portions face each other.
　更に、第１ケース側連結部５５１と第２取付部材側連結部５５４とが同極性であり、第２ケース側連結部５５２と第１取付部材側連結部５５３とが同極性である。上述の例では、第１ケース側連結部５５１は、表面部がＮ極として構成され、第２取付部材側連結部５５４も、表面部がＮ極として構成されているため、互いの表面部が対向したときに反発し合うようになっている。また、第２ケース側連結部５５２は、表面部がＳ極として構成され、第１取付部材側連結部５５３も、表面部がＳ極として構成されているため、互いの表面部が対向したときに反発し合うようになっている。 Furthermore, the first case side connecting portion 551 and the second mounting member side connecting portion 554 have the same polarity, and the second case side connecting portion 552 and the first mounting member side connecting portion 553 have the same polarity. In the above-described example, the first case side connecting portion 551 has a surface portion configured as an N pole, and the second attachment member side connecting portion 554 is also configured as a surface portion having an N pole. When they face each other, they repel each other. Moreover, since the surface part of the second case side connecting part 552 is configured as an S pole, and the surface part of the first attachment member side connecting part 553 is also configured as an S pole, the surface parts face each other. Have come to repel each other.
　更に、対向壁部５１２ａを基準とする撮像部２３の変位、又はベース部５６５を基準とする取付部５６６の変位を変更可能な変位調整部５６４が設けられている変位調整部５６４は、例えば公知のラチェット機構として構成されており、所定の回転軸を中心として、取付部５６６を回転し得るように構成されており、取付部５６６の回転位置を段階的に変更できるようになっている。 Furthermore, a displacement adjustment unit 564 provided with a displacement adjustment unit 564 that can change the displacement of the imaging unit 23 with respect to the opposing wall portion 512a or the displacement of the attachment portion 566 with respect to the base portion 565 is known, for example. The ratchet mechanism is configured such that the attachment portion 566 can be rotated around a predetermined rotation axis, and the rotational position of the attachment portion 566 can be changed stepwise.
　このように構成される読取装置１０Ａでは、所定のトリガ条件の成立毎に、又は所定の開始条件の成立後に継続的に情報コードの読み取り処理を行うことができるようになっている。例えば、操作スイッチが押されたことを撮像開始のトリガとし、操作スイッチが押された後に継続的に撮像部２３による撮像処理を行い、情報コードが撮像範囲に入り込む毎にその情報コードを読み取るようにしてもよい。或いは、操作スイッチ４２とは異なるセンサによって所定状態が検出されたことを条件として読み取りを開始するようにしてもよい。例えば、ケース５１２の前方方向に物体が近接したことを検出する公知の近接センサを設け、物体が近接したときに照明光源や撮像部を動作させて撮像、解読を行うようにしてもよい。或いは、マイクから入力され音声を解析し、所定音声に該当するか否か（例えば一定量以上の音量が検出されたか否か、或いは所定波形の音声が検出されたか否か）を判断するようにすればよい。なお、この判断処理は、読取装置１０Ａで行ってもよく、外部装置で行ってもよい。 The reading apparatus 10A configured as described above can continuously read the information code every time a predetermined trigger condition is satisfied or after a predetermined start condition is satisfied. For example, when the operation switch is pressed, the imaging start trigger is used, and after the operation switch is pressed, the imaging process is continuously performed by the imaging unit 23, and the information code is read each time the information code enters the imaging range. It may be. Alternatively, reading may be started on the condition that a predetermined state is detected by a sensor different from the operation switch 42. For example, a known proximity sensor that detects the proximity of an object in the forward direction of the case 512 may be provided, and when an object approaches, an illumination light source or an imaging unit may be operated to perform imaging and decoding. Alternatively, the voice input from the microphone is analyzed, and it is determined whether or not the voice corresponds to the predetermined voice (for example, whether or not a volume of a predetermined amount or more is detected or whether or not a voice having a predetermined waveform is detected). do it. This determination process may be performed by the reading device 10A or an external device.
　（本構成の主な効果）
　本構成によれば、情報コード読取装置１０Ａを手で握らずに身体に装着して使用することが可能な構成を実現できる。更にこの構成では、身体に装着される部分（身体装着部５６２）を身体に取り付けた状態で、ケース側を分離するように取り外すことができるため、取り外し作業の容易化を図ることができる。更に、身体装着部５６２は、撓み変形可能な可撓性の構造であるため、身体に装着する際の自由度も大きくなる。 (Main effects of this configuration)
According to this configuration, it is possible to realize a configuration in which the information code reading device 10A can be worn and used without being grasped by a hand. Furthermore, in this configuration, since the case side can be detached while the part to be worn on the body (the body wearing part 562) is attached to the body, the removal work can be facilitated. Furthermore, since the body mounting portion 562 has a flexible structure that can be bent and deformed, the degree of freedom when mounting on the body is increased.
　また、身体装着部５６２は、被装着時の自然状態において所定形状で維持される構成であり、且つ弾性変形可能に構成されている。このように弾性復帰力によって規定形状で維持されようとする身体装着部５６２を取り付ける構造であるため、身体に取り付ける際に複雑な結び作業などを省略し易くなり、装着の一層の容易化を図ることができる。 Further, the body mounting portion 562 is configured to be maintained in a predetermined shape in a natural state when being worn, and is configured to be elastically deformable. Since the body mounting portion 562 that is to be maintained in the prescribed shape by the elastic restoring force is attached in this way, it is easy to omit a complicated knotting operation or the like when attaching to the body, and further facilitate the mounting. be able to.
　また、身体装着部５６２は、使用者の耳に掛けられる耳掛け部として構成されている。この構成では、読取装置１０Ａが耳に取り付けられるため、顔の動きと読取装置１０Ａ全体が連動することになり、使用者の顔の動きに合わせて読み取る方向を定めやすくなる。更に、取り付ける位置が耳であるため、他の装着具（ヘルメットや眼鏡等）が使用される場合でも容易に装着しやすくなる。 Also, the body wearing part 562 is configured as an ear hook part that is hung on the user's ear. In this configuration, since the reading device 10A is attached to the ear, the movement of the face and the entire reading device 10A are interlocked, and the reading direction can be easily determined in accordance with the movement of the user's face. Further, since the attachment position is the ear, it is easy to wear even when other wearing tools (such as a helmet or glasses) are used.
　また、取付部材５６０の所定の取付部５６６に対してケース５１２を着脱可能に連結し、且つその連結の際に取付部５６６に対するケース１２の姿勢が所定姿勢（具体的には、使用者Ｐの顔が向く方向（視線が向く側）に読取口５１４が向く姿勢）となるようにガイドするガイド部５５０が設けられている。この構成では、読取装置１０Ａを手で握らずに身体に装着して使用することが可能な構成において、身体からのケース側の取り外しを容易に行うことができ、且つ取り外し後の再装着も容易に行い得る構成を実現することができる。特に、再装着の際には、使用者に取り付けたままとされた取付部５６６に対してケース５１２の姿勢が所定姿勢となるようにガイド部５５０によってガイドされるため、ケース５１２側がより正確な位置及び向きになるように迅速に装着しやすくなる。 Further, the case 512 is detachably connected to a predetermined attachment portion 566 of the attachment member 560, and the posture of the case 12 with respect to the attachment portion 566 at the time of the connection is a predetermined posture (specifically, the user P's A guide portion 550 is provided for guiding the face so that the reading port 514 faces in the direction in which the face faces (the side in which the line of sight faces). In this configuration, in the configuration in which the reader 10A can be used by being attached to the body without being grasped by the hand, the case side can be easily detached from the body, and can be easily reattached after the removal. It is possible to realize a configuration that can be performed. In particular, when remounting, the case 512 is guided more accurately by the guide portion 550 so that the posture of the case 512 becomes a predetermined posture with respect to the attachment portion 566 that is left attached to the user. It becomes easy to mount quickly so as to be in the position and orientation.
　また、ガイド部５５０は、ケース５１２に設けられた少なくとも２つのケース側連結部と、取付部材５６０の取付部５６６に設けられた少なくとも２つの取付部材側連結部と、を備えており、２つのケース側連結部と２つの取付部材側連結部とがそれぞれ連結されることにより取付部材５６０とケース５１２とが連結される構成となっている。このように、取付部材５６０に定められた少なくとも２つの連結部（取付部材側連結部）に対し、ケース５１２に設けられた２つの連結部（ケース側連結部）を合わせるように連結する構成であるため、ケース５１２の向きが所望の方向を向くように、より正確に設定されやすくなる。 The guide portion 550 includes at least two case-side coupling portions provided in the case 512 and at least two attachment member-side coupling portions provided in the attachment portion 566 of the attachment member 560. The attachment member 560 and the case 512 are connected by connecting the case side connection portion and the two attachment member side connection portions, respectively. Thus, it is the structure connected so that two connection parts (case side connection part) provided in case 512 may match with at least two connection parts (attachment member side connection part) defined in attachment member 560. For this reason, it is easier to set the case 512 more accurately so that the direction of the case 512 is in a desired direction.
　また、ガイド部５５０が、ケース５１２及び取付部５６６の一方に設けられた一方側磁石と、ケース５１２及び取付部５６６の他方に設けられ、一方側磁石に吸引される磁性体とを有する。この構成によれば、一方側磁石と他方側の磁性体との間で生じる吸引力を利用してケース５１２を取付部材５６０の所定位置に導くことができ、位置合わせや連結の負担をより低減することができる。 Further, the guide portion 550 includes a one-side magnet provided on one of the case 512 and the attachment portion 566 and a magnetic body provided on the other of the case 512 and the attachment portion 566 and attracted by the one-side magnet. According to this configuration, the case 512 can be guided to a predetermined position of the mounting member 560 using the attractive force generated between the one-side magnet and the other-side magnetic body, thereby further reducing the burden of alignment and connection. can do.
　具体的には、２つのケース側連結部は、磁石として構成される第１ケース側連結部５５１及び第２ケース側連結部５５２からなり、２つの取付部材側連結部は、磁石として構成される第１取付部材側連結部５５３及び第２取付部材側連結部５５４からなる。そして、第１ケース側連結部５５１と第１取付部材側連結部５５３との極性が互いに異なり、これら第１ケース側連結部５５１と第１取付部材側連結部５５３とが互いに吸引して連結される構成となっている。また、第２ケース側連結部５５２と第２取付部材側連結部５５４との極性が互いに異なり、これら第２ケース側連結部５５２と第２取付部材側連結部５５４とが互いに吸引して連結される構成となっている。更に、第１ケース側連結部５５１と第２取付部材側連結部５５４とが同極性となっており、第２ケース側連結部５５２と第１取付部材側連結部５５３とが同極性となっている。 Specifically, the two case-side coupling portions include a first case-side coupling portion 551 and a second case-side coupling portion 552 configured as magnets, and the two attachment member-side coupling portions are configured as magnets. It consists of a first attachment member side connection portion 553 and a second attachment member side connection portion 554. And the polarity of the 1st case side connection part 551 and the 1st attachment member side connection part 553 is mutually different, These 1st case side connection part 551 and the 1st attachment member side connection part 553 are mutually sucked and connected. It is the composition which becomes. Further, the polarities of the second case side connecting portion 552 and the second mounting member side connecting portion 554 are different from each other, and the second case side connecting portion 552 and the second mounting member side connecting portion 554 are sucked and connected to each other. It is the composition which becomes. Furthermore, the 1st case side connection part 551 and the 2nd attachment member side connection part 554 are the same polarity, and the 2nd case side connection part 552 and the 1st attachment member side connection part 553 are the same polarity. Yes.
　この構成では、図５７のように、２つの連結位置において対応する連結部同士（即ち、第１ケース側連結部５５１と第１取付部材側連結部５５３、第２ケース側連結部５５２と第２取付部材側連結部５５４）がそれぞれ対向した位置関係になった場合に、それぞれの連結位置で生じる吸引力を利用してケース１２をガイド部５５０の所定位置により正確に導くことができる。逆に、対応しない連結部同士（即ち、第１ケース側連結部５５１と第２取付部材側連結部５５４、第２ケース側連結部５５２と第１取付部材側連結部５５３）は、互いに同極性であるため、それぞれが対向するような向き（逆向き）で連結が試みられても、各位置で反発し合うことになり、連結されないことになる。従って、図５７のように正規の向きの場合には、取付部材５６０に対するケース５１２の位置合わせをより正確かつ迅速に行い易くなり、逆向きでの異常な連結については、より確実に防ぐことができる。 In this configuration, as shown in FIG. 57, corresponding connecting portions at two connecting positions (that is, the first case side connecting portion 551 and the first attachment member side connecting portion 553, the second case side connecting portion 552 and the second connecting portion). When the attachment member-side connecting portions 554 are in the opposing positional relationship, the case 12 can be accurately guided to the predetermined position of the guide portion 550 using the suction force generated at each connecting position. On the other hand, the connection parts that do not correspond to each other (that is, the first case side connection part 551 and the second attachment member side connection part 554, the second case side connection part 552, and the first attachment member side connection part 553) have the same polarity. Therefore, even if connection is attempted in a direction (opposite direction) in which they face each other, they will repel each other and will not be connected. Therefore, in the case of the normal orientation as shown in FIG. 57, it becomes easier to align the case 512 with the mounting member 560 more accurately and quickly, and abnormal connection in the opposite direction can be more reliably prevented. it can.
　また、取付部材５６０は、取付部５６６と連結されるベース部５６５を備え、ベース部５６５から身体装着部（装着部）５６２が延びている。そして、ケース５１２は、ガイド部５５０によって取付部５６６に連結される対向壁部（被取付部）５１２ａを備えている。更に、ベース部５６５を基準とする取付部５６６の変位を変更可能な変位調整部６４が設けられている。この構成では、変位調整部５６４により、ベース部５６５を基準とする取付部５６６の変位を調整することができるため、ケース５１２が取付部５６６に取り付けられたときの撮像部２３の向きがより望ましい方向となるように微調整しやすくなる。 Also, the attachment member 560 includes a base portion 565 that is connected to the attachment portion 566, and a body attachment portion (attachment portion) 562 extends from the base portion 565. The case 512 includes an opposing wall portion (attached portion) 512 a that is connected to the attaching portion 566 by the guide portion 550. Furthermore, a displacement adjustment unit 64 that can change the displacement of the mounting portion 566 relative to the base portion 565 is provided. In this configuration, since the displacement adjustment unit 564 can adjust the displacement of the attachment portion 566 with respect to the base portion 565, the orientation of the imaging unit 23 when the case 512 is attached to the attachment portion 566 is more desirable. It becomes easier to fine-tune the direction.
　また、本構成では、ケース５１２内に電池が収容されている。この構成では、ケース５１２内に電源が存在するため、取付部材５６０からケース５１２を取り外している間、外部からの電力供給を受けずとも情報コードの読み取りを継続することができる。 Further, in this configuration, a battery is accommodated in the case 512. In this configuration, since the power source exists in the case 512, reading of the information code can be continued without receiving external power supply while the case 512 is removed from the mounting member 560.
　［第４実施形態の変更例]
　次に、図５８を参照して第４実施形態の変更例について説明する。 [Modification Example of Fourth Embodiment]
Next, a modification of the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG.
　この変更例は電源供給のみが上記第４実施形態と異なりそれ以外は第４実施形態と同一である。具体的には、取付部材５６０とケース５１２とを連結するようにケーブル（接続ケーブル）１９が設けられている。このケーブル５１９は、取付部材５６０又は取付部材５６０に電気的に接続された電池からケース５１２側に電力を供給するように構成されている。この構成では、電気的な構成をケース側（読取側）と取付部材側に分けることができ、ケース側の電子部品をより削減しやすくなるため、ケース側の小型化、軽量化を一層図りやすくなる。 This modified example differs from the fourth embodiment only in power supply, and is otherwise the same as the fourth embodiment. Specifically, a cable (connection cable) 19 is provided so as to connect the attachment member 560 and the case 512. The cable 519 is configured to supply power to the case 512 from the attachment member 560 or a battery electrically connected to the attachment member 560. In this configuration, the electrical configuration can be divided into the case side (reading side) and the mounting member side, and the electronic components on the case side can be more easily reduced, making it easier to reduce the size and weight of the case side. Become.
　なお、ケーブル５１９は、電力供給に用いるのではなく、情報通信に用いるものであってもよい。或いは、電力供給と情報通信に併用してもよい。例えば、前述の図２に示す通信部４８を取付部材５６０に設けられた機器内又は取付部材５６０に電気的に接続された機器内に設け、装置本体５１１側から取付部材５６０側にデータ（例えば解読データ）を送信し、取付部材５６０に設けられた機器内又は取付部材５６０に電気的に接続された機器内に設けられた通信部４８から外部装置にデータ（解読データ）を送信するように構成してもよい。或いは、装置本体５１１側に、撮像部２３を設け、取付部材５６０に設けられた機器内又は取付部材５６０に電気的に接続された機器内に制御回路４０やメモリ３５を設けるようにしてもよい。この場合、撮像部２３で撮像されたデータ（画像データ）を取付部材５６０に設けられた機器内又は取付部材５６０に電気的に接続された機器内に設けられた制御回路４０によって解読するようにしてもよい。 Note that the cable 519 may be used for information communication, not for power supply. Or you may use together for an electric power supply and information communication. For example, the communication unit 48 shown in FIG. 2 described above is provided in a device provided on the attachment member 560 or in a device electrically connected to the attachment member 560, and data (for example, from the apparatus main body 511 side to the attachment member 560 side). (Decryption data) is transmitted, and data (decryption data) is transmitted from the communication unit 48 provided in the device provided on the attachment member 560 or in the device electrically connected to the attachment member 560 to the external device. It may be configured. Alternatively, the imaging unit 23 may be provided on the apparatus main body 511 side, and the control circuit 40 and the memory 35 may be provided in a device provided on the mounting member 560 or in a device electrically connected to the mounting member 560. . In this case, data (image data) imaged by the imaging unit 23 is decoded by the control circuit 40 provided in the device provided on the attachment member 560 or in the device electrically connected to the attachment member 560. May be.
　なお、図５８に示すケーブル５１９は、ケース５１２内に収容可能に構成されていてもよく、取付部材５６０に設けられた収容部（図示略）に収容可能に構成されていてもよい。また、このようにケーブル５１９を収容可能に構成する場合、収容部にはケーブル５１９の自動巻き取り機構を設けるようにするとよい。 Note that the cable 519 shown in FIG. 58 may be configured to be accommodated in the case 512, or may be configured to be accommodated in an accommodating portion (not shown) provided in the attachment member 560. When the cable 519 is configured to be accommodated in this way, an automatic winding mechanism for the cable 519 may be provided in the accommodating portion.
　［第５実施形態]
　次に、図５９を参照して第５実施形態について説明する。 [Fifth Embodiment]
Next, a fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG.
　この第５実施形態は、ケースの対向壁部の構成、取付部材の取付壁部の構成、ガイド部の構成のみが第４実施形態又は第４実施形態の変更例と異なり、それ以外は第４実施形態又は第４実施形態の変更例と同一である。従って、それ以外は第４実施形態又は第４実施形態の変更例と同一であるとして詳細な説明は省略する。 The fifth embodiment is different from the fourth embodiment or the modified example of the fourth embodiment only in the configuration of the facing wall portion of the case, the configuration of the mounting wall portion of the mounting member, and the configuration of the guide portion. This is the same as the modification of the embodiment or the fourth embodiment. Accordingly, the rest of the description is the same as the fourth embodiment or the modification of the fourth embodiment, and a detailed description thereof is omitted.
　本構成でも、取付部材７６０の所定の取付部７６６に対してケース７１２を着脱可能に連結し、且つその連結の際に取付部７６６に対するケース７１２の姿勢が所定姿勢（具体的には、図５０と同様、使用者Ｐの顔が向く方向（視線が向く側）に読取口５１４が向く姿勢）となるようにガイドするガイド部７５０が設けられている。 Even in this configuration, the case 712 is detachably connected to the predetermined mounting portion 766 of the mounting member 760, and the posture of the case 712 with respect to the mounting portion 766 at the time of the connection is a predetermined posture (specifically, FIG. Similarly, a guide unit 750 is provided for guiding the user P so that the face of the user P faces (the posture in which the reading port 514 faces in the direction in which the line of sight faces).
　第５実施形態で用いられるガイド部７５０は、ケース７１２に設けられた２つのケース側連結部７５１，７５２と、取付部材７６０の取付部７６６に設けられた２つの取付部材側連結部７５３、７５４とを備えている。そして、２つのケース側連結部７５１，７５２と２つの取付部材側連結部７５３、７５４とがそれぞれ連結することにより取付部材７６０とケース７１２とを連結する構成となっている。２つのケース側連結部７５１，７５２は、一方側シート材として機能し、２つの取付部材側連結部７５３、７５４は、他方側シート材として機能しており、ケース側連結部７５１と取付部材側連結部７５３とが面ファスナーとして連結するようになっており、ケース側連結部７５２と取付部材側連結部７５４とが面ファスナーとして連結するようになっている。 The guide portion 750 used in the fifth embodiment includes two case side connecting portions 751 and 752 provided in the case 712 and two attachment member side connecting portions 753 and 754 provided in the attaching portion 766 of the attaching member 760. And. The two case- side connecting portions 751 and 752 and the two attachment member- side connecting portions 753 and 754 are connected to each other so that the attachment member 760 and the case 712 are connected. The two case side connecting portions 751 and 752 function as one side sheet material, and the two mounting member side connecting portions 753 and 754 function as the other side sheet material, and the case side connecting portion 751 and the mounting member side The connecting portion 753 is connected as a hook-and-loop fastener, and the case-side connecting portion 752 and the attachment member-side connecting portion 754 are connected as a hook-and-loop fastener.
　この構成によれば一方側シート材と他方側シート材とが結合しようとする作用を利用して、ケース５１２を取付部材５６０の所定位置に導くことができる。特に、再装着の際には、一方側シート材と他方側シート材を接触させるように操作すれば良く、再装着の際に大きな力や複雑な操作が不要であるため、作業性の面でも優れる。 According to this configuration, the case 512 can be guided to a predetermined position of the mounting member 560 by utilizing the action of the one side sheet material and the other side sheet material to be combined. In particular, when remounting, it is only necessary to operate so that the one side sheet material and the other side sheet material are brought into contact with each other, and no great force or complicated operation is required for remounting. Excellent.
　［第６実施形態]
　次に、図６０を参照して第５実施形態について説明する。 [Sixth Embodiment]
Next, a fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG.
　この第６実施形態は、ケースの対向壁部の構成、取付部材の取付壁部の構成、ガイド部の構成のみが第４実施形態又は第４実施形態の変更例と異なり、それ以外は第４実施形態又は第４実施形態の変更例と同一である。従って、それ以外は第４実施形態又は第４実施形態の変更例と同一であるとして詳細な説明は省略する。 The sixth embodiment is different from the fourth embodiment or the modified example of the fourth embodiment only in the configuration of the facing wall portion of the case, the configuration of the mounting wall portion of the mounting member, and the configuration of the guide portion. This is the same as the modification of the embodiment or the fourth embodiment. Accordingly, the rest of the description is the same as the fourth embodiment or the modification of the fourth embodiment, and a detailed description thereof is omitted.
　本構成でも、取付部材８６０の所定の取付部８６６に対してケース８１２を着脱可能に連結し、且つその連結の際に取付部３６６に対するケース８１２の姿勢が所定姿勢（具体的には、図５０と同様、使用者Ｐの顔が向く方向（視線が向く側）に読取口５１４が向く姿勢）となるようにガイドするガイド部８５０が設けられている。 Also in this configuration, the case 812 is detachably connected to the predetermined mounting portion 866 of the mounting member 860, and the posture of the case 812 with respect to the mounting portion 366 at the time of the connection is a predetermined posture (specifically, FIG. Similarly, a guide unit 850 is provided to guide the user P so that the face of the user P faces (the posture in which the reading port 514 faces in the direction in which the line of sight faces).
　第６実施形態で用いられるガイド部８５０は、ケース８１２に設けられた２つのケース側連結部８５１，８５２と、取付部材８６０の取付部８６６に設けられた２つの取付部材側連結部８５３、８５４とを備えている。そして、２つのケース側連結部８５１，８５２と２つの取付部材側連結部８５３、８５４とがそれぞれ連結することにより取付部材８６０とケース８１２とを連結する構成となっている。２つのケース側連結部８５１，８５２は、一方側嵌合部として機能し、２つの取付部材側連結部８５３、８５４は、被嵌合部として機能しており、ケース側連結部８５１と取付部材側連結部８５３とが嵌合構造で連結するようになっており、ケース側連結部８５２と取付部材側連結部８５４とが嵌合構造で連結するようになっている。 The guide portion 850 used in the sixth embodiment includes two case side connecting portions 851 and 852 provided in the case 812 and two attachment member side connecting portions 853 and 854 provided in the attaching portion 866 of the attaching member 860. And. The two case- side connecting portions 851 and 852 and the two attaching member- side connecting portions 853 and 854 are connected to each other, thereby connecting the attaching member 860 and the case 812. The two case- side connecting portions 851 and 852 function as one-side fitting portions, and the two attachment member- side connecting portions 853 and 854 function as fitted portions, and the case-side connecting portion 851 and the attachment member The side connecting portion 853 is connected with a fitting structure, and the case side connecting portion 852 and the attachment member side connecting portion 854 are connected with a fitting structure.
　この構成によれば一方側嵌合部と被嵌合部とが嵌合しようとする作用を利用して、ケース５１２を取付部材５６０の所定位置に導くことができる。また、特別な材料や複雑な構造を多用せずともケース５１２を取付部材５６０に安定的に取り付けることができる。 According to this configuration, the case 512 can be guided to a predetermined position of the mounting member 560 by utilizing the action of the one side fitting portion and the fitted portion to be fitted. Further, the case 512 can be stably attached to the attachment member 560 without using a special material or a complicated structure.
　［第７実施形態]
　次に、図６１、図６２等を参照して第７実施形態について説明する。 [Seventh Embodiment]
Next, a seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS.
　第７実施形態は、取付部材の構成のみが第４実施形態又は第４実施形態の変更例と異なり、それ以外は第４実施形態又は第４実施形態の変更例と同一である。具体的には、ベース部及び身体装着部のみが第４実施形態又は第４実施形態の変更例と異なり、それ以外は第４実施形態又は第４実施形態の変更例と同一となっている。例えば、装置本体５１１は、第４実施形態と同一である。 7th Embodiment differs from the modification of 4th Embodiment or 4th Embodiment only in the structure of an attachment member, and other than that is the same as the modification of 4th Embodiment or 4th Embodiment. Specifically, only the base part and the body wearing part are different from the modification example of the fourth embodiment or the fourth embodiment, and the other parts are the same as the modification example of the fourth embodiment or the fourth embodiment. For example, the apparatus main body 511 is the same as that in the fourth embodiment.
　第７実施形態で用いられる取付部材９６０は、取付部９６６の構造は第４実施形態で用いられる取付部５６６と同一となっている。一方、身体装着部９６２は、第４実施形態で用いられる身体装着部５６２と異なり、使用者の腕又は指に掛けられるバンド部材として構成されている。この身体装着部９６２は、一対の湾曲部９６２ａ、９６２ｂが互いに対向して配置され、全体として略環状に構成されている。そして、一対の湾曲部９６２ａ、９６２ｂの先端部が互いに対向して配置され、先端部間には隙間が形成されている。身体装着部４６２が一般的な指のサイズ程度に構成されている場合、このような湾曲部９６２ａ、９６２ｂの間に指を挿入しつつ指輪状に保持することで、使用者の指に取付部材９６０を装着できる。また、身体装着部９６２が一般的な手首のサイズ程度に構成されている場合、このような湾曲部９６２ａ、９６２ｂの間に手首を配置しつつ腕輪状に保持することで、使用者の腕に取付部材９６０を装着できる。 The attachment member 960 used in the seventh embodiment has the same structure of the attachment portion 966 as that of the attachment portion 566 used in the fourth embodiment. On the other hand, unlike the body mounting part 562 used in the fourth embodiment, the body mounting part 962 is configured as a band member that is hung on the user's arm or finger. The body mounting portion 962 is configured in a substantially annular shape as a whole, with a pair of curved portions 962a and 962b arranged to face each other. And the front-end | tip part of a pair of curved part 962a, 962b is mutually opposingly arranged, and the clearance gap is formed between front-end | tip parts. In the case where the body mounting portion 462 is configured to have a general finger size, an attachment member is attached to the user's finger by inserting the finger between the curved portions 962a and 962b and holding it in a ring shape. 960 can be installed. In addition, when the body wearing portion 962 is configured to have a general wrist size, the wrist is placed between the curved portions 962a and 962b and held in a bracelet so that the user's arm can be attached. A mounting member 960 can be attached.
　この構成では、装置本体５１１が指又は腕に取り付けられるため、手で握らずに操作可能な構成を実現しつつ、手の動きと連動させやすくなる。 In this configuration, since the apparatus main body 511 is attached to a finger or an arm, it is easy to be interlocked with the movement of the hand while realizing a configuration that can be operated without being gripped by the hand.
　なお、第７実施形態のいずれの構成でも、対向壁部の構成、取付壁部の構成、ガイド部の構成を第５実施形態のようにしてもよく、第６実施形態のようにしてもよい。 In any of the configurations of the seventh embodiment, the configuration of the opposing wall portion, the configuration of the mounting wall portion, and the configuration of the guide portion may be the same as in the fifth embodiment or the sixth embodiment. .
　［第７実施形態の変更例]
　第７実施形態の変更例では、第４実施形態の取付部材５６０（図５５等）と、第７実施形態の取付部材９６０（図６１、図６２等）を用いることができるようになっている。 [Modification of the seventh embodiment]
In the modified example of the seventh embodiment, the mounting member 560 (FIG. 55, etc.) of the fourth embodiment and the mounting member 960 (FIGS. 61, 62, etc.) of the seventh embodiment can be used. .
　本構成では、装置本体５１１の構成は第４実施形態と同一であり、この構成でも、装置本体５１１は、情報コードを撮像する撮像部２３と、撮像部２３によって撮像された情報コードの画像を処理する処理部と、撮像部２３及び処理部を保持するケース５１２とを備えている。そして、いずれの取付部材も、身体装着部と、ケース５１２が着脱される取付部とを備えており、ケース５１２とは別体として構成されている。 In this configuration, the configuration of the apparatus main body 511 is the same as that of the fourth embodiment. Even in this configuration, the apparatus main body 511 also captures an image of the information code imaged by the imaging unit 23 that images the information code and the imaging unit 23. A processing unit for processing, and a case 512 for holding the imaging unit 23 and the processing unit are provided. Each attachment member includes a body mounting portion and an attachment portion to which the case 512 is attached and detached, and is configured as a separate body from the case 512.
　この構成では、複数種類の取付部材５６０、９６０が使用者に取り付け可能とされており、いずれの取付部材が使用者に取り付けられた場合でも、その取り付けられた取付部材に対してケース１２を連結可能とされている。そして、この場合、取付部材５６０と取付部材９６０を択一的に用いるようにしてもよく、両方の取付部材５６０、９６０を装着した上で、いずれかの取付部材にケース５１２を取り付けるようにしてもよい。 In this configuration, a plurality of types of attachment members 560 and 960 can be attached to the user, and the case 12 is connected to the attached attachment member regardless of which attachment member is attached to the user. It is possible. In this case, the attachment member 560 and the attachment member 960 may be used alternatively, and both the attachment members 560 and 960 are attached, and the case 512 is attached to one of the attachment members. Also good.
　この構成では、予め用意された複数種類の取付部材５６０の中からいずれかを選択して利用することができ、使用状況に合わせて適切な位置に装着することが可能となる。そして、いずれの種類の取付部材５６０を用いる場合でも、ケース側は共通して用いることができるため、取付部材５６０の種類毎にケース側の構造を用意せずに済み、部品点数の低減及びコスト低減を図りやすくなる。 In this configuration, any one of a plurality of types of attachment members 560 prepared in advance can be selected and used, and can be mounted at an appropriate position in accordance with the use situation. In addition, even when any type of mounting member 560 is used, the case side can be used in common, so there is no need to prepare a case-side structure for each type of mounting member 560, reducing the number of parts and cost. It becomes easy to reduce.
　また、本構成では、複数種類の取付部材５６０、９６０の内、いずれかの取付部材にケース５１２が連結された場合に、ケース５１２が連結された取付部の種類を判定するようにしてもよい。 In this configuration, when the case 512 is connected to any one of the plurality of types of attachment members 560 and 960, the type of the attachment portion to which the case 512 is connected may be determined. .
　例えば、取付部材５６０において、図５５に示す一点鎖線Ａの位置に突起部を設け、取付部材９６０において図６１に示す一点鎖線Ｂの位置にも突起部を設けるように構成し、ケース５１２においてこれらＡの位置、Ｂの位置に対応するように第１孔部、第２孔部をそれぞれ形成するようにしてもよい。そして、例えば取付部材５６０にケース５１２が装着された場合には、Ａの位置に形成された突起部がケース５１２に形成された第１孔部内に挿入されるように構成し、取付部材９６０にケース５１２が装着された場合には、Ｂの位置に形成された突起部がケース５１２に形成された第２孔部内に挿入されるようにすればよい。この場合、第１孔部への突起部の挿入及び第２孔部への突起部の挿入を検出するセンサを設け、センサによって、第１孔部への突起部の挿入が検出された場合には、取付部材５６０に取り付けられたと判定し、第２孔部への突起部の挿入が検出された場合には、取付部材９６０に取り付けられたと判定すればよい。この構成では、上述のセンサと、制御回路が判定部の一例に相当する。 For example, the mounting member 560 is configured such that a protrusion is provided at the position of the alternate long and short dash line A shown in FIG. 55, and the protrusion is also provided at the position of the alternate long and short dash line B shown in FIG. The first hole and the second hole may be formed so as to correspond to the position A and the position B, respectively. For example, when the case 512 is mounted on the mounting member 560, the protrusion formed at the position A is configured to be inserted into the first hole formed in the case 512, and the mounting member 960 When the case 512 is attached, the protrusion formed at the position B may be inserted into the second hole formed in the case 512. In this case, when a sensor for detecting the insertion of the protrusion into the first hole and the insertion of the protrusion into the second hole is provided, and the insertion of the protrusion into the first hole is detected by the sensor. Is determined to be attached to the attachment member 560, and if the insertion of the protrusion into the second hole is detected, it may be determined to be attached to the attachment member 960. In this configuration, the above-described sensor and the control circuit correspond to an example of a determination unit.
　また、装置本体５１１では、判定部によって判定された種類の応じた対応処理を行うようにしてもよい。例えば、取付部材５６０にケース５１２が取り付けられたことが上記判定部によって検出された場合には、読み取りのモードを第１モードとし、取付部材９６０にケース１２が取り付けられたことが上記判定部によって検出された場合には、読み取りのモードを第２モードとするようにモード切り替えを行うような構成とすることができる。この場合、例えば耳に装着されるときの第１モードでは、継続的に撮像処理を行い、情報コードが撮像される毎に自動的に読み取り処理を行うようなオートセンスモードとすればよい。また、指或いは腕に装着されるときの第２モードでは、操作スイッチ４２が押される毎に読み取り処理を行うようなモードとすればよい。本構成では、制御回路４０が対応処理部の一例に相当し、判定部によって判定された種類に応じた対応処理を行うように機能する。 Further, the apparatus main body 511 may perform a corresponding process according to the type determined by the determination unit. For example, when the determination unit detects that the case 512 is attached to the attachment member 560, the reading mode is set to the first mode, and the determination unit determines that the case 12 is attached to the attachment member 960. If detected, the mode can be switched so that the reading mode is the second mode. In this case, for example, in the first mode when worn on the ear, an auto sense mode may be employed in which imaging processing is continuously performed and reading processing is automatically performed every time an information code is captured. Further, the second mode when worn on a finger or an arm may be a mode in which a reading process is performed each time the operation switch 42 is pressed. In this configuration, the control circuit 40 corresponds to an example of a response processing unit, and functions to perform response processing according to the type determined by the determination unit.
　この構成では、複数種類の取付部材５６０を利用する上でケース５１２を共通して利用可能な構成を実現しつつ、ケース側では、装着された取付部材５６０の種類を判定し、その種類に合わせた処理を行うことが可能となる。 In this configuration, when using a plurality of types of mounting members 560, a configuration in which the case 512 can be used in common is realized, and on the case side, the type of the mounted mounting member 560 is determined and matched to that type. Can be performed.
　なお、ケース５１２に連結された取付部材の種類の判定方法はこの方法に限られない。例えば、使用者がケース５１２の内部に取付部材の種類の情報を入力できるようにしてもよい。或いは、各取付部材に通信手段を設け、各取付部材からケース５１２側に自身の種類を特定する信号を送信できるようにしてもよい。 Note that the method of determining the type of the attachment member connected to the case 512 is not limited to this method. For example, the user may be able to input information on the type of attachment member into the case 512. Alternatively, each attachment member may be provided with a communication means so that a signal specifying its type can be transmitted from each attachment member to the case 512 side.
　［第８実施形態]
　次に、図６３を参照して第８実施形態について説明する。 [Eighth embodiment]
Next, an eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG.
　この第８実施形態は、取付部材５６０の構成（具体的には、取付部５６６と身体装着部５６２とを連結するベース部１０６５の構成（変位調整部１０６４の構成））のみが第４実施形態と異なり、それ以外は第４実施形態と同一である。従って、それ以外は第４実施形態と同一であるとして詳細な説明は省略する。 In the eighth embodiment, only the configuration of the attachment member 560 (specifically, the configuration of the base portion 1065 that connects the attachment portion 566 and the body mounting portion 562 (configuration of the displacement adjustment portion 1064)) is the fourth embodiment. Otherwise, the rest is the same as in the fourth embodiment. Accordingly, the rest of the description is the same as that of the fourth embodiment, and a detailed description thereof is omitted.
　第８実施形態で用いられる変位調整部１０６４は、身体装着部５６２側と取付部５６６側とを球面対偶構造にて連結するボールジョイントとして構成されている。この構成では、ベース部１０６５と取付部５６６と球面対偶構造で連結することにより、ベース部１０６５に対する取付部５６６の向きを三次元的に変化させることができる。 The displacement adjusting unit 1064 used in the eighth embodiment is configured as a ball joint that connects the body mounting unit 562 side and the mounting unit 566 side with a spherical pair structure. In this configuration, the orientation of the mounting portion 566 relative to the base portion 1065 can be changed three-dimensionally by connecting the base portion 1065 and the mounting portion 566 with a spherical pair structure.
　なお、第８実施形態のいずれの構成でも、対向壁部の構成、取付壁部の構成、ガイド部の構成を第５実施形態のようにしてもよく、第６実施形態のようにしてもよい。また、第８実施形態のベース部の構造を、第７実施形態や第７実施形態の変形例に適用してもよい。 In any configuration of the eighth embodiment, the configuration of the opposing wall portion, the configuration of the mounting wall portion, and the configuration of the guide portion may be the same as in the fifth embodiment or the sixth embodiment. . Further, the structure of the base portion of the eighth embodiment may be applied to the seventh embodiment or a modification of the seventh embodiment.
　［第９実施形態]
　次に、第９実施形態について、図６４、図６５を参照して説明する。 [Ninth Embodiment]
Next, a ninth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 64 and 65.
　本実施形態では、装置本体側の構成のみが第１実施形態又は第１実施形態の変更例と異なり、それ以外の構成は、第１実施形態又は第１実施形態の変更例と同一である。特に取付部材６０は第１実施形態と同一である。 In the present embodiment, only the configuration on the apparatus main body side is different from the first embodiment or the modified example of the first embodiment, and other configurations are the same as the first embodiment or the modified example of the first embodiment. In particular, the attachment member 60 is the same as that of the first embodiment.
　この構成でも、装置本体１１１１内の電気的構成は第１実施形態と同一であり、情報コードを撮像する撮像部２３と、撮像部２３によって撮像された前記情報コードの画像を処理する制御回路４０（処理部）とが設けられている。そして、これら撮像部２３及び処理部などがケース１１１２内部に収容されて一体化された構成となっている。また、取付部材５６０は、第１実施形態と同一の構成であり、ケース１１１２と別体として構成され、図５５等と同一の身体装着部５６２とベース部５６５と取付部６６とを備えている。 Even in this configuration, the electrical configuration in the apparatus main body 1111 is the same as that in the first embodiment, and the imaging unit 23 that images the information code, and the control circuit 40 that processes the image of the information code captured by the imaging unit 23. (Processing unit) is provided. The imaging unit 23 and the processing unit are accommodated in the case 1112 and integrated. Further, the mounting member 560 has the same configuration as that of the first embodiment, is configured as a separate body from the case 1112, and includes a body mounting portion 562, a base portion 565, and a mounting portion 66 that are the same as those in FIG. .
　そして本構成では、撮像部２３を当該撮像部２３の受光面の平面方向と交差する所定方向の回転軸Ｃ１を中心として回転可能に構成され、撮像部２３を少なくとも２つの回転位置に切り替え可能な回転機構１１２０が設けられている。図６４の例では、ケース１１１２における先端側の一部（回転部１１１２ｂ）を、図６４の実線位置と二点鎖線の位置とに切替可能となっており、実線位置のときには、図６４、図６５で一点鎖線で示すような横方向に広い視野範囲ＡＲ１が設定され、回転部７１２ｂが二点鎖線の位置（符号１１１２ｂ’）のときには、図６４、図６５で二点鎖線で示すような縦方向に広い視野範囲ＡＲ２が設定されるようになっている。なお、回転軸Ｃ１は、前後方向の軸となっており、例えば、視野範囲の中心となる光軸の方向となっている。なお、図６５では、回転部１１１２ｂの外形を一点鎖線にて概念的に示しており、回転部１１１２の内部構造を実線にて示している。 In this configuration, the imaging unit 23 is configured to be rotatable about a rotation axis C1 in a predetermined direction intersecting the plane direction of the light receiving surface of the imaging unit 23, and the imaging unit 23 can be switched to at least two rotational positions. A rotation mechanism 1120 is provided. In the example of FIG. 64, a part on the front end side (rotating portion 1112b) of the case 1112 can be switched between the solid line position and the two-dot chain line position of FIG. 64. When a wide field-of-view range AR1 is set in the horizontal direction as indicated by the alternate long and short dash line at 65 and the rotating unit 712b is at the position of the alternate long and two short dashes line (reference numeral 1112b ′), A wide visual field range AR2 is set in the direction. The rotation axis C1 is an axis in the front-rear direction, and is, for example, the direction of the optical axis that is the center of the visual field range. In addition, in FIG. 65, the external shape of the rotation part 1112b is notionally shown with the dashed-dotted line, and the internal structure of the rotation part 1112 is shown as the continuous line.
　本構成では、撮像部２３を当該撮像部２３の受光面の平面方向と交差する所定方向の回転軸Ｃ１を中心として回転可能に構成され、撮像部２３を少なくとも２つの回転位置に切り替え可能な回転機構１１２０を有する。この構成では、身体への装着状態に合わせて撮像部２３の向きをより適切な向きに変更しやすくなる。 In this configuration, the imaging unit 23 is configured to be rotatable around a rotation axis C1 in a predetermined direction intersecting the plane direction of the light receiving surface of the imaging unit 23, and the imaging unit 23 can be switched to at least two rotational positions. A mechanism 1120 is included. In this configuration, the orientation of the imaging unit 23 can be easily changed to a more appropriate orientation in accordance with the wearing state on the body.
　なお、本実施形態の特徴は、上述したいずれの実施形態の構成にも適用でき、いずれの実施形態の変更例にも適用でできる。 Note that the feature of the present embodiment can be applied to the configuration of any of the above-described embodiments, and can be applied to a modified example of any of the embodiments.
　［第１０実施形態]
　次に、第１０実施形態について説明する。 [Tenth embodiment]
Next, a tenth embodiment will be described.
　本実施形態では、制御回路による制御方法のみが第７実施形態の変更例と異なり、それ以外は第７実施形態の変更例と同一である。 In the present embodiment, only the control method by the control circuit is different from the modified example of the seventh embodiment, and other than that is the same as the modified example of the seventh embodiment.
　本構成では、装置本体５１１の構成は第４実施形態と同一であり、この構成でも、装置本体５１１は、情報コードを撮像する撮像部２３と、撮像部２３によって撮像された情報コードの画像を処理する処理部と、撮像部２３及び処理部を保持するケース５１２とを備えている。そして、取付部材は、第４実施形態の取付部材５６０（図５５等）と、第７実施形態の取付部材９６０（図６１、図６２等）を用いることができるようになっている。なお、いずれの取付部材も、身体装着部と、ケース５１２が着脱される取付部とを備えており、ケース５１２とは別体として構成されている。 In this configuration, the configuration of the apparatus main body 511 is the same as that of the fourth embodiment. Even in this configuration, the apparatus main body 511 also captures an image of the information code imaged by the imaging unit 23 that images the information code and the imaging unit 23. A processing unit for processing, and a case 512 for holding the imaging unit 23 and the processing unit are provided. And the attachment member 560 (FIG. 55 etc.) of 4th Embodiment and the attachment member 960 (FIG. 61, FIG. 62 etc.) of 7th Embodiment can be used for an attachment member. Each attachment member includes a body mounting portion and an attachment portion to which the case 512 is attached and detached, and is configured as a separate body from the case 512.
　この構成でも、複数種類の取付部材５６０、９６０が使用者に取り付け可能とされており、いずれの取付部材が使用者に取り付けられた場合でも、その取り付けられた取付部材に対してケース５１２を連結可能とされている。そして、この場合、取付部材５６０と取付部材９６０を択一的に用いるようにしてもよく、両方の取付部材５６０、９６０を装着した上で、いずれかの取付部材にケース５１２を取り付けるようにしてもよい。 Even in this configuration, a plurality of types of attachment members 560 and 960 can be attached to the user, and the case 512 is connected to the attached attachment member regardless of which attachment member is attached to the user. It is possible. In this case, the attachment member 560 and the attachment member 960 may be used alternatively, and both the attachment members 560 and 960 are attached, and the case 512 is attached to one of the attachment members. Also good.
　そして、検出部により、ケース５１２の取り付け位置を検出可能となっており、撮像部２３によって撮像された画像から検出部の検出結果に対応する範囲を選択する構成となっている。具体的には、第７実施形態の変更例と同様、複数種類の取付部材５６０、９６０の内、いずれかの取付部材にケース５１２が連結された場合に、ケース５１２が連結された取付部の種類を判定するようになっており、第７実施形態の変更例で用いられた判定部（取付部材の種類を検出するセンサ、及び制御回路４０）が検出部の一例に相当する。 Then, the attachment position of the case 512 can be detected by the detection unit, and the range corresponding to the detection result of the detection unit is selected from the image captured by the imaging unit 23. Specifically, as in the modification of the seventh embodiment, when the case 512 is connected to any one of the plurality of types of attachment members 560 and 960, the attachment portion to which the case 512 is connected is shown. The type is determined, and the determination unit (the sensor for detecting the type of the attachment member and the control circuit 40) used in the modified example of the seventh embodiment corresponds to an example of the detection unit.
　例えば、装置本体５１１が、耳に掛けられる取付部材５６０に取り付けられる場合には、図６６のように、全撮像画像の範囲Ｂ１の中から縦長の範囲Ｂ２を選択して画像処理に用い、装置本体５１１が指又は腕に掛けられる取付部材９６０に取り付けられる場合には、図６６のように、全撮像画像の範囲Ｂ１の中から横長の範囲Ｂ３を選択して画像処理に用いるようにしてもよい。 For example, when the apparatus main body 511 is attached to the attachment member 560 to be hooked, the vertically long range B2 is selected from the range B1 of all captured images and used for image processing as shown in FIG. When the main body 511 is attached to an attachment member 960 that is hung on a finger or an arm, as shown in FIG. 66, a horizontally long range B3 is selected from the range B1 of all captured images and used for image processing. Good.
　なお、制御回路４０が、選択部の一例に相当し、受光センサ２３（撮像部）によって撮像された画像から検出部の検出結果に対応する範囲を選択するように機能する。 The control circuit 40 corresponds to an example of a selection unit, and functions to select a range corresponding to the detection result of the detection unit from the image captured by the light receiving sensor 23 (imaging unit).
　この構成によれば、撮像部２３によって撮像された画像から、ケース５１２が取り付けられた位置に合わせた範囲を選択して利用可能となる。従って、常に全画素のデータを全て利用する方法と比較して処理するデータ量を低減しつつ、取付位置に合わせたより適正な範囲の画像を用いやすくなる。 According to this configuration, it is possible to select and use a range that matches the position where the case 512 is attached from the image captured by the imaging unit 23. Therefore, it is easy to use an image in a more appropriate range according to the mounting position while reducing the amount of data to be processed as compared with the method of always using all the data of all pixels.
　［第１１実施形態]
　次に第１１実施形態について説明する。 [Eleventh embodiment]
Next, an eleventh embodiment will be described.
　本実施形態では、制御回路による制御方法のみが第７実施形態の変更例と異なり、それ以外は第７実施形態の変更例と同一である。 In the present embodiment, only the control method by the control circuit is different from the modified example of the seventh embodiment, and other than that is the same as the modified example of the seventh embodiment.
　本構成では、装置本体５１１の構成は第４実施形態と同一であり、この構成でも、装置本体５１１は、情報コードを撮像する撮像部２３と、撮像部２３によって撮像された情報コードの画像を処理する処理部と、撮像部２３及び処理部を保持するケース５１２とを備えている。そして、取付部材は、第４実施形態の取付部材５６０（図５５等）と、第７実施形態の取付部材９６０（図６１、図６２等）を用いることができるようになっている。なお、いずれの取付部材も、身体装着部と、ケース５１２が着脱される取付部とを備えており、ケース５１２とは別体として構成されている。 In this configuration, the configuration of the apparatus main body 511 is the same as that of the fourth embodiment. Even in this configuration, the apparatus main body 511 also captures an image of the information code captured by the imaging unit 23 that images the information code and the imaging unit 23. A processing unit for processing, and a case 512 for holding the imaging unit 23 and the processing unit are provided. And the attachment member 560 (FIG. 55 etc.) of 4th Embodiment and the attachment member 960 (FIG. 61, FIG. 62 etc.) of 7th Embodiment can be used for an attachment member. Each attachment member includes a body mounting portion and an attachment portion to which the case 512 is attached and detached, and is configured as a separate body from the case 512.
　この構成でも、複数種類の取付部材５６０、９６０が使用者に取り付け可能とされており、いずれの取付部材が使用者に取り付けられた場合でも、その取り付けられた取付部材に対してケース５１２を連結可能とされている。そして、この場合、取付部材５６０と取付部材９６０を択一的に用いるようにしてもよく、両方の取付部材５６０、９６０を装着した上で、いずれかの取付部材にケース５１２を取り付けるようにしてもよい。 Even in this configuration, a plurality of types of attachment members 560 and 960 can be attached to the user, and the case 512 is connected to the attached attachment member regardless of which attachment member is attached to the user. It is possible. In this case, the attachment member 560 and the attachment member 960 may be used alternatively, and both the attachment members 560 and 960 are attached, and the case 512 is attached to one of the attachment members. Also good.
　制御回路４０は、ケース５１２が取り付けられた取付部材の種類を判別した場合、その種類を特定する情報を外部装置ＨＳＴに送信するように構成されている。例えば、取付部材５６０が種類１であり、取付部材９６０が種類２である場合、制御回路４０は、ケース５１２が取付部材５６０に取り付けられていることを確認した場合、外部装置ＨＳＴに種類１の情報を送信する。このとき、外部装置ＨＳＴは、種類１に対応するプログラムを装置本体５１１に送信する。また、制御回路４０は、ケース５１２が取付部材９６０に取り付けられていることを確認した場合、外部装置ＨＳＴに種類２の情報を送信する。このとき、外部装置ＨＳＴは、種類２に対応するプログラムを装置本体１１に送信する。 The control circuit 40 is configured to transmit information specifying the type to the external device HST when the type of the mounting member to which the case 512 is mounted is determined. For example, when the attachment member 560 is of type 1 and the attachment member 960 is of type 2, the control circuit 40 confirms that the case 512 is attached to the attachment member 560, and if the attachment member 560 is of the type 1, Send information. At this time, the external device HST transmits a program corresponding to type 1 to the device main body 511. In addition, when the control circuit 40 confirms that the case 512 is attached to the attachment member 960, the control circuit 40 transmits type 2 information to the external device HST. At this time, the external apparatus HST transmits a program corresponding to type 2 to the apparatus main body 11.
　本構成では制御回路４０と通信インタフェース４８が送信制御部の一例に相当し、検出部によって検出されたケース５１２の取付位置の情報を外部装置に送信するように機能する。また、制御回路４０と通信インタフェース４８が受信部の一例に沿う装置、送信制御部によってケース１２の取付位置の情報が外部装置ＨＳＴに送信された場合に、外部装置ＨＳＴから、ケース１２の取付位置の情報に対応する応答情報を受信するように機能する。 In this configuration, the control circuit 40 and the communication interface 48 correspond to an example of a transmission control unit, and function to transmit information on the mounting position of the case 512 detected by the detection unit to an external device. In addition, when the control circuit 40 and the communication interface 48 transmit information about the attachment position of the case 12 to the external device HST by the transmission control unit according to an example of a receiving unit, the attachment position of the case 12 is transmitted from the external device HST. It functions to receive response information corresponding to this information.
　この構成によれば、ケース５１２が取り付けられた位置に合わせたデータを外部装置から取得して利用可能となる。 According to this configuration, it is possible to acquire and use data matched with the position where the case 512 is attached from the external device.
　［第４～第１１の実施形態に対する他の実施形態]
　本発明は前述した第４～第１１の実施形態に限定されるものではなく、例えば次のような実施形態も本発明の技術的範囲に含まれる。 [Other Embodiments for Fourth to Eleventh Embodiments]
The present invention is not limited to the fourth to eleventh embodiments described above. For example, the following embodiments are also included in the technical scope of the present invention.
　本実施形態では、処理部の一例として、制御回路４０を例示し、撮像部２３によって撮像された情報コード１００の画像の処理として当該情報コードのコード画像を解読する構成を例示したが、撮像部２３によって撮像された情報コード１００の画像の処理はこれに限られない。例えば、撮像部２３によって撮像された情報コード１００の画像データを外部装置ＨＳＴに送信するような処理であってもよい。この場合、外部装置ＨＳＴ（ホスト装置等）にて当該画像データを解読すればよい。 In this embodiment, the control circuit 40 is illustrated as an example of the processing unit, and the configuration of decoding the code image of the information code as the processing of the image of the information code 100 captured by the imaging unit 23 is illustrated. The processing of the image of the information code 100 captured by the image 23 is not limited to this. For example, the processing may be such that the image data of the information code 100 imaged by the imaging unit 23 is transmitted to the external device HST. In this case, the image data may be decoded by an external device HST (host device or the like).
　上記実施形態では、両耳に掛けられる構成の身体装着部を例示したが、身体装着部は、いずれか一方の耳に掛けられる構成であってもよい。 In the above-described embodiment, the body wearing part configured to be hung on both ears is exemplified, but the body wearing part may be configured to be hung on either ear.
　上記実施形態では、使用者の耳、指、腕などに取り付けられる身体装着部を例示したが、身体装着部は、使用者の頭に取り付けられるバンド部材として構成されていてもよい。例えば、ハチマキ状、ヘアバンド状、カチューシャ状などの構造のバンド部材として身体装着部が構成されていてもよい。この構成では、装置本体５１１が頭に取り付けられるため、顔の動きと装置本体５１１の全体が連動することになり、使用者の顔の動きに合わせて読み取る方向を定めやすくなる。また、この場合、第７実施形態の変更例の思想を用い、第４実施形態の取付部材と、第７実施形態の取付部材と、本構成の取付部材を使用の候補として、いずれかの取付部材を選択して使用するようにしてもよい。この場合、装置本体は、これら３種類のいずれにも取り付け可能な構成とすればよい。 In the above embodiment, the body wearing part attached to the user's ear, finger, arm or the like is exemplified, but the body wearing part may be configured as a band member attached to the user's head. For example, the body wearing part may be configured as a band member having a structure such as a bee shape, a hair band shape, or a headband shape. In this configuration, since the apparatus main body 511 is attached to the head, the movement of the face and the entire apparatus main body 511 are interlocked, and the reading direction can be easily determined in accordance with the movement of the user's face. Moreover, in this case, using the idea of the modified example of the seventh embodiment, the attachment member of the fourth embodiment, the attachment member of the seventh embodiment, and the attachment member of this configuration are used as candidates for use. A member may be selected and used. In this case, the apparatus main body may be configured to be attached to any of these three types.
　上記実施形態では、使用者の耳、指、腕、頭などに掛けられる構成或いは巻かれる構成の身体装着部を有する取付部材を例示したが、取付部材は、使用者の装着物（メガネ、ヘルメット、手袋、服）などに取り付けられるアタッチメントとして構成されていてもよい。 In the above-described embodiment, the attachment member having the body attachment portion configured to be hung or wound on the user's ear, finger, arm, head, etc. has been exemplified. , Gloves, clothes) or the like.
　上記実施形態では、２つのケース側連結部と、２つの取付部材側連結部とがそれぞれ連結される構成を例示したがこのような例に限られない。３以上のケース側連結部が、これらと同数の３以上の取付部材側連結部とそれぞれ連結される構成であってもよい。 In the above-described embodiment, the configuration in which the two case side connecting portions and the two attachment member side connecting portions are connected to each other is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to such an example. The structure by which 3 or more case side connection parts are each connected with the 3 or more attachment member side connection parts of the same number may be sufficient.
　上記実施形態では、ベース部を基準とする取付壁部の変位を調整し得る構成を例示したが、いずれの実施形態の構成でも、或いはいずれの実施形態の構成を変更した構成でも、対向壁部５１２ａを基準とする撮像部２３の変位を調整可能に構成されていてもよい。 In the said embodiment, although the structure which can adjust the displacement of the attachment wall part on the basis of a base part was illustrated, even if it is the structure of any embodiment, or the structure which changed the structure of any embodiment, an opposing wall part You may be comprised so that adjustment of the displacement of the imaging part 23 on the basis of 512a is possible.
　[第１２実施形態]
　以下、本発明を具現化した第１２実施形態について、図面を参照して説明する。 [Twelfth embodiment]
Hereinafter, a twelfth embodiment embodying the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings.
　（全体構成）
　第１２実施形態に係る携帯型情報コード読取装置１０Ｂ（以下、単に情報コード読取装置１０Ｂ又は読取装置１０Ｂとも称する）は、例えば図６７のような外観をなしている。この読取装置１０Ｂは、所定の撮像範囲ＡＲ（図７５参照）の画像を撮像する撮像部２３と、撮像部２３によって得られた撮像画像を処理する処理部（制御回路４０（図６８））と、撮像部２３の撮像範囲ＡＲ（図７５参照）に向けてマーカ光Ｍｋ（図６８）を照射するマーカ光照射部５０と、マーカ光Ｍｋ（図６８）とは異なる照明光Ｌｆ（図６８）を照射する照明光源２１とを備えている。更に、マーカ光照射部５０、照明光源２１、撮像部２３などを保持するケース１２と、ケース１２と一体的に又はケース１２とは別体として設けられ、使用者の身体又は使用者の装着物に取り付けられる取付部材６０とを備えている。 (overall structure)
A portable information code reader 10B according to the twelfth embodiment (hereinafter also simply referred to as an information code reader 10B or a reader 10B) has an appearance as shown in FIG. 67, for example. The reading device 10B includes an imaging unit 23 that captures an image in a predetermined imaging range AR (see FIG. 75), and a processing unit (control circuit 40 (FIG. 68)) that processes a captured image obtained by the imaging unit 23. The marker light irradiation unit 50 that irradiates the marker light Mk (FIG. 68) toward the imaging range AR (see FIG. 75) of the imaging unit 23, and the illumination light Lf (FIG. 68) different from the marker light Mk (FIG. 68). The illumination light source 21 which irradiates is provided. Furthermore, the case 12 that holds the marker light irradiation unit 50, the illumination light source 21, the imaging unit 23, and the like is provided integrally with the case 12 or as a separate body from the case 12, and the user's body or the user's wearing items And an attachment member 60 to be attached.
　まず、情報コード読取装置１０Ｂの電気的構成について説明する。図６８に示すように、情報コード読取装置１０Ｂは、ハードウェア的には一次元コードや二次元コードなどの情報コード１００（図６８）を読取可能なコードリーダとして構成されており、図６７に示すケース１２によって装置本体１１の外郭が構成され、このケース１２の内部に各種電子部品が収容された構成をなしている。 First, the electrical configuration of the information code reader 10B will be described. As shown in FIG. 68, the information code reader 10B is configured as a code reader capable of reading the information code 100 (FIG. 68) such as a one-dimensional code or a two-dimensional code in terms of hardware. An outer case of the apparatus main body 11 is constituted by the case 12 shown, and various electronic components are accommodated in the case 12.
　図６８に示すように、情報コード読取装置１０Ｂは、主に、照明光源２１、マーカ光照射部５０、撮像部２３、フィルタ２５、結像レンズ２７等の光学系と、メモリ３５、制御回路４０、操作スイッチ４２等のマイクロコンピュータ（以下「マイコン」という）系と、電源スイッチ４１、電池４９等の電源系と、から構成されている。なお、これらは、図略のプリント配線板に実装あるいはケース内に内装されている。 As shown in FIG. 68, the information code reader 10B mainly includes an optical system such as an illumination light source 21, a marker light irradiation unit 50, an imaging unit 23, a filter 25, and an imaging lens 27, a memory 35, and a control circuit 40. And a microcomputer (hereinafter referred to as “microcomputer”) system such as an operation switch 42 and a power system such as a power switch 41 and a battery 49. These are mounted on a printed wiring board (not shown) or housed in a case.
　光学系は、前述した図２の構成と同様に、照明光源２１、撮像部２３、フィルタ２５、結像レンズ２７、マーカ光照射部５０等から構成されている。特に、マーカ光照射部５０は、ＬＥＤやレーザ光源などの公知のマーカ光源等によって構成されており、照明光源２１が光を照射する側と同じ側に、例えば指向性の高いマーカ光Ｍｋ（図６８）を照射するように構成されている。具体的には、図７５のように撮像部２３によって撮像可能となる範囲（撮像範囲ＡＲ）に向けてマーカ光Ｍｋ（図６８）を照射する構成となっている。なお、図７５では、マーカ光照射部５０によって照射されるマーカ光Ｍｋの光軸（中心軸）を一点鎖線Ｍｋ１によって概念的に示している。 The optical system includes an illumination light source 21, an imaging unit 23, a filter 25, an imaging lens 27, a marker light irradiation unit 50, and the like, similar to the configuration of FIG. In particular, the marker light irradiation unit 50 is configured by a known marker light source such as an LED or a laser light source. The marker light irradiation unit 50 has, for example, a highly directional marker light Mk (see FIG. 68). Specifically, as shown in FIG. 75, the marker light Mk (FIG. 68) is irradiated toward the range (imaging range AR) that can be imaged by the imaging unit 23. In FIG. 75, the optical axis (center axis) of the marker light Mk irradiated by the marker light irradiation unit 50 is conceptually indicated by a one-dot chain line Mk1.
　撮像部２３は、図７５のように、ケース１２の外部に設定される所定の撮像範囲ＡＲの画像を撮像する構成となっている。 The imaging unit 23 is configured to capture an image of a predetermined imaging range AR set outside the case 12, as shown in FIG.
　マイコン系は、前述と同様に、増幅回路３１、Ａ／Ｄ変換回路３３、メモリ３５、アドレス発生回路３６、同期信号発生回路３８、制御回路４０、操作スイッチ４２（４２ａ，４２Ｂ）、マイク４３、発音部４４、センサ部４６、通信部４８等から構成されている。
なお、外部装置は、このようなパーソナルコンピュータの例に限られるものではなく、情報コード読取装置１０Ｂの外部に配置され、この情報コード読取装置１０Ｂと通信を行い得る情報処理装置であればどのような構成であってもよい。また、通信部４８は、制御回路４０と協働し、「送信部」として機能しており、例えば情報コード１００の解読後、一定時間の経過した後に情報コード１００を解読した解読データを上記「外部装置」に送信するように機能している。 As described above, the microcomputer system includes an amplifier circuit 31, an A / D conversion circuit 33, a memory 35, an address generation circuit 36, a synchronization signal generation circuit 38, a control circuit 40, an operation switch 42 (42a, 42B), a microphone 43, The sound generating unit 44, the sensor unit 46, the communication unit 48, and the like are included.
The external device is not limited to such an example of a personal computer, and any information processing device can be used as long as it is arranged outside the information code reader 10B and can communicate with the information code reader 10B. It may be a simple configuration. Further, the communication unit 48 cooperates with the control circuit 40 and functions as a “transmission unit”. For example, after the information code 100 is decoded, after a predetermined time has elapsed, the decoded data obtained by decoding the information code 100 is “ Function to send to "external device".
　情報コード読取装置１０Ｂの電気的構成は、基本的に、前述した図２に記載物と同等である。 The electrical configuration of the information code reader 10B is basically the same as that described in FIG.
　（装着構造等）
　次に、携帯型情報コード読取装置１０Ｂの装着構造等について説明する。なお、この装着構造は前述した図４９のものと同様であるが、実施例の全体の説明を良くするために、一部重複して説明する。 (Mounting structure etc.)
Next, the mounting structure and the like of the portable information code reader 10B will be described. The mounting structure is the same as that of FIG. 49 described above, but a part of the mounting structure will be described in order to improve the overall description of the embodiment.
　携帯型情報コード読取装置１０Ｂは、主に、装置本体５１１と取付部材５６０とによって構成されている。装置本体５１１は、情報コード１００を撮像可能な撮像部２３と、撮像部２３によって撮像された情報コード１００の画像を処理する処理部（制御回路４０（図６８）と、撮像部２３や処理部などを保持するケース５１２とを備えた構成となっている。また、取付部材５６０は、ケース５１２とは別体として設けられ、撓み変形可能な可撓性の身体装着部（装着部）５６２と、ケース５１２が着脱される取付部５６６とを備えている。 The portable information code reader 10B is mainly configured by an apparatus main body 511 and an attachment member 560. The apparatus main body 511 includes an imaging unit 23 that can image the information code 100, a processing unit (control circuit 40 (FIG. 68), an imaging unit 23, and a processing unit that processes an image of the information code 100 captured by the imaging unit 23. The mounting member 560 is provided as a separate body from the case 512, and is a flexible body mounting portion (mounting portion) 562 that can be bent and deformed. And a mounting portion 566 to which the case 512 is attached and detached.
　なお、取付部５６６とケース５１２との着脱構造は、例えばねじ等の締結部材によってケース５１２が取付部５６６によって取り付けられる構成などであってもよく、ケース５１２に形成された係合部（例えば凸部などの嵌合部）が取付部５６６に形成された被係合部（例えば凹部などの被嵌合部）と係合することで取り付けられる構成であってもよい。或いは、ケース５１２又は取付部５６６のいずれか一方に固定された磁石と、他方に固定された磁性体（金属部材や磁石）との吸引力によって取り付けられる構成であってもよい。なお、ここでは、ケース５１２と取付部材５６０が別体として構成された例を示すが、ケース５１２と取付部材５６０は、互いに連結されていればよく、例えば一体的に形成されていてもよい。 The attachment / detachment structure between the attachment portion 566 and the case 512 may be, for example, a configuration in which the case 512 is attached by the attachment portion 566 with a fastening member such as a screw, or the like. The fitting portion such as a portion may be attached by engaging with an engaged portion (for example, a fitted portion such as a recess) formed on the attachment portion 566. Or the structure attached by the attractive force of the magnet fixed to either one of the case 512 or the attaching part 566 and the magnetic body (metal member or magnet) fixed to the other may be sufficient. Here, an example in which the case 512 and the mounting member 560 are configured as separate bodies is shown, but the case 512 and the mounting member 560 may be connected to each other, and may be integrally formed, for example.
　図６７等に示す装置本体５１１は、ケース５１２の内部に図６８に示す各種電子部品が収容されてなるものであり、例えば、取付部材５６０に対して図６７のように取付可能とされており、更に、この取付部材５６０からの取り外しが可能となっている。この装置本体５１１の外殻をなすケース５１２は、全体として長手状且つ箱状に構成されている。なお、本構成では、装置本体５１１の前後方向、幅方向（横方向）、上下方向を以下のように規定する。まず、撮像部２３の視野範囲の中心の方向（図７５に示す光軸Ｇの方向）を前後方向としており、ケース５１２の長手方向が前後方向となっている。そして、前後方向と直交する方向においてケース５１２の厚さ方向が幅方向（横方向）となっている。そして、上記前後方向及び幅方向と直交する方向が上下方向となっている。 The apparatus main body 511 shown in FIG. 67 and the like has various electronic components shown in FIG. 68 housed inside the case 512, and can be attached to the attachment member 560 as shown in FIG. Further, it can be removed from the mounting member 560. The case 512 that forms the outer shell of the apparatus main body 511 is formed in a longitudinal and box shape as a whole. In this configuration, the front-rear direction, the width direction (lateral direction), and the up-down direction of the apparatus main body 511 are defined as follows. First, the center direction of the field of view of the imaging unit 23 (the direction of the optical axis G shown in FIG. 75) is the front-rear direction, and the longitudinal direction of the case 512 is the front-rear direction. The thickness direction of the case 512 is the width direction (lateral direction) in the direction orthogonal to the front-rear direction. And the direction orthogonal to the said front-back direction and the width direction is the up-down direction.
　ケース５１２は、前端部に前壁部５１３ｃが設けられ、後端部に後壁部５１３ｄが設けられている。更に、幅方向（左右方向）一方側（取付部材５６０側）に側壁部が設けられ、これとは反対側に側壁部５１３ａが設けられている。 The case 512 is provided with a front wall portion 513c at the front end portion and a rear wall portion 513d at the rear end portion. Further, a side wall portion is provided on one side (the mounting member 560 side) in the width direction (left and right direction), and a side wall portion 513a is provided on the opposite side.
　図６７、図６９、図７１に示すように、ケース５１２の前端部に設けられる前壁部５１３ｃには、情報コードからの光を導入可能な読取口５１４が設けられている。そして、取付部材５６０は、例えば使用時に使用者Ｐの両耳に掛けられる構造となっており、図６９のようにケース５１２が使用者Ｐの顔Ｆａの横位置に配置され且つ読取口５１４が使用者Ｐの前側を向く構成で当該ケース５１２を使用者Ｐの耳Ｅｙに取り付ける構成となっている。このように、使用者Ｐの顔Ｆａが向く側と同じ側に撮像部２３が向くように取付部材５６０によってケース５１２が取り付けられている。 As shown in FIGS. 67, 69, and 71, the front wall 513c provided at the front end of the case 512 is provided with a reading port 514 through which light from the information code can be introduced. The mounting member 560 has a structure that can be hung on both ears of the user P at the time of use, for example. As shown in FIG. 69, the case 512 is disposed in the lateral position of the face Fa of the user P and the reading port 514 is provided. It is the structure which attaches the said case 512 to the user's P ear Ey by the structure which faces the user's P front side. As described above, the case 512 is attached by the attachment member 560 so that the imaging unit 23 faces the same side as the side where the face Fa of the user P faces.
　図６７のように、ケース５１２において上壁部５１３ｅには、外部操作（例えば、上方から下方側への押圧操作）が可能な操作スイッチ４２（４２ａ，　４２ｂ）が設けられている。また、ケース５１２の内部には、図６８のように照明光を照射する照明光源２１及びマーカ光を照射するマーカ光照射部５０が設けられており、照明光源２１からの照明光Ｌｆ及びマーカ光照射部５０からのマーカ光Ｍｋはいずれも、前壁部５１３ｃからケース５１２の前側に照射されるようになっている。 As shown in FIG. 67, the upper wall 513e of the case 512 is provided with operation switches 42 (42a, 42b) capable of external operation (for example, pressing operation from the upper side to the lower side). Further, as shown in FIG. 68, an illumination light source 21 that emits illumination light and a marker light irradiation unit 50 that emits marker light are provided inside the case 512, and the illumination light Lf and marker light from the illumination light source 21 are provided. Any of the marker lights Mk from the irradiation unit 50 is irradiated to the front side of the case 512 from the front wall portion 513c.
　取付部材５６０は、撓み変形可能な可撓性の身体装着部５６２と、ケース５１２が着脱される取付部５６６と、身体装着部５６２を支持するベース部５６５とを備え、ケース５１２とは別体として設けられている。 The mounting member 560 includes a flexible body mounting portion 562 that can be bent and deformed, a mounting portion 566 to which the case 512 is attached and detached, and a base portion 565 that supports the body mounting portion 562, and is separate from the case 512. It is provided as.
　図６９のように、身体装着部５６２は、使用者Ｐの両耳に掛けられる耳掛け部として構成されており、図６７のように、被装着時の自然状態において所定形状で維持される構成であり、且つ弾性変形可能に構成されている。 As shown in FIG. 69, the body wearing part 562 is configured as an ear hooking part that is hung on both ears of the user P, and as shown in FIG. 67, the body wearing part 562 is maintained in a predetermined shape in a natural state when worn. And is configured to be elastically deformable.
　ベース部５６５及び取付部５６６も前述した図４９に記載の構成と同じである。 The base part 565 and the attachment part 566 are also the same as the structure shown in FIG.
　（読取処理）
　次に、読取装置１０Ｂで実行される読取処理について説明する。 (Reading process)
Next, a reading process executed by the reading device 10B will be described.
　読取装置１０Ｂでは、所定の開始条件の成立時（例えば電源投入時や操作スイッチ４２に対する所定の押圧操作時等）に、図７０に示す読取処理が制御回路４０によって実行される。そして、図７０の読取処理の実行中には、継続的に情報コードの読み取り処理を行うことができるようになっている。なお、符号Ｓはステップを示す。 In the reading device 10B, the reading process shown in FIG. 70 is executed by the control circuit 40 when a predetermined start condition is satisfied (for example, when the power is turned on or when a predetermined pressing operation is performed on the operation switch 42). During the reading process of FIG. 70, the information code reading process can be continuously performed. Reference symbol S indicates a step.
　図７０に示す読取処理は、所定の開始条件の成立に応じて実行され、実行開始後には、まずマーカ光照射部５０を動作させてマーカ光Ｍｋを照射させる（Ｓ１）。このＳ１の処理では、照明光源２１は動作させず、照明光Ｌｆは照射させないようにする。なお、本構成では、Ｓ１でのマーカ光Ｍｋの照射開始後、Ｓ１３にて照明光Ｌｆの照射を開始するまでは、照明光Ｌｆを照射しない状態で維持する。 70 is executed in response to the establishment of a predetermined start condition. After the start of execution, the marker light irradiation unit 50 is first operated to emit the marker light Mk (S1). In the process of S1, the illumination light source 21 is not operated and the illumination light Lf is not irradiated. In this configuration, after the irradiation of the marker light Mk in S1, the illumination light Lf is not irradiated until the irradiation of the illumination light Lf is started in S13.
　Ｓ１の処理の後には、撮像部２３でのシャッタ速度を後述する第２のシャッタ速度よりも相対的に遅い（長い）第１のシャッタ速度に設定する（Ｓ２）。つまり、Ｓ２では、撮像部２３で撮像するときの露光時間の設定を、後述するＳ１２で設定される露光時間よりも長く設定する。そして、このように撮像部２３のシャッタ速度を第１のシャッタ速度に設定した状態で、撮像部２３によって撮像範囲を撮像する（Ｓ３）。これにより、第１のシャッタ速度に設定された状態での撮像部２３による撮像画像（第１撮像画像）が生成される。 After the processing of S1, the shutter speed in the image pickup unit 23 is set to a first shutter speed that is relatively slower (longer) than a second shutter speed described later (S2). That is, in S2, the setting of the exposure time when imaging by the imaging unit 23 is set longer than the exposure time set in S12 described later. Then, the imaging range is imaged by the imaging unit 23 with the shutter speed of the imaging unit 23 set to the first shutter speed in this way (S3). Thereby, a captured image (first captured image) by the imaging unit 23 in a state where the first shutter speed is set is generated.
　そして、Ｓ３で得られた撮像画像（第１撮像画像）内の「特徴検出エリア」を算出する。 Then, the “feature detection area” in the captured image (first captured image) obtained in S3 is calculated.
　Ｓ３でエリア特定を行う方法の第１例としては、例えば、図７１のように、Ｓ３で得られた撮像画像（第１撮像画像）を解析し、当該第１撮像画像の中からマーカ光Ｍｋの照射領域ＡＲｍを特定すればよい。そして、そのマーカ光の照射領域ＡＲｍを「特徴検出エリア」とすればよい。具体的には例えば、当該第１撮像画像において、所定値以上の受光量となっている領域（領域ＡＲｍ）を検出し、その領域ＡＲｍを全て含む矩形領域や円形領域をマーカ光の照射領域とすればよい。或いは、Ｓ３で得られた撮像画像（第１撮像画像）の中から所定形状（マーカ光Ｍｋによる照射形状であり、図７１の領域ＡＲｍの例では矩形形状）の領域を検出し、その領域をマーカ光の照射領域としてもよい。 As a first example of the method of specifying the area in S3, for example, as shown in FIG. 71, the captured image (first captured image) obtained in S3 is analyzed, and the marker light Mk is extracted from the first captured image. What is necessary is just to specify the irradiation area ARm. Then, the marker light irradiation area ARm may be set as a “feature detection area”. Specifically, for example, in the first captured image, a region (region ARm) having a light reception amount equal to or greater than a predetermined value is detected, and a rectangular region or a circular region including all the region ARm is defined as a marker light irradiation region. do it. Alternatively, a region having a predetermined shape (irradiation shape by the marker light Mk, which is a rectangular shape in the example of the region ARm in FIG. 71) is detected from the captured image (first captured image) obtained in S3, and the region is detected. It is good also as an irradiation area of marker light.
　また、Ｓ３でエリア特定を行う第２例としては、メモリ３５を位置データ記憶部として機能させ、撮像部２３で得られる撮像画像でのマーカ光Ｍｋの照射領域の位置を示す位置データを記憶しておくようにしてもよい。この位置データは、例えば、マーカ光Ｍｋの照射領域の中心位置を示す中心データと、中心位置を中心とする大きさを示す大きさデータとを含む構成となっている。例えば、図７５のように、マーカ光照射部５０によるマーカ光Ｍｋの照射方向（中心軸（光軸）Ｍｋ１の方向）が撮像範囲ＡＲ１の中心軸（光軸Ｇ）とほぼ平行であり、且つマーカ光Ｍｋの中心軸Ｍｋ１と光軸Ｇとの距離が非常に近い場合（例えば無視できる程度に小さい場合）、マーカ光Ｍｋによる照射領域の中心位置は撮像画像のほぼ中心画素となる。従って、このような場合は、例えば、撮像部２３によって生成される撮像画像内での中心画素の座標のデータを中心データとし、マーカ光Ｍｋで予め想定される照射スポットの直径（マーカ光の径）を大きさデータとしてメモリ３５に記憶しておけば、このような位置データに基づいて、Ｓ３で得られた撮像画像（第１撮像画像）においてマーカ光の照射領域（例えば、照射領域の中心と照射領域の直径）を特定できるようになる。 Further, as a second example of specifying the area in S3, the memory 35 is made to function as a position data storage unit, and position data indicating the position of the irradiation area of the marker light Mk in the captured image obtained by the imaging unit 23 is stored. You may make it leave. The position data includes, for example, center data indicating the center position of the irradiation area of the marker light Mk and size data indicating the size centered on the center position. For example, as shown in FIG. 75, the irradiation direction (the direction of the central axis (optical axis) Mk1) of the marker light Mk by the marker light irradiation unit 50 is substantially parallel to the central axis (optical axis G) of the imaging range AR1, and When the distance between the center axis Mk1 of the marker light Mk and the optical axis G is very close (for example, when it is small enough to be ignored), the center position of the irradiation area by the marker light Mk is substantially the center pixel of the captured image. Accordingly, in such a case, for example, the coordinate data of the central pixel in the captured image generated by the imaging unit 23 is used as the central data, and the diameter of the irradiation spot (the diameter of the marker light) assumed in advance with the marker light Mk. ) As size data in the memory 35, based on such position data, the marker light irradiation region (for example, the center of the irradiation region) in the captured image (first captured image) obtained in S3. And the diameter of the irradiated area).
　この場合、検出部に相当する制御回路４０は、Ｓ４の処理により、メモリ３５（位置データ記憶部）に記憶された位置データに基づき、Ｓ３で得られた撮像画像（第１撮像画像）でのマーカ光Ｍｋの照射領域の位置を特定するように機能し、Ｓ５の処理では、この第１撮像画像内の照射領域ＡＲｍから特徴パターンを検出するように機能することになる。 In this case, the control circuit 40 corresponding to the detection unit uses the captured image (first captured image) obtained in S3 based on the position data stored in the memory 35 (position data storage unit) by the process of S4. It functions to specify the position of the irradiation area of the marker light Mk, and in the process of S5, it functions to detect a feature pattern from the irradiation area ARm in the first captured image.
　また、Ｓ３でエリア特定を行う第３例としては、例えば図７５のように、マーカ光照射部５０が撮像部２３による撮像範囲ＡＲの中心軸Ｇに沿ってマーカ光Ｍｋを照射する構成であれば、メモリ３５に位置データが記憶されていなくてもよい。即ち、このような場合、装置構成により、マーカ光Ｍｋの照射領域が撮像画像の中心部を含んだ所定領域になることが予め特定されるため、検出部に相当する制御回路４０は、Ｓ４の処理により、Ｓ３で得られた撮像画像（第１撮像画像）の中心部を含んだ所定の中央領域（例えば上述の照射領域の中心と照射領域の直径とによって特定される位置）を「特徴検出エリア」として特定し、Ｓ５の処理では、このように特定された「特徴検出エリア」から特徴パターンを検出すればよい。 Further, as a third example in which the area is identified in S3, for example, as shown in FIG. 75, the marker light irradiation unit 50 may irradiate the marker light Mk along the central axis G of the imaging range AR by the imaging unit 23. For example, the position data may not be stored in the memory 35. That is, in such a case, since it is specified in advance by the apparatus configuration that the irradiation area of the marker light Mk is a predetermined area including the central portion of the captured image, the control circuit 40 corresponding to the detection section By processing, a predetermined central region (for example, a position specified by the center of the irradiation region and the diameter of the irradiation region described above) including the central portion of the captured image (first captured image) obtained in S3 is detected as “feature detection. It is specified as “area”, and in the process of S5, a feature pattern may be detected from the “feature detection area” specified in this way.
　Ｓ４の処理として上述したいずれの例の場合でも、Ｓ５の処理では、Ｓ４で特定された「特徴検出エリア」から特徴パターンを検出することになる。具体的には、例えば、読取対象となる情報コード１００が図７１のような公知のＱＲコード（登録商標）である場合、ＱＲコードに含まれる位置検出パターン（切り出しシンボル）ＦＰを、「特徴パターン」として周知の検出方法で検出する。具体的には、例えばＳ４で特定された「特徴検出エリア」内において複数の位置で所定方向に走査を行い、明色セルと暗色セルが交互に配置される領域において、各領域幅が１：１：３：１：１となる領域を検出する。 In any case described above as the process of S4, in the process of S5, the feature pattern is detected from the “feature detection area” specified in S4. Specifically, for example, when the information code 100 to be read is a known QR code (registered trademark) as shown in FIG. 71, the position detection pattern (cutout symbol) FP included in the QR code is expressed as “feature pattern”. ”Is detected by a known detection method. Specifically, for example, scanning is performed in a predetermined direction at a plurality of positions in the “feature detection area” specified in S4, and each region width is 1: in a region where light cells and dark cells are alternately arranged. A region of 1: 3: 1: 1 is detected.
　なお、明色セルとは、暗色セルよりも相対的に明度の高い色のセルであり、例えば、暗色セルが黒色のときには白色である。暗色セルとは、明色セルよりも相対的に明度が低い色のセルであり、例えば、明色セルが白色のときには黒色である。このセルの明色、暗色については、例えば、“International　standard　ISO/IEC　18004,　second　edition　2006-09-01, page　109,　Annex M,　“M1
Symbol　contrast””　等で説明されている。 Note that the light color cell is a cell having a relatively higher lightness than the dark color cell, and is white when the dark color cell is black, for example. A dark cell is a cell of a color having a lightness relatively lower than that of a light cell, and is, for example, black when the light cell is white. For example, “International standard ISO / IEC 18004, second edition 2006-09-01, page 109, Annex M,“ M1 ”
Symbol contrast ”” etc.
　ところで、Ｓ５で検出される特徴パターンは、図７１のような特徴パターンに限られない。例えば、Ｓ５で検出すべき特徴パターンが複数種類想定されていてもよく、例えば、図７２のようなバーコードの明色バーＷｓ（スペース）と暗色バーＢｓ（バー）の配列の一部を「特徴パターン」としてもよい。例えば、図７３のように、マーカ光の照射領域ＡＲｍに位置するバーコード（情報コード１００）の一部に対して公知の方法で解読を試み、当該バーコードの一部が解読できた場合に、Ｓ６でＹｅｓに進むようにしてもよい。具体的には例えば、少なくとも公知のスタートビット、ストップビットなどが検出された場合に、Ｓ６でＹｅｓに進むようにしてもよく、或いは少なくとも所定キャラクタ分が解読できた場合に、Ｓ６でＹｅｓに進むようにしてもよい。 Incidentally, the feature pattern detected in S5 is not limited to the feature pattern as shown in FIG. For example, a plurality of types of feature patterns to be detected in S5 may be assumed. For example, a part of the arrangement of the light color bar Ws (space) and dark color bar Bs (bar) of the barcode as shown in FIG. It may be a “feature pattern”. For example, as shown in FIG. 73, when a part of the barcode (information code 100) located in the marker light irradiation area ARm is tried to be decoded by a known method, and a part of the barcode can be decoded The process may proceed to Yes in S6. Specifically, for example, when at least a known start bit, stop bit or the like is detected, the process may proceed to Yes in S6, or when at least a predetermined character can be decoded, the process may proceed to Yes in S6. Good.
　なお、図７１では、矩形状のマーカ光照射領域ＡＲｍが構成されるようにマーカ光を照射する例を示している。この図７１のような矩形状の領域であってもＳ５にて図７２のようなバーコードの一部を読み取ることは可能であるが、図７２のようなバーコードを読み取ることを想定した場合、図７２のように線状のマーカ光照射領域ＡＲｍが構成されるようにマーカ光を照射してもよい。なお、マーカ光照射領域ＡＲｍの例はこれらに限られるものではなく、例えば図７４のような様々な構成とすることができる。 In addition, in FIG. 71, the example which irradiates marker light is shown so that the rectangular marker light irradiation area | region ARm may be comprised. Even in the rectangular area as shown in FIG. 71, it is possible to read a part of the barcode as shown in FIG. 72 in S5, but assuming that the barcode as shown in FIG. 72 is read. 72, the marker light may be irradiated so that a linear marker light irradiation area ARm is formed as shown in FIG. Note that examples of the marker light irradiation area ARm are not limited to these, and for example, various configurations as shown in FIG. 74 can be adopted.
　そして、Ｓ６において特徴パターンが検出されたと判断される場合には、Ｓ６にてＹｅｓに進み、特徴検出回数を１つ加算するようにインクリメントする。なお、Ｓ８でカウントアップされる特徴検出回数の値は、例えばＳ１の処理実行直後に０に設定（初期化）されるようになっており、Ｓ８の処理が行われる度にカウントアップするようになっている。そして、Ｓ８の後には、特徴検出回数が規定回数（例えば３回）に到達したか否かを判断し（Ｓ９）、Ｓ８でカウントアップされた特徴検出回数が規定回数に到達している場合にはＳ９にてＹｅｓに進む。一方、Ｓ８でカウントアップされた特徴検出回数が規定回数に到達していない場合にはＳ９にてＮｏに進み、Ｓ３以降の処理を繰り返す。また、Ｓ６の判断処理において特徴パターンが検出されていないと判断される場合には、Ｓ６にてＹｅｓに進み、特徴検出回数を０にクリアする。 If it is determined in S6 that a feature pattern has been detected, the process proceeds to Yes in S6, and the feature detection count is incremented by one. The value of the number of feature detections counted up in S8 is set (initialized) to 0 immediately after execution of the process of S1, for example, and is incremented every time the process of S8 is performed. It has become. Then, after S8, it is determined whether or not the number of feature detections has reached a specified number of times (for example, 3 times) (S9), and when the number of feature detections counted up in S8 has reached the specified number of times. Advances to Yes in S9. On the other hand, if the number of feature detections counted up in S8 has not reached the specified number, the process proceeds to No in S9, and the processes after S3 are repeated. If it is determined that the feature pattern is not detected in the determination process of S6, the process proceeds to Yes in S6, and the number of feature detections is cleared to zero.
　そして、Ｓ９でＹｅｓに進む場合には、Ｓ４で算出された「特徴検出エリア」の位置をメモリ３５に保存する。そして、照明光源２１を動作させて照明光の照射を開始し（Ｓ１１）、撮像部２３でのシャッタ速度を、Ｓ２で設定した第１のシャッタ速度よりも相対的に速い（短い）第２のシャッタ速度に設定する（Ｓ１２）。つまり、Ｓ１２では、撮像部２３で撮像するときの露光時間の設定を、Ｓ２で設定される露光時間よりも短く設定する。そして、マーカ光照射部５０の動作を停止させてマーカ光を消灯する（Ｓ１３）。 When the process proceeds to Yes in S9, the position of the “feature detection area” calculated in S4 is stored in the memory 35. Then, the illumination light source 21 is operated to start illumination light irradiation (S11), and the shutter speed at the imaging unit 23 is relatively faster (shorter) than the first shutter speed set at S2. The shutter speed is set (S12). That is, in S12, the exposure time when capturing with the imaging unit 23 is set shorter than the exposure time set in S2. Then, the operation of the marker light irradiation unit 50 is stopped and the marker light is turned off (S13).
　なお、本構成では、制御回路４０が光源制御部の一例に相当し、照明光源２１を駆動させずにマーカ光照射部５０を駆動させる第１制御（Ｓ１～Ｓ１０の制御）と、照明光源２１を駆動させる第２制御（Ｓ１１～Ｓ１９の制御）とを切り替える制御を行うようになっている。具体的には、検出部に相当する制御回路４０がＳ３で取得した撮像画像（第１撮像画像）から特徴パターンを検出した場合に、マーカ光照射部５０及び照明光源２１に対する制御を第１制御から第２制御に切り替える構成となっている。より具体的には、撮像部２３は、Ｓ９でＹｅｓに進むまでの間、光源制御部による第１制御に応じてマーカ光が照射された状態でのＳ３の処理により撮像画像（第１撮像画像）を複数回取得するようになっており、光源制御部に相当する制御回路４０は、それら複数回の第１撮像画像において検出部により所定回数連続して特徴パターンが検出された場合（即ち、Ｓ９でＹｅｓに進む場合）に、第１制御から第２制御に切り替える構成となっている。 In this configuration, the control circuit 40 corresponds to an example of the light source control unit, and the first control (control of S1 to S10) for driving the marker light irradiation unit 50 without driving the illumination light source 21 and the illumination light source 21. Control for switching to the second control (control of S11 to S19) for driving is performed. Specifically, when the control circuit 40 corresponding to the detection unit detects a feature pattern from the captured image (first captured image) acquired in S3, the first control is performed on the marker light irradiation unit 50 and the illumination light source 21. To the second control. More specifically, the imaging unit 23 performs the captured image (first captured image) by the process of S3 in a state in which the marker light is irradiated according to the first control by the light source control unit until the process proceeds to Yes in S9. ) Is acquired a plurality of times, and the control circuit 40 corresponding to the light source control unit detects the feature pattern continuously for a predetermined number of times by the detection unit in the plurality of first captured images (that is, In the case of advancing to Yes in S9), the first control is switched to the second control.
　Ｓ１３にてマーカ光照射部５０の動作を停止させ、マーカ光を消灯した後には、タイムアウト時間Ｔを設定し（Ｓ１４）、この時間Ｔまでの時間計測を開始する。そして、Ｓ１４で開始された計測時間がタイムアウト時間Ｔを経過しているか否かを判断し、Ｓ１４の処理後の時間がタイムアウト時間Ｔを経過している場合には、撮像部２３によって撮像範囲を撮像する（Ｓ１６）。これにより、第２のシャッタ速度に設定された状態での撮像部２３による撮像画像（第２撮像画像）が生成される。そして、Ｓ１６で得られた第２撮像画像に含まれる情報コードを公知の方法でデコードする（Ｓ１７）。このＳ１７の処理では、Ｓ１０で保存された特徴検出エリア付近（例えば、Ｓ１６で得られた第２撮像画像においてＳ１０で保存された特徴検出エリアの中心から一定範囲内の領域）に含まれる情報コードを公知の方法でデコードする。そして、Ｓ１７でデコードが成功した場合には、Ｓ１８にてＹｅｓに進み、Ｓ１７で解読されたデータ（情報コード１００に記録されたデータ）を外部装置（例えば図６８のホストコンピュータＨＳＴなど）に送信する（Ｓ１９）。そして、Ｓ１９の後には、照明光源２１を停止させて照明を消灯し（Ｓ２０）、再び、Ｓ１に戻ることになる。一方、Ｓ１７でデコードが失敗した場合には、Ｓ１８にてＮｏに進む。この処理では、Ｓ１４からタイムアウト時間Ｔが経過するまでは、Ｓ１８でＮｏに進む毎にＳ１６以降の処理が繰り返されることになる。 After stopping the operation of the marker light irradiation unit 50 in S13 and turning off the marker light, a timeout time T is set (S14), and time measurement up to this time T is started. Then, it is determined whether or not the measurement time started in S14 has passed the timeout time T. If the time after the processing in S14 has passed the timeout time T, the imaging range is set by the imaging unit 23. An image is taken (S16). As a result, a captured image (second captured image) by the imaging unit 23 in a state where the second shutter speed is set is generated. Then, the information code included in the second captured image obtained in S16 is decoded by a known method (S17). In the process of S17, the information code included in the vicinity of the feature detection area stored in S10 (for example, a region within a certain range from the center of the feature detection area stored in S10 in the second captured image obtained in S16). Is decoded by a known method. If the decoding is successful in S17, the process proceeds to Yes in S18, and the data decrypted in S17 (data recorded in the information code 100) is transmitted to an external device (for example, the host computer HST in FIG. 68). (S19). After S19, the illumination light source 21 is stopped, the illumination is turned off (S20), and the process returns to S1 again. On the other hand, if the decoding fails in S17, the process proceeds to No in S18. In this process, until the time-out time T elapses from S14, the process after S16 is repeated every time the process proceeds to No in S18.
　本構成では、Ｓ２、Ｓ１２の処理を行う制御回路４０は、設定部の一例に相当し、検出部によって特徴パターンが検出された場合（具体的には、Ｓ９でＹｅｓに進む場合）に、撮像部２３でのシャッタ速度を、検出部による特徴パターンの検出前の第１のシャッタ速度よりも速い第２のシャッタ速度に設定変更するように機能する。また、本構成では、Ｓ２０の処理の後、再びＳ１に戻ってＳ２の処理が行われるようになっている。即ち、設定部に相当する制御回路４０は、処理部によって第２撮像画像が処理された後、再びＳ２の処理を行い、撮像部２３でのシャッタ速度を、再び、第１のシャッタ速度に戻すようになっている。 In this configuration, the control circuit 40 that performs the processes of S2 and S12 corresponds to an example of a setting unit, and when a feature pattern is detected by the detection unit (specifically, when the process proceeds to Yes in S9), imaging is performed. The shutter speed at the unit 23 functions to change the setting to a second shutter speed that is faster than the first shutter speed before the feature pattern is detected by the detection unit. In this configuration, after the process of S20, the process returns to S1 and the process of S2 is performed. That is, after the second captured image is processed by the processing unit, the control circuit 40 corresponding to the setting unit performs the process of S2 again, and returns the shutter speed at the imaging unit 23 to the first shutter speed again. It is like that.
　本構成では、制御回路４０が処理部の一例に相当し、光源制御部による第２制御に応じて照明光が照射された状態で撮像部２３によって得られた第２撮像画像を処理するように機能しており、具体的には、検出部により、第１のシャッタ速度のときの第１撮像画像から特徴パターンが検出された後、設定部によって第２のシャッタ速度に設定変更された撮像部で得られた第２撮像画像を処理するように機能する。この処理部では、第２撮像画像の処理として、Ｓ１６で得られた第２撮像画像に含まれる情報コードを解読する処理や、その解読データを外部装置に送信する処理を行っているが、第２撮像画像に対する処理としては、第２撮像画像に含まれる情報コードの解読データを表示する処理や記憶する処理などであってもよい。或いは、第２撮像画像そのものを記憶する処理であってもよく、第２撮像画像そのものを外部装置に送信する処理であってもよい。 In this configuration, the control circuit 40 corresponds to an example of a processing unit, and processes the second captured image obtained by the imaging unit 23 in a state where illumination light is irradiated according to the second control by the light source control unit. More specifically, after the feature pattern is detected from the first captured image at the first shutter speed by the detection unit, the imaging unit whose setting is changed to the second shutter speed by the setting unit It functions so as to process the second captured image obtained in the above. In this processing unit, as processing of the second captured image, processing for decoding the information code included in the second captured image obtained in S16 and processing for transmitting the decoded data to the external device are performed. The process for the two captured images may be a process for displaying or storing decoded data of the information code included in the second captured image. Or the process which memorize | stores the 2nd captured image itself may be sufficient, and the process which transmits the 2nd captured image itself to an external device may be sufficient.
　（本構成の効果の一例）
　本構成では、光源制御部により、照明光源２１を駆動させずにマーカ光照射部５０を駆動させる第１制御と、照明光源２１を駆動させる第２制御とを切り替える構成となっている。そして、特徴パターンを検出するまでは、マーカ光を照射した状態で得られた第１撮像画像によって特徴パターンの検出を試み、特徴パターンが検出された後は、照明光源２１を駆動して得られた第２撮像画像によって情報コードの処理を行っている。 (An example of the effect of this configuration)
In this configuration, the light source control unit switches between the first control for driving the marker light irradiation unit 50 without driving the illumination light source 21 and the second control for driving the illumination light source 21. Until the feature pattern is detected, detection of the feature pattern is attempted using the first captured image obtained in the state where the marker light is irradiated. After the feature pattern is detected, the illumination light source 21 is driven to obtain the feature pattern. The information code is processed by the second captured image.
　マーカ光を照射した状態で得られた第１撮像画像によって特徴パターンが検出された場合、使用者が意図する方向（読取装置を向けている方向）に情報コードが存在する可能性が高く、このような検出結果が得られた場合に照明光源２１を駆動して第２撮像画像を撮像すれば、使用者が意図する情報コードを選択的に解読することができ、照明光源２１を常に駆動して情報コードの解読を試みる構成と比べると、意図しない情報コードの解読を防ぎやすくなる。また、読取装置１０Ｂが向く方向に情報コードが存在する可能性が高い場合に照明光源２１が駆動されるため、電力消費を効果的に抑制することができる。 When the feature pattern is detected by the first captured image obtained in the state where the marker light is irradiated, there is a high possibility that the information code exists in the direction intended by the user (direction in which the reading device is directed). If such a detection result is obtained, if the illumination light source 21 is driven to capture the second captured image, the information code intended by the user can be selectively decoded, and the illumination light source 21 is always driven. Compared to a configuration that attempts to decode the information code, it is easier to prevent unintentional decoding of the information code. Further, since the illumination light source 21 is driven when there is a high possibility that an information code exists in the direction in which the reading device 10B faces, power consumption can be effectively suppressed.
　また、検出部は、Ｓ３で得られた第１撮像画像においてマーカ光の照射領域を解析し、当該照射領域から特徴パターンを検出している。このようにすれば、マーカ光の照射先に情報コードが存在しているか否かをより確実に検出することができ、マーカ光の照射先に存在する情報コードを狙ってより確実に読み取りを行うことができるようになる。 Further, the detection unit analyzes the irradiation region of the marker light in the first captured image obtained in S3, and detects a feature pattern from the irradiation region. In this way, it is possible to more reliably detect whether or not the information code is present at the marker light irradiation destination, and more reliably read the information code existing at the marker light irradiation destination. Will be able to.
　また、Ｓ４の処理で説明した第２の例では、撮像部２３で得られる撮像画像でのマーカ光の照射領域の位置を示す位置データが記憶される位置データ記憶部（メモリ３５）を備えており、検出部は、位置データ記憶部に記憶された位置データに基づいて第１撮像画像内でのマーカ光の照射領域の位置を特定し、第１撮像画像内のマーカ光照射領域から特徴パターンを検出している。このようにすれば、第１撮像画像内でマーカ光の照射領域を解析する際に、マーカ光の照射領域の位置をより正確に把握して解析を行うことができる。 Further, the second example described in the process of S4 includes a position data storage unit (memory 35) that stores position data indicating the position of the marker light irradiation region in the captured image obtained by the imaging unit 23. The detection unit specifies the position of the marker light irradiation region in the first captured image based on the position data stored in the position data storage unit, and the feature pattern is determined from the marker light irradiation region in the first captured image. Is detected. In this way, when analyzing the irradiation area of the marker light in the first captured image, the position of the irradiation area of the marker light can be grasped more accurately and analyzed.
　Ｓ４の処理の第２の例では、位置データが、照射領域の中心位置を示す中心データと、中心位置を中心とする大きさを示す大きさデータとを含んでいる。このようにすれば、マーカ光の照射領域の具体的範囲を、より簡易なデータで、より詳細に把握して解析を行うことができる。 In the second example of the process of S4, the position data includes center data indicating the center position of the irradiation region and size data indicating the size around the center position. In this way, the specific range of the marker light irradiation region can be understood and analyzed in more detail with simpler data.
　また、マーカ光照射部５０は、撮像部２３による撮像範囲ＡＲの中心軸Ｇに沿ってマーカ光Ｍｋを照射する構成であり、Ｓ４の処理で説明した第３の例では、検出部は、第１撮像画像の中心部を含んだ所定の中央領域から特徴パターンを検出する構成となっている。このようにすれば、第１撮像画像内でマーカ光の照射領域を解析する際に、マーカ光の照射領域の位置をより正確に把握して解析を行うことができる。 In addition, the marker light irradiation unit 50 is configured to irradiate the marker light Mk along the central axis G of the imaging range AR by the imaging unit 23. In the third example described in the process of S4, the detection unit A feature pattern is detected from a predetermined central region including the central portion of one captured image. In this way, when analyzing the irradiation area of the marker light in the first captured image, the position of the irradiation area of the marker light can be grasped more accurately and analyzed.
　また、本構成では、撮像部２３は、光源制御部による第１制御に応じてマーカ光が照射された状態で第１撮像画像を複数回取得し、光源制御部は、複数回の第１撮像画像において検出部により所定回数連続して特徴パターンが検出された場合に、第１制御から第２制御に切り替える構成となっている。このように、所定回数連続して特徴パターンが検出された場合に限って照明光源を駆動し、第２撮像画像を処理する構成とすれば、意図しない情報コードが偶然に撮像範囲を一時的に横切るようなケース（例えば、特徴パターンがたまたま１回だけ検出されるようなケース）などにおいて、意図しない情報コードに対する解読処理を排除し易くなる。 In this configuration, the imaging unit 23 acquires the first captured image a plurality of times in a state in which the marker light is irradiated according to the first control by the light source control unit, and the light source control unit performs the first imaging for a plurality of times. When a feature pattern is detected a predetermined number of times consecutively in the image, the first control is switched to the second control. As described above, when the illumination light source is driven only when the feature pattern is detected a predetermined number of times in succession and the second captured image is processed, an unintended information code temporarily changes the imaging range by chance. In a case of crossing (for example, a case where a feature pattern is detected only once), it is easy to eliminate the decoding process for an unintended information code.
　また、本構成では、マーカ光照射部５０は、図７４のように、マーカ光の照射方向と直交する平面での照射形状が所定方向に延びる線状形状を含む形状（図７４（Ｄ）、（Ｅ）参照）、略矩形状（図７４（Ａ）参照）、略円形状（図７４（Ｂ）、（Ｃ）参照）となるようにマーカ光を照射する構成となっている。このようにすれば、所定方向の走査で特徴パターンが検出され得る情報コード、又は円形エリアや矩形エリアの解析で特徴パターンが検出され得る情報コードを対象として、特徴パターンをより良好に検出し易くなる。 In this configuration, as shown in FIG. 74, the marker light irradiation unit 50 has a shape including a linear shape in which the irradiation shape on a plane orthogonal to the irradiation direction of the marker light extends in a predetermined direction (FIG. 74 (D), (E)), the marker light is irradiated so as to have a substantially rectangular shape (see FIG. 74A) and a substantially circular shape (see FIGS. 74B and 74C). In this way, it is easier to detect a feature pattern better for an information code that can detect a feature pattern by scanning in a predetermined direction or an information code that can detect a feature pattern by analyzing a circular area or a rectangular area. Become.
　また、本構成では、特徴パターンを検出するまでの間は撮像部２３のシャッタ速度を相対的に遅く（長く）設定し、画像を相対的にぼけやすくすることで、希望しない情報コードが瞬間的に撮像範囲に入り込むような場合に、その情報コードの特徴パターンを検出されにくくすることができ、その情報コードを読み取りにくくすることができる逆に、画像がぼけやすい状態の第１撮像画像で特徴パターンが検出された場合には、使用者が当該装置を希望する情報コードに向け、ある程度の時間保持された可能性が高い。従って、上記構成によれば、使用者が希望する情報コードを読み取りやすく、使用者が希望しない情報コードをより確実に排除しやすい構成となる。また、第１撮像画像で特徴パターンが検出された場合には、シャッタ速度を速く（短く）設定することで、意図する情報コードが含まれる可能性の高い第２撮像画像をより鮮明に撮像することができ、希望する情報コードがより確実に読み取られ易くなる。 In this configuration, the shutter speed of the image pickup unit 23 is set to be relatively slow (long) until the feature pattern is detected, and the image is relatively easily blurred. When entering the imaging range, the feature pattern of the information code can be made difficult to detect, and the information code can be made difficult to read. When a pattern is detected, it is highly likely that the user has held the device for an information code that desires the device for a certain period of time. Therefore, according to the above configuration, the information code desired by the user can be easily read, and the information code not desired by the user can be more reliably excluded. In addition, when a feature pattern is detected in the first captured image, the second captured image that is likely to contain the intended information code is captured more clearly by setting the shutter speed to be faster (shorter). This makes it easier to read the desired information code more reliably.
　また、本構成では、設定部は、処理部によって第２撮像画像が処理された後、撮像部でのシャッタ速度を、再び、第１のシャッタ速度に戻す構成となっている。この構成によれば、第２撮像画像が処理された後に、再び第１のシャッタ速度に戻すことで、再び、希望しない情報コードを排除しやすい設定にすることができる。つまり、第２撮像画像が処理される毎に、希望する情報コードのみを選択し易い状態に戻すことができ、より効率的に読み取りを行うことができる。 In this configuration, the setting unit is configured to return the shutter speed at the imaging unit to the first shutter speed again after the second captured image is processed by the processing unit. According to this configuration, after the second captured image is processed, the setting can be made so that unwanted information codes can be easily excluded again by returning to the first shutter speed again. That is, every time the second captured image is processed, it is possible to return to a state in which only a desired information code can be easily selected, and reading can be performed more efficiently.
　［第１３実施形態]
　第１３実施形態では、図７６に示す読取処理のみが第１２実施形態の読取処理（図７０）と異なり、それ以外の構成は第１２実施形態と同様である。よって、以下では読取処理について重点的に説明することとし、第１２実施形態と同様の他の構成については、詳細な説明を省略する。 [Thirteenth embodiment]
In the thirteenth embodiment, only the reading process shown in FIG. 76 is different from the reading process (FIG. 70) in the twelfth embodiment, and the other configurations are the same as those in the twelfth embodiment. Therefore, in the following, the reading process will be described mainly, and detailed description of other configurations similar to those in the twelfth embodiment will be omitted.
　第１３実施形態に係る読取装置１０Ｂでは、図７６のような流れで読取処理が行われる。なお、図７６の読取処理は、Ｓ２５１～Ｓ２６８の処理は、図７０のＳ１～Ｓ１８の処理と同一であるため、これらの処理の詳細な説明は省略する。 In the reading apparatus 10B according to the thirteenth embodiment, the reading process is performed according to the flow shown in FIG. In the reading process of FIG. 76, the processes of S251 to S268 are the same as the processes of S1 to S18 of FIG. 70, and thus detailed description of these processes will be omitted.
　図７６の読取処理では、Ｓ２６５にてＹｅｓに進む場合の処理がＳ１５にてＹｅｓに進む場合の処理と異なり、Ｓ２６８にてＹｅｓに進む場合の処理が、Ｓ１８にてＹｅｓに進む場合の処理と異なっている。それ以外は、第１２実施形態で説明した図７０の処理と同様である。 In the reading process of FIG. 76, unlike the process when the process proceeds to Yes at S265, the process when the process proceeds to Yes at S268 is different from the process when the process proceeds to Yes at S268. Is different. Other than that, it is the same as the processing of FIG. 70 described in the twelfth embodiment.
　この図７６の読取処理では、Ｓ２６５にてＹｅｓに進む場合、照明光源２１の動作を停止させて照明光を消灯するようになっている（Ｓ２６９）。この場合、Ｓ２６９の処理の後には、再びＳ２５１以降の処理が行われる。 76, when the process proceeds to Yes in S265, the operation of the illumination light source 21 is stopped and the illumination light is turned off (S269). In this case, after the process of S269, the process after S251 is performed again.
　一方、Ｓ２６８にてＹｅｓに進む場合、Ｓ２７０にてキャンセル待ち時間Ｔ２を設定し、Ｓ２７０の処理後の経過時間が時間Ｔ２に至るまでの時間計測を開始する（Ｓ２７０）。そして、照明光源２１の動作を停止させて照明光Ｌｆを消灯する（Ｓ２７１）。そして、Ｓ２７０で開始された計測時間がキャンセル待ち時間Ｔ２を経過しているか否かを判断し（Ｓ２７２）、Ｓ２７０の処理後の経過時間がキャンセル待ち時間Ｔ２を経過している場合には、Ｓ２７２にてＹｅｓに進む。このようにＳ２７２にてＹｅｓに進む場合には、Ｓ２６７で解読した解読データ（処理データ）を外部装置（例えば図６８のホストコンピュータＨＳＴなど）に転送する。なお、このＳ２６７の処理は、図７０のＳ１９の処理と同様である。 On the other hand, when the process proceeds to Yes in S268, a cancel waiting time T2 is set in S270, and time measurement is started until the elapsed time after the processing in S270 reaches time T2 (S270). Then, the operation of the illumination light source 21 is stopped and the illumination light Lf is turned off (S271). Then, it is determined whether or not the measurement time started in S270 has passed the cancellation waiting time T2 (S272), and if the elapsed time after the processing in S270 has passed the cancellation waiting time T2, S272 Proceed to Yes. When the process proceeds to Yes in S272 as described above, the decrypted data (processed data) decrypted in S267 is transferred to an external device (for example, the host computer HST in FIG. 68). Note that the processing of S267 is the same as the processing of S19 of FIG.
　一方、Ｓ２７２の判断処理において、Ｓ２７０の処理後の経過時間がキャンセル待ち時間Ｔ２を経過していないと判断される場合には、Ｓ２７２にてＮｏに進み、「所定のキャンセル操作」があったか否かを判断する（Ｓ２７３）。そして、「所定のキャンセル操作」がなされていないと判断される場合には、Ｓ２７３にてＮｏに進み、Ｓ２７２以降の処理を繰り返す。つまり、この処理では、Ｓ２７０の処理後、キャンセル時間Ｔ２（一定時間）を経過するまでは、「所定のキャンセル操作」がない限りＳ２７２とＳ２７３の処理が繰り返されることになる。一方、Ｓ２７３の判断処理において、「所定のキャンセル操作」があったと判断される場合には、Ｓ２７３にてＹｅｓに進み、Ｓ２６７で解読された解読データの外部装置（図６８のホストコンピュータＨＳＴなど）への送信をキャンセルし、その解読データを消去する。 On the other hand, in the determination process of S272, when it is determined that the elapsed time after the process of S270 has not passed the cancel waiting time T2, the process proceeds to No in S272 and whether or not there is a “predetermined cancel operation”. Is determined (S273). If it is determined that the “predetermined cancel operation” has not been performed, the process proceeds to No in S273, and the processes in and after S272 are repeated. In other words, in this process, the processes of S272 and S273 are repeated until the cancellation time T2 (a fixed time) elapses after the process of S270 unless there is a “predetermined cancel operation”. On the other hand, if it is determined in the determination process of S273 that there has been a “predetermined cancel operation”, the process proceeds to Yes in S273, and the external device of the decrypted data decrypted in S267 (such as the host computer HST in FIG. 68). Cancel the transmission to, and erase the decrypted data.
　Ｓ２７３で判断される「所定のキャンセル操作」の第１の例としては、例えば、「携帯型情報コード読取装置１０Ｂによる所定の専用コードの読み取り操作」とすることができる。このような構成では、Ｓ２７２にてＮｏに進む場合、「携帯型情報コード読取装置１０Ｂによる所定の専用コードの読み取り操作」があったと判断される場合には、Ｓ２７３にてＹｅｓに進み、そうでない場合には、Ｓ２７３にてＮｏに進むことになる。なお、このような例では、Ｓ２７１の消灯処理を、Ｓ２７５の後や、Ｓ２７４の後に行うようにしてもよい。なお、この「専用コード」の例は様々であり、例えば固有の識別情報（専用コードであることを示す識別情報）が記録された情報コードであってもよい。或いは、専用コードとして想定された特定の種類の情報コードなどであってもよい。 As a first example of the “predetermined cancel operation” determined in S273, for example, a “predetermined code reading operation by the portable information code reader 10B” can be used. In such a configuration, when the process proceeds to No in S272, if it is determined that “the reading operation of the predetermined dedicated code by the portable information code reader 10B” has been performed, the process proceeds to Yes in S273, and is not so. In this case, the process proceeds to No in S273. In such an example, the extinguishing process of S271 may be performed after S275 or after S274. There are various examples of the “dedicated code”, and for example, an information code in which unique identification information (identification information indicating a dedicated code) is recorded may be used. Alternatively, a specific type of information code assumed as a dedicated code may be used.
　また、Ｓ２７３で判断される「所定のキャンセル操作」の第２の例としては、「操作スイッチ４２に対する所定の押圧操作」とすることができる。このような構成では、Ｓ２７２にてＮｏに進む場合、「操作スイッチ４２に対する所定の押圧操作」があったと判断される場合には、Ｓ２７３にてＹｅｓに進み、そうでない場合には、Ｓ２７３にてＮｏに進むことになる。なお、「所定の押圧操作」は、例えば操作スイッチ４２を一定時間以上継続して押し続ける長押し操作や、操作スイッチ４２を一定回数以上繰り返して押圧する操作などとすることができる。 Further, as a second example of the “predetermined canceling operation” determined in S273, it can be set as “a predetermined pressing operation on the operation switch 42”. In such a configuration, when the process proceeds to No in S272, if it is determined that there is a “predetermined pressing operation on the operation switch 42”, the process proceeds to Yes in S273, and if not, the process proceeds to S273. Proceed to No. Note that the “predetermined pressing operation” can be, for example, a long pressing operation in which the operation switch 42 is continuously pressed for a certain period of time or an operation in which the operation switch 42 is repeatedly pressed a certain number of times.
　また、Ｓ２７３で判断される「所定のキャンセル操作」の第３の例としては、「携帯型情報コード読取装置１０Ｂによって既に読み取られている既読コードを当該携帯型情報コード読取装置１０Ｂによって再び読み取る操作」とすることができる。このような構成では、Ｓ２７２にてＮｏに進む場合、「携帯型情報コード読取装置１０Ｂによって既に読み取られている既読コードを当該携帯型情報コード読取装置１０Ｂによって再び読み取る操作」があったと判断される場合には、Ｓ２７３にてＹｅｓに進み、そうでない場合には、Ｓ２７３にてＮｏに進むことになる。「携帯型情報コード読取装置１０Ｂによって既に読み取られている既読コード」の例としては、直近のＳ２６７の処理で解読された情報コードが挙げられ、Ｓ２７１の処理後、キャンセル待ち時間Ｔ２が経過するまでの間にこのような情報コードが読み取られた場合には、この情報コードの解読データをＳ２７５にて消去することになる。 As a third example of the “predetermined cancel operation” determined in S273, “read code already read by the portable information code reader 10B is read again by the portable information code reader 10B. Operation ". In such a configuration, when the process proceeds to No in S272, it is determined that there has been an “operation for rereading a read code that has already been read by the portable information code reader 10B by the portable information code reader 10B”. If yes, the process proceeds to Yes in S273, and if not, the process proceeds to No in S273. An example of “read code already read by the portable information code reader 10B” is the information code decoded in the latest processing of S267, and the cancellation waiting time T2 elapses after the processing of S271. If such an information code is read until then, the decoded data of this information code is erased in S275.
　また、このような第３の例で想定される既読コードは、直近のＳ２６７で読み取られた情報コードに限られない。例えば、直近のＳ２６７よりも前に読取装置１０Ｂによって読み取られた情報コードが再び読み取られた場合、Ｓ２７５において、その情報コードの解読データを消去する処理を行うようにしてもよい。この場合、その情報コードの解読データが依然としてメモリ３５に蓄積されている場合には、その解読データをメモリ３５から消去することが望ましい。また、その情報コードの解読データが外部装置に既に送信されている場合には、その情報コードの解読データを消去する旨のコマンドを外部装置に送信するようにしてもよい。 Further, the read code assumed in the third example is not limited to the information code read in the latest S267. For example, when an information code read by the reading device 10B before the latest S267 is read again, a process of deleting the decoded data of the information code may be performed in S275. In this case, when the decrypted data of the information code is still stored in the memory 35, it is desirable to erase the decrypted data from the memory 35. In addition, when the decrypted data of the information code has already been transmitted to the external device, a command for deleting the decrypted data of the information code may be transmitted to the external device.
　また、Ｓ２７３で判断される、「所定のキャンセル操作」の第４の例としては、「操作スイッチ４２に対して所定の外部操作が行われつつ当該携帯型情報コード読取装置１０Ｂによって既に読み取られている既読コードが再び当該携帯型情報コード読取装置１０Ｂによって読み取られる操作」とすることができる。このような構成では、Ｓ２７２にてＮｏに進む場合、「操作スイッチ４２に対して所定の外部操作が行われつつ当該携帯型情報コード読取装置１０Ｂによって既に読み取られている既読コードが再び当該携帯型情報コード読取装置１０Ｂによって読み取られる操作」があったと判断される場合には、Ｓ２７３にてＹｅｓに進み、そうでない場合には、Ｓ２７３にてＮｏに進むことになる。この場合、例えば、所定の外部操作としては、操作スイッチ４２を押圧する操作などが挙げられ、「携帯型情報コード読取装置１０Ｂによって既に読み取られている既読コード」の例としては、直近のＳ２６７の処理で解読された情報コードが挙げられる。このようなケースでは、Ｓ２７１の処理後、キャンセル待ち時間Ｔ２が経過するまでの間に、操作スイッチ４２が押圧された状態でこのような情報コード（直近のＳ２６７で読み取られた情報コード）が読み取られた場合に、この情報コードの解読データをＳ２７５にて消去することになる。 In addition, as a fourth example of the “predetermined cancel operation” determined in S273, “a predetermined external operation is being performed on the operation switch 42 and the portable information code reader 10B has already read it. The operation in which the already read code is read again by the portable information code reader 10 </ b> B ”can be performed. In such a configuration, when the process proceeds to No in S272, “the read code that has already been read by the portable information code reading device 10B while the predetermined external operation is performed on the operation switch 42 is again the portable If it is determined that the “operation read by the type information code reader 10B” has been performed, the process proceeds to Yes in S273, and otherwise, the process proceeds to No in S273. In this case, for example, the predetermined external operation includes an operation of pressing the operation switch 42, and an example of “read code already read by the portable information code reading device 10B” is the latest S267. The information code decrypted by the above process is listed. In such a case, after the process of S271, until the cancellation waiting time T2 elapses, such an information code (information code read in the latest S267) is read with the operation switch 42 pressed. If so, the decrypted data of the information code is erased in S275.
　また、このような第４の例でも、想定される既読コードは、直近のＳ２６７で読み取られた情報コードに限られない。例えば、直近のＳ２６７よりも前に読取装置１０Ｂによって読み取られた情報コードが操作スイッチ４２の押圧と共に再び読み取られた場合、Ｓ２７５において、その情報コードの解読データを消去する処理を行うようにしてもよい。この場合、その情報コードの解読データが依然としてメモリ３５に蓄積されている場合には、その解読データをメモリ３５から消去することが望ましい。また、その情報コードの解読データが外部装置（図６８のホストコンピュータＨＳＴなど）に既に送信されている場合には、その情報コードの解読データを消去する旨のコマンドを外部装置に送信するようにしてもよい。 Also in the fourth example, the assumed read code is not limited to the information code read in the latest S267. For example, when an information code read by the reading device 10B before the latest S267 is read again with the pressing of the operation switch 42, a process of deleting the decoded data of the information code is performed in S275. Good. In this case, when the decrypted data of the information code is still stored in the memory 35, it is desirable to erase the decrypted data from the memory 35. If the decrypted data of the information code has already been transmitted to an external device (such as the host computer HST in FIG. 68), a command for deleting the decrypted data of the information code is transmitted to the external device. May be.
　また、Ｓ２７３で判断される、「所定のキャンセル操作」の第５の例としては、「撮像部によって情報コードを所定時間以上継続して撮像し続ける操作」とすることができる。このような構成では、Ｓ２７２にてＮｏに進む場合、「撮像部２３によって情報コードを所定時間以上継続して撮像し続ける操作」があったと判断される場合には、Ｓ２７３にてＹｅｓに進み、そうでない場合には、Ｓ２７３にてＮｏに進むことになる。この第５の例で想定される情報コードは、第１の例のような専用コードであってもよく、第３の例や第４の例のような既読コードであってもよい。また、既読コードの場合、「撮像部２３によって既読コードを所定時間以上継続して撮像し続ける操作」があったと判断される場合に、Ｓ２７３にてＹｅｓに進み、その既読コードの解読データを消去する処理を行えばよい。例えば、既読コードが直近のＳ２６７の処理で解読された情報コードである場合、Ｓ２７１の処理後、キャンセル待ち時間Ｔ２が経過するまでの間にこのような情報コードが所定時間継続して撮像し続けられた場合には、この情報コードの解読データをＳ２７５にて消去すればよい。また、既読コードが、直近のＳ２６７よりも前に読取装置１０Ｂによって読み取られた情報コードであり、このような既読コードがＳ２７０の処理後に再び読み取られた場合、Ｓ２７５において、その情報コードの解読データを消去する処理を行うようにしてもよい。この場合も、その情報コードの解読データが依然としてメモリ３５に蓄積されている場合には、その解読データをメモリ３５から消去することが望ましい。また、その情報コードの解読データが外部装置に既に送信されている場合には、その情報コードの解読データを消去する旨のコマンドを外部装置に送信するようにしてもよい。 Further, as a fifth example of the “predetermined cancel operation” determined in S273, an “operation for continuously capturing the information code by the image capturing unit for a predetermined time or longer” may be used. In such a configuration, when the process proceeds to No in S272, if it is determined that there has been an “operation for continuously capturing the information code by the image capturing unit 23 for a predetermined time or longer”, the process proceeds to Yes in S273. Otherwise, the process proceeds to No in S273. The information code assumed in the fifth example may be a dedicated code as in the first example, or may be a read code as in the third example or the fourth example. In the case of a read code, if it is determined that there has been an “operation to continue imaging the read code for a predetermined time or longer by the imaging unit 23”, the process proceeds to Yes in S273 and the read code is decoded. A process of deleting data may be performed. For example, when the read code is an information code decoded in the latest processing of S267, such information code is continuously captured for a predetermined time after the processing of S271 until the cancellation waiting time T2 elapses. If the process is continued, the decrypted data of this information code may be deleted in S275. In addition, when the read code is an information code read by the reading device 10B before the latest S267, and such read code is read again after the processing of S270, the information code of the information code is read in S275. You may make it perform the process which erases decoding data. Also in this case, when the decrypted data of the information code is still stored in the memory 35, it is desirable to erase the decrypted data from the memory 35. In addition, when the decrypted data of the information code has already been transmitted to the external device, a command for deleting the decrypted data of the information code may be transmitted to the external device.
　以上のように、本構成では、携帯型情報コード読取装置１０Ｂに対して所定の指示操作がなされた場合に、処理部によって撮像画像を処理した処理データに対する所定のキャンセル制御を行う対応部を備えている。この構成によれば、希望しない情報コードの撮像画像が処理された場合、或いは処理された可能性が高い場合などにおいて、その撮像画像を処理した処理データをキャンセルすることができるため、希望する情報コードの処理データのみを残存させやすい構成となる。 As described above, in this configuration, when a predetermined instruction operation is performed on the portable information code reader 10B, a corresponding unit that performs predetermined cancel control on the processing data obtained by processing the captured image by the processing unit is provided. ing. According to this configuration, when a captured image of an undesired information code is processed, or when processing possibility is high, processing data obtained by processing the captured image can be canceled. The configuration is such that only the code processing data remains.
　また、本構成では、処理部に相当する制御回路４０は、撮像部２３によって得られた撮像画像を解読する解読部として機能し、更に、撮像画像の解読後、一定時間が経過するまでは解読部によって得られた解読データの送信を停止し、一定時間の経過後に解読データを当該携帯型情報コード読取装置の外部に設けられた外部装置に送信する送信部としても機能している。そして、対応部に相当する制御回路４０は、撮像画像の解読後、一定時間が経過する前に携帯型情報コード読取装置１０Ｂに対して所定の指示操作がなされた場合に、解読データを消去する処理を行い、送信部は、対応部によって解読データが消去される場合、当該解読データを外部装置に送信する処理を行わない構成となっている。 Further, in this configuration, the control circuit 40 corresponding to the processing unit functions as a decoding unit that decodes the captured image obtained by the imaging unit 23, and further decodes until a certain time elapses after decoding the captured image. It also functions as a transmission unit that stops transmission of the decrypted data obtained by the unit and transmits the decrypted data to an external device provided outside the portable information code reader after a lapse of a certain time. Then, the control circuit 40 corresponding to the corresponding unit erases the decrypted data when a predetermined instruction operation is performed on the portable information code reader 10B after a certain time has elapsed after the captured image is decrypted. Processing is performed, and the transmission unit is configured not to perform processing for transmitting the decrypted data to the external device when the decrypted data is erased by the corresponding unit.
　この構成によれば、情報コードを解読したデータを外部装置に送信し得る構成を実現しつつ、希望しない情報コードの解読がなされた場合に、その情報コードの解読データの送信を中止しやすくなる。従って、外部装置では、使用者が希望する情報コードの解読データのみが得られやすくなる。 According to this configuration, while realizing a configuration capable of transmitting data obtained by decoding an information code to an external device, it becomes easy to stop transmission of decoded data of the information code when an undesired information code is decoded. . Therefore, in the external device, it becomes easy to obtain only decoded data of the information code desired by the user.
　また、本構成では、上記「一定時間」（Ｓ２７０でのキャンセル待ち時間Ｔ２）の値を記憶するメモリ３５（設定データ記憶部）を備え、送信部に相当する制御回路４０は、メモリ３５（設定データ記憶部）に記憶されたデータに基づき、Ｓ２７２、Ｓ２７３にて解読データ（Ｓ２６７で解読したデータ）の送信を一定時間（キャンセル待ち時間Ｔ２）だけ停止する構成となっている。そして、メモリ３５（設定データ記憶部）に記憶された一定時間（キャンセル待ち時間Ｔ２）の値は、設定変更可能となっている。例えば、操作スイッチ４２に対する操作や外部からのデータ入力により、一定時間（キャンセル待ち時間Ｔ２）の値を更新できるようになっている。この構成によれば、装置内でキャンセル可能となるキャンセル待ち時間Ｔ２（一定時間）をユーザが任意に設定変更することができ、より利便性が高まる。 Further, in this configuration, the memory 35 (setting data storage unit) that stores the value of the “certain time” (cancellation waiting time T2 in S270) is provided, and the control circuit 40 corresponding to the transmission unit includes the memory 35 (setting data setting unit). Based on the data stored in the data storage unit), transmission of decrypted data (data decrypted in S267) in S272 and S273 is stopped for a certain time (cancellation waiting time T2). And the value of the fixed time (cancellation waiting time T2) memorize | stored in the memory 35 (setting data storage part) can be changed. For example, the value of a predetermined time (cancellation waiting time T2) can be updated by an operation on the operation switch 42 or data input from the outside. According to this configuration, the user can arbitrarily set and change the cancellation waiting time T2 (fixed time) that can be canceled in the apparatus, and the convenience is further improved.
　また、「キャンセル操作」に関する第１の例では、当該携帯型情報コード読取装置１０Ｂによって所定の専用コードが読み取られた場合に、対応部に相当する制御回路４０がキャンセル制御を行う構成となっている。この構成によれば、ユーザは、当該携帯型情報コード読取装置１０Ｂによって専用コードを読み取るという簡易な操作を行えば、既存の処理データをキャンセルすることができるようになる。特に、キャンセル時にも通常の読み取りと同様の対応（コードの読み取り操作）によってキャンセルが可能となるため、特徴的なハンズフリー構成を生かしたキャンセルが可能となる。 Further, in the first example regarding the “cancel operation”, when a predetermined dedicated code is read by the portable information code reader 10B, the control circuit 40 corresponding to the corresponding unit performs cancel control. Yes. According to this configuration, the user can cancel the existing processing data by performing a simple operation of reading the dedicated code by the portable information code reader 10B. In particular, since cancellation can be performed by the same response (code reading operation) as in normal reading, cancellation using a characteristic hands-free configuration is possible.
　また、「キャンセル操作」に関する第２の例では、操作スイッチ４２に対して所定の外部操作が行われた場合に、対応部に相当する制御回路４０がキャンセル制御を行う構成となっている。この構成によれば、ユーザは、操作スイッチ４２を操作するという簡易な操作を行えば、既存の処理データをキャンセルすることができる。 Further, in the second example regarding the “cancel operation”, when a predetermined external operation is performed on the operation switch 42, the control circuit 40 corresponding to the corresponding unit performs the cancel control. According to this configuration, the user can cancel the existing processing data by performing a simple operation of operating the operation switch 42.
　また、「キャンセル操作」に関する第３の例では、当該携帯型情報コード読取装置１０Ｂによって既に読み取られている既読コードが再び当該携帯型情報コード読取装置１０Ｂによって読み取られた場合に、処理部によって処理された既読コードの処理データを消去する消去処理を行う構成となっている。この構成によれば、ユーザは、当該携帯型情報コード読取装置１０Ｂによって既読コードを読み取るという簡易な操作を行えば、既存の処理データをキャンセルすることができるようになる。特に、キャンセル時にも通常の読み取りと同様の対応（コードの読み取り操作）によってキャンセルが可能となるため、特徴的なハンズフリー構成を生かしたキャンセルが可能となる。また、キャンセルしたい処理データを具体的に指定した上でキャンセルが可能となるため、複数の処理データが存在する場合に、不要なデータを確実に選択してキャンセルすることができる。 In the third example related to the “cancel operation”, when the already-read code that has already been read by the portable information code reader 10B is read again by the portable information code reader 10B, the processing unit An erasure process for erasing the processed data of the processed read code is performed. According to this configuration, the user can cancel the existing processing data by performing a simple operation of reading the read code with the portable information code reader 10B. In particular, since cancellation can be performed by the same response (code reading operation) as in normal reading, cancellation using a characteristic hands-free configuration is possible. In addition, since the processing data to be canceled can be specifically designated and cancelled, unnecessary data can be reliably selected and canceled when there are a plurality of processing data.
　また、「キャンセル操作」に関する第４の例では、操作スイッチ４２に対して所定の外部操作が行われつつ当該携帯型情報コード読取装置１０Ｂによって既に読み取られている既読コードが再び当該携帯型情報コード読取装置１０Ｂによって読み取られた場合に、処理された既読コードの処理データを消去する消去処理を行う構成となっている。この構成によれば、複数の処理データが存在する場合に、不要なデータを確実に選択してキャンセルすることができる。また、操作スイッチの操作をキャンセルの条件としているため、キャンセルしたくない処理データが誤ってキャンセルされてしまうことを防ぎ易くなる。 In the fourth example relating to the “cancel operation”, the read code that has been read by the portable information code reader 10B while the predetermined external operation is performed on the operation switch 42 is again the portable information. When it is read by the code reading device 10B, an erasing process for erasing the processed data of the processed read code is performed. According to this configuration, when a plurality of processing data exists, unnecessary data can be reliably selected and canceled. In addition, since the operation of the operation switch is set as a cancellation condition, it is easy to prevent erroneous processing data that is not desired to be canceled.
　［第１４実施形態]
　第１４実施形態に係る携帯型情報コード読取装置は、「所定のキャンセル操作」以外は、第１３実施形態と同様であり、図７６のような流れで読取処理が行われるようになっている。また、図７６の読取処理以外は、第１２実施形態及び第１３実施形態と同一である。 [Fourteenth embodiment]
The portable information code reader according to the fourteenth embodiment is the same as the thirteenth embodiment except for “predetermined cancel operation”, and the reading process is performed in the flow as shown in FIG. Further, the processing is the same as that of the twelfth and thirteenth embodiments except for the reading process of FIG.
　第１４実施形態では、Ｓ２７３で判断対象となる「所定のキャンセル操作」を、「Ｓ２６７で解読された情報コードの撮像画像（Ｓ２６６で撮像された撮像画像（第２撮像画像））における情報コードの向きから、所定角度以上（例えば、９０°以上）回転した向きで当該情報コードが撮像部２３によって撮像される操作」としている。このような構成では、Ｓ２７２にてＮｏに進む場合、「Ｓ２６７で解読された情報コードの撮像画像（Ｓ２６６で撮像された撮像画像（第２撮像画像））における情報コードの向きから、所定角度以上（例えば、９０°以上）回転した向きで当該情報コードが撮像部２３によって撮像される操作」があったと判断される場合には、Ｓ２７３にてＹｅｓに進み、そうでない場合には、Ｓ２７３にてＮｏに進むことになる。なお、ＱＲコード（登録商標）では、Ｓ２６７で解読された情報コードの撮像画像（第２撮像画像）における３つの位置検出パターンＦＰ（図７１）の位置によってその撮像画像（第２撮像画像）での情報コードの姿勢（第１撮像姿勢）を特定することができ、その後に、当該情報コードが撮像部２３によって撮像される操作があった場合にはその撮像画像（第３撮像画像）での３つの位置検出パターンＦＰの位置によってその撮像画像（第３撮像画像）での情報コードの姿勢（第２撮像姿勢）を特定できる。そして、これらの画像を比較することにより、「所定角度以上（例えば、９０°以上）回転した向きで当該情報コードが撮像部２３によって撮像される操作」がなされたか否かを判断することができる。 In the fourteenth embodiment, the “predetermined cancel operation” to be determined in S273 is “the captured image of the information code decrypted in S267 (the captured image captured in S266 (second captured image))”. “Operation in which the information code is imaged by the imaging unit 23 in a direction rotated from a direction by a predetermined angle or more (for example, 90 ° or more)”. In such a configuration, when the process proceeds to No in S272, “at least a predetermined angle from the direction of the information code in the captured image of the information code decoded in S267 (the captured image captured in S266 (second captured image))” If it is determined that there has been an operation in which the information code is imaged by the imaging unit 23 in a rotated direction (for example, 90 ° or more), the process proceeds to Yes in S273. Otherwise, the process proceeds to S273. Proceed to No. In the QR code (registered trademark), the picked-up image (second picked-up image) depends on the positions of the three position detection patterns FP (FIG. 71) in the picked-up image (second picked-up image) of the information code decoded in S267. Can be specified, and if there is an operation for imaging the information code by the imaging unit 23, the captured image (third captured image) The attitude of the information code (second imaging attitude) in the captured image (third captured image) can be specified by the positions of the three position detection patterns FP. Then, by comparing these images, it is possible to determine whether or not “an operation for imaging the information code by the imaging unit 23 in a direction rotated by a predetermined angle or more (for example, 90 ° or more)” has been performed. .
　この構成では、図７６の処理を行う制御回路４０が対応部の一例に相当し、撮像部２３によって得られた撮像画像（Ｓ２６６で得られた第２撮像画像）に含まれる情報コードが所定の第１撮像姿勢であるときに処理部によって処理データ（Ｓ２６７で解読された解読データ）が生成された場合において、その後、撮像部２３によって第１撮像姿勢とは向きが所定角度以上異なる第２撮像姿勢で当該情報コードが読み取られた場合に処理データに対するキャンセル制御（例えば、当該情報コードを解読した解読データのメモリ３５からの削除、或いは、当該情報コードを解読した解読データを削除するコマンドを外部装置へ送信する処理など）を行う構成となっている。 In this configuration, the control circuit 40 that performs the processing of FIG. 76 corresponds to an example of a corresponding unit, and an information code included in a captured image obtained by the imaging unit 23 (second captured image obtained in S266) is a predetermined value. When the processing data (decrypted data decoded in S267) is generated by the processing unit when it is in the first imaging posture, the second imaging in which the orientation differs from the first imaging posture by a predetermined angle or more by the imaging unit 23 thereafter. When the information code is read in a posture, the cancel control for the processing data (for example, the deletion of the decoded data obtained by decoding the information code from the memory 35 or the command for deleting the decoded data obtained by decoding the information code For example, processing to transmit to the apparatus).
　この構成によれば、ユーザは、当該携帯型情報コード読取装置１０Ｂによって情報コードを読み取るという簡易な操作を行えば、既存の処理データをキャンセルすることができるようになる。特に、キャンセル時にも通常の読み取りと同様の対応（コードの読み取り操作）によってキャンセルが可能となるため、特徴的なハンズフリー構成を生かしたキャンセルが可能となる。また、処理部による処理対象の姿勢（第１撮像姿勢）とは異なる第２撮像姿勢で読み取られた場合にキャンセル制御が行われるため、ユーザは、「読み取り姿勢を変える」という簡易な変更でキャンセルが可能となる。 According to this configuration, the user can cancel the existing processing data by performing a simple operation of reading the information code by the portable information code reader 10B. In particular, since cancellation can be performed by the same response (code reading operation) as in normal reading, cancellation using a characteristic hands-free configuration is possible. In addition, since cancel control is performed when the processing unit reads the image in a second imaging posture different from the processing target posture (first imaging posture), the user cancels with a simple change “change the reading posture”. Is possible.
　また、第１４実施形態の思想は、図７６のような読取処理に限定されるものではなく、図７６の、Ｓ２５１～Ｓ２６８のような流れで情報コードが解読される場合に限定されるものではない。例えば、図７７のような順序で情報コードが読み取られる場合も同様に適用できる。 The concept of the fourteenth embodiment is not limited to the reading process as shown in FIG. 76, but is limited to the case where the information code is decoded in the flow of S251 to S268 in FIG. Absent. For example, the present invention can be similarly applied when information codes are read in the order as shown in FIG.
　図７７の順序説明図の例では、Ｓ３０１のように読取装置１０Ｂによって情報コードを読み取らせる操作を行う（Ｓ３０１）。その後、その情報コードの解読データをキャンセルする必要がなければ、作業者は、特別な操作を行う必要はない。一方、Ｓ３０１の動作の後、その情報コードの解読データをキャンセルしたければ、作業者は、Ｓ３０１での読取時からその情報コードを撮像部２３の撮像範囲内に維持したまま、Ｓ３０１での読取時の情報コードの撮像姿勢（第１撮像姿勢）から当該情報コードを９０°以上回転させる（Ｓ３０２）。そして、このように回転させた情報コードを読取装置１０Ｂに読み取らせる（Ｓ３０３）。その後、Ｓ３０４では読取装置１０Ｂにてキャンセルコマンドが実行される（Ｓ３０４）。 In the example of the sequence explanatory diagram of FIG. 77, an operation for reading the information code is performed by the reading device 10B as in S301 (S301). Thereafter, if it is not necessary to cancel the decoded data of the information code, the operator does not need to perform a special operation. On the other hand, if it is desired to cancel the decoded data of the information code after the operation of S301, the operator reads the information code in S301 while maintaining the information code in the imaging range of the imaging unit 23 from the time of reading in S301. The information code is rotated by 90 ° or more from the imaging posture (first imaging posture) of the current information code (S302). Then, the information code thus rotated is read by the reading device 10B (S303). Thereafter, in S304, a cancel command is executed by the reading apparatus 10B (S304).
　図７７のようなキャンセルの流れを想定した読取装置１０Ｂでは、制御回路４０は、情報コードの読み取りが行われた後、その読取時から当該情報コードが撮像部２３の撮像範囲内に維持されたまま、その読取時の情報コードの撮像姿勢（第１撮像姿勢）から９０°以上回転した撮像姿勢（第２撮像姿勢）の画像が得られたか否かを判断する。そして、読取時の情報コードの撮像姿勢（第１撮像姿勢）から９０°以上回転した撮像姿勢（第２撮像姿勢）の画像が得られた場合には、その情報コードの解読データを読取装置１０Ｂから消去する。また、その情報コードの解読データが既に外部装置に送信されている場合には、外部装置に対してその情報コードの解読データの消去を指示するコマンドを送信するようにしてもよい。 In the reading apparatus 10B that assumes the flow of cancellation as shown in FIG. 77, after the information code is read, the control circuit 40 maintains the information code within the imaging range of the imaging unit 23 from the time of reading. It is determined whether or not an image of the imaging posture (second imaging posture) rotated 90 ° or more from the imaging posture (first imaging posture) of the information code at the time of reading is obtained. When an image having an imaging posture (second imaging posture) rotated by 90 ° or more from the imaging posture (first imaging posture) of the information code at the time of reading is obtained, the decoding data of the information code is read by the reading device 10B. Erase from Further, when the decrypted data of the information code has already been transmitted to the external device, a command for instructing the external device to erase the decrypted data of the information code may be transmitted.
　［第１５実施形態]
　第１５実施形態に係る携帯型情報コード読取装置は、「所定のキャンセル操作」以外は、第１３実施形態と同様であり、図７６のような流れで読取処理が行われるようになっている。また、図７６の読取処理以外は、第１２実施形態及び第１３実施形態と同一である。 [Fifteenth embodiment]
The portable information code reader according to the fifteenth embodiment is the same as that of the thirteenth embodiment except for the “predetermined cancel operation”, and the reading process is performed according to the flow shown in FIG. Further, except for the reading process of FIG. 76, this embodiment is the same as the twelfth and thirteenth embodiments.
　第１５実施形態では、Ｓ２７３で判断対象となる「所定のキャンセル操作」を、「処理部によって処理された情報コードを撮像部２３の撮像範囲ＡＲ（図７５）から外し、外してから一定時間内（例えば、上述のキャンセル待ち時間Ｔ２よりも短い所定時間内）に当該情報コードを撮像範囲ＡＲ（図７５）に入り込ませる操作」としている。このような構成では、Ｓ２７２にてＮｏに進む場合、「処理部によって処理された情報コード（Ｓ２６７で解読された情報コード）を撮像部２３の撮像範囲ＡＲ（図７５）から外し、外してから一定時間内に当該情報コードを撮像範囲に入り込ませる操作」があったと判断される場合には、Ｓ２７３にてＹｅｓに進み、そうでない場合には、Ｓ２７３にてＮｏに進むことになる。 In the fifteenth embodiment, the “predetermined cancel operation” to be determined in S273 is “determination of the information code processed by the processing unit from the imaging range AR (FIG. 75) of the imaging unit 23 and within a certain period of time after the removal. “For example, an operation for entering the information code into the imaging range AR (FIG. 75) within a predetermined time shorter than the above-described cancel waiting time T2”. In such a configuration, when the process proceeds to No in S272, “the information code processed by the processing unit (the information code decrypted in S267) is removed from the imaging range AR (FIG. 75) of the imaging unit 23 and removed. If it is determined that there has been an “operation for causing the information code to enter the imaging range within a certain period of time”, the process proceeds to Yes in S273, and if not, the process proceeds to No in S273.
　この構成では、制御回路４０が対応部の一例に相当し、処理部によって処理された情報コード（Ｓ２６７で解読された情報コード）が撮像部２３の撮像範囲ＡＲ（図７５）に存在しなくなり、存在しなくなってから一定時間内に当該情報コードが撮像範囲ＡＲ（図７５）に入り込んだ場合に、処理データ（Ｓ２６７で解読された情報コード）に対するキャンセル制御（例えば、当該情報コードを解読した解読データのメモリ３５からの削除、或いは、当該情報コードを解読した解読データを削除するコマンドを外部装置へ送信する処理など）を行う構成となっている。この構成によれば、ユーザは、処理された情報コードを撮像範囲から一旦外し、一定時間内に再び撮像範囲内に入り込ませるという簡易な操作を行えば、既存の処理データをキャンセルすることができるようになる。特に、キャンセル時にも通常の読み取りと同様の対応（コードの読み取り操作）によってキャンセルが可能となるため、特徴的なハンズフリー構成を生かしたキャンセルが可能となる。 In this configuration, the control circuit 40 corresponds to an example of a corresponding unit, and the information code processed by the processing unit (the information code decoded in S267) does not exist in the imaging range AR (FIG. 75) of the imaging unit 23. When the information code enters the imaging range AR (FIG. 75) within a certain period of time after it no longer exists, cancel control for the processing data (information code decoded in S267) (for example, decoding by decoding the information code) The data is deleted from the memory 35, or a process for transmitting a command for deleting the decoded data obtained by decoding the information code to an external device). According to this configuration, the user can cancel the existing processing data by performing a simple operation of once removing the processed information code from the imaging range and reentering the imaging range within a predetermined time. It becomes like this. In particular, since cancellation can be performed by the same response (code reading operation) as in normal reading, cancellation using a characteristic hands-free configuration is possible.
　また、第１５実施形態の思想は、図７６のような読取処理に限定されるものではなく、図７６の、Ｓ２５１～Ｓ２６８のような流れで情報コードが解読される場合に限定されるものではない。例えば、図７８のような順序で情報コードが読み取られる場合も同様に適用できる。 The idea of the fifteenth embodiment is not limited to the reading process as shown in FIG. 76, but is limited to the case where the information code is decoded in the flow of S251 to S268 in FIG. Absent. For example, the present invention can be similarly applied when information codes are read in the order as shown in FIG.
　図７８の順序説明図の例では、まず作業者がＳ４０１のように読取装置１０Ｂによって情報コードを読み取らせる操作を行う（Ｓ３０１）。その後、その情報コードの解読データをキャンセルする必要がなければ、作業者は、特別な操作を行う必要はない。一方、Ｓ４０１の動作の後、その情報コードの解読データをキャンセルしたければ、作業者は、情報コードを読取装置の読取視野（撮像部２３による撮像範囲）から外した後、再び読取視野（撮像部２３による撮像範囲）内に戻す操作を行い（Ｓ４０２）、その情報コードを読取装置１０Ｂに読み取らせればよい。このように、撮像範囲から情報コードが外され、その後に情報コードが撮像範囲内に入り込む場合、読取装置１０Ｂでは、撮像範囲から外れた時間が一定時間内であればＳ４０１で読み取られた情報コードの解読データのキャンセルを実行する。一方、撮像範囲から外れた時間が一定時間を超えていれば、Ｓ４０３で読み取られた情報コードの解読データを新規データとしてメモリ３５に記憶する。 In the example of the sequence explanatory diagram of FIG. 78, first, the operator performs an operation of reading the information code by the reading device 10B as in S401 (S301). Thereafter, if it is not necessary to cancel the decoded data of the information code, the operator does not need to perform a special operation. On the other hand, if it is desired to cancel the decoded data of the information code after the operation of S401, the operator removes the information code from the reading field of view (imaging range by the imaging unit 23) and then reads the reading field (imaging again). It is only necessary to perform an operation of returning the information code to within the imaging range by the unit 23 (S402) and cause the reading device 10B to read the information code. As described above, when the information code is removed from the imaging range, and then the information code enters the imaging range, the reader 10B reads the information code read in S401 if the time outside the imaging range is within a predetermined time. Cancel the decrypted data. On the other hand, if the time outside the imaging range exceeds a certain time, the decoded data of the information code read in S403 is stored in the memory 35 as new data.
　図７８のようなキャンセルの流れを想定した読取装置１０Ｂでは、制御回路４０は、情報コードの読み取りが行われた後、その情報コードが撮像部２３の撮像範囲から外され、外されてから一定時間内に当該情報コードを再び撮像部２３の撮像範囲に入り込んだか否かを判断する。そして、読み取られた情報コードが撮像部２３の撮像範囲から外され、外されてから一定時間内に当該情報コードを再び撮像部２３の撮像範囲に入り込んだ場合には、その情報コードの解読データを読取装置１０Ｂから消去する。また、その情報コードの解読データが既に外部装置に送信されている場合には、外部装置に対してその情報コードの解読データの消去を指示するコマンドを送信するようにしてもよい。 In the reading apparatus 10B that assumes the flow of cancellation as shown in FIG. 78, after the information code is read, the control circuit 40 removes the information code from the imaging range of the imaging unit 23 and is constant after being removed. It is determined whether or not the information code has entered the imaging range of the imaging unit 23 again in time. When the read information code is removed from the imaging range of the imaging unit 23 and the information code is reentered in the imaging range of the imaging unit 23 within a certain time after being removed, the decoded data of the information code Are deleted from the reading device 10B. Further, when the decrypted data of the information code has already been transmitted to the external device, a command for instructing the external device to erase the decrypted data of the information code may be transmitted.
　［第１６実施形態]
　第１６実施形態に係る携帯型情報コード読取装置は、「所定のキャンセル操作」以外は、第１３実施形態と同様であり、図７６のような流れで読取処理が行われるようになっている。また、図７６の読取処理以外は、第１２実施形態及び第１３実施形態と同一である。 [Sixteenth embodiment]
The portable information code reader according to the sixteenth embodiment is the same as that of the thirteenth embodiment except for the “predetermined cancel operation”, and the reading process is performed according to the flow shown in FIG. Further, except for the reading process of FIG. 76, this embodiment is the same as the twelfth and thirteenth embodiments.
　第１６実施形態では、Ｓ２７３で判断対象となる「所定のキャンセル操作」を、「撮像部によって複数の情報コードが同時に撮像される操作」としている。このような構成では、Ｓ２７２にてＮｏに進む場合、「撮像部によって複数の情報コードが同時に撮像される操作」があったと判断される場合には、Ｓ２７３にてＹｅｓに進み、そうでない場合には、Ｓ２７３にてＮｏに進むことになる。 In the sixteenth embodiment, the “predetermined cancel operation” to be determined in S273 is “an operation in which a plurality of information codes are simultaneously imaged by the imaging unit”. In such a configuration, when the process proceeds to No in S272, if it is determined that there has been an “operation for simultaneously imaging a plurality of information codes by the imaging unit”, the process proceeds to Yes in S273, and otherwise Will proceed to No in S273.
　この構成では、図７６の処理を行う制御回路４０が対応部の一例に相当し、処理部によって処理データ（Ｓ２６７で得られる解読データ）が生成された後、撮像部２３によって複数の情報コードが同時に撮像された場合に、処理データ（Ｓ２６７で得られる解読データ）に対するキャンセル制御を行う構成となっている。この構成によれば、ユーザは、当該携帯型情報コード読取装置１０Ｂによって複数の情報コードを読み取るという簡易な操作を行えば、既存の処理データをキャンセルすることができるようになる。特に、キャンセル時にも通常の読み取りと同様の対応（コードの読み取り操作）によってキャンセルが可能となるため、特徴的なハンズフリー構成を生かしたキャンセルが可能となる。更に、複数の情報コードを同時に撮像するという簡易な対応によって、キャンセル時の読み取りを通常の読み取りと区別することができる。 In this configuration, the control circuit 40 that performs the process of FIG. 76 corresponds to an example of a corresponding unit. After the processing data (decoded data obtained in S267) is generated by the processing unit, the imaging unit 23 generates a plurality of information codes. When the images are simultaneously captured, the cancel control is performed on the processing data (decoded data obtained in S267). According to this configuration, the user can cancel the existing processing data by performing a simple operation of reading a plurality of information codes by the portable information code reader 10B. In particular, since cancellation can be performed by the same response (code reading operation) as in normal reading, cancellation using a characteristic hands-free configuration is possible. Furthermore, reading at the time of cancellation can be distinguished from normal reading by a simple response of simultaneously imaging a plurality of information codes.
　また、上述の例では、複数の情報コードが同時に撮像された場合に、直近の解読データをキャンセルする例を示したが、複数の情報コードが予め定められた所定の配列で撮像されたことを条件として、処理データ（Ｓ２６７で解読された解読データ）に対するキャンセル制御を行う構成であってもよい。この構成では、複数の情報コードが予め定められた所定の配列で撮像されたことをキャンセルの条件としているため、複数の情報コードが所定の配列以外で撮像されてもキャンセルされないことになる。従って、通常の読み取りと同様の対応（コードの読み取り操作）によって容易にキャンセルすることを可能としつつ、キャンセルしたくない処理データが誤ってキャンセルされてしまうことをより確実に防ぎ易くなる。 In the above example, when a plurality of information codes are imaged simultaneously, the example of canceling the latest decoded data is shown. However, it is assumed that a plurality of information codes are imaged in a predetermined arrangement. As a condition, it may be configured to perform cancel control on the processing data (decrypted data decrypted in S267). In this configuration, since a condition for cancellation is that a plurality of information codes are imaged in a predetermined arrangement, the plurality of information codes are not canceled even if the information codes are imaged outside the predetermined arrangement. Accordingly, it is possible to easily cancel the processing data that the user does not want to cancel, while making it possible to easily cancel it by the same action (code reading operation) as in normal reading.
　また、上述のいずれの例でも、複数の情報コードが同時に撮像された場合に、直近の解読データをキャンセルする例を示したが、処理部によって処理データが生成された後、当該携帯型情報コード読取装置によって複数の情報コードが同時に撮像され且つそれら複数の情報コードが読み取られた場合に、それら複数の情報コードに対応する処理データに対するキャンセル制御を行う構成であってもよい。この構成によれば、更に、キャンセルを希望する複数の処理データを確実に指定して一括してキャンセルすることができるため、利便性が非常に高くなる。 In any of the above examples, when a plurality of information codes are simultaneously imaged, an example of canceling the latest decoded data has been shown. However, after the processing data is generated by the processing unit, the portable information code The configuration may be such that when a plurality of information codes are simultaneously imaged by the reading device and the plurality of information codes are read, cancel control is performed on the processing data corresponding to the plurality of information codes. According to this configuration, it is possible to reliably specify a plurality of processing data desired to be canceled and cancel them all at once, so that the convenience is very high.
　また、第１６実施形態のいずれの思想も、図７６のような読取処理に限定されるものではなく、図７６の、Ｓ２５１～Ｓ２６８のような流れで情報コードが解読される場合に限定されるものではない。例えば、図７９のような順序で情報コードが読み取られる場合も同様に適用できる。 Further, any idea of the sixteenth embodiment is not limited to the reading process as shown in FIG. 76, but is limited to the case where the information code is decoded in the flow like S251 to S268 in FIG. It is not a thing. For example, the present invention can be similarly applied when information codes are read in the order as shown in FIG.
　図７９では、既に解読されたデータが読取装置１０Ｂに蓄積されている場合のキャンセル動作の順序を概略的に説明しており、この例では、蓄積された解読データをキャンセルする場合に、作業者は、複数の情報コードを撮像部２３の撮像範囲内に配置し（Ｓ５０１）、それら複数の情報コードを読取装置１０Ｂに読み取らせる（Ｓ５０２）。その後、読取装置１０Ｂにてキャンセルコマンドが実行される（Ｓ５０３）。 FIG. 79 schematically illustrates the order of the cancel operation in the case where already decoded data is stored in the reader 10B. In this example, when canceling the stored decoded data, the operator Arranges a plurality of information codes within the imaging range of the imaging unit 23 (S501), and causes the reader 10B to read the plurality of information codes (S502). Thereafter, a cancel command is executed in the reading device 10B (S503).
　図７９のようなキャンセルの流れを想定した読取装置１０Ｂでは、制御回路４０は、情報コードの読み取りが行われた後、複数の情報コードの画像が得られたか否かを判断する。そして、複数の情報コードの画像が得られた場合には、直近の情報コードの解読データ又はそれら複数の情報コードの解読データを読取装置１０Ｂから消去する。また、更に条件を付加し、制御回路４０は、情報コードの読み取りが行われた後、複数の情報コードの画像が所定の配列で得られたか否かを判断し、複数の情報コードの画像が所定の配列で得られた場合に、直近の情報コードの解読データ又はそれら複数の情報コードの解読データを読取装置１０Ｂから消去するようにしてもよい。 In the reading apparatus 10B that assumes the flow of cancellation as shown in FIG. 79, the control circuit 40 determines whether or not images of a plurality of information codes are obtained after the information code is read. When images of a plurality of information codes are obtained, the latest decoded data of the information code or the decoded data of the plurality of information codes is erased from the reading device 10B. Further, a condition is added, and after the information code is read, the control circuit 40 determines whether or not a plurality of information code images are obtained in a predetermined arrangement. When the data is obtained in a predetermined arrangement, the decoded data of the latest information code or the decoded data of the plurality of information codes may be erased from the reading device 10B.
　［第１２～第１６実施形態に対する他の実施形態]
　本発明は上記記述及び図面によって説明した実施形態に限定されるものではなく、例えば次のような実施形態も本発明の技術的範囲に含まれる。 [Other Embodiments for the 12th to 16th Embodiments]
The present invention is not limited to the embodiments described with reference to the above description and drawings. For example, the following embodiments are also included in the technical scope of the present invention.
　本実施形態では、処理部の一例として、制御回路４０を例示し、撮像部２３によって撮像された情報コード１００の画像の処理として当該情報コードのコード画像を解読する構成を例示したが、撮像部２３によって撮像された情報コード１００の画像の処理はこれに限られない。例えば、撮像部２３によって撮像された情報コード１００の画像データを外部装置ＨＳＴに送信するような処理であってもよい。この場合、外部装置ＨＳＴ（ホスト装置等）にて当該画像データを解読すればよい。 In this embodiment, the control circuit 40 is illustrated as an example of the processing unit, and the configuration of decoding the code image of the information code as the processing of the image of the information code 100 captured by the imaging unit 23 is illustrated. The processing of the image of the information code 100 captured by the image 23 is not limited to this. For example, the processing may be such that the image data of the information code 100 imaged by the imaging unit 23 is transmitted to the external device HST. In this case, the image data may be decoded by an external device HST (host device or the like).
　上記実施形態では、ケース１２を身体に装着し、読取装置１０Ｂが身体に装着されない外部装置と通信可能な例を示したが、身体に装着される外部装置と通信可能となっていてもよい。 In the above embodiment, the case 12 is attached to the body, and the reader 10B can communicate with an external device that is not attached to the body. However, the reader 12B may be communicable with the external device attached to the body.
　上記実施形態では、両耳に掛けられる構成の身体装着部を例示したが、身体装着部は、いずれか一方の耳に掛けられる構成であってもよい。 In the above-described embodiment, the body wearing part configured to be hung on both ears is exemplified, but the body wearing part may be configured to be hung on either ear.
　上記実施形態では、使用者の耳、指、腕などに取り付けられる身体装着部を例示したが、身体装着部は、使用者の頭に取り付けられるバンド部材として構成されていてもよい。例えば、ハチマキ状、ヘアバンド状、カチューシャ状などの構造のバンド部材として身体装着部が構成されていてもよい。この構成では、装置本体１１が頭に取り付けられるため、顔の動きと装置本体１１の全体が連動することになり、使用者の顔の動きに合わせて読み取る方向を定めやすくなる。 In the above embodiment, the body wearing part attached to the user's ear, finger, arm or the like is exemplified, but the body wearing part may be configured as a band member attached to the user's head. For example, the body wearing part may be configured as a band member having a structure such as a bee shape, a hair band shape, or a headband shape. In this configuration, since the apparatus main body 11 is attached to the head, the movement of the face and the entire apparatus main body 11 are interlocked, and the reading direction can be easily determined according to the movement of the user's face.
　上記実施形態では、使用者の耳、指、腕、頭などに掛けられる構成或いは巻かれる構成の身体装着部を有する取付部材を例示したが、取付部材は、使用者の装着物（メガネ、ヘルメット、手袋、服）などに取り付けられるアタッチメントとして構成されていてもよい。 In the above-described embodiment, the attachment member having the body attachment portion configured to be hung or wound on the user's ear, finger, arm, head, etc. has been exemplified. , Gloves, clothes) or the like.
　第１２～第１６実施形態では、キャンセル制御の一例として、直前の処理データ（解読データ）を消去する例などを示したが、このような例に限られない。例えば、上述の「所定のキャンセル操作」があった場合に、読取装置１０Ｂに蓄積されている過去の処理データ（解読データ）を一括して消去するようにしてもよく、読取装置１０Ｂから外部装置に送信された過去の処理データ（解読データ）を一括して消去するように当該外部装置にコマンドを発するようにしてもよい。 In the twelfth to sixteenth embodiments, as an example of cancel control, an example of erasing the immediately previous processing data (decoded data) is shown, but the present invention is not limited to such an example. For example, when the above-mentioned “predetermined cancel operation” is performed, the past processing data (decoded data) stored in the reading device 10B may be erased all at once. A command may be issued to the external device so as to erase the past processing data (decoded data) transmitted to.
　第１５実施形態では、例えば図７６のＳ２７０で設定されるキャンセル待ち時間Ｔ２内において、一定時間内に情報コード（Ｓ２６７で解読を行った情報コード）を読取視野（撮像範囲ＡＲ（図７５））から外して戻し、再び情報コードを読み取らせる動作が少なくとも１回なされれば、キャンセルコマンドとして認識され、このような場合に、その情報コード（Ｓ２６７で解読を行った情報コード）の解読データを削除するようなキャンセル制御を行う例を示したが、このような例に限られない。例えば、このような操作をｎ回繰り返された場合に、最新の解読データからｎ個前の解読データをキャンセルするようにしてもよい。或いは、一定時間内に情報コードを読取視野から外して戻し、その後に、視野内に保持したままの状態で当該情報コードがｎ回読み取られた場合に、最新の解読データからｎ個前の解読データをキャンセルするようにしてもよい。 In the fifteenth embodiment, for example, within the cancellation waiting time T2 set in S270 of FIG. 76, the information code (information code decoded in S267) is read within a certain time (viewing range AR (FIG. 75)). If the operation for reading the information code again is performed at least once, it is recognized as a cancel command. In such a case, the decrypted data of the information code (the information code decrypted in S267) is deleted. Although the example which performs such cancellation control was shown, it is not restricted to such an example. For example, when such an operation is repeated n times, the nth previous decoded data may be canceled from the latest decoded data. Alternatively, if the information code is removed from the reading field within a certain time and returned, and then the information code is read n times while held in the field of view, the nth previous decoding data is decoded. You may make it cancel data.
　また、第１３実施形態で説明した「所定のキャンセル操作」の第２の例では、「操作スイッチ４２に対する所定の押圧操作」がなされたときにＳ２７３にてＹｅｓに進み、直近のＳ２６７で解読された解読データを消去する例を示したが、このような例に限られない。例えば、操作スイッチ４２の押圧回数によって消去対象とする解読データを定めるようにしてもよい。例えば、操作スイッチ４２の押圧操作がｎ回繰り返された場合に、最新の解読データからｎ個前の解読データをキャンセルするようにしてもよい。 In the second example of the “predetermined cancel operation” described in the thirteenth embodiment, when “predetermined pressing operation on the operation switch 42” is performed, the process proceeds to Yes in S273, and is decoded in the latest S267. Although the example of deleting the decrypted data has been shown, the present invention is not limited to such an example. For example, the decoding data to be erased may be determined by the number of times the operation switch 42 is pressed. For example, when the pressing operation of the operation switch 42 is repeated n times, the n-th previous decoded data may be canceled from the latest decoded data.
　なお、上述したいずれの「所定のキャンセル操作」の例も併用することができ、携帯型情報コード読取装置１０Ｂに対する所定の指示操作として、複数種類の指示操作を定義しておき、指示操作の種類に対応付けてキャンセルコマンド（直近の解読データの消去、ｎ個前のキャンセルデータの消去、蓄積された解読データの一括消去など）を定めておいてもよい。そして、携帯型情報コード読取装置１０Ｂに対してなされた指示操作の種類に応じていずれかのキャンセルコマンド（例えば、直近の解読データの消去、ｎ個前のキャンセルデータの消去、蓄積された解読データの一括消去のいずれか）を実行するようにしてもよい。 Any of the examples of the “predetermined cancel operation” described above can be used together, and a plurality of types of instruction operations are defined as predetermined instruction operations for the portable information code reader 10B. A cancel command (deletion of the latest decrypted data, erase of the nth previous cancel data, batch erase of the stored decrypted data, etc.) may be determined in association with. Depending on the type of instruction operation performed on the portable information code reader 10B, one of the cancel commands (for example, deletion of the latest decoded data, deletion of the nth previous cancel data, accumulated decoded data) Any one of the above-mentioned batch erasure may be executed.
　１…読取システム
　１０…携帯型情報コード読取装置
　１０Ａ…携帯型情報コード読取装置
　１０Ｂ…携帯型情報コード読取装置
　１２，３１２…ケース
　１４…読取口
　１８…支持部
　２１…照明光源（光源）
　２３…受光センサ（撮像部）
　３５…メモリ（位置データ記憶部、設定データ記憶部）
　４０…制御回路（処理部、音声案内部、処理部、判定部、検出部、選択部、送信制御部、受信部、設定部、対応部、解読部設定部、対応部、解読部）
　４２…操作スイッチ
　４４…発音部（報知部）
　４６…センサ部
　４８…通信部（送信制御部、受信部）
　５０…マーカ光照射部
　６０，３６０…取付部
　６１…耳挿入部
　６１ａ…導出孔（導出部）
　６２…耳掛け部
　７１…第１固定部
　７２…第２固定部
　８０，３８０…ケーブル
　１００…情報コード
　５１２，７１２，８１２…ケース
　５１２ａ，７１２ａ，８１２ａ，１０１２ａ…対向壁部（被取付部）
　５１９…接続ケーブル
　５５０，７５０，８５０…ガイド部
　５５１…第１ケース側連結部（ケース側連結部、一方側磁石）
　５５２…第２ケース側連結部（ケース側連結部、一方側磁石）
　５５３…第１取付部材側連結部（取付部材側連結部、磁性体）
　５５４…第２取付部材側連結部（取付部材側連結部、磁性体）
　５６０，７６０，８６０，９６０，…取付部材
　５６２…身体装着部（装着部）
　５６４…変位調整部
　５６５，１０６５…ベース部
　５６６…取付部
　９６２…バンド部材（身体装着部）
　７５１…第１ケース側連結部（ケース側連結部、一方側シート材）
　７５２…第２ケース側連結部（ケース側連結部、一方側シート材）
　７５３…第１取付部材側連結部（取付部材側連結部、他方側シート材）
　７５４…第２取付部材側連結部（取付部材側連結部、他方側シート材）
　７５１…第１ケース側連結部（ケース側連結部、一方側嵌合部）
　７５２…第２ケース側連結部（ケース側連結部、一方側嵌合部）
　７５３…第１取付部材側連結部（取付部材側連結部、被嵌合部）
　７５４…第２取付部材側連結部（取付部材側連結部、被嵌合部）
　１１２０…回転機構
　Ｃ１…回転軸
　ＦＰ…位置検出パターン（特徴パターン）
　Ｂｓ…暗色バー（特徴パターン）
　Ｗｓ…明色バー（特徴パターン）
　Ｇ…中心軸 DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 ... Reading system 10 ... Portable information code reader 10A ... Portable information code reader 10B ... Portable information code reader 12, 312 ... Case 14 ... Reading port 18 ... Supporting part 21 ... Illumination light source (light source)
23. Light receiving sensor (imaging unit)
35. Memory (position data storage unit, setting data storage unit)
40... Control circuit (processing section, voice guidance section, processing section, determination section, detection section, selection section, transmission control section, reception section, setting section, corresponding section, decoding section setting section, corresponding section, decoding section)
42 ... Operation switch 44 ... Sound generation part (notification part)
46 ... sensor unit 48 ... communication unit (transmission control unit, reception unit)
DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 50 ... Marker light irradiation part 60, 360 ... Attachment part 61 ... Ear insertion part 61a ... Derivation hole (derivation | leading-out part)
62 ... Ear hook 71 ... First fixing part 72 ... Second fixing part 80, 380 ... Cable 100 ... Information code 512, 712, 812 ... Case 512a, 712a, 812a, 1012a ... Opposing wall (attached part)
519 ... Connection cable 550, 750, 850 ... Guide portion 551 ... First case side connecting portion (case side connecting portion, one side magnet)
552 ... 2nd case side connection part (case side connection part, one side magnet)
553 ... 1st attachment member side connection part (attachment member side connection part, magnetic body)
554 ... 2nd attachment member side connection part (attachment member side connection part, magnetic body)
560, 760, 860, 960, ... attachment member 562 ... body attachment part (attachment part)
564 ... Displacement adjustment part 565, 1065 ... Base part 566 ... Mounting part 962 ... Band member (body mounting part)
751 ... 1st case side connection part (case side connection part, one side sheet material)
752 ... 2nd case side connection part (case side connection part, one side sheet material)
753 ... 1st attachment member side connection part (attachment member side connection part, other side sheet material)
754 ... 2nd attachment member side connection part (attachment member side connection part, other side sheet material)
751 ... 1st case side connection part (case side connection part, one side fitting part)
752 ... 2nd case side connection part (case side connection part, one side fitting part)
753 ... 1st attachment member side connection part (attachment member side connection part, fitting part)
754 ... 2nd attachment member side connection part (attachment member side connection part, fitting part)
DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1120 ... Rotation mechanism C1 ... Rotation axis FP ... Position detection pattern (characteristic pattern)
Bs ... Dark bar (characteristic pattern)
Ws ... Light color bar (characteristic pattern)
G ... Center axis

Claims (101)

  1. 　情報コードを撮像する撮像部と、
    　前記撮像部によって撮像された前記情報コードの画像を処理する処理部と、
    　前記撮像部及び前記処理部を保持するケースと、
    　前記ケースとは別体として設けられ、使用者の顔が向く側を撮像する構成で前記撮像部を使用者に取り付ける取付部と、
    を備えたことを特徴とする携帯型情報コード読取装置。     An imaging unit for imaging the information code;
    A processing unit that processes an image of the information code imaged by the imaging unit;
    A case for holding the imaging unit and the processing unit;
    An attachment part that is provided as a separate body from the case and attaches the imaging unit to the user in a configuration that images the side of the user facing the face,
    A portable information code reading device comprising:
  2. 　情報コードを撮像する撮像部と、
    　前記撮像部によって撮像された前記情報コードの画像を処理する処理部と、
    　前記撮像部及び前記処理部を保持するケースと、
    　前記ケースと一体的又は前記ケースとは別体として設けられ、前記ケースを、少なくとも使用者のいずれか一方の耳に取り付ける取付部と、
    を備えたことを特徴とする携帯型情報コード読取装置。     An imaging unit for imaging the information code;
    A processing unit that processes an image of the information code imaged by the imaging unit;
    A case for holding the imaging unit and the processing unit;
    An attachment portion that is provided integrally with the case or as a separate body, and attaches the case to at least one ear of a user;
    A portable information code reading device comprising:
  3. 　前記取付部は、前記ケースを、少なくとも使用者のいずれか一方の耳に取り付ける構成であることを特徴とする請求項１に記載の携帯型情報コード読取装置。 2. The portable information code reader according to claim 1, wherein the attachment portion is configured to attach the case to at least one ear of a user.
  4. 　前記取付部は、前記使用者の人体に掛けられる構成であることを特徴とする請求項１に記載の携帯型情報コード読取装置。 2. The portable information code reader according to claim 1, wherein the attachment portion is configured to be hung on the user's human body.
  5. 　前記ケースは、前記情報コードからの光を導入可能な読取口を備えており、
    　前記取付部は、前記ケースが前記使用者の顔の横位置に配置され且つ前記読取口が前記使用者の前側を向く構成で当該ケースを前記使用者の耳に取り付けることを特徴とする請求項２から請求項４のいずれか一項に記載の携帯型情報コード読取装置。     The case includes a reading port through which light from the information code can be introduced,
    The mounting part is configured to attach the case to the user's ear in a configuration in which the case is arranged in a lateral position of the user's face and the reading port faces the front side of the user. The portable information code reader according to any one of claims 2 to 4.
  6. 　前記ケースは、前記取付部の位置から所定方向に延びる延出部を備え、且つ前記延出部における前記取付部とは反対側の端部寄りに前記読取口が設けられており、
    　前記取付部は、前記延出部が前記使用者の耳から少なくとも前側に延びる構成で前記ケースを前記使用者の耳に取り付けることを特徴とする請求項５に記載の携帯型情報コード読取装置。     The case includes an extension portion extending in a predetermined direction from the position of the attachment portion, and the reading port is provided near an end portion of the extension portion opposite to the attachment portion,
    6. The portable information code reader according to claim 5, wherein the attachment portion attaches the case to the user's ear so that the extension portion extends at least forward from the user's ear.
  7. 　前記取付部は、前記使用者の耳の穴に挿入される耳挿入部を有することを特徴とする請求項２から請求項６のいずれか一項に記載の携帯型情報コード読取装置。 The portable information code reader according to any one of claims 2 to 6, wherein the attachment portion includes an ear insertion portion that is inserted into an ear hole of the user.
  8. 　前記取付部は、前記使用者の耳に掛けられる耳掛け部を有することを特徴とする請求項２から請求項７のいずれか一項に記載の携帯型情報コード読取装置。 The portable information code reading device according to any one of claims 2 to 7, wherein the attachment portion includes an ear hook portion that is hung on the user's ear.
  9. 　前記耳掛け部は、前記ケースの一部又は前記ケースに連結された連結部に対して着脱可能とされており、
    　前記ケースの一部又は前記ケースに連結された連結部には、前記使用者の左耳に前記耳掛け部を取り付ける場合に前記耳掛け部が固定されるべき第１固定部と、前記使用者の右耳に前記耳掛け部を取り付ける場合に前記耳掛け部が固定されるべき第２固定部とが形成されていることを特徴とする請求項８に記載の携帯型情報コード読取装置。     The ear hook is detachable from a part of the case or a connecting part connected to the case,
    A first fixing part to which the ear hook part is to be fixed when the ear hook part is attached to the left ear of the user, and a part of the case or a connecting part connected to the case; The portable information code reader according to claim 8, wherein a second fixing portion to which the ear hooking portion is to be fixed when the ear hooking portion is attached to the right ear is formed.
  10. 　前記耳掛け部は、前記ケースの一部又は前記ケースに連結された連結部に対して変位可能に設けられていることを特徴とする請求項８に記載の携帯型情報コード読取装置。 The portable information code reading device according to claim 8, wherein the ear hooking portion is provided so as to be displaceable with respect to a part of the case or a connecting portion connected to the case.
  11. 　前記ケースは、前記情報コードからの光を導入可能な読取口を備えており、
    　前記取付部は、前記ケースが前記使用者の左耳側に取り付けられる場合でも、前記ケースが前記使用者の右耳側に取り付けられる場合でも、前記読取口が前記使用者の前側を向く構成で前記ケースを前記使用者の耳に取り付け可能とされていることを特徴とする請求項１から請求項１０のいずれか一項に記載の携帯型情報コード読取装置。     The case includes a reading port through which light from the information code can be introduced,
    Even if the case is attached to the user's left ear side or the case is attached to the user's right ear side, the attachment portion has a configuration in which the reading port faces the front side of the user. The portable information code reader according to any one of claims 1 to 10, wherein the case is attachable to the user's ear.
  12. 　照明光を照射する照明光源及びマーカ光を照射するマーカ光照射部を有し、
    　前記取付部は、前記ケースが前記使用者の左耳側に取り付けられる場合でも、前記ケースが前記使用者の右耳側に取り付けられる場合でも、前記照明光源からの照射光及び前記マーカ光照射部からのマーカ光が前記使用者の前側に照射される構成で前記ケースを前記使用者の耳に取り付け可能とされていることを特徴とする請求項１から請求項１１のいずれか一項に記載の携帯型情報コード読取装置。     Having an illumination light source for illuminating illumination light and a marker light irradiator for irradiating marker light;
    Even if the case is attached to the left ear side of the user or the case is attached to the right ear side of the user, the attachment portion is irradiated with light from the illumination light source and the marker light irradiation portion. 12. The case according to claim 1, wherein the case can be attached to the ear of the user in a configuration in which the marker light from the front is irradiated on the front side of the user. Portable information code reader.
  13. 　前記ケースの内部又は外部には、センサ部が設けられており、
    　前記処理部又は前記ケースの外部に設けられた外部処理部は、少なくとも前記センサ部で所定の検出結果が得られたことを条件として前記情報コードの解読を行うことを特徴とする請求項１から請求項１２のいずれか一項に記載の携帯型情報コード読取装置。     A sensor part is provided inside or outside the case,
    The external processing unit provided outside the processing unit or the case decodes the information code on condition that at least a predetermined detection result is obtained by the sensor unit. The portable information code reader according to claim 12.
  14. 　前記センサ部は、前記取付部が前記使用者の耳に取り付けられた所定状態を検知可能とされており、
    　前記処理部又は前記ケースの外部に設けられた外部処理部は、前記センサ部により前記所定状態が検知されたことを条件として、前記情報コードの解読を行うことを特徴とする請求項１３に記載の携帯型情報コード読取装置。     The sensor part is capable of detecting a predetermined state in which the attachment part is attached to the user's ear,
    14. The information processing code according to claim 13, wherein an external processing unit provided outside the processing unit or the case decodes the information code on condition that the predetermined state is detected by the sensor unit. Portable information code reader.
  15. 　前記センサ部は、前記撮像部を有し、
    　前記撮像部は、前記ケースの外部の画像を連続的又は断続的に撮像可能とされており、
    　前記処理部又は前記ケースの外部に設けられた外部処理部は、前記撮像部によって撮像された画像が所定状態となったことを条件として、その条件成立後に前記情報コードを解読することを特徴とする請求項１３に記載の携帯型情報コード読取装置。     The sensor unit includes the imaging unit,
    The imaging unit is capable of continuously or intermittently capturing images outside the case,
    The external processing unit provided outside the processing unit or the case is characterized in that the information code is decoded after the condition is satisfied on condition that an image captured by the imaging unit is in a predetermined state. The portable information code reader according to claim 13.
  16. 　照明光を照射する照明光源及びマーカ光を照射するマーカ光照射部の少なくともいずれ
    かと、
    　前記センサ部で所定の開始条件が成立したことを条件として、前記照明光源及び前記マーカ光照射部の少なくともいずれかを動作させ、前記照明光及び前記マーカ光の少なくともいずれかの照射を開始する照射制御部と、
    を有することを特徴とする請求項１３から請求項１５のいずれか一項に記載の携帯型情報
    コード読取装置。     At least one of an illumination light source that emits illumination light and a marker light irradiation unit that emits marker light;
    Irradiation that starts at least one of the illumination light and the marker light by operating at least one of the illumination light source and the marker light irradiation unit on condition that a predetermined start condition is satisfied in the sensor unit A control unit;
    The portable information code reader according to claim 13, further comprising:
  17. 　前記ケースの外側に設けられた外部装置と通信を行う通信部を備え、前記通信部により前記外部装置への情報送信又は前記外部装置からの情報受信が可能とされていることを特徴とする請求項１から請求項１６のいずれか一項に記載の携帯型情報コード読取装置。 A communication unit that communicates with an external device provided outside the case, wherein the communication unit is capable of transmitting information to the external device or receiving information from the external device. The portable information code reader according to any one of claims 1 to 16.
  18. 　前記ケース内又は前記ケースに取り付けられる部分には、少なくとも前記処理部又は前記ケースの外部に設けられた外部処理部での処理結果を報知する報知部が設けられていることを特徴とする請求項１から請求項１７のいずれか一項に記載の携帯型情報コード読取装置。 The in-case or a portion attached to the case is provided with a notifying unit for notifying at least the processing unit or a processing result in an external processing unit provided outside the case. The portable information code reader according to any one of claims 1 to 17.
  19. 　前記取付部は、前記使用者の耳の穴に挿入される耳挿入部を有し、
    　前記耳挿入部には、音声を発する発音部、又は音声を発する発音部からの音を導出する導出部が設けられていることを特徴とする請求項１から請求項１８のいずれか一項に記載の携帯型情報コード読取装置。     The mounting portion has an ear insertion portion to be inserted into the user's ear hole,
    19. The ear insertion unit is provided with a sound generation unit that emits sound or a derivation unit that derives sound from the sound generation unit that emits sound, according to any one of claims 1 to 18. The portable information code reader according to claim.
  20. 　前記処理部又は前記ケースの外部に設けられた外部処理部が前記情報コードを解読して得られた解読情報に基づき、当該解読情報の解読後に対応すべき情報を音声案内する音声案内部を有することを特徴とする請求項１から請求項１９のいずれか一項に記載の携帯型情報コード読取装置。 Based on the decoding information obtained by decoding the information code by the processing unit or an external processing unit provided outside the case, it has a voice guidance unit that voice-guides information to be dealt with after decoding the decoding information The portable information code reading device according to any one of claims 1 to 19, wherein the portable information code reading device is a portable information code reading device.
  21. 　前記ケースに保持されると共に前記ケースの外部に設けられた外部装置に電気的に接続されるケーブルを備えており、
    　前記ケースは、長手状に構成され、当該ケースの長手方向一方寄りに前記取付部が設けられ、前記ケースの長手方向一方側において当該ケースの短手方向一方側から前記ケーブルが前記ケース外に引き出されていることを特徴とする請求項１から請求項２０のいずれか一項に記載の携帯型情報コード読取装置。     A cable that is held by the case and electrically connected to an external device provided outside the case;
    The case is configured in a longitudinal shape, the attachment portion is provided on one side in the longitudinal direction of the case, and the cable is pulled out of the case from one side in the short direction of the case on one side in the longitudinal direction of the case. The portable information code reader according to any one of claims 1 to 20, wherein the portable information code reader is provided.
  22. 　前記ケースに固定されると共に前記ケースから引き出され、且つ前記ケースの外部に設けられた外部装置に電気的に接続されるケーブルを備えており、
    　前記取付部は、前記ケースの一方の壁部側に設けられ、
    　前記ケースの前記一方の壁部とは反対の壁部において前記取付部の裏側の位置に、前記ケースから引き出された前記ケーブルを支持するケーブル支持部が形成されていることを特徴とする請求項１から請求項２１のいずれか一項に記載の携帯型情報コード読取装置。     A cable that is fixed to the case and pulled out from the case and electrically connected to an external device provided outside the case;
    The mounting portion is provided on one wall side of the case,
    The cable support portion for supporting the cable drawn out from the case is formed at a position on the back side of the mounting portion on a wall portion opposite to the one wall portion of the case. The portable information code reader according to any one of claims 1 to 21.
  23. 　前記ケースにおいて前記取付部が設けられた壁部とは反対側の壁部には、前記取付部の裏側の位置に、外部操作が可能な操作スイッチが設けられていることを特徴とする請求項１から請求項２２のいずれか一項に記載の携帯型情報コード読取装置。 The operation switch capable of external operation is provided at a position on the back side of the mounting portion on a wall portion opposite to the wall portion on which the mounting portion is provided in the case. The portable information code reader according to any one of claims 1 to 22.
  24. 　前記取付部は、前記使用者の耳の穴に挿入される着脱可能な耳挿入部、又は前記使用者の耳に掛けられる着脱可能な耳掛け部を有し、
    　更に、少なくとも前記取付部が前記ケースから取り外された場合に情報を報知する情報報知部が設けられていることを特徴とする請求項１から請求項２３のいずれか一項に記載の携帯型情報コード読取装置。     The attachment portion has a detachable ear insertion portion that is inserted into a hole of the user's ear, or a detachable ear hook portion that is hung on the user's ear,
    The portable information according to any one of claims 1 to 23, further comprising an information notification unit that notifies information when at least the mounting portion is removed from the case. Code reader.
  25. 　音を発する発音部と、
    　前記発音部から発せられる音の音量を調整する音量調整部と、
    を備えたことを特徴とする請求項１から請求項２４のいずれか一項に記載の携帯型情報コード読取装置。     A sound generator that emits sound;
    A volume adjustment unit for adjusting the volume of the sound emitted from the sound generation unit;
    25. The portable information code reader according to any one of claims 1 to 24, comprising:
  26. 　前記取付部は、前記使用者の耳の穴に挿入される着脱可能な耳挿入部、又は前記使用者の耳に掛けられる着脱可能な耳掛け部を有し、
    　前記ケースから前記取付部を取り外した後に、その取り外した当該取付部とは異なる他の取付部材を前記ケースに取り付けることが可能とされていることを特徴とする請求項１から請求項２５のいずれか一項に記載の携帯型情報コード読取装置。     The attachment portion has a detachable ear insertion portion that is inserted into a hole of the user's ear, or a detachable ear hook portion that is hung on the user's ear,
    26. Any one of claims 1 to 25, wherein after the attachment portion is removed from the case, another attachment member different from the removed attachment portion can be attached to the case. The portable information code reader according to claim 1.
  27. 　前記処理部又は前記ケースの外部に設けられた外部処理部が、前記撮像部によって撮像された前記情報コードに記録されたデータを解読する解読部を備えており、
    　前記ケースと一体的に、外部に光を照射する光源が組み付けられ、
    　更に、前記解読部による前記情報コードの解読結果が、所定の成功状態である場合と前記所定の成功状態ではない所定の失敗状態である場合とを判定可能な判定部と、
    　前記光源からの光の照射状態を、前記判定部による判定結果に応じた状態に制御する照
    射状態制御部と、
    を備えることを特徴とする請求項１から請求項２６のいずれか一項に記載の携帯型情報コード読取装置。     The processing unit or an external processing unit provided outside the case includes a decoding unit that decodes data recorded in the information code imaged by the imaging unit,
    A light source for irradiating light to the outside is assembled integrally with the case,
    And a determination unit capable of determining whether the decoding result of the information code by the decoding unit is a predetermined success state and a predetermined failure state that is not the predetermined success state;
    An irradiation state control unit that controls an irradiation state of light from the light source to a state according to a determination result by the determination unit;
    27. The portable information code reader according to any one of claims 1 to 26, comprising:
  28. 　前記撮像部は、前記光源によって前記ケースの外部に向けて光が照射された状態で前記ケースの外部を撮像する構成であり、
    　前記解読部は、前記光源によって前記ケースの外部に光が照射された状態で前記撮像部によって撮像された前記情報コードを解読する構成であり、
    　前記照射状態制御部は、前記解読部によって前記情報コードの解読が試みられた後、前記光源からの光の照射状態を、前記判定部による判定結果に応じた状態に制御することを特徴とする請求項２７に記載の携帯型情報コード読取装置。     The imaging unit is configured to image the outside of the case in a state where light is irradiated toward the outside of the case by the light source,
    The decoding unit is configured to decode the information code imaged by the imaging unit in a state where light is irradiated to the outside of the case by the light source,
    The irradiation state control unit controls the irradiation state of light from the light source to a state according to a determination result by the determination unit after the decoding unit attempts to decode the information code. 28. A portable information code reader according to claim 27.
  29. 　前記光源とは別光源として構成され、前記ケースの外部に向けて光を照射する照明光照射部を備え、
    　前記撮像部は、前記照明光照射部によって前記ケースの外部に向けて光が照射された状態で前記ケースの外部を撮像する構成であり、
    　前記解読部は、前記照明光照射部によって前記ケースの外部に光が照射された状態で前記撮像部によって撮像された前記情報コードを解読する構成であり、
    　前記照射状態制御部は、前記解読部によって前記情報コードの解読が試みられた後に、前記光源からの光の照射状態を、前記判定部による判定結果に応じた状態に制御することを特徴とする請求項２７に記載の携帯型情報コード読取装置。     It is configured as a light source different from the light source, and includes an illumination light irradiation unit that irradiates light toward the outside of the case,
    The imaging unit is configured to image the outside of the case in a state where light is irradiated toward the outside of the case by the illumination light irradiation unit,
    The decoding unit is configured to decode the information code imaged by the imaging unit in a state where light is irradiated outside the case by the illumination light irradiation unit,
    The irradiation state control unit controls the irradiation state of light from the light source to a state according to a determination result by the determination unit after the decoding unit attempts to decode the information code. 28. A portable information code reader according to claim 27.
  30. 　前記照射状態制御部は、前記判定部によって前記所定の成功状態であると判定された場合の前記光源からの光の点灯時間又は消灯時間のいずれかの時間の間隔を、前記判定部によって前記所定の失敗状態と判定された場合の前記光源からの光の点灯時間又は消灯時間の前記いずれかの時間の間隔と異ならせる制御を行うことを特徴とする請求項２７から請求項２９のいずれか一項に記載の携帯型情報コード読取装置。 The irradiation state control unit is configured to determine, by the determination unit, a time interval between a lighting time and a light-off time of light from the light source when the determination unit determines that the predetermined success state is achieved. 30. The control according to any one of claims 27 to 29, wherein a control is performed to make the light on time or the light off time of the light from the light source different from the time interval when the failure state is determined. The portable information code reader according to the item.
  31. 　前記照射状態制御部は、前記判定部によって前記所定の成功状態であると判定された場合、前記光源から第１色の光を照射する第１色照射状態とし、前記判定部によって前記所定の失敗状態と判定された場合、前記光源から前記第１色とは異なる第２色の光を照射する第２色照射状態とすることを特徴とする請求項２７から請求項３０のいずれか一項に記載の携帯型情報コード読取装置。 When the determination unit determines that the irradiation state control unit is in the predetermined success state, the irradiation state control unit sets a first color irradiation state in which light of the first color is emitted from the light source, and the determination unit performs the predetermined failure. The state according to any one of claims 27 to 30, wherein when the state is determined, a second color irradiation state in which light of a second color different from the first color is emitted from the light source is set. The portable information code reader according to claim.
  32. 　前記照射状態制御部は、前記判定部によって前記所定の成功状態又は前記所定の失敗状態のいずれか一方の状態と判定された場合、前記光源からの光の照射状態を、前記光源からの光が照射される照射対象物に対して所定の情報を表示する第１表示状態とし、いずれか他方の状態と判定された場合、前記光源からの光の照射状態を、前記第１表示状態とは異なる照射状態とすることを特徴とする請求項２７から請求項３１のいずれか一項に記載の携帯型情報コード読取装置。 When the determination unit determines that the predetermined success state or the predetermined failure state is one of the states, the irradiation state control unit determines the light irradiation state of the light source from the light source. When it is determined as one of the other display states for displaying predetermined information on the irradiated object, the light irradiation state from the light source is different from the first display state. 32. The portable information code reader according to claim 27, wherein the portable information code reader is in an irradiation state.
  33. 　前記取付部は、前記使用者の右耳に取り付けられる右耳取付部と、前記使用者の左耳に取り付けられる左耳取付部と、前記右耳取付部と前記左耳取付部とを連結する中間連結部とを有することを特徴とする請求項１から請求項３２のいずれか一項に記載の携帯型情報コード読取装置。 The attachment portion connects a right ear attachment portion attached to the user's right ear, a left ear attachment portion attached to the user's left ear, and the right ear attachment portion and the left ear attachment portion. The portable information code reading device according to any one of claims 1 to 32, further comprising an intermediate connecting portion.
  34. 　前記取付部は、前記ケースとは別体として構成され、前記使用者の顔の右側に配置されると共に前記ケースを着脱可能な右側装着部と、前記使用者の顔の左側に配置されると共に前記ケースを着脱可能な左側装着部とを有することを特徴とする請求項１から請求項３３のいずれか一項に記載の携帯型情報コード読取装置。 The mounting portion is configured as a separate body from the case, and is disposed on the right side of the user's face, and is disposed on the left side of the user's face, and a right mounting portion on which the case can be attached and detached. The portable information code reader according to any one of claims 1 to 33, further comprising a left side mounting portion to which the case can be attached and detached.
  35. 　前記ケース及び前記取付部のいずれか一方には磁石が配置され、他方には前記磁石に吸引される吸引部が配置されており、
    　前記ケースが前記右側装着部に装着される場合には、前記ケースと前記右側装着部とが前記磁石と前記吸引部との吸引によって保持され、前記ケースが前記左側装着部に装着される場合には、前記ケースと前記左側装着部とが前記磁石と前記吸引部との吸引によって保持されることを特徴とする請求項３４に記載の携帯型情報コード読取装置。     A magnet is disposed in one of the case and the mounting portion, and a suction portion that is attracted to the magnet is disposed in the other,
    When the case is attached to the right attachment part, the case and the right attachment part are held by suction of the magnet and the suction part, and the case is attached to the left attachment part. 35. The portable information code reading device according to claim 34, wherein the case and the left mounting portion are held by suction of the magnet and the suction portion.
  36. 　前記ケースには、前記右側装着部に形成された右側被嵌合部と嵌合可能に構成され、前記左側装着部に形成された左側被嵌合部と嵌合可能に構成された嵌合部が形成されており、
    　前記ケースが前記右側装着部に取り付けられる時に、前記嵌合部と前記右側被嵌合部とが嵌合し、
    　前記ケースが前記左側装着部に取り付けられる時に、前記嵌合部と前記左側被嵌合部とが嵌合することを特徴とする請求項３４又は請求項３５に記載の携帯型情報コード読取装
    置。     The case is configured to be engageable with a right-side mated portion formed on the right-side mounting portion, and is configured to be matable with a left-side mated portion formed on the left-side mounting portion. Is formed,
    When the case is attached to the right mounting part, the fitting part and the right fitted part are fitted,
    36. The portable information code reading device according to claim 34 or 35, wherein when the case is attached to the left mounting portion, the fitting portion and the left fitting portion are fitted.
  37. 　前記右側装着部に対して前記ケースを着脱可能に連結し、且つ前記右側装着部に対して前記ケースを連結した際に前記右側装着部に対する前記ケースの姿勢が第１所定姿勢となるようにガイドする第１ガイド部と、
    　前記左側装着部に対して前記ケースを着脱可能に連結し、且つ前記左側装着部に対して前記ケースを連結した際に前記左側装着部に対する前記ケースの姿勢が第２所定姿勢となるようにガイドする第２ガイド部と、
    を有することを特徴とする請求項３４から請求項３６のいずれか一項に記載の携帯型情報コード読取装置。     The case is detachably connected to the right mounting part, and a guide is provided so that the posture of the case with respect to the right mounting part becomes a first predetermined attitude when the case is connected to the right mounting part. A first guide part that
    The case is detachably connected to the left mounting portion, and a guide is provided so that the posture of the case with respect to the left mounting portion becomes a second predetermined posture when the case is connected to the left mounting portion. A second guide part that
    37. The portable information code reader according to any one of claims 34 to 36, comprising:
  38. 　前記ケース側に設けられた少なくとも２つのケース側連結部と、
    　前記右側装着部側に設けられた少なくとも２つの右側連結部と、
    　前記左側装着部側に設けられた少なくとも２つの左側連結部と、
    を備え、
    　前記第１ガイド部は、少なくとも２つの前記ケース側連結部と少なくとも２つの前記右側連結部とがそれぞれ連結されることにより前記ケースを前記右側装着部に取り付ける構成であり、
    　前記第２ガイド部は、少なくとも２つの前記ケース側連結部と少なくとも２つの前記左側連結部とがそれぞれ連結されることにより前記ケースを前記左側装着部に取り付けることを特徴とする請求項３７に記載の携帯型情報コード読取装置。     At least two case-side connecting portions provided on the case side;
    At least two right connecting portions provided on the right mounting portion side;
    At least two left connecting portions provided on the left mounting portion side;
    With
    The first guide part is configured to attach the case to the right mounting part by connecting at least two case side connection parts and at least two right connection parts, respectively.
    The said 2nd guide part attaches the said case to the said left attachment part by connecting at least 2 said case side connection part and at least 2 said left side connection part, respectively. Portable information code reader.
  39. 　２つの前記ケース側連結部として、永久磁石として構成される第１ケース側連結部と、永久磁石として構成される第２ケース側連結部とが設けられ、
    　２つの前記右側連結部として、永久磁石として構成される第１右側連結部と、永久磁石として構成される第２右側連結部とが設けられ、
    　２つの前記左側連結部として、永久磁石として構成される第１左側連結部と、永久磁石として構成される第２左側連結部とが設けられ、
    　前記第１ケース側連結部は、前記第１右側連結部及び前記第１左側連結部と極性が異なり、且つ前記第２右側連結部及び前記第２左側連結部と極性が同じであり、
    　前記第２ケース側連結部は、前記第２右側連結部及び前記第２左側連結部と極性が異なり、前記第１右側連結部及び前記第１左側連結部と極性が同じであることを特徴とする請求項３８に記載の携帯型情報コード読取装置。     As the two case-side connecting portions, a first case-side connecting portion configured as a permanent magnet and a second case-side connecting portion configured as a permanent magnet are provided,
    As the two right connection parts, a first right connection part configured as a permanent magnet and a second right connection part configured as a permanent magnet are provided,
    As the two left side connection parts, a first left side connection part configured as a permanent magnet and a second left side connection part configured as a permanent magnet are provided,
    The first case side connecting portion has a polarity different from that of the first right connecting portion and the first left connecting portion, and has the same polarity as the second right connecting portion and the second left connecting portion,
    The second case side connection part has a polarity different from that of the second right connection part and the second left connection part, and has the same polarity as the first right connection part and the first left connection part. A portable information code reader according to claim 38.
  40. 　前記取付部は、前記使用者のいずれかの耳に掛けられて支持される被支持部と、前記被支持部から延びる前側延出部と、前記前側延出部に連結されると共に前記ケースを保持する保持部と、を少なくとも備え、
    　前記使用者に前記取付部を取り付けた取付時に、前記前側延出部が前記被支持部よりも前側に延びて配置され、前記被支持部を支持する耳の耳孔よりも前位置に前記保持部が配置されることを特徴とする請求項１から請求項３９のいずれか一項に記載の携帯型情報コード読取装置。     The mounting portion is connected to and supported by any of the user's ears, a front extending portion extending from the supported portion, the front extending portion, and the case. A holding unit for holding at least,
    When the attachment portion is attached to the user, the front extension portion is arranged to extend to the front side of the supported portion, and the holding portion is located in front of the ear hole of the ear that supports the supported portion. 40. The portable information code reading device according to any one of claims 1 to 39, wherein:
  41. 　前記保持部は、前記耳孔よりも前位置において前記使用者の顔に対向する裏面部と、前記裏面部の反対側に配置された表面部とを備えており、前記ケースを前記表面部で保持することを特徴とする請求項４０に記載の携帯型情報コード読取装置。 The holding portion includes a back surface portion facing the user's face at a position before the ear hole, and a surface portion disposed on the opposite side of the back surface portion, and holds the case by the surface portion. 41. The portable information code reader according to claim 40.
  42. 　前記ケースにおいて前記取付部に取り付けられる側の壁部には、音を導出する導出孔が形成されており、
    　前記ケースが前記取付部に取り付けられた取り付け時には、前記取付部の一部をなす被覆部によって前記導出孔の少なくとも一部が覆われ、前記ケースが前記取付部から取り外された取り外し時には、前記導出孔において前記取り付け時に前記被覆部によって覆われ
    る部分が露出することを特徴とする請求項１から請求項４１のいずれか一項に記載の携帯型情報コード読取装置。     In the case, in the wall portion on the side attached to the attachment portion, a lead-out hole for leading out sound is formed,
    When the case is attached to the attachment part, at least a part of the lead-out hole is covered with a covering part that forms a part of the attachment part, and when the case is removed from the attachment part, the lead-out is performed. The portable information code reading device according to any one of claims 1 to 41, wherein a portion of the hole that is covered by the covering portion is exposed during the attachment.
  43. 　情報コードを撮像する撮像部と、
    　前記撮像部によって撮像された前記情報コードの画像を処理する処理部と、
    　前記撮像部及び前記処理部を保持するケースと、
    　前記ケースとは別体として設けられ、使用者に取り付けられる取付部材と、
    　前記取付部材の所定の取付部に対して前記ケースを着脱可能に連結し、且つその連結の際に前記取付部に対する前記ケースの姿勢が所定姿勢となるようにガイドするガイド部と、
    を有することを特徴とする携帯型情報コード読取装置。     An imaging unit for imaging the information code;
    A processing unit that processes an image of the information code imaged by the imaging unit;
    A case for holding the imaging unit and the processing unit;
    An attachment member provided as a separate body from the case and attached to a user;
    A guide portion that removably connects the case to a predetermined mounting portion of the mounting member and guides the case so that the posture of the case with respect to the mounting portion becomes a predetermined posture at the time of the connection;
    A portable information code reader characterized by comprising:
  44. 　前記取付部材は、使用者の首から上の部分に取り付けられることを特徴とする請求項４３に記載の携帯型情報コード読取装置。 44. The portable information code reader according to claim 43, wherein the attachment member is attached to a portion above the user's neck.
  45. 　前記ガイド部は、
    　前記ケースに設けられた少なくとも２つのケース側連結部と、
    　前記取付部材の前記取付部に設けられた少なくとも２つの取付部材側連結部と、を備え、
    　２つの前記ケース側連結部と２つの前記取付部材側連結部とがそれぞれ連結することにより前記取付部材と前記ケースとを連結することを特徴とする請求項４３又は請求項４４に記載の携帯型情報コード読取装置。     The guide portion is
    At least two case side connecting portions provided in the case;
    And at least two attachment member side connecting portions provided in the attachment portion of the attachment member,
    45. The portable type according to claim 43 or 44, wherein the case member and the case are connected by connecting the two case side connecting portions and the two attaching member side connecting portions, respectively. Information code reader.
  46. 　前記ガイド部は、前記ケース及び前記取付部の一方に設けられた一方側磁石と、前記ケース及び前記取付部の他方に設けられ、前記一方側磁石に吸引される磁性体とを有することを特徴とする請求項４３から請求項４５のいずれか一項に記載の携帯型情報コード読取装置。 The guide portion includes a one-side magnet provided on one of the case and the attachment portion, and a magnetic body provided on the other of the case and the attachment portion and attracted to the one-side magnet. The portable information code reading device according to any one of claims 43 to 45.
  47. 　２つの前記ケース側連結部は、磁石として構成される第１ケース側連結部及び第２ケース側連結部からなり、
    　２つの前記取付部材側連結部は、磁石として構成される第１取付部材側連結部及び第２取付部材側連結部からなり、
    　前記第１ケース側連結部と前記第１取付部材側連結部との極性が互いに異なり、
    　さらに、前記第２ケース側連結部と前記第２取付部材側連結部との極性が互いに異なることを特徴とする請求項４５に記載の携帯型情報コード読取装置。     The two case-side connecting portions are composed of a first case-side connecting portion and a second case-side connecting portion configured as magnets,
    The two attachment member side connection portions are composed of a first attachment member side connection portion and a second attachment member side connection portion configured as magnets,
    The polarities of the first case side connecting portion and the first mounting member side connecting portion are different from each other,
    46. The portable information code reader according to claim 45, wherein the second case side connecting portion and the second mounting member side connecting portion have different polarities.
  48. 　前記第１ケース側連結部と前記第２取付部材側連結部とが同極性であり、
    　前記第２ケース側連結部と前記第１取付部材側連結部とが同極性であることを特徴とする請求項４７に記載の携帯型情報コード読取装置。     The first case side connecting portion and the second mounting member side connecting portion have the same polarity,
    48. The portable information code reader according to claim 47, wherein the second case side connecting portion and the first attachment member side connecting portion have the same polarity.
  49. 　前記ガイド部は、前記ケース及び前記取付部の一方に設けられた一方側嵌合部と、前記ケース及び前記取付部の他方に設けられ、前記一方側嵌合部と嵌合する被嵌合部とを有することを特徴とする請求項４３から請求項４５のいずれか一項に記載の携帯型情報コード読取装置。 The guide portion is provided on one side of the case and the attachment portion, and a fitted portion provided on the other side of the case and the attachment portion and fitted with the one side fitting portion. 46. The portable information code reader according to any one of claims 43 to 45, wherein:
  50. 　前記ガイド部は、前記ケース及び前記取付部の一方に設けられた一方側シート材と、前記ケース及び前記取付部の他方に設けられた他方側シート材とを有し、これらの前記一方側シート材及び前記他方側シート材が、互いに接触しつつ結合する面ファスナーとして構成されていることを特徴とする請求項４３から請求項４５のいずれか一項に記載の携帯型情報コード読取装置。 The guide portion includes a one-side sheet material provided on one of the case and the attachment portion, and an other-side sheet material provided on the other of the case and the attachment portion, and the one-side sheet. The portable information code reading device according to any one of claims 43 to 45, wherein the material and the other side sheet material are configured as a hook-and-loop fastener that is bonded while being in contact with each other.
  51. 　前記取付部材は、使用者に装着される装着部と、前記取付部とを備え、
    　前記ケースは、前記ガイド部によって前記取付部に連結される被取付部を備えており、
    　前記被取付部を基準とする前記撮像部の変位、又は前記装着部を基準とする前記取付部の変位を変更可能な変位調整部が設けられていることを特徴とする請求項４３から請求項５０のいずれか一項に記載の携帯型情報コード読取装置。     The mounting member includes a mounting portion to be mounted on a user, and the mounting portion.
    The case includes a mounted portion connected to the mounting portion by the guide portion,
    44. The displacement adjustment unit capable of changing the displacement of the imaging unit with respect to the attached portion or the displacement of the attachment portion with respect to the mounting portion is provided. 50. The portable information code reader according to any one of 50.
  52. 　前記取付部材と前記ケースとを接続する接続ケーブルが設けられており、前記取付部材と前記ケースとの間で、電力供給又は情報通信が可能とされていることを特徴とする請求項４３から請求項５１のいずれか一項に記載の携帯型情報コード読取装置。 44. A connection cable for connecting the mounting member and the case is provided, and power supply or information communication is enabled between the mounting member and the case. Item 52. The portable information code reader according to any one of Items 51.
  53. 　前記ケース内に電池が収容されていることを特徴とする請求項４３から請求項５１のいずれか一項に記載の携帯型情報コード読取装置。 52. The portable information code reader according to any one of claims 43 to 51, wherein a battery is accommodated in the case.
  54. 　情報コードを撮像する撮像部と、
    　前記撮像部によって撮像された前記情報コードの画像を処理する処理部と、
    　前記撮像部及び前記処理部を保持するケースと、
    　撓み変形可能な可撓性の装着部と、前記ケースが着脱される取付部と、を備え、前記ケースとは別体として設けられる取付部材と、を有することを特徴とする携帯型情報コード読取装置。     An imaging unit for imaging the information code;
    A processing unit that processes an image of the information code imaged by the imaging unit;
    A case for holding the imaging unit and the processing unit;
    A portable information code reading device comprising: a flexible mounting portion that can be bent and deformed; and an attachment portion to which the case is attached and detached, and an attachment member that is provided separately from the case. apparatus.
  55. 　前記装着部は、被装着時の自然状態において所定形状で維持される構成であり、且つ弾性変形可能に構成されていることを特徴とする請求項５４に記載の携帯型情報コード読取装置。 55. The portable information code reading device according to claim 54, wherein the mounting portion is configured to be maintained in a predetermined shape in a natural state when being mounted, and is configured to be elastically deformable.
  56. 　前記装着部は、使用者の少なくともいずれか一方の耳に掛けられる耳掛け部として構成されていることを特徴とする請求項５４又は請求項５５に記載の携帯型情報コード読取装置。 56. The portable information code reading device according to claim 54 or 55, wherein the mounting portion is configured as an ear hooking portion that is hung on at least one of the user's ears.
  57. 　前記装着部は、使用者の腕又は指に掛けられるバンド部材として構成されていることを特徴とする請求項５４又は請求項５５に記載の携帯型情報コード読取装置。 56. The portable information code reading device according to claim 54 or 55, wherein the mounting portion is configured as a band member that is hung on a user's arm or finger.
  58. 　前記装着部は、使用者の頭に取り付けられるバンド部材として構成されていることを特徴とする請求項５４又は請求項５５に記載の携帯型情報コード読取装置。 The portable information code reading device according to claim 54 or 55, wherein the mounting portion is configured as a band member attached to a user's head.
  59. 　前記撮像部を当該撮像部の受光面の平面方向と交差する所定方向の回転軸を中心として回転可能に構成され、前記撮像部を少なくとも２つの回転位置に切り替え可能な回転機構を有することを特徴とする請求項５４から請求項５８のいずれか一項に記載の携帯型情報コード読取装置。 The image pickup unit is configured to be rotatable about a rotation axis in a predetermined direction intersecting a plane direction of a light receiving surface of the image pickup unit, and has a rotation mechanism capable of switching the image pickup unit to at least two rotation positions. 59. The portable information code reader according to any one of claims 54 to 58.
  60. 　情報コードを撮像する撮像部と、
    　前記撮像部によって撮像された前記情報コードの画像を処理する処理部と、
    　前記撮像部及び前記処理部を保持するケースと、
    　装着部と、前記ケースが着脱される取付部とを備え、前記ケースとは別体として設けられる取付部材と、
    　前記撮像部を当該撮像部の受光面の平面方向と交差する所定方向の回転軸を中心として回転可能に構成され、前記撮像部を少なくとも２つの回転位置に切り替え可能な回転機構と、を有することを特徴とする携帯型情報コード読取装置。     An imaging unit for imaging the information code;
    A processing unit that processes an image of the information code imaged by the imaging unit;
    A case for holding the imaging unit and the processing unit;
    An attachment member provided with a mounting part and an attachment part to which the case is attached and detached, and provided as a separate body from the case;
    A rotation mechanism configured to be rotatable about a rotation axis in a predetermined direction intersecting a plane direction of a light receiving surface of the image pickup unit, and capable of switching the image pickup unit to at least two rotation positions. A portable information code reader characterized by the above.
  61. 　複数種類の前記取付部材が使用者に取り付け可能とされており、
    　いずれの前記取付部材が前記使用者に取り付けられた場合でも、その取り付けられた前記取付部材に対して前記ケースを連結可能とされていることを特徴とする請求項５４から請求項６０のいずれか一項に記載の携帯型情報コード読取装置。     A plurality of types of attachment members can be attached to the user,
    The case can be connected to the attached mounting member even when any of the mounting members is attached to the user. The portable information code reader according to one item.
  62. 　情報コードを撮像する撮像部と、
    　前記撮像部によって撮像された前記情報コードの画像を処理する処理部と、
    　前記撮像部及び前記処理部を保持するケースと、
    　装着部と、前記ケースが着脱される取付部とを備え、前記ケースとは別体として設けられる取付部材と、を有し、
    　複数種類の前記取付部材が使用者に取り付け可能とされており、
    　いずれの前記取付部材が前記使用者に取り付けられた場合でも、その取り付けられた前記取付部材に対して前記ケースを連結可能とされていることを特徴とする携帯型情報コード読取装置。     An imaging unit for imaging the information code;
    A processing unit that processes an image of the information code imaged by the imaging unit;
    A case for holding the imaging unit and the processing unit;
    A mounting portion and a mounting portion on which the case is attached and detached, and a mounting member provided separately from the case;
    A plurality of types of attachment members can be attached to the user,
    The portable information code reading device, wherein the case can be connected to the attached mounting member regardless of which of the mounting members is attached to the user.
  63. 　複数種類の前記取付部材の内、いずれかの前記取付部材に前記ケースが連結された場合に、前記ケースが連結された前記取付部材の種類を判定する判定部と、
    　前記判定部によって判定された種類の応じた対応処理を行う対応処理部と、
    を有することを特徴とする請求項６１又は請求項６２に記載の携帯型情報コード読取装置。     A determination unit that determines the type of the attachment member to which the case is connected when the case is connected to any of the attachment members among the plurality of types of the attachment members;
    A response processing unit that performs a response process according to the type determined by the determination unit;
    63. The portable information code reading device according to claim 61 or 62, wherein:
  64. 　前記ケースの取付位置を検出する検出部と、
    　前記撮像部によって撮像された画像から前記検出部の検出結果に対応する範囲を選択する選択部と、を有することを特徴とする請求項５４から請求項６３のいずれか一項に記載の携帯型情報コード読取装置。     A detector for detecting the mounting position of the case;
    The portable unit according to any one of claims 54 to 63, further comprising: a selection unit that selects a range corresponding to a detection result of the detection unit from an image captured by the imaging unit. Information code reader.
  65. 　情報コードを撮像する撮像部と、
    　前記撮像部によって撮像された前記情報コードの画像を処理する処理部と、
    　前記撮像部及び前記処理部を保持するケースと、
    　装着部と、前記ケースが着脱される取付部と、を備え、前記ケースとは別体として設けられる取付部材と、
    　前記ケースの取付位置を検出する検出部と、
    　前記撮像部によって撮像された画像から前記検出部の検出結果に対応する範囲を選択する選択部と、を有することを特徴とする携帯型情報コード読取装置。     An imaging unit for imaging the information code;
    A processing unit that processes an image of the information code imaged by the imaging unit;
    A case for holding the imaging unit and the processing unit;
    An attachment member provided with a mounting part and an attachment part to which the case is attached and detached, and provided as a separate body from the case;
    A detector for detecting the mounting position of the case;
    A portable information code reading apparatus comprising: a selection unit that selects a range corresponding to a detection result of the detection unit from an image captured by the imaging unit.
  66. 　前記ケースの取付位置を検出する検出部と、
    　前記検出部によって検出された前記ケースの取付位置の情報を外部装置に送信する送信制御部と、
    　前記送信制御部によって前記ケースの取付位置の情報が前記外部装置に送信された場合に、前記外部装置から、前記ケースの取付位置の情報に対応する応答情報を受信する受信部と、を有することを特徴とする請求項５４から請求項６５のいずれか一項に記載の携帯型情報コード読取装置。     A detector for detecting the mounting position of the case;
    A transmission control unit for transmitting information on the mounting position of the case detected by the detection unit to an external device;
    A receiving unit that receives response information corresponding to the information on the mounting position of the case from the external device when the information on the mounting position of the case is transmitted to the external device by the transmission control unit; 66. The portable information code reader according to any one of claims 54 to 65.
  67. 　情報コードを撮像する撮像部と、
    　前記撮像部によって撮像された前記情報コードの画像を処理する処理部と、
    　前記撮像部及び前記処理部を保持するケースと、
    　身体装着部と、前記ケースが着脱される取付部と、を備え、前記ケースとは別体として設けられる取付部材と、
    　前記ケースの取付位置を検出する検出部と、
    　前記検出部によって検出された前記ケースの取付位置の情報を外部装置に送信する送信制御部と、
    　前記送信制御部によって前記ケースの取付位置の情報が前記外部装置に送信された場合に、前記外部装置から、前記ケースの取付位置の情報に対応する応答情報を受信する受信部と、を有することを特徴とする携帯型情報コード読取装置。     An imaging unit for imaging the information code;
    A processing unit that processes an image of the information code imaged by the imaging unit;
    A case for holding the imaging unit and the processing unit;
    An attachment member provided with a body mounting portion and an attachment portion to which the case is attached and detached, and provided separately from the case;
    A detector for detecting the mounting position of the case;
    A transmission control unit for transmitting information on the mounting position of the case detected by the detection unit to an external device;
    A receiving unit that receives response information corresponding to the information on the mounting position of the case from the external device when the information on the mounting position of the case is transmitted to the external device by the transmission control unit; A portable information code reader characterized by the above.
  68. 　前記取付部材の所定の取付部に対して前記ケースを着脱可能に連結し、且つその連結の際に前記取付部に対する前記ケースの姿勢が所定姿勢となるようにガイドするガイド部が設けられていることを特徴とする請求項５４から請求項６７のいずれか一項に記載の携帯型情報コード読取装置。 A guide portion is provided for detachably connecting the case to a predetermined mounting portion of the mounting member, and guiding the case so that the posture of the case with respect to the mounting portion becomes a predetermined posture at the time of the connection. 68. The portable information code reader according to any one of claims 54 to 67, wherein:
  69. 　前記ガイド部は、
    　前記ケースに設けられた少なくとも２つのケース側連結部と、
    　前記取付部材の前記取付部に設けられた少なくとも２つの取付部材側連結部と、
    を備え、
    　２つの前記ケース側連結部と２つの前記取付部材側連結部とがそれぞれ連結することにより前記取付部材と前記ケースとを連結することを特徴とする請求項６８に記載の携帯型情報コード読取装置。     The guide portion is
    At least two case side connecting portions provided in the case;
    At least two attachment member side connecting portions provided in the attachment portion of the attachment member;
    With
    69. The portable information code reader according to claim 68, wherein the case member and the case are connected by connecting the two case side connecting portions and the two attaching member side connecting portions, respectively. .
  70. 　前記ガイド部は、前記ケース及び前記取付部の一方に設けられた一方側磁石と、前記ケース及び前記取付部の他方に設けられ、前記一方側磁石に吸引される磁性体とを有することを特徴とする請求項６８又は請求項６９に記載の携帯型情報コード読取装置。 The guide portion includes a one-side magnet provided on one of the case and the attachment portion, and a magnetic body provided on the other of the case and the attachment portion and attracted to the one-side magnet. 70. A portable information code reader according to claim 68 or 69.
  71. 　２つの前記ケース側連結部は、磁石として構成される第１ケース側連結部及び第２ケース側連結部からなり、
    　２つの前記取付部材側連結部は、磁石として構成される第１取付部材側連結部及び第２取付部材側連結部からなり、
    　前記第１ケース側連結部と前記第１取付部材側連結部との極性が互いに異なり、これら前記第１ケース側連結部と前記第１取付部材側連結部とが互いに吸引して連結される構成となっており、
    　前記第２ケース側連結部と前記第２取付部材側連結部との極性が互いに異なり、これら前記第２ケース側連結部と前記第２取付部材側連結部とが互いに吸引して連結される構成となっていることを特徴とする請求項６９に記載の携帯型情報コード読取装置。     The two case-side connecting portions are composed of a first case-side connecting portion and a second case-side connecting portion configured as magnets,
    The two attachment member side connection portions are composed of a first attachment member side connection portion and a second attachment member side connection portion configured as magnets,
    The first case side connecting portion and the first mounting member side connecting portion have different polarities, and the first case side connecting portion and the first mounting member side connecting portion are connected to each other by suction. And
    The second case side connecting portion and the second mounting member side connecting portion have different polarities, and the second case side connecting portion and the second mounting member side connecting portion are connected to each other by suction. 70. The portable information code reader according to claim 69, wherein:
  72. 　前記第１ケース側連結部と前記第２取付部材側連結部とが同極性であり、
    　前記第２ケース側連結部と前記第１取付部材側連結部とが同極性であることを特徴とする請求項７１に記載の携帯型情報コード読取装置。     The first case side connecting portion and the second mounting member side connecting portion have the same polarity,
    72. The portable information code reader according to claim 71, wherein the second case side connecting portion and the first attachment member side connecting portion have the same polarity.
  73. 　前記ガイド部は、前記ケース及び前記取付部の一方に設けられた一方側嵌合部と、前記ケース及び前記取付部の他方に設けられ、前記一方側嵌合部と嵌合する被嵌合部とを有することを特徴とする請求項６８又は請求項６９に記載の携帯型情報コード読取装置。 The guide portion is provided on one side of the case and the attachment portion, and a fitted portion provided on the other side of the case and the attachment portion and fitted with the one side fitting portion. 70. The portable information code reader according to claim 68 or claim 69, comprising:
  74. 　前記ガイド部は、前記ケース及び前記取付部の一方に設けられた一方側シート材と、前記ケース及び前記取付部の他方に設けられた他方側シート材とを有し、前記一方側シート材と前記他方側シート材とが互いに接触しつつ結合する面ファスナーとして構成されていることを特徴とする請求項６８又は請求項６９に記載の携帯型情報コード読取装置。 The guide portion includes a one-side sheet material provided on one of the case and the attachment portion, and an other-side sheet material provided on the other of the case and the attachment portion, and the one-side sheet material; 70. The portable information code reader according to claim 68 or 69, wherein the portable information code reader is configured as a hook-and-loop fastener that joins the other side sheet material while being in contact with each other.
  75. 　前記取付部材は、前記取付部と連結されるベース部を備え、前記ベース部から前記身体装着部が延びており、
    　前記ケースは、前記ガイド部によって前記取付部に連結される被取付部を備えており、
    　前記被取付部を基準とする前記撮像部の変位、又は前記ベース部を基準とする前記取付部の変位を変更可能な変位調整部が設けられていることを特徴とする請求項５４から請求項７４のいずれか一項に記載の携帯型情報コード読取装置。     The attachment member includes a base portion connected to the attachment portion, and the body mounting portion extends from the base portion,
    The case includes a mounted portion connected to the mounting portion by the guide portion,
    55. A displacement adjustment unit capable of changing a displacement of the imaging unit with respect to the attached portion or a displacement of the attachment portion with respect to the base portion is provided. 74. The portable information code reader according to any one of 74.
  76. 　前記取付部材と前記ケースとを接続する接続ケーブルが設けられており、前記取付部材と前記ケースとの間で、電力供給又は情報通信が可能とされていることを特徴とする請求項５４から請求項７５のいずれか一項に記載の携帯型情報コード読取装置。 55. A connection cable for connecting the attachment member and the case is provided, and power supply or information communication is enabled between the attachment member and the case. Item 76. The portable information code reader according to any one of Items 75.
  77. 　前記ケース内に電池が収容されていることを特徴とする請求項５４から請求項７５のいずれか一項に記載の携帯型情報コード読取装置。 The portable information code reader according to any one of claims 54 to 75, wherein a battery is accommodated in the case.
  78. 　所定の撮像範囲の画像を撮像する撮像部と、
    　前記撮像範囲に向けてマーカ光を照射するマーカ光照射部と、
    　前記マーカ光とは異なる照明光を照射する照明光源と、
    　少なくとも前記マーカ光照射部と、前記照明光源と、前記撮像部とを保持するケースと、
    　前記ケースと一体的に、又は前記ケースとは別体として設けられ、使用者の身体又は使用者の装着物に取り付けられる取付部材と、
    　前記照明光源を駆動させずに前記マーカ光照射部を駆動させる第１制御と、前記照明光源を駆動させる第２制御とを切り替える光源制御部と、
    　前記光源制御部による前記第１制御に応じて前記マーカ光が照射された状態で前記撮像部によって得られた第１撮像画像から、情報コードの所定の特徴パターンを検出する検出部と、
    　前記光源制御部による前記第２制御に応じて前記照明光が照射された状態で前記撮像部によって得られた第２撮像画像を処理する処理部と、
    を備え、
    　前記光源制御部は、前記検出部が前記第１撮像画像から前記特徴パターンを検出した場合に、前記マーカ光照射部及び前記照明光源に対する制御を前記第１制御から前記第２制御に切り替えることを特徴とする携帯型情報コード読取装置。     An imaging unit that captures an image of a predetermined imaging range;
    A marker light irradiation unit that irradiates marker light toward the imaging range; and
    An illumination light source that emits illumination light different from the marker light;
    A case that holds at least the marker light irradiation unit, the illumination light source, and the imaging unit;
    An attachment member provided integrally with the case or as a separate body from the case, and attached to a user's body or a user's wearing object;
    A light source control unit that switches between a first control for driving the marker light irradiation unit without driving the illumination light source and a second control for driving the illumination light source;
    A detection unit for detecting a predetermined feature pattern of an information code from a first captured image obtained by the imaging unit in a state in which the marker light is irradiated according to the first control by the light source control unit;
    A processing unit that processes a second captured image obtained by the imaging unit in a state in which the illumination light is irradiated according to the second control by the light source control unit;
    With
    The light source control unit switches the control of the marker light irradiation unit and the illumination light source from the first control to the second control when the detection unit detects the feature pattern from the first captured image. A portable information code reader.
  79. 　前記検出部は、前記第１撮像画像における前記マーカ光の照射領域を解析し、当該照射領域から前記特徴パターンを検出することを特徴とする請求項７８に記載の携帯型情報コード読取装置。 79. The portable information code reading device according to claim 78, wherein the detection unit analyzes an irradiation area of the marker light in the first captured image and detects the feature pattern from the irradiation area.
  80. 　前記撮像部で得られる撮像画像での前記マーカ光の照射領域の位置を示す位置データが記憶される位置データ記憶部を備え、
    　前記検出部は、前記位置データ記憶部に記憶された前記位置データに基づいて前記第１撮像画像内での前記マーカ光の照射領域の位置を特定し、前記第１撮像画像内の前記照射領域から前記特徴パターンを検出することを特徴とする請求項７９に記載の携帯型情報コード読取装置。     A position data storage unit that stores position data indicating the position of the irradiation region of the marker light in a captured image obtained by the imaging unit;
    The detection unit specifies a position of an irradiation region of the marker light in the first captured image based on the position data stored in the position data storage unit, and the irradiation region in the first captured image 80. The portable information code reader according to claim 79, wherein the feature pattern is detected.
  81. 　前記位置データは、前記照射領域の中心位置を示す中心データと、前記中心位置を中心とする大きさを示す大きさデータとを含むことを特徴とする請求項８０に記載の携帯型情報コード読取装置。 81. The portable information code reading device according to claim 80, wherein the position data includes center data indicating a center position of the irradiation region and size data indicating a size centered on the center position. apparatus.
  82. 　前記マーカ光照射部は、前記撮像部による撮像範囲の中心軸に沿って前記マーカ光を照射する構成であり、
    　前記検出部は、前記第１撮像画像の中心部を含んだ所定の中央領域から前記特徴パターンを検出することを特徴とする請求項７９に記載の携帯型情報コード読取装置。     The marker light irradiation unit is configured to irradiate the marker light along a central axis of an imaging range by the imaging unit,
    80. The portable information code reading device according to claim 79, wherein the detection unit detects the feature pattern from a predetermined central region including a central portion of the first captured image.
  83. 　前記撮像部は、前記光源制御部による前記第１制御に応じて前記マーカ光が照射された状態で前記第１撮像画像を複数回取得し、
    　前記光源制御部は、複数回の前記第１撮像画像において前記検出部により所定回数連続して前記特徴パターンが検出された場合に、前記第１制御から前記第２制御に切り替えることを特徴とする請求項７８から請求項８２のいずれか一項に記載の携帯型情報コード読取装置。     The imaging unit acquires the first captured image a plurality of times in a state where the marker light is irradiated according to the first control by the light source control unit,
    The light source control unit switches from the first control to the second control when the detection unit detects the feature pattern continuously a predetermined number of times in the first captured image a plurality of times. 83. A portable information code reader according to any one of claims 78 to 82.
  84. 　前記マーカ光照射部は、前記マーカ光の照射方向と直交する平面での照射形状が所定方向に延びる線状、略矩形状、略円形状の少なくともいずれかを含む形状となるように前記マーカ光を照射することを特徴とする請求項７８から請求項８３のいずれか一項に記載の携帯型情報コード読取装置。 The marker light irradiating unit includes the marker light so that an irradiation shape on a plane orthogonal to the irradiation direction of the marker light has a shape including at least one of a linear shape, a substantially rectangular shape, and a substantially circular shape extending in a predetermined direction. 84. The portable information code reader according to any one of claims 78 to 83, wherein:
  85. 　前記検出部によって前記特徴パターンが検出された場合に、前記撮像部でのシャッタ速度を、前記検出部による前記特徴パターンの検出前の第１のシャッタ速度よりも速い第２のシャッタ速度に設定変更する設定部を備え、
    　前記処理部は、前記検出部により、前記第１のシャッタ速度のときの前記第１撮像画像から前記特徴パターンが検出された後、前記設定部によって前記第２のシャッタ速度に設定変更された前記撮像部で得られた前記第２撮像画像を処理することを特徴とする請求項７８から請求項８４のいずれか一項に記載の携帯型情報コード読取装置。     When the feature pattern is detected by the detection unit, the shutter speed at the imaging unit is changed to a second shutter speed that is faster than the first shutter speed before the feature pattern is detected by the detection unit. With a setting section to
    The processing unit is set to the second shutter speed by the setting unit after the characteristic pattern is detected from the first captured image at the first shutter speed by the detection unit. 85. The portable information code reading device according to any one of claims 78 to 84, wherein the second captured image obtained by an imaging unit is processed.
  86. 　光を照射する光源と、
    　所定の撮像範囲の画像を撮像する撮像部と、
    　少なくとも前記光源と、前記撮像部とを保持するケースと、
    　前記ケースと一体的に、又は前記ケースとは別体として設けられ、使用者の身体又は使用者の装着物に取り付けられる取付部材と、
    　前記撮像部によって得られた撮像画像から、情報コードの所定の特徴パターンを検出する検出部と、
    　前記検出部によって前記特徴パターンが検出された場合に、前記撮像部でのシャッタ速度を、前記検出部による前記特徴パターンの検出前の第１のシャッタ速度よりも速い第２のシャッタ速度に設定変更する設定部と、
    　前記検出部により、前記第１のシャッタ速度のときの前記撮像部で得られた第１撮像画像から前記特徴パターンが検出された後、前記設定部によって前記第２のシャッタ速度に設定変更された前記撮像部で得られた第２撮像画像を処理する処理部と、を有することを特徴とする携帯型情報コード読取装置。     A light source that emits light;
    An imaging unit that captures an image of a predetermined imaging range;
    A case for holding at least the light source and the imaging unit;
    An attachment member provided integrally with the case or as a separate body from the case, and attached to a user's body or a user's wearing object;
    A detection unit for detecting a predetermined feature pattern of an information code from a captured image obtained by the imaging unit;
    When the feature pattern is detected by the detection unit, the shutter speed at the imaging unit is changed to a second shutter speed that is faster than the first shutter speed before the feature pattern is detected by the detection unit. A setting section to
    After the feature pattern is detected from the first captured image obtained by the imaging unit at the first shutter speed by the detection unit, the setting is changed to the second shutter speed by the setting unit. And a processing unit that processes a second captured image obtained by the imaging unit.
  87. 　前記設定部は、前記処理部によって前記第２撮像画像が処理された後、前記撮像部でのシャッタ速度を、再び、前記第１のシャッタ速度に戻すことを特徴とする請求項８５又は請求項８６に記載の携帯型情報コード読取装置。 The said setting part returns the shutter speed in the said imaging part to the said 1st shutter speed again after the said 2nd captured image is processed by the said process part, The Claim 85 or Claim characterized by the above-mentioned. 86. A portable information code reader according to 86.
  88. 　前記携帯型情報コード読取装置に対して所定の指示操作がなされた場合に、前記処理部によって撮像画像を処理した処理データに対する所定のキャンセル制御を行う対応部を有することを特徴とする請求項７８から請求項８７のいずれか一項に記載の携帯型情報コード読取装置。 79. The apparatus according to claim 78, further comprising: a corresponding unit that performs predetermined cancel control on the processing data obtained by processing the captured image by the processing unit when a predetermined instruction operation is performed on the portable information code reader. The portable information code reader according to any one of claims 87 to 87.
  89. 　光を照射する光源と、
    　所定の撮像範囲の画像を撮像する撮像部と、
    　少なくとも前記光源と、前記撮像部とを保持するケースと、
    　前記ケースと一体的に、又は前記ケースとは別体として設けられ、使用者の身体又は使用者の装着物に取り付けられる取付部材と、
    　前記撮像部によって得られた撮像画像を処理する処理部と、
    　当該携帯型情報コード読取装置に対して所定の指示操作がなされた場合に、前記処理部によって撮像画像を処理した処理データに対する所定のキャンセル制御を行う対応部と、を有することを特徴とする携帯型情報コード読取装置。     A light source that emits light;
    An imaging unit that captures an image of a predetermined imaging range;
    A case for holding at least the light source and the imaging unit;
    An attachment member provided integrally with the case or as a separate body from the case, and attached to a user's body or a user's wearing object;
    A processing unit for processing a captured image obtained by the imaging unit;
    And a corresponding unit that performs predetermined cancellation control on the processing data obtained by processing the captured image by the processing unit when a predetermined instruction operation is performed on the portable information code reading device. Type information code reader.
  90. 　前記処理部は、
    　前記撮像部によって得られた撮像画像を解読する解読部と、
    　前記解読部による撮像画像の解読後、一定時間が経過するまでは前記解読部によって得られた解読データの送信を停止し、前記一定時間の経過後に前記解読データを当該携帯型情報コード読取装置の外部に設けられた外部装置に送信する送信部と、を有し、
    　前記対応部は、前記解読部による撮像画像の解読後、前記一定時間が経過する前に前記携帯型情報コード読取装置に対して前記所定の指示操作がなされた場合に、前記解読データを消去する処理を行い、
    　前記送信部は、前記対応部によって前記解読データが消去される場合、当該解読データを前記外部装置に送信する処理を行わないことを特徴とする請求項８８又は請求項８９に記載の携帯型情報コード読取装置。     The processor is
    A decoding unit for decoding a captured image obtained by the imaging unit;
    After decoding the captured image by the decoding unit, the transmission of the decoded data obtained by the decoding unit is stopped until a predetermined time elapses, and after the predetermined time elapses, the decoded data is transferred to the portable information code reader. A transmission unit that transmits to an external device provided outside,
    The corresponding unit erases the decoded data when the predetermined instruction operation is performed on the portable information code reader before the fixed time elapses after the decoded image is decoded by the decoding unit. Process
    The portable information according to claim 88 or 89, wherein the transmitting unit does not perform a process of transmitting the decrypted data to the external device when the decrypted data is erased by the corresponding unit. Code reader.
  91. 　前記一定時間の値を記憶する設定データ記憶部を備え、
    　前記送信部は、前記設定データ記憶部に記憶されたデータに基づいて前記解読データの送信を前記一定時間だけ停止する構成であり、
    　前記設定データ記憶部に記憶された前記一定時間の値が設定変更可能とされていることを特徴とする請求項９０に記載の携帯型情報コード読取装置。     A setting data storage unit for storing the value of the predetermined time;
    The transmission unit is configured to stop the transmission of the decrypted data based on the data stored in the setting data storage unit for the predetermined time,
    The portable information code reading device according to claim 90, wherein the value of the predetermined time stored in the setting data storage unit can be changed.
  92. 　前記対応部は、当該携帯型情報コード読取装置によって所定の専用コードが読み取られた場合に前記キャンセル制御を行うことを特徴とする請求項８９から請求項９１のいずれか一項に記載の携帯型情報コード読取装置。 The portable unit according to any one of claims 89 to 91, wherein the corresponding unit performs the cancel control when a predetermined dedicated code is read by the portable information code reader. Information code reader.
  93. 　外部からの操作が可能な操作スイッチを備え、
    　前記対応部は、前記操作スイッチに対して所定の外部操作が行われた場合に前記キャンセル制御を行うことを特徴とする請求項８９から請求項９１のいずれか一項に記載の携帯型情報コード読取装置。     Equipped with an operation switch that can be operated from the outside,
    92. The portable information code according to claim 89, wherein the corresponding unit performs the cancel control when a predetermined external operation is performed on the operation switch. Reader.
  94. 　前記対応部は、当該携帯型情報コード読取装置によって既に読み取られている既読コードが再び当該携帯型情報コード読取装置によって読み取られた場合に、前記処理部によって処理された前記既読コードの前記処理データを消去する消去処理を行うことを特徴とする請求項８９から請求項９１のいずれか一項に記載の携帯型情報コード読取装置。 The corresponding unit is configured so that when the read code that has already been read by the portable information code reader is read again by the portable information code reader, the corresponding part of the read code processed by the processing unit 92. The portable information code reader according to any one of claims 89 to 91, wherein an erasure process for erasing process data is performed.
  95. 　外部からの操作が可能な操作スイッチを備え、
    　前記対応部は、前記操作スイッチに対して所定の外部操作が行われつつ当該携帯型情報コード読取装置によって既に読み取られている既読コードが再び当該携帯型情報コード読取装置によって読み取られた場合に、前記処理部によって処理された前記既読コードの前記処理データを消去する消去処理を行うことを特徴とする請求項８９から請求項９１のいずれか一項に記載の携帯型情報コード読取装置。     Equipped with an operation switch that can be operated from the outside,
    The corresponding unit is configured such that when a predetermined external operation is performed on the operation switch, a read code that has already been read by the portable information code reader is read again by the portable information code reader. The portable information code reading device according to any one of claims 89 to 91, wherein an erasing process for erasing the processing data of the read code processed by the processing unit is performed.
  96. 　前記対応部は、前記撮像部によって得られた撮像画像に含まれる前記情報コードが所定の第１撮像姿勢であるときに前記処理部によって前記処理データが生成された場合において、その後、前記撮像部によって前記第１撮像姿勢とは向きが所定角度以上異なる第２撮像姿勢で当該情報コードが読み取られた場合に、前記処理データに対する前記キャンセル制御を行うことを特徴とする請求項８９から請求項９１のいずれか一項に記載の携帯型情報コード読取装置。 In the case where the processing data is generated by the processing unit when the information code included in the captured image obtained by the imaging unit is in a predetermined first imaging posture, the corresponding unit is then configured to perform the imaging unit. 92. The cancel control for the processing data is performed when the information code is read in a second imaging posture whose direction differs from the first imaging posture by a predetermined angle or more. The portable information code reader according to any one of the above.
  97. 　前記対応部は、前記処理部によって前記処理データが生成された後、前記撮像部によって前記情報コードが所定時間以上継続して撮像され続けた場合に、当該情報コードの前記処理データに対する前記キャンセル制御を行うことを特徴とする請求項８９から請求９１のいずれか一項に記載の携帯型情報コード読取装置。 The corresponding unit, when the processing data is generated by the processing unit, and when the information code is continuously imaged for a predetermined time or more by the imaging unit, the cancel control for the processing data of the information code 92. The portable information code reader according to any one of claims 89 to 91, wherein:
  98. 　前記対応部は、前記処理部によって処理された前記情報コードが前記撮像部の撮像範囲に存在しなくなり、存在しなくなってから一定時間内に当該情報コードが前記撮像範囲に入り込んだ場合に、前記処理データに対する前記キャンセル制御を行うことを特徴とする請求項８９から請求項９１のいずれか一項に記載の携帯型情報コード読取装置。 The corresponding unit is configured such that when the information code processed by the processing unit does not exist in the imaging range of the imaging unit and the information code enters the imaging range within a certain time after the information code does not exist, 92. The portable information code reader according to claim 89, wherein the cancel control is performed on processing data.
  99. 　前記対応部は、前記処理部によって前記処理データが生成された後、前記撮像部によって複数のコードが同時に撮像された場合に、前記処理データに対する前記キャンセル制御を行うことを特徴とする請求項８９から請求項９１のいずれか一項に記載の携帯型情報コード読取装置。 90. The response unit performs the cancel control on the processing data when a plurality of codes are simultaneously captured by the imaging unit after the processing data is generated by the processing unit. 92. The portable information code reader according to any one of claims 91 to 91.
  100. 　前記対応部は、前記処理部によって前記処理データが生成された後、当該携帯型情報コード読取装置によって複数のコードが同時に撮像され且つそれら複数のコードが読み取られた場合に、それら複数のコードに対応する前記処理データに対する前記キャンセル制御を行うことを特徴とする請求項８９から請求項９１のいずれか一項に記載の携帯型情報コード読取装置。 The correspondence unit is configured such that, after the processing data is generated by the processing unit, a plurality of codes are simultaneously imaged and read by the portable information code reader, and the plurality of codes are read. The portable information code reading device according to any one of claims 89 to 91, wherein the cancel control is performed on the corresponding processing data.
  101. 　前記対応部は、前記複数のコードが予め定められた所定の配列で撮像されたことを条件として、前記処理データに対する前記キャンセル制御を行うことを特徴とする請求項９９又は請求項１００に記載の携帯型情報コード読取装置。 The said corresponding | compatible part performs the said cancellation control with respect to the said process data on the conditions that the said some code | cord | chord was imaged by the predetermined arrangement | sequence predetermined. 101 or 100 characterized by the above-mentioned. Portable information code reader.
PCT/JP2014/052142 2013-01-31 2014-01-30 Portable information code reading device WO2014119673A1 (en)

Priority Applications (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
US14/764,608 US9904828B2 (en) 2013-01-31 2014-01-30 Portable information code reader
CN201480011336.6A CN105027140B (en) 2013-01-31 2014-01-30 Portable information code reading device

Applications Claiming Priority (10)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
JP2013-017532 2013-01-31
JP2013017532 2013-01-31
JP2013116261 2013-05-31
JP2013-116261 2013-05-31
JP2013-116262 2013-05-31
JP2013116262 2013-05-31
JP2013-197413 2013-09-24
JP2013197413 2013-09-24
JP2014013060A JP6179411B2 (en) 2013-01-31 2014-01-28 Portable information code reader
JP2014-013060 2014-01-28

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2014119673A1 true WO2014119673A1 (en) 2014-08-07

Family

ID=51262382

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/JP2014/052142 WO2014119673A1 (en) 2013-01-31 2014-01-30 Portable information code reading device

Country Status (1)

Country Link
WO (1) WO2014119673A1 (en)

Citations (3)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JP2000215267A (en) * 1999-01-27 2000-08-04 Tohken Co Ltd Portable code reader
JP2010510602A (en) * 2006-11-22 2010-04-02 チョルネンキー、ティー・イー Security and monitoring device
JP2011209805A (en) * 2010-03-29 2011-10-20 Konica Minolta Opto Inc Video display device

Patent Citations (3)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JP2000215267A (en) * 1999-01-27 2000-08-04 Tohken Co Ltd Portable code reader
JP2010510602A (en) * 2006-11-22 2010-04-02 チョルネンキー、ティー・イー Security and monitoring device
JP2011209805A (en) * 2010-03-29 2011-10-20 Konica Minolta Opto Inc Video display device

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
KR102091520B1 (en) Mobile terminal
CN110622500B (en) Image forming apparatus and image forming method
JP6066676B2 (en) Head mounted display and video presentation system
AU2001260356B2 (en) Wearable projector and intelligent clothing
EP3043237A1 (en) Display system, control method for display device, and computer program
US20140270685A1 (en) Personal recording, illuminating, and data transmitting apparatus
US9904828B2 (en) Portable information code reader
JP6011072B2 (en) Control device and program
US9866756B2 (en) Medical image recording device
JP6719418B2 (en) Electronics
CN110612720A (en) Information processing apparatus, information processing method, and program
JP2019146737A (en) Game controller
CN108243302A (en) Sensor information acquisition device, sensor information adquisitiones and recording medium
JP2013190925A (en) Input device, and display device
JP2013255012A (en) Head holding member and head-mounted information output device
US20200068098A1 (en) Shooting apparatus
US10057547B2 (en) Medical image recording device
JP6179411B2 (en) Portable information code reader
WO2014119673A1 (en) Portable information code reading device
JP2016126589A (en) Display system, program, and method of controlling display device
JP6405714B2 (en) Portable information code reader
JP2013174730A (en) Information display device
JP5732446B2 (en) Head mounted display and motion detection method
JP2020135306A (en) Display system, program for controlling information processing device, and method of controlling information processing device
JP2017055296A (en) Wearable imaging apparatus

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
WWE Wipo information: entry into national phase

Ref document number: 201480011336.6

Country of ref document: CN

121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 14746288

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1

NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: DE

WWE Wipo information: entry into national phase

Ref document number: 14764608

Country of ref document: US

122 Ep: pct application non-entry in european phase

Ref document number: 14746288

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1